No preview available
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 8519 MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK (4)SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK BID NO. 8519 PURCHASING DIVISION 215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS APRIL 26, 2017 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK) Financial Services Purchasing Division 215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 970.221.6775 970.221.6707 fcgov.com/purchasing CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS BID INFORMATION 00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00100 Instruction to Bidders 00300 Bid Form 00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement Forms 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment SPECIFICATIONS SOILS REPORT DRAWINGS SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID Date: April 6, 2017 Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on April 27, 2017, for the Maple Hill Neighborhood Park; BID NO. 8519. If delivered, they are to be delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580. At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 8519. The Work includes, but is not limited to, construction/installation of the following: erosion control, hard paths, plazas, site lighting, basketball court, site walls, storm drainage, shelter, buried restroom, irrigation supply line, irrigation system, irrigation pumphouse, landscaping, utilities, and site furnishings. All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins, 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524. The City encourages all disadvantaged business enterprises to submit bid in response to all invitations and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin. A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be held at 10:00 AM, on April 11, 2017, in conference room 2A at 215 N Mason Street, Fort Collins. Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this meeting. Questions concerning the scope of the bid should be directed to Matt Day, Project Manager, at (970) 224-6096 or mday@fcgov.com. Questions regarding bid submittal or process should be directed to Elliot Dale, Buyer at (970) 221-6777 or edale@fcgov.com. All questions not addressed at the prebid, must be submitted in writing via email to Matt Day , with a copy to Elliot Dale, no later than 5:00 PM our clock on April 17, 2017. Questions received after this deadline will not be answered. The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at https://www.bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort-collins. Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents. The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the performance of the Contract. No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening Bids. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and irregularities therein. Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the form specified in the Instructions to Bidders. Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material, supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision- making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift, gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited. City of Fort Collins Gerry Paul Purchasing Director SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.0 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430 fully executed. 2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in Section 00420. In addition, requirements set forth in SECTION 01010, 1.02 Contractor Qualifications shall be submitted with the Bid. 3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder, (4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and (9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract. 3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this Work. 3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City. 4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-4.2. 4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA. 5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of Fort Collins' Purchasing Division. 5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or Engineer. 5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as having received the Bidding documents. 6.0 BID SECURITY 6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds. 6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening. 7.0 CONTRACT TIME. The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set forth in the Agreement. 8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained within these Documents. 10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work. 11.0 BID FORM. 11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid. 11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums. 11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the corporate name. 11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form. 11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. 11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 12.0 BID PRICING. Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules. 13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS. 13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. 14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. 14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS. Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids. 16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE. All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT. 17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded. 17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening. 18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY. The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required Contract Security. 19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT. When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification. 20.0 TAXES. OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions. 21.0 RETAINAGE. Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. 22.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS. Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's office. A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as a fuel. 23.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS. Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid. 24.0 BID RESULTS. For information regarding results for individual Bids, please go to https://www.bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort-collins. END OF SECTION SECTION 00300 BID FORM SECTION 00300 BID FORM PROJECT: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park Place: Date: 1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company, Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules. 2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned. 3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum of ($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to Bidders. 4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as follows: . 5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list. 6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents. 7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through . 8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid) Provide materials and labor associated with installation, maintenance, start-up and Owner training, as indicated on the drawings and in the Specifications, for each of the following bid items. Owner is responsible for payment of Building Permit application fees. Bid Item #1 Demolition & Traffic Control To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Demolition, Disposal, Protection of Items to Remain, Traffic Control, as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #2. Landscape To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Landscaping, Fine Grading, Soil Testing and Amendments, Tree Planting and Backfill, Irrigation System, Seed, Sod and Mulch,) as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #3. Irrigation Water Delivery System To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Point of Connection, Piping, Sleeves, Boring, Valves, Meters, Settling Structures, Conduits, Wiring) as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #4. Restroom To include all materials complete, in place the Restroom, and items located within the structures and within a distance of five feet (5’) from their foundations), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #5. Shelter To include all materials complete, in place the Shelter, and items located within the structures and within a distance of five feet (5’) from their foundations), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #6. Pump House To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Pump House, and items located within the structures and the Pump Station Intake System), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #7. Earthwork and Utilities To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Site Clearing, Water Control, Earthwork, Erosion Control, Water Utilities, Sanitary Sewer, Rip Rap, Storm Sewer, Sub-drains, Pond Outlet Structure, Storm Sewer, Power Distribution and Controls), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #8. Playground Area To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Playground Surfacing, Playground Header, Subdrain system), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #9. Hardscape To include all materials complete, in place (such as but not limited to the following: Site Preparation, Fine Grading, Base Materials, Sidewalks, Sidewalk w/Thickened Edge, Crusher Fines, Access Ramps) as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #10. Site Furnishings To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following: Picnic Tables, Bike Racks, Drinking Fountain, and Trash Receptacles), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #11. Benches – Type 1 and Type 2 To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following: Picnic Tables, Bike Racks, Drinking Fountain, and Trash Receptacles), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #12. Boulders To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following: Landscape Boulders, Stacked Boulder Wall Type 1 and Type 2, Stone Steps, Boulders in Restroom Retaining Walls), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ Bid Item #13. Pond To include all materials complete, in place (such as, but not limited to the following: Pond Edge, Liner, Soil Ballast), as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ TOTAL BASE BID (Bid Items #1 thru #13) Lump Sum Price $______________________________ In Writing___________________________________________________________________ ADD/ALTERNATES: AWARD OF THE CONTRACT IS BASED ON THE BASE BID OR AT THE CITY’S SOLE OPTION IN THE EVENT THE CITY ELECTS TO INCLUDE ANY OF THE ALTERNATES LISTED BELOW TO THE LOWEST QUALIFIED RESPONSIVE AND RESPONSIBLE BIDDER BASED ON THE CUMULATIVE TOTAL OF THE BASE BID AND ALL SELECTED ALTERNATES. ADDITIONS / DELETIONS Add or subtract the following amounts for the items listed below. Alternate Bid Item #1. Trail To include all materials complete, in place, the installation of Trail including excavation, grading, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. Lump Sum Price $______________________________ UNIT PRICES For additions and deletions to the Contract, the following unit prices shall be applicable for the specific items listed. Unit Prices shall be complete, in place including required labor, materials, permits, equipment, implements, testing, parts and supplies necessary for, and incidental to proper installation, as indicated on the Drawings, and in the Specifications. A. The Contractor agrees that for requested and/or required changes in the scope of work, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted in accordance with the following unit prices, where the Owner elects to use this method of determining costs. B. The Contractor is advised that the unit prices will enter into the determination of the successful bidder. Unreasonable prices may result in rejection of the entire bid proposal. C. Unit prices for irrigation shall include pipe, fittings, valves, concrete thrust block and stabilizers and any other items shown on the Drawings, as described in the Specifications or recommended by the manufacturer as part of the installation. D. The unit prices quoted by the Contractor shall be those unit prices that will be charged or credited for labor and materials to be provided regardless of the total number of units and/or amount of labor required for added or deleted items of work. DEMOLITION ITEM UNIT PRICE Demo – Asphalt Removal $___________________SF Demo – Existing Curb and Gutter $___________________LF Demo – Existing Concrete Sidewalk $___________________SF EARTHWORK AND UTILITIES ITEM UNIT PRICE Imported Topsoil $___________________CY Imported Fill $___________________CY Earthwork - Cut and Stockpiling $___________________CY Earthwork – Fill $___________________CY Imported Structural Fill $___________________CY Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling $___________________CY Topsoil Spreading and Placement $___________________CY Vehicle Tracking Pad Removal $___________________SF Rip Rap- Type M $__________________TON Waterline Service Pipe – 3/4” $___________________LF Waterline Thrust Block $___________________EA Waterline Tapping Saddle $___________________EA Waterline Swivel Tee $___________________EA Waterline Bends $___________________EA Waterline Joint Restraint $___________________EA 3/4” Water Service blowout assembly $___________________EA 3/4” Water Meter and Meter Pit $___________________EA Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 6” PVC $___________________LF Sanitary Sewer - Cleanout $___________________EA Storm Sewer – 24” RCP $___________________LF Storm Sewer – Type C Inlet $___________________EA Storm Sewer – Area Inlet $___________________EA Erosion Control – Earthen Berm $___________________LF Erosion Control – Inlet Protection $___________________EA Erosion Control – Wattle Protection $___________________EA SITE RETAINING WALL ITEM UNIT PRICE Overruns and underruns of 12” $___________________LF Thick Retaining Wall Attached to Restroom HARDSCAPE ITEM UNIT PRICE Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” thick) $___________________SF Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” thick) - Thickened Edge $___________________LF Integral Color Concrete Pavement (8” thick) $___________________SF Access Ramp $___________________EA Basketball Court $___________________EA PLAYGROUND ITEM UNIT PRICE Engineered Wood Fiber Surfacing $___________________SF Playground Underdrain $___________________LF IRRIGATION ITEM UNIT PRICE Master Valve- 3” $___________________EA Flow Sensor- 4” $___________________EA Air Relief Valve- 1.5” $___________________EA Irrigation for turf (seed or sod) areas less than 10 feet in width $___________________SF Irrigation for turf (seed or sod) areas greater than10 feet in width $___________________SF Pop-Up Spray Sprinkler with Rain Bird nozzle $___________________EA Pop-Up Rotor Sprinkler with Rain Bird nozzle $___________________EA Drip Irrigation – per Shrub, Perennial or Grass in planting bed $___________________EA Drip Irrigation – per Shrub or Tree in sod or seeded area $___________________EA Sleeve Pipe- 2” Class 200 PVC $___________________LF Sleeve Pipe- 3” Class 200 PVC $___________________LF Sleeve Pipe- 4” Class 200 PVC $___________________LF Sleeve Pipe- 6” Class 200 PVC $___________________LF Sleeve Pipe- 8” Class 200 PVC $___________________LF Isolation Gate Valve Assembly – 3” $___________________EA Isolation Gate Valve Assembly – 4” $___________________EA Quick Coupling Valve Assembly $___________________EA Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 1” $___________________EA Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 1.5” $___________________EA Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 2” $___________________EA Remote Control Valve Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals – 3” $___________________EA Remote Control Valve Assembly for Drip Laterals – 1” $___________________EA Flush Cap Assembly $___________________EA Mainline Pipe – 3” $___________________LF Mainline Pipe – 4” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 1” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 1.25” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 1.5” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 2” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 2 1/2” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 3” $___________________LF Lateral Pipe – 4” $___________________LF LANDSCAPE ITEM UNIT PRICE Finish Grading $___________________SF Organic Amendment $___________________CY Turf Seed $___________________SF Turf Sod $___________________SF Native Seed $___________________SF Evergreen Tree – 6’ height $___________________EA Deciduous Tree – 2” caliper $___________________EA Deciduous Shrub – 5 gal $___________________EA Weed Barrier $___________________SF City Supplied Wood Mulch $___________________SF Landscape Edging $___________________SF Rock Mulch $___________________SF Boulder – Type A $___________________EA Mountain Granite Boulder – 3 Ton $___________________EA Stone Step $___________________EA SITE FURNISHINGS ITEM UNIT PRICE Bike Rack $___________________EA Picnic Table $___________________EA Trash Receptacle $___________________EA Drinking Fountain $___________________EA 9. PRICES The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal, dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the several kinds called for. Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total Agreement Price. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: CONTRACTOR BY: Printed Date Title License Number (If Applicable) (Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest: Address Telephone Email SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors SECTION 00410 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned as Principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns. THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park. NOW THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above. PRINCIPAL SURETY Name: Address: By: By: Title: Title: ATTEST: By: (SEAL) (SEAL) SECTION 00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. In addition, requirements set forth in SECTION 01010, 1.02 Contractor Qualifications shall be submitted with the Bid. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Permanent main office address: 3. When organized: 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of Work performed by your company: 8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. Are you debarred by any government agency? If yes list agency name. 11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of construction. 12. List your major equipment available for this contract. 13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project: 14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including officers: 15. Credit available: $ 16. Bank Reference: 17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the OWNER? 18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor? If yes, in what city, county and state? What class, license and numbers? 19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract? If yes, what percent of total contract? And to whom? 20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time? IF yes, DETAIL 21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL What company? 22. What are your company's bonding limitations? 23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__. Company: By: Printed: Title: State of County of being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name) (Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__. (Seal) Notary Public My commission expires: . SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over 15% of the contract. ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: [Date] TO: [Contractor] PROJECT: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") You are hereby notified that your Bid dated [Contractor's Bid Date] for the above project has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park. The Price of your Agreement is ($ ). Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by [Date]. 1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the page. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and Supplementary Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Gerry Paul Purchasing Director SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year] and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and [Contractor] (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park and is generally described in Section 01010. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by BHA, 1603 Oakridge Drive, Fort Collins, CO 80525, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within one hundred forty (140) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within twenty-eight(28) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion: Three Hundred Dollars ($300.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the one hundred forty (140) calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially Complete. 2) Final Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, One Hundred Fifty Dollars ($150.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the twenty-eight (28) calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate 7.2.6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows: The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: By: DARIN ATTEBERRY, CITY MANAGER PRINTED By: GERRY S. PAUL Title: PURCHASING DIRECTOR Date: Date: Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL) City Clerk Address for giving notices: P. O. Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest: Approved as to Form Address for giving notices: Assistant City Attorney License No.: SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park To: [Contractor] This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement. Dated this day of , 20 . The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and , 20__, respectively. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] By: Title: SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins Project, 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins Project, 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance in accordance with the following requirements: 1. The Contractor will provide, from insurance companies acceptable to the City, the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs. Before commencing work under this bid, the Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies, and containing substantially the following statement: “The insurance evidenced by this Certificate will not reduce coverage or limits and will not be cancelled, except after thirty (30) days written notice has been received by the City of Fort Collins.” In case of the breach of any provision of the Insurance Requirements, the City, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the City may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may be due or become due the Contractor under this Agreement. The City, its officers, agents and employees shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor’s general liability and automobile liability insurance policies for any claims arising out of work performed under this Agreement. 2. Insurance coverages shall be as follows: A. Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement for all of the Contractor's employees engaged in work performed under this agreement: 1. Workers' Compensation insurance with statutory limits as required by Colorado law. 2. Employer's Liability insurance with limits of $100,000 per accident, $500,000 disease aggregate, and $100,000 disease each employee. B. Commercial General & Vehicle Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement such commercial general liability and automobile liability insurance as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement. Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of insurance for each coverage, Commercial General and Vehicle, shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage. In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado INCLUDE: OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] CONTRACT DATE: [Date] The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE REMARKS: SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE , 20__ TO: [Contractor] Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by [Contractor] for the City of Fort Collins project, 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park. A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated [Contract Date]. In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__. Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: [Contractor] (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. Signed this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__, by . Witness my hand and official seal. Notary Public My Commission Expires: SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] PROJECT: 8519 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park CONTRACT DATE: [Date] In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for . (Surety) on bond of hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of , 20____ . (Surety Company) By: ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. 4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: Geotechnical Investigation, dated January 10, 2017, completed by CTL Thompson Inc., Project No. FC07300-125. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following: N/A SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). SC-8.10 OWNER’s Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. SC-12.3 Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3. Contractor will include in the project schedule zero (0) days lost due to abnormal weather conditions. SC-13.12 Correction Period: 13.12.1 If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, an Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER’s written instructions . . . SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: Maple Hill Neighborhood Park CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] PROJECT NUMBER: 8519 DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for change: 2. Description of Change: 3. Change in Contract Cost: 4. Change in Contract Time: ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER % TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT % ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00 (Assuming all change orders approved) ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Contractor's Representative ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Project Manager REVIEWED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Purchasing Agent over $60,000 cc: City Clerk Contractor Engineer Project File Architect Purchasing SECTION 00960 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01000 – PROJECT SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. This section contains general requirements that are applicable to this project. 1.02 Description of Work A. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform the work items called for on the drawings and bid schedule. 1.03 City Furnished Materials A. None. 1.04 Conditions of Work A. Area of Work: The Contractor shall confine his operations to the immediate work area. Material storage shall be confined to areas shown on the Drawings or designated by the City. B. Regulations: The Contractor shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to safety, traffic control, fire prevention, erosion control and environmental protection. C. Working Hours: The Contractor's working hours shall be between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., with no work on weekends and Federal holidays, unless otherwise approved by the City. D. Material Storage: The Contractor's material and equipment storage site shall be limited to the area of the project site. The area shall be kept orderly and free of litter. The location of staging and material storage areas shall be approved by the Owner’s representative. E. Construction Fencing: The Contractor may construct a fence around the project limits to prevent pedestrian and automotive access to the construction site, and to prohibit access to protected areas. Fence height and materials shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. Construction fences shall be maintained in good condition throughout the duration of the construction process. 1.05 Project Cleanup A. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the construction site in a clean and orderly condition from the start of the project to completion. Daily cleanups are required. 1. The City may require Contractor to perform cleanup within 100 feet of the progress of the work and perform cleanup of the site daily prior to work stoppage. B. Store volatile wastes in covered containers and dispose off-site. 1. Provide on-site covered containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. 2. Neatly store construction materials, such as concrete forms, when not in use. C. Wastes shall not be buried or burned on the site or disposed of into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams or waterways. D. At project completion the Contractor shall remove equipment, materials, and debris from the site including toilets and dumpsters. Areas around work sites shall be cleaned, with dirt and grass surfaces raked clean of any slag from the Contractor's operations. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces. Remaining dirt and fill material shall be removed, or may be scattered, with the approval of the City. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK Page 2 of 3 1.06 Trash Removal A. Non-salvageable items and trash shall be hauled off the site and disposed of in accordance with applicable state and local regulations. Items shall be transported in tarp-covered or closed vehicles. Materials dropped or blown off vehicles shall be picked up immediately by Contractor. Contractor to recycle appropriate materials. 1.07 Verification of Dimensions A. The Contractor shall he responsible for the coordination and proper relation of the work. He shall field verify dimensions and advise the City of any discrepancies prior to proceeding with that phase of the work. 1.08 Fire Hydrants A. Fire Hydrant Connections: City’s or District’s permission is required for connection to fire hydrants. Only compatible adapters shall be utilized for hydrant connections. A gate valve shall be provided and installed by the Contractor between the hydrant and supply hoses to control flow. Connection shall include backflow protection. Temporary connections to fire hydrants shall be disconnected at the end of each working day. No quick closing valves such as plug or butterfly valves will be used. 1.09 Outages A. Utility outages necessitated by the work shall be requested in writing at least fifteen (15) working days prior to the proposed outage. The request shall be directed to the City and shall stipulate the specific utility system(s) and circuits to be affected, the location of the work, the time at which the shutdown will occur, and the duration of the outage for each system. Outages shall be kept to a minimum both in number and in duration. Where multiple outages are required, as many outages as can be accurately scheduled shall he submitted as a group. 1.10 Fill Material A. Excess fill material (unless approved to remain on site) including rock, gravel, sod, broken concrete, asphalt, plaster, etc., shall be hauled off the site and disposed of in accordance with applicable State and local regulations. B. Additional fill material, if required, shall be hauled to the site from off the site as a necessary part of the work. Material composition shall be subject to the requirements of the specifications. 1.11 Parking A. Parking of the Contractor's vehicles shall be restricted to an area designated by the City. 1.12 Telephone A. Business Telephone: At the beginning of construction, the Contractor shall provide the City with a telephone number at which the Contractor or his representative may be contacted at any time during regular working hours. The Contractor shall also provide a phone number for after-duty hours contact. 1.13 Sanitary Provisions A. The Contractor shall provide temporary toilets for the use of construction personnel. Location, type, proposed maintenance, etc., shall be approved by the City prior to placing toilets. Temporary toilets shall be removed at the completion of construction and the adjacent area restored to the condition existing prior to the start of construction or as indicated on the plans. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK Page 3 of 3 1.14 Pollution Abatement A. Transporting materials to or from the site shall be accomplished in a manner preventing materials or particles from becoming airborne. Earth materials shall be covered, wetted or otherwise protected. Gravel, sand and concrete shall be contained within vehicles to prevent spillage. B. Prevent the deposit of dirt, mud or debris on improved streets and roads, and remove debris should such deposition occur. C. Burning of material on site is prohibited. D. Stream beds, lakes, ponds, drainage ways, sanitary and storm sewers, etc., shall not be polluted by fuels, oils, bitumen, acids, or other harmful materials. Surface drainage from the construction site, which contains harmful amounts of sediment, shall not be allowed to drain onto adjacent areas. Grading shall be accomplished to allow sedimentation to settle out prior to flowing onto adjacent areas. E. Flushing of concrete trucks is allowed only at the project site or the designated contractor storage area, with the responsibility of control and cleanup resting with the Contractor. F. Toxic, corrosive and flammable materials for construction other than specified shall not be used without prior approval of the City of Fort Collins. When approved, disposal of these materials or their containers will be off site and conform to state and federal regulations. G. The City of Fort Collins has adopted a Dust Prevention and Control Manual: https://www.fcgov.com/airquality/fugitive-dust.php. All operations conducted under this Agreement shall be performed in accordance with the stated procedures and requirements. 1.15 Protection of Property A. Initiate, maintain and supervise necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. The Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the project, whether in storage on or off the site: and 2. Property at the site or adjacent thereto, including fences, patios, driveways, sidewalks, pavement, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, structures, utilities and underground facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. B. Maintain, protect, and support existing utilities and other appurtenances against damage by shoring, bracing, or other means. C. Do not stockpile excavated material against existing appurtenances. 1.16 Survey Requirements A. Contractor shall perform surveying necessary to complete the work. 1.17 Construction Superintendent A. The construction superintendent shall be at the job site any time work is being accomplished by any of the trades. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK Page 1 of 2 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description of Work A. The City of Fort Collins Maple Hill Neighborhood Park improvements include, but are not limited to, construction/installation of the following: erosion control, site grading, hard and soft paths, plazas, site lighting, basketball court, stone site walls, storm drainage, shelter, buried restroom, irrigation and water quality pond, irrigation supply line, irrigation system, irrigation pump house, landscaping, utilities, playground headers, drains and safety surfacing, offsite concrete trail connection and site furnishings. B. Protection and Restoration. 1. Replace to equal or better conditions items removed and replaced or damaged during construction. Restore areas disturbed to match surrounding surface conditions. 1.02 Contractor Qualifications Required Documents To be a qualified Contractor, the Prime Contractor shall submit with their bid the following written documentation for the Owner’s review. The statement of qualifications shall be provided inside the bound and sealed bid envelope, but as a separate document from the bid proposal. A. Cover Letter. A letter on the company letterhead with following information: 1. The letter must be signed be the Owner of the Company or a Company Officer and dated; and 2. A statement declaring at least (5) complete years of experience in the active performance of similar work (similar work is considered to include, but not limited to, the acquisition and installation of park projects, athletic facilities, buildings of similar nature to the proposed buildings, irrigation systems, landscaping) with its own forces and organization as opposed to the sole use of subcontractors. 3. A statement declaring that the company will perform a minimum of 20% of the work; not including purchasing of materials, with its own forces and organization, and a list of services that the prime contractor will provide; and B. Company Experience. On a separate sheet, list a project history of the company’s experience as a General Contractor for the five (5) years declared in item A.2. above, including the following information: 1. Project name and a brief description of the work performed; and 2. Beginning and ending date of project; and 3. Location of the project (city, state); and 4. Monetary amount of project construction budget; and 5. Owner of project, contact person, valid phone number with area code; and 6. If applicable, name of Prime Contractor (Client) that the work was performed for / phone number; and 7. Superintendent must have worked for the Prime Contractor for minimum of one year and preferably on one of the like projects. C. Resumes. The company shall include up-to-date resumes for the Superintendent(s) and other key personnel that will actually be doing the work which shall include at a minimum a list of similar projects that each person has been involved with, and their role, in the last 3 (three) years; and Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK Page 2 of 2 D. References. On a separate sheet, provide References for a total of 3 municipalities and/or Landscape Architect/Engineer. Reference information shall include: 1. Project name and brief description of work performance; and 2. Location of project (city and state) 1.03 Notices to Private Owners and Authorities A. Notify private owners of adjacent property, utilities, affected governmental agencies, and school district when execution of the work may affect them. B. Give notification 48 hours in advance to enable affected persons to provide for their needs when it is necessary to temporarily deny access or services. C. Contact utilities at least 48 hours prior to excavating near underground utilities. D. Contact agencies at least 72 hours prior to start of construction. Notify agencies of the proposed scope of work, schedule and items that would affect their daily operation. E. Names and telephone numbers of affected agencies and utilities in the area are listed below for Contractor's convenience. Water – ELCO Water District 493-2044 Storm Sewer - City of Fort Collins, Colorado 212-2900 Sanitary Sewer – Boxelder Sanitation District 498-0701 Electrical - City of Fort Collins, Colorado 212-2900 Gas – Xcel Energy 800-481-4700 Telephone - Qwest 800-222-0400 Roads - City of Ft. Collins, Colorado 221-6588, inspections only 221-6609 Cable Television – Comcast 800-824-4010 Utility Locates - One-call System 1-800-922-1987 Safety - Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 844-3061 Fire - Poudre Fire Authority Non-Emergency 221-6570/ Emergency 911 Police - City of Fort Collins Police Department Non-Emergency 221-6540 / Emergency 911 Larimer County Sheriff's Department - Non-Emergency 416-1985 Postmaster - United States Postal Service 800-275-8777 Ambulance - Poudre Valley Hospital Non-Emergency 484-1227 / Emergency 911 Public Transportation - TransFort 221-6620 Traffic Control - Traffic Engineering 221-6815 PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS PART 1 - SITE INVESTIGATIONS AND REPRESENTATION 1.01 General Investigations A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon access to the site; handling, storage, and disposal of materials; availability of water, electricity and roads; uncertainties of weather, or similar physical conditions at the site; the conformation and conditions of the ground; the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the execution of the work; and all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this Contract. 1.02 Soil Conditions A. The Contractor further acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered from his inspection of the site and from reviewing any available records of exploratory work furnished by the Owner or included in these Documents. Failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with the physical conditions of the site and all the available information will not relieve him from responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. 1.03 Contractor Representation A. The Contractor warrants that as a result of his examination and investigation of all the aforesaid data that he can perform the work in a good and workmanlike manner and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner assumes no responsibility for representations made by its officers or agents during or prior to the execution of this Contract, unless (1) such representations are expressly stated in the Contract, and (2) the Contract expressly provides that the responsibility therefore is assumed by the Owner. PART 2 - INFORMATION ON SITE CONDITIONS 2.01 General Information obtained by the Engineer regarding site conditions, subsurface information, groundwater elevations, existing construction of site facilities, and similar data will be available for inspection, as applicable, at the office of the Engineer upon request. Such information is offered as supplementary information only. Neither the Engineer nor the Owner assumes responsibility for the completeness or interpretation of such supplementary information. A. Differing Subsurface Conditions: 1. In the event that the subsurface or latent physical conditions are found materially different from those indicated in these Documents, and differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the character of work covered in these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the Owner in writing of such changed conditions. 2. The Engineer will investigate such conditions promptly and following this investigation, the Contractor shall proceed with the work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. If the Engineer finds that such conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of or in the time required for performing the work, the Engineer will recommend to the Owner the amount of adjustment in cost and time he considers reasonable. The Owner will make the final decision on Change Orders to the Contract regarding adjustments in cost or time for completion. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS Page 2 of 3 B. Underground Utilities: 1. Known utilities and structures adjacent to or encountered in the work are shown on the Drawings. The locations shown are taken from existing records and the best information available from existing utility plans, however, it is expected that there may be some discrepancies and omissions in the locations and quantities of utilities and structures shown. Those shown are for the convenience of the Contractor only, and no responsibility is assumed by either the Owner or the Engineer for their accuracy or completeness. PART 3 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND SERVICE 3.01 General A. Where the Contractor's operations could cause damage or inconvenience to railway, telegraph, telephone, television, oil, gas, electricity, water, sewer, or irrigation systems, the operations shall be suspended until arrangements necessary for the protection of these utilities and services have been made by the Contractor. B. Notify utility offices which are affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance. Under no circumstances expose any utility without first obtaining permission from the appropriate agency. Once permission has been granted, locate, expose, and provide temporary support for existing underground utilities. C. The Contractor shall protect utility poles from damage. If interference of power poles, telephone poles, guy wires, or anchors are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative and the appropriate utility company at least 48 hours in advance of construction operations to permit the necessary arrangements for protection or relocation of the interfering structure. D. The Contractor shall be solely and directly responsible to the Owner and operators of such properties for damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this Contract. E. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor for damages as a result of the Contractor's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work. F. If the Contractor while performing the Contract discovers utility facilities not identified in the Drawings or Specifications, he shall immediately notify the Owners and the utility in writing. G. In the event of interruption to domestic water, sewer, storm drain, or other utility services as a result of accidental breakage due to construction operations, promptly notify the proper authority. Cooperate with said authority in the restoration of service as promptly as possible and bear all costs of repair. In no case shall interruption of water or utility service be allowed to exist outside working hours unless prior approval is granted. H. The Contractor shall replace, at his own expense, existing utilities or structures removed or damaged during construction, unless otherwise provided for in these Contract Documents or ordered by the Engineer. 3.02 Interfering Structures A. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing structures whether on the surface, aboveground, or underground. An attempt has been made to show major structures on the Drawings. The completeness and accuracy cannot be guaranteed, and it is presented simply as a guide to avoid known possible difficulties. 3.03 Field Relocation A. During the progress of construction, it is expected that minor relocations of the work will be necessary. Such relocations shall be made only by direction of the Owner’s Representative. If existing structures are encountered that prevent the construction, and that are not properly shown on the drawings, notify the Owner’s Representative before continuing with the construction in order that the Owner’s Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01160 – SITE CONDITIONS Page 3 of 3 Representative may make such field revision as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures. If the Contractor shall fail to so notify the Owner’s Representative when an existing structure is encountered, and shall proceed with the construction despite the interference, he shall do so at his own risk. 3.04 Easements A. Easements and permits will be obtained by the Owner where portions of the work are located on public or private property. Easements will provide for the use of the property for construction purposes to the extent indicated on the easements. Copies of these easements and permits are available upon request to the Owner. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the adequacy of the easement obtained in every case and to abide by requirements and provisions of the easement. The Contractor shall confine his construction operations to within the easement limits or make special arrangements with the property owners or appropriate public agency for the additional area required. Damage to property, either inside or outside the limits of the easements provided by the Owner, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor as specified herein. The Contractor shall remove, protect, and replace fences or other items encountered on public or private property. Before final payment will be authorized by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor will be required to furnish the Owner with written releases from property owners or public agencies where side agreements or special easements have been made by the Contractor or where the Contractor's operations, for any reason, have not been kept within the construction right-of-way obtained by the Owner. B. It is anticipated that the required easements and permission will be obtained before construction is started. However, should the procurement of any easement or permission be delayed, the Contractor shall schedule and perform the work around these areas until such a time as the easement or permission has been secured. 3.05 Land Monuments A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative of existing Federal, State, Town, County, and private land monuments encountered. Private monuments shall be preserved, or replaced by a licensed surveyor at the Contractor's expense. When Government monuments are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative at least two (2) weeks in advance of the proposed construction in order that the Owner’s Representative will have ample opportunity to notify the proper authority and reference these monuments for later replacement. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01200 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01200 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This section covers the methods employed in determining the payment due for work completed under this contract. B. The bid price should cover all work required by this contract based upon the quantities outlined in the bid form. C. Where actual quantities differ from those outlined in the bid form; unit prices as stipulated in the bid form shall be utilized to compute payment. D. Where unit prices are not set forth for specific work, that work shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor. E. Quantities given in the bid form are estimates for the purpose of evaluating bids consequently some difference may arise in actual and bid quantities. 1.02 Lump Sum Prices A. Where lump sum (LS) prices are given for an item in the bid schedule or for items added during construction by change order, the price will include materials, labor, overhead and other cost incurred to complete the construction of the item in accordance with the plans and specifications. 1.03 Unit Prices A. Unit prices for each item shall include its pro rata share of profits, taxes, and overhead, and are for the items installed in place, maintained and guaranteed. Including these factors, unit prices must accurately reflect actual costs. Unit prices are to be valid for the life of the contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01300 – COORDINATION AND PROJECT MEETINGS Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01300 – COORDINATION AND PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General A. In order to provide for an orderly progression of work, parties involved in the construction will meet at various times during the project to discuss pertinent items regarding the work. B. Coordinate operations under contract in a manner that will facilitate progress of the work. C. Conform to the requirements of public utilities and concerned public agencies in respect to the timing and manner of performance of operations that affect the service of such utilities, agencies, or public safety. 1.02 Conferences A. The pre-construction conference will be held at a time to be determined by the Owner, after the award of the contract and prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The meeting will involve the Owner, the Engineer, the Contractor and representatives of the owners of utilities and other properties that will be directly affected by the work. Among the Contractor’s representative on the site. The Contractor will have a complete construction schedule ready for review at the time of the pre-construction conference. B. Hold conferences for coordination of the Work when necessary. C. The City may hold coordination conferences to be attended by all involved when Contractor's operations affects, or is affected by, the work of others. 1.03 Progress Meetings A. Contractor and the City shall schedule and hold regular progress meetings at least weekly and at other times as requested by the City or required by the progress of the Work. B. Attendance shall include: 1. Contractor and Superintendent 2. Owners Representative 3. Landscape Architect 4. Others as may be requested by contractor, Landscape Architect or Owner C. Minimum Agenda shall include: 1. Review of work progress since last meeting 2. Identification and discussion of problems affecting progress 3. Review of any pending change orders 4. Revisions of Construction Schedule as appropriate D. Meeting Minutes shall be prepared and distributed by the Contractor. 1.04 Job Site Administration A. Contract administration and construction observation services will be provided by the Owner. The Owner will make decisions regarding changes in the work and adjustments in contract quantities and/or unit prices. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Page 1 of 4 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01310 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General A. It is the intent of the Owner to begin construction on approximately May 15, 2017. The signing of the contract and issuance of a Notice to Proceed will be completed promptly to accomplish that objective. The Notice to Proceed will authorize the Contractor to begin project administration and construction work on the site. Construction work shall not begin on site prior to the pre-construction conference. B. The Contractor shall complete all work, including cleanup of the site by October 2017 specified in the Agreement, subject to the "Liquidated Damages" provision described under "Instructions to Bidders." C. Delays during project contract period outside control of the Contractor are subject to time extension consideration but not financial compensation unless such delay is significant enough to reasonably require Owner initiated work suspension (demobilization) as determined in the field by the Owner at the time of occurrence. See Paragraph 1.04 for requirements for modifying the Contract Time due to weather delays. D. Contractor shall plan and schedule his own work effort (personnel, equipment and material) to complete the project satisfactorily within the project time limits. Such schedule shall be in general conformance with the schedule submitted at the pre-construction conference. This includes the requirement that the Contractor conduct his operations to enable a shift of work effort from one part of the project to another to reasonably accommodate unexpected delays, and to conduct his daily operations so as to not create a public nuisance including but not limited to access or traffic obstruction, dust and mud generation, work outside of construction limits, noise, unsatisfactory cleanup or site restoration, unacceptable equipment/materials staging, flooding, etc. No work is to begin at the site until City's acceptance of the Construction Schedule. E. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule. The schedule shall show all work completed within the contract time and shall cover the time from the date of Notice to Proceed to the completion date. Contractor shall use Microsoft Project 2000 or approved equivalent to develop and manage the CPM schedule. F. Schedule shall include milestones that demonstrate the Contractor’s approach to completing the project within project time limits. Milestones shall be of sufficient number to indicate regular progress of work and shall identify major components of the work. Milestones are subject to Owner approval prior to work beginning at the site. If Contractor fails to meet a milestone, contractor shall submit an updated schedule subject to Owner approval and demonstrate how the remaining milestones will be met. The Owner may order work shut down or suspended for nonconformance with the approved schedule (See Paragraph G. below) G. Milestones (minimum required items) The following items shall be indicated on the schedule with completion dates: (1) Demolition (2) Earthwork (3) Utilities (4) Irrigation supply line (5) Restroom and shelter structures (6) Playground layout/survey and installation coordination (7) Concrete paving in core area Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Page 2 of 4 (8) Irrigation system (9) Landscape (10) Playground and engineered wood fiber safety surfacing install H. The Contractor may voluntarily shut down or suspend work due to conditions beyond his control provided a minimum of 24 hours notice is provided to the Owner together with the reasons for subject suspension of work. The Contractor shall leave the project conditions in such a way so as not to cause a public nuisance or a threat to public safety. Neither remobilization costs nor additional time will be allowed for such suspension unless agreed to in writing in advance. I. The Owner or Engineer may order work shut down or suspended for such nonconformance issues as unsafe conditions, nonconformance with schedule, cause of public nuisance, unnecessary private property disturbance, materials and labor unsuited to the task, nonconformance to technical specifications, failure to comply with permits, etc. The Owner or Engineer will give a written warning to the Contractor with a specified deadline during which time the Contractor shall remedy the cause(s) described on the warning. Failure to do so shall justify the Owner or Engineer to order work shut down or suspended. Such shutdown will not be compensated by cost reimbursement or time schedule adjustment. J. Failure to promptly execute the approved schedule in the judgment of the Owner will result in a written warning submitted to the Contractor explaining the specific compliance needed. Failure of the Contractor to remedy the noted items may be considered a breach of contract possibly leading to work shutdown for cause or contract termination. 1.02 Format and Submissions A. Prepare Construction and Procurement schedules in a graphic format suitable for displaying schedule and actual progress. B. Submit two copies of each schedule to owner for review. Owner will return one copy to contractor with revisions suggested or necessary for coordination of the Work with the needs of Owner or others. 1.03 Progress Revisions A. A schedule update shall be submitted to the Owner at each weekly progress meeting that will reflect work performed in the previous week and the upcoming two-(2) weeks. Schedule updates shall not change any Contract times. B. A complete schedule update shall be submitted with each application for progress payment. C. Show changes occurring since previous submission. 1. Actual progress of each item to date. 2. Revised projections of progress and completion. D. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Anticipated problems, recommended actions, and their effects on the schedule. 2. The effect of changes on schedules of other work. 1.04 Modifications to Time of Completion in the Approved Schedule A. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract Documents and the work embraced shall be commenced on a date specified in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to ensure full completion within the contract time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the contract time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the climatic and other factors prevailing in the locality of the work. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Page 3 of 4 Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to complete the project within the "Contract Time" shown in the proposal. The "Contract Time" anticipates a “Normal” weather and climate condition in and around the vicinity of the Project site during the times of year that the construction will be carried out. Extensions of time based upon weather conditions shall be granted only if the Contractor demonstrates clearly that such conditions were "unusually severe," would not have been reasonably anticipated, and that such conditions adversely affected the Contractor’s work and thus required additional time to complete the work. B. The following specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather. The listing below defines the anticipated number of calendar days lost to adverse weather for each month and is based upon National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the geographic location of the project. Monthly Anticipated Calendar Days Lost to Adverse Weather Conditions JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC (7) (4) (4) (4) (6) (3) (4) (2) (3) (3) (2) (5) The above schedule of anticipated adverse weather will constitute the base line for monthly (or portion thereof) weather time evaluations. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days and the impact of adverse weather days that delay the work will be recorded on a day-to-day basis. It is assumed that the work will be carried out Mondays through Fridays (holidays excepted) unless an approved construction schedule or written authorization from the Owner indicates otherwise. The number of days of delayed work due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then be compared to the monthly adverse weather schedule above. An actual adverse weather day must prevent work for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s workday, delay work critical to the timely completion of the project, and be documented by the Contractor. The City Representative observing the construction shall determine on a daily basis whether or not work can proceed or if work is delayed due to adverse weather or the effects thereof. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Coordinator in writing of any disagreement as to whether or not work can proceed on a given date, within 2 calendar days of that date. The Owner will use the above written notification in determining the number of working days for which work was delayed during each month. C. At the end of each month, if the number of working days for which work was delayed due to adverse weather exceeds that shown in the above schedule, a Change Order will be executed which increases the Contract Time. The number of workdays delayed due to adverse weather or the impact thereof will then be converted to Calendar Days based on the contract completion day and date. This conversion assumes a 5-day work week, Mondays through Fridays, holidays excepted; should the Contractor have authorization to work weekends and/or holidays, then the method of conversion of workdays to calendar days would take this into consideration. The contract time period will then be increased by the number of calendar days calculated above and a new contract completion day and date will be set. D. The Contractor’s schedule must reflect the above-anticipated adverse weather delays on all weather- dependent activities. E. While extensions of time shall be granted for "unusually severe" weather or climate conditions, the Owner shall make no monetary compensation for any costs to the Contractor arising out of such delays. The Contractor shall comply with the portions of the Contract Documents relating to his project schedule and amendments thereto which result from the "unusually severe" weather condition. F. Breakdowns in equipment or lack of performance by the Contractor will not be considered justification for an extension of time. Liquidated damages will be assessed as delineated elsewhere. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01310 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Page 4 of 4 G. The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is due to the following, and the Contractor has promptly given written notice of such delay to the Owner or Engineer. 1. To any preference, priority, or allocation order duly issued by the Owner. 2. To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and abnormal and unforeseeable weather as provided above; and 3. To any delays of Subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in paragraphs 1 and 2, above. 1.05 City's Responsibility A. City's review is only for the purpose of checking conformity with the Contract Documents and assisting Contractor in coordinating the Work with the needs of the Project. B. It is not to be construed as relieving Contractor from any responsibility to determine the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction as provided in the General Conditions. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Shop Drawings A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates, and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Submit all shop drawings on Shareware, any exceptions approved by Owner’s Representative to be in the following format: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 7. Submittal: Scan shop submittal information and post on Shareware site hosted by the City. Shop Submittal logs and shop submittal data to be posted and updated by the Contractor. Stamped responses will be posted by Owner’s Representative and log updated also on the Shareware system 8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken. 1.02 Product Data A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer’s installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer’s printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Page 2 of 3 4. Submittals: Scan submittal information and post on Shareware site hosted by the City. Submittal logs and submittal data to be posted and updated by the Contractor. Stamped responses will be posted by Owner’s Representative and log updated on the Shareware system. 5. Distribution: Furnish copies and/or access to viewing of Shareware documents of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer’s possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.03 Samples A. Submit full-size, full-fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicated special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner’s property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. The Owner will review and return preliminary submittals with the Owner’s notation, indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Owner will return one set marked with the action taken. 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01330 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Page 3 of 3 a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1.04 Quality Assurance Submittals A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, manufacturer’s field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature: an officer of the manufacturer or other authorized individual shall sign Certification documents. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Sections “Quality Control” and “Testing,” and in the applicable technical specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01330 Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01340 – SURVEY DATA Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01340 - SURVEY DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Survey Requirements A. Contractor is responsible for the layout of the Work. The City will not provide surveying. B. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, on established control points. Verify established control points at site prior to laying out the work. C. Perform layout of the Work with qualified personnel. 1. Stake pipes, sleeves and conduits at the following minimum locations: a. Storm Drainage Systems: in addition to laser, as a minimum stake manholes and the following stations upgrade of each manhole, +25, +50, and the midpoint station to the nearest 50 feet. b. Irrigation/Utility Sleeves: Stake sleeves at end points and changes in horizontal alignment. c. Electrical Conduit: Stake conduit at end points and changes in horizontal alignment. d. Offset staking shall be for both alignment and grade. e. Contractor shall stake the piping and verify piping both for grade and alignment at each of the above locations. Keep field measurements in a field book to be turned in to Owner. Keeping of field book is a requirement for progress payment. 2. As a minimum, stake plazas, courts and pathways at grade changes, changes in horizontal alignment, and at 25 foot stations along sidewalk centerline. 3. As a minimum, stake drainage channel and swale alignments at changes in horizontal alignment and at 25 foot stations along center of channel/swale and at the top of bank on both sides of the channel. 4. As a minimum, stake buildings/structures at corners and at column locations. 5. As a minimum, stake open areas/landscape areas at changes in vertical slope, and using 25 foot grid in smaller areas and at 100 foot grid in larger areas. 6. As a minimum, stake the top and bottom of berms and depressions at changes in horizontal alignment, and at 25 foot stations along the top and bottom of the slope around the perimeter of the berm or depression. 7. Refer to Drawings for earthwork requirements. D. Field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing surveys required by the Work will be available to City for examination throughout the construction period. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit to City survey data with other documentation required for final acceptance. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING Page 1 of 2 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General A. Provide such equipment and facilities as the City may require for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. Do not use materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have been made and the materials or equipment are found to be acceptable. A product that becomes unfit for use after approval hereof shall not be incorporated into the work. B. Materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their preparation or use. Furnish the required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of the placing of orders to permit the testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at the site of the work. C. Tests shall be made by an accredited independent testing laboratory selected by the Contractor. Except as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of materials and the laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). D. Where additional or specified information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is required, such information is included under the applicable sections of the Specifications. Modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures which may be included for specific materials under their respective sections in the Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures. 1.02 Transmittal of Test Reports A. Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by Contractor for Engineer’s review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the work shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings. B. The testing laboratory retained by the Owner will furnish three (4) copies of a written report of each test performed by laboratory personnel in the field or laboratory. Two (2) copies of each test report will be transmitted to the Engineer and one (1) copy to the Contractor and (1) copy to the owner within seven (7) days after each test is completed. 1.03 City's Responsibilities A. The City shall be responsible for and shall pay the costs in connection with the following testing: 1. Soil Compaction Tests. 2. Trench Backfill. 3. Pipe Bedding and Structural Bedding. 4. Tests not called for by the Specifications 5. Concrete, mortar and grout tests. 1.04 Contractor’s Responsibilities A. In addition to those inspections and tests called for in the General Conditions, Contractor shall also be responsible for and shall pay the costs associated with testing required for the following: 1. Performance and field testing specifically called for by the specifications. 2. Re-testing for Work or materials found defective or unsatisfactory, including tests covered under 1.03 above. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING Page 2 of 2 3. Testing of pipe (if required). 4. Vacuum testing of manholes (if required). 5. Concrete materials and mix designs. 6. Gradation tests for embedment, fill and backfill materials. 7. Material Substitution - tests for basic material or fabrication of equipment offered as a substitution for a specified item on which a test may be required in order to prove it compliance with the specifications. Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the Contractor does not have the right to have tests performed on any material at any time for his/her own information and job control so long as the Owner does not assume responsibility for the cost or for giving them consideration when appraising quality materials. 1.05 Contractor's Quality Control System A. General: The Contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of items of work, including that of his subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the functional performance of this project. This control shall be established for construction except where the Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories or engineers employed by the City. Contractor's control system shall specifically include testing required by the various sections of the Specifications. B. Contractor's quality control system is the means by which he assures himself that his construction complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover the construction operations and should be keyed to the proposed construction schedule. C. Records: maintain correct records on an appropriate form for inspections and tests performed, instructions received from the City and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or test, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. Document inspections and tests as required by each section of the Specifications. Provide copies to City in a reasonable time. D. Pipe alignment and grade is to be maintained through the use of suitable surveying instruments or laser equipment operated continuously during construction. Horizontal tolerances of + 0.3 feet and vertical tolerances of + 0.1 feet maximum deviation from plan and construction staking are to be maintained, except that visible “snaking” of the horizontal alignment and changes in directions of slope will not be permitted. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01500 – TEMPORARY CONTROLS Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 Noise Control A. Take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise when construction activities are being performed in populated areas. B. Construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the work. C. Cease operation of all machinery and vehicles between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. 1.02 Dust Control A. The City of Fort Collins has adopted a Dust Prevention and Control Manual: https://www.fcgov.com/airquality/fugitive-dust.php. All operations conducted under this Agreement shall be performed in accordance with the stated procedures and requirements. B. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing. C. Earth and road surfaces subject to dusting due to construction activities and detouring of traffic shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. 1. Chemical dust suppressant shall not be injurious to existing or future vegetation. 1.03 Pollution Control A. Prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, concrete, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction activities. 1. Retain spent oils, hydraulic fluids and other petroleum fluids in containers for disposal off the site. 2. Prevent sediment, debris or other substances from entering sanitary sewers, storm drains and culverts. 1.04 Erosion Control A. Take such measures as are necessary to prevent erosion of soil that might result from construction activities. 1. Measures in general will include: a. Control of runoff. b. Trapping of sediment. c. Minimizing area and duration of soil exposure. d. Temporary materials such as hay bales, sandbags, plastic sheets, riprap or culverts to prevent the erosion of banks and beds of watercourses or drainage swales where runoff will be increased due to construction activities. B. Preserve natural vegetation to the greatest extent possible, except where otherwise noted. C. Locate temporary storage and route construction traffic so as to preserve vegetation and minimize erosion. D. Comply with the City of Fort Collins' Storm Drainage Erosion Control Manual. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Utilities A. Furnish utilities necessary for construction including, but not limited to temporary electric power and pay cost associated with utilities during and used for the contract period. Temporary utilities installation shall meet the construction safety requirements of OSHA, State and local governing agencies. 1.02 Water A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining water for construction and shall pay costs associated with establishing a temporary meter used during construction. 1.03 Sanitary Facilities A. Furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site in the vicinity of the construction for the needs of construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services on the Project. B. Properly maintain sanitary facilities of reasonable capacity throughout construction periods. C. Enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. D. Obscure sanitary facilities from public view to the greatest extent practical. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL Page 1 of 2 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 General A. Traffic Control necessary to complete the project will be provided by the Contractor and will not be paid for separately. B. The Contractor must submit traffic control plans and coordinate traffic control with the City's Traffic Control Coordinator. The traffic control plans must he submitted and approved 72 hours prior to starting construction and before making each modification. C. Conformance: City of Fort Collins Work Area Traffic Control Handbook, Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (U.S. Dept. of Transportation), or applicable statutory requirements of authority having jurisdiction. D. Limited closures may be permitted for short periods up to three days to allow installation of concrete pavement. Closures must be requested and approved 72 hours prior to anticipated closure. E. Limited alternating one-way traffic operation may be permitted during the hours from 9:00 A.M. to 3:30 P.M. One-way traffic operation must be requested and approved 72 hours prior to anticipated operation. F. At all times, Contractor must maintain two-way traffic with a minimum of one lane of traffic in each direction. Limited closures may be allowed. G. The Contractor must coordinate with adjacent residents to provide and maintain them sufficient access during the duration of the project. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and communicate with the residents during construction. H. Keep traffic areas free of excavated material, construction equipment, pipe, and other materials and equipment. I. Keep fire hydrants and utility control devices free from obstruction and available for use. J. Conduct operations in a manner to avoid unnecessary interference with public and private roads and drives. K. Provide and maintain temporary approaches or crossings at streets, businesses, and residences. L. Keep roads open and in acceptable condition, unless closure or detour has been approved by City's Traffic Control Coordinator 72 hours prior to closure or detour. M. Post signs around the perimeter of the construction site to restrict public access. 1.02 Traffic Control Plan A. Submit a detailed traffic control plan to Traffic Control Coordinator for review and acceptance. Plan must be accepted 72 hours prior to work commencing at the site. Maintain the accepted plan throughout all phases of construction. Provide copy to Owner prior to submittal. 1. Notify police, sheriff, ambulance services, and fire authorities of traffic control plan and the schedule of it. Distribute copies if requested. 1.03 Flagmen A. Required where necessary to provide for public safety, or the regulation of traffic, or by jurisdictional authorities. B. Shall be properly equipped and licensed. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01570 - TRAFFIC CONTROL Page 2 of 2 1.04 Warning Signs and Lights A. Provide suitable barricades and warning signs for: 1. Open trenches and other excavations. 2. Obstructions, such as material piles, equipment, piled embankment. B. Illuminate by means of warning lights all barricades and obstructions from sunset to sunrise. C. Protect roads and driveways by effective barricades on which are placed acceptable warning signs. 1.05 Parking A. Provide suitable parking areas for the use of construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Project so as to avoid interference with private property, public traffic, City's operations, or construction activities. Such parking shall occur on the project site or another suitable location, approved by the City. 1.06 Roadway Usage between Operations A. When Work is not actually in progress, Contractor shall make passable and shall open to traffic such portions of the Project and temporary roadways or portions thereof as may be agreed upon between Contractor and City and authorities having jurisdiction over any properties involved. PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 3 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 Summary A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s selection of products for use in the Project. 1.03 Definitions A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as “specialties,” “systems,” “structure,” “finishes,” “accessories,” and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. “Products” are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,” “equipment,” “systems,” and terms of similar intent. 2. “Materials” are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. “Equipment” is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 1.04 Submittals A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Owner. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer’s name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor’s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specifications Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer’s name and address. e. Supplier’s name and address. f. Installer’s name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days of date commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial product list. Provide a written explanation of omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. 4. Complete List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 3 5. Owner’s Action: The Owner will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Owner’s response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of seeking between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions provide domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work: 1. Not available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents. 2. Domestic products that comply with the Contract Documents are available only at prices or terms substantially higher than foreign products that comply with the Contract Documents. 1.06 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Delivery, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Delivery products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer’s original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weather-tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Product Selection A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. B. Product Selection procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 3 2. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers or where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term “or equal” or “or approved equivalent,” provide one of the products listed or comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning “substitutions” or obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Nonproprietary Specification Requirements: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning “substitutions” to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. 6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Owner’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase “… as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures…” or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Owner will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation of Products A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Page 1 of 6 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.02 Summary A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 8. Final cleaning. 9. As-built drawings B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 1.03 Substantial Completion A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner’s personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Page 2 of 6 11. Seed establishment shall be deemed substantially in compliance with the specifications. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. If the Owner’s Representative determines that the work is not substantially complete at the time of review or that deficiencies remain at time of compliance review, the Contractor shall pay additional costs for the additional review(s) by Owner’s Representative and Consultants. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.04 Final Acceptance A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Owner’s final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Owner. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Owner. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 12. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 13. Submit as-built drawings and an as-built site survey with a 1 foot contour interval, high points, low points, ridges, and horizontal and vertical utility locations including invert elevations. 14. Submit as-built drawings of the stormwater improvements, prepared by a licensed survey. 15. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Re-inspection Procedure: The Owner will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Owner. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Owner will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Owner will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. The cost of additional inspections shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.05 Record Document Submittals A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Owner’s reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Page 3 of 6 conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set. 5. Prior to Contract Closeout, obtain from the Owner a digital copy of the AutoCAD bid documents. Using AutoCAD v. 2004 (or later version), the Contractor shall transpose information contained on the Record Drawings maintained on site to the AutoCAD drawings. 6. The contractor shall the provide a reproducible mylar copy of the Record Drawings and a copy of the digital files to the Owner’s Representative. Label each sheet “Record Drawing.” On the first sheet, the Contractor or resident Superintendent shall execute the following statement: Having reviewed this document and all attachments, I affirm that, to the best of my knowledge, the information presented here is true and accurate. Signed: Date: Position: C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Owner. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. 3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Owner. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Page 4 of 6 E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Owner. F. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended “turn-around” cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. 1.06 Warranties and Bonds A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. Maintain copies of Contractor’s submittals and assemble documents executed by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. B. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For items of Work delayed materially beyond date of substantial completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.07 Final Payment A. The Contractor shall submit written certification that Contract Documents Work has been reviewed and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner Representative’s review. B. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract provide submittals required by governing authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and sum remaining due. C. Owner’s Representative will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made by Change Order. D. Retainage will be held until advertisement for liens and encumbrances is completed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Closeout Procedures A. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner’s personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer’s representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. Maple Hill Neighborhood Park SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Page 5 of 6 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Startup. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.02 Final Cleaning A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner’s property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01270 – UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 Summary This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 1.03 Definitions A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.04 Procedures A. Unit prices includes acquisition of necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation (per the drawings and specifications), insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 – MATERIALS (Not Used) Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 List of Unit Prices Demolition Unit Price Item: Asphalt Removal 1. Description: Demolition, removal, and disposal of asphalt, including all efforts and materials required for complete removal. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Demolition Existing of Curb and Gutter 3. Description: Demolition, removal, and disposal of curb and gutter, including all efforts and materials required for complete removal. 4. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Demolition of Existing Concrete Sidewalk 1. Description: Demolition, removal, and dispose of concrete sidewalk including all incidental efforts and materials required to complete the demolition. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Earthwork and Utilities Unit Price Item: Import Topsoil 1. Description: Import Topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Imported Fill 1. Description: Acquisition, import, distribution and compaction of fill including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Earthwork-Cut and Stockpiling 1. Description: Cut and stockpiling of earthwork including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Earthwork- Fill 1. Description: distribution and compaction of fill including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Imported Structural Fill 1. Description: Acquisition, import, distribution and compaction of structural fill including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Unit Price Item: Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling 1. Description: Cut and stockpiling of topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Topsoil Spreading and Placement 1. Description: Spreading and placement of topsoil including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Vehicle Tracking Pad Removal 1. Description: Maintenance and removal of vehicular tracking pad including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Rip Rap – Type M 1. Description: Installation of Type M Rip Rap located adjacent to the Basketball and Tennis Courts including all incidental efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Ton Unit Price Item: Waterline Pipe – 3/4” Copper 1. Description: 3/4” copper water line pipe installation with fittings, installation per drawings, including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Waterline Thrust Block 1. Description: Waterline thrust block installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Waterline Tapping Saddle 1. Description: Waterline Tapping Saddle installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Waterline Swivel Tee 1. Description: Waterline Swivel Tee installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Waterline Bends 1. Description: Waterline Bends installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Unit Price Item: Waterline Joint Restraint 1. Description: Waterline joint restraint installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: 3/4” Water Service Blowout Assembly 1. Description: 2” water service blowout assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: 3/4” Water Meter and Meter Pit 1. Description: 2” water meter and meter pit installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Sanitary Sewer Pipe – 6” PVC 1. Description: Four inch PVC sewer pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Sanitary Sewer - Cleanout 1. Description: Sanitary sewer cleanout installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – 24” RCP 1. Description: Twenty Four inch RCP storm sewer installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – Type C Inlet 1. Description: Type C Inlet installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Storm Sewer – Area Inlet 1. Description: Area Inlet installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Earthen Berm 1. Description: Earthen Berm installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Inlet Protection 1. Description: Inlet Protection installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Unit Price Item: Erosion Control – Wattle Protection 1. Description: Wattle Protection installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Site Retaining Wall Unit Price Item: Overruns and underruns of 12” Thick Retaining Wall Attached to Restroom 1. Description: Installation of Structural Concrete Retaining Wallincluding excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Hardscape Unit Price Item: Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” Thick) 3. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 4. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Standard Grey Concrete Pavement (5” Thick) –Thickened Edge 1. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Integral Color Concrete Pavement (8” Thick) 1. Description: Installation of Concrete including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Access Ramp 1. Description: Installation of Access Ramp including excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, detectable warning pads, asphalt removal and patching, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Basketball Court 1. Description: Installation of Post-Stress Concrete Basketball Court including structural design, excavation, formwork, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Playground Safety Surfacing Unit Price Item: Engineered Wood Fiber 1. Description: Installation of engineered wood fiber including excavation, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Playground Underdrain 3. Description: Installation of playground underdrain including excavation, transportation, installation in place, and incidental effort and materials required for completed finished product. 4. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Irrigation Unit Price Item: Master Valve 1. Description: Master valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Flow Sensor 1. Description: Flow Sensor assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Air Relief valve assembly 1. Description: Air Relief valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Irrigation for Turf (seed or sod) areas less than 10 feet in width 1. Description: Turf Seed or Sod Irrigation system for areas less 10 feet in width, installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Irrigation for Turf (seed or sod) areas greater than 10 feet in width 1. Description: Turf Seed or Sod Irrigation system for areas greater than 10 feet in width, installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Pop up spray sprinkler with Rain Bird nozzle 1. Description: Pop up spray sprinkler with nozzle installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Pop up Rotor sprinkler with Rain Bird nozzle 1. Description: Pop up gear driven rotor spray sprinkler with nozzle installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Drip Irrigation – per shrub, perennial or grass in planting bed 1. Description: Drip irrigation installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Drip Irrigation – per shrub or tree in sod or seeded area 1. Description: Drip irrigation installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Sleeve Pipe 1. Description: PVC sleeve pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Unit Price Item: Isolation gate valve assembly 1. Description: Isolation gate valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Quick coupling valve assembly 3. Description: Quick coupling valve assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 4. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals 1. Description: Remote control valve assembly for sprinkler laterals installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Remote control valve assembly for drip laterals 1. Description: 1” remote control valve assembly for drip lateral drip zones installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Flush Cap Assembly 1. Description: Flush cap assembly installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Mainline Pipe 1. Description: Mainline pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Unit Price Item: Lateral Pipe 1. Description: Lateral pipe installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot Landscape Unit Price Item: Finish Grading 1. Description: Finish grading per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Organic Amendment 1. Description: Class 2 Organic amendment including acquisition, incorporation into soil and all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard Unit Price Item: Turf Seed 1. Description: Irrigated turf seed mix as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Turf Sod 1 Description: Irrigation Turf Sod as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation. 2 Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Native Seed 1. Description: Native seed mix as described in the specs including transportation, excavation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. Does not include irrigation. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Evergreen Tree- 6’ Height 1. Description: 6’ evergreen tree, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Deciduous Tree 1. Description: 2” inch caliper deciduous canopy tree, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Unit Price Item: Deciduous Shrub- 5 Gallon Container 1. Description: Five gallon container deciduous shrub, including transportation, excavation, planting soil, soil amendments, fertilizer, mulch, subgrade removal, installation in place, and incidental efforts and materials required for complete finished installation. Does not include irrigation system work. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Weed Barrier 1. Description: Weed barrier installation per drawings including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: City Supplied Wood Mulch 1. Description: City Supplied mulch installation per drawings including all transportation and installation efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot Unit Price Item: Rock Mulch 1. Description: Rock mulch as described in the specs including transportation, installation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Boulder – Type A 1. Description: Type A Boulder as described in the specs and drawings including transportation, installation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Mountain Granite Boulder – 3 Ton 1. Description: 3 Ton Boulder that matches the Type A Boulder source as described in the specs and drawings including transportation, installation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Boulder – Stone Step 1. Description: Stone Step as described in the specs and drawings including transportation, installation, and incidental efforts and materials required for a complete installed finished product. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Site Furnishings Unit Price Item: Bike Rack 1. Description: Bicycle rack installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Picnic Table 1. Description: Picnic table installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials Maple Hill Park 01 27 00 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each Unit Price Item: Drinking Fountain 1. Description: Drinking fountain installation per drawings and specifications including all efforts and materials required for a complete item. 2. Unit of Measurement: Each END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 BID SET PROJECT MANUAL Site Improvements, Civil Engineering, Architecture, Site Electrical, Landscaping and Irrigation Maple Hill Park PROJECT DIRECTORY - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER Company CITY OF FORT COLLINS Address 215 NORTH MASON City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80522 Contact MATT DAY Phone 970.224.6096 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT Company BHA DESIGN INCORPORATED Address 1603 OAKRIDGE DRIVE City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80525 Contact MIKE MCBRIDE Phone 970.223.7577 ARCHITECT Company ALM2S Address 712 WHALERS WAY City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80525 Contact CHAD KOSCINSKI Phone 970.223.1820 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Company LARSEN STRUCTURAL DESIGN Address 19 OLD TOWN SQUARE, STE 238 City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80524 Contact BLAKE LARSEN Phone 970.568.3355 CIVIL ENGINEER Company INTERWEST CONSULTING GROUP Address 1218 W ASH ST City/State WINDSOR, CO ZIP code 80550 Contact SKYLAR BROWER Phone 970.674.3300 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER Company CTL THOMPSON Address 400 N LINK LANE City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80524 Contact SPENCER SCHRAM Phone 970.206.9455 Maple Hill Park PROJECT DIRECTORY - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Company ESC ENGINEERING Address 3540 JFK PARKWAY City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80525 Contact YANCY SCHNEIDER Phone 970.224.9100 PLUMBING ENGINEER Company THE BALLARD GROUP Address 4730 S COLLEGE AVE, STE 203 City/State FORT COLLINS, CO ZIP code 80525 Contact MATT DOLL Phone 970.568.8762 MECHANICAL ENGINEER Company RMH GROUP Address 12600 WEST COLFAX AVE, STE A-400 City/State LAKEWOOD, CO ZIP code 80215 Contact MARK RUDIGER Phone 303.239.0909 END OF PROJECT DIRECTORY Maple Hill Park TOC - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Maple Hill Park Fort Collins, Colorado BID SET PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIRMENTS 00 00 02 Project Directory 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 00 03 00 Bid Form CITY OF FORT COLLINS GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 00 00 Division 1 01 35 66 Green Building Guidelines 01 43 39 Mock-ups 01 45 00 Quality Control DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Not Used DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-in-place Concrete 03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 05 13 Masonry Mortaring 04 05 16 Masonry Grouting 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 – METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Maple Hill Park TOC - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 05 50 13 Miscellaneous Metals 05 52 13 Pipe & Tube Railings DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 15 33 Wood Patio Decking 06 17 00 Shop Fabricated Structural Wood 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 14 00 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing 07 21 00 Thermal Building Insulation 07 21 13 Foundation Insulation 07 22 00 Roof & Deck Insulation 07 53 16 Elastomeric Sht Roof-Fully-adhered 07 61 13 Prefinished Mech-Seamed Metal Roof 07 92 00 Sealants & Joint Fillers DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 08 11 13 Skylights 08 70 00 Finish Hardware DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Not Used DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 28 13 Commercial Toilet-Bath DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 65 00 Athletic and Recreation Equipment 11 69 00 Playground Safety Surfacing DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 Site Furnishings DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPEMENT Not Used DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Maple Hill Park TOC - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Not Used DIVISON 22 – PLUMBING Not Used DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VETILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Not Used DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Not Used DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 14 13 Topsoil 31 23 23 Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealers 32 15 40 Crushed Stone Paving 32 40 00 Site Rock Work 32 81 00 Pump System Intake 32 82 00 Vertical Turbine Pump 32 83 00 Raw Water Delivery 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 32 90 00 Plants 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 93 00 Turf and Grasses 32 92 13 Hydro Mulching DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 47 13 Pond Lining END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Maple Hill Park 01 35 66 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 01 35 66 GREEN BUILDING GUIDELINES (for use with non‐LEED certified projects) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall follow the same general sustainable design and construction guidelines and procedures as for LEED certification through the U.S. Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System certification will not be pursued for this Project. B. Sustainability tracking by the Contractor is not required; however, submittals shall provide information related to the sustainability design criteria required by individual Sections of these Specifications. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 11 00, Summary of Work: Sustainability goals. 2. Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements. 3. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for design and performance criteria. 1.02 REFERENCES A. LEED reference standards, as specified in the LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations, Version 4, are included in this Section by reference. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Certificates of Chain‐of‐Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC‐accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria". Certificates shall include evidence that mill is certified for chain‐of‐ custody by an FSC‐accredited certification body. B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. LEED Version 3.0 (2009), Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations (LEED‐NC). C. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured or assembled within a radius of 500 miles from the Project location. D. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site. E. Recycled Content: Percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre‐industrial), or after consumer use (post‐consumer). F. Certified Wood: Wood‐based materials and products which are certified in accordance with the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Principles and Criteria for sustainably harvested and processed wood building components. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Refer to specific Sections of these Specifications. Contractor tracking of sustainability submittals is not required. Maple Hill Park 01 35 66 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS A. General: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post‐consumer recycled content plus one‐half of post‐industrial recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent of the cost of materials used for the Project. 1. The cost of post‐consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post‐consumer recycled content in the item by the total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item. 2. The cost of post‐consumer recycled content plus one‐half of post‐industrial recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post‐consumer recycled content plus one‐ half of post‐industrial recycled content in the item by the total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item. 3. Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculation. 4. Recycled content shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission's "Guide for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims", 16 CFR 260.7 (e). 2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regionally manufactured or assembled materials. B. Of the regionally manufactured materials specified above, provide at least 50 percent (by cost) that are regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. 2.03 CERTIFIED WOOD A. Provide wood materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC‐ accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2 "Principles and Criteria". 1. Wood‐based materials include but are not limited to the following materials: a. Rough carpentry. b. Miscellaneous carpentry. c. Finish carpentry. d. Architectural woodwork. 2.04 LOW‐EMITTING MATERIALS A. For interior applications use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. VCT, Asphalt Tile, and Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. Gypsum Wallboard and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 12. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 13. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 14. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 16. Top and Trim Adhesive or other Special Purpose Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 17. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. Maple Hill Park 01 35 66 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 18. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 19. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 20. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 21. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. 22. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 23. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 24. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 25. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content and the following chemical restrictions per Green Seal Standard GS‐11: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non‐Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti‐Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 6. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 7. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 9. Waterproofing Sealers: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 10. Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers: VOC not more than 400 g/L. 11. Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 275 g/L. 12. All Other Sealers: VOC not more than 200 g/L. 13. Clear Shellac: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 14. Pigmented Shellac: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 15. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds. 16. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2‐ethylhexyl) phthalate, di‐n‐butyl phthalate, di‐n‐ octyl phthalate, 1,2‐dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1‐ trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride. C. Low Emitting Materials: Carpet Systems: Comply with the current VOC limits of the Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program. For technical information on CRI and a list of approved Green Label Products, visit the website, http://www.carpet‐rug.org. 1. Current criteria for the program are based on a maximum emission factor measured in mg/m/hr as follows: a. Total Volatile Organic Compounds: 0.5 b. 4‐PC (4‐Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 c. Formaldehyde (to prove that none is used): 0.05 d. Styrene: 0.4 D. Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea‐formaldehyde resin. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 01 43 39 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 01 43 39 MOCK‐UPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor and related subcontractors shall construct and maintain mock‐ups of building construction assemblies as specified herein. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination. 2. Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Sample and sample panel require‐ ments. 3. Respective Sections of Specifications which specify products, materials or systems that are part of the required mock‐up(s). 4. Respective Sections of Specifications which specify materials or systems that require sample panels, sample mock‐ups or sample areas of the construction. 1.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Approved mock‐up(s) shall be used as standard of comparison for balance of work. B. Mock‐ups shall be constructed in a location on the Project site where they can remain in place until completion, and be secured from displacement or vandalism. C. Architect and/or Owner may use the mock‐up to evaluate, and possibly modify, the proposed details and assemblies shown in the Drawings or Specifications. The Contractor shall not continue work until the Architect and Owner's representative have accepted the mock‐up. 1. Mock‐up approval does not constitute approval of changes to the Contract Documents, unless such changes are specifically itemized and approved by the Architect and Owner. D. Mock‐ups may NOT be constructed as a part of the permanent building construction. E. Field Quality Control: Refer to paragraph 3.04 below. 1.03 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITY A. Architect shall provide an elevation or axonometric drawing of the required mock‐up for use by the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOCK‐UP MATERIALS A. General: Materials shall be as specified in applicable Sections of these Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOCK‐UP REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERIOR CONSTRUCTION A. General: Contractor and related Subcontractors shall construct a full‐scale, compressed‐height mock‐up of the Project's typical exterior building foundation wall/wall/roof/soffit construction, minimum 4‐0" wide mock‐up. Mock‐up shall consist of the following materials and details: 1. Architectural cast‐in‐place concrete wall panels with vertical tube steel and composite decking. B. Mock‐up shall be constructed to illustrate the constructed details for the following building systems or components: Maple Hill Park 01 43 39 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Full height exterior wall construction, from foundation/grade elevation to roof eave or parapet cap. Wall condition shall show an external corner condition, fully illustrating how exterior wall materials "turn the corner". Mock‐up can be constructed in a vertically "compressed" manner, to eliminate unnecessary expanses of materials. 2. Patio and upper level deck construction, including decking and deck edge details, guardrail and patio door threshold conditions. C. Mock‐up(s) shall be constructed to satisfactorily illustrate relationship and construction of all interrelated materials, systems and parts, and proposed color range, texture, attachments, flashings and workmanship of all component materials and systems. D. Materials that do not need to be built into the required mock‐up include, but are not limited to: 1. Interior finish materials. 2. Paint and stains. 3. Mechanical and plumbing equipment, fixtures, piping, vents, etc., not specifically indicated above. 4. Electrical conduit runs. 5. Electrical light fixtures. 3.03 REMOVAL A. Upon Substantial Completion of construction, disassemble or deconstruct mock‐up(s) and remove from the Project site. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Mock‐up(s) shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner's representative for compliance with the design intent, specifications and quality standards of the Project. Review shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Materials. 2. Installation and system assemblies. 3. Shop and field workmanship. 4. Joints/flashings between materials. 5. Tolerances. B. Portions of the mock‐up(s) that do not meet specified requirements shall be corrected or reconstructed until approved by the Architect and Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 01 45 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. General quality control of the materials, equipment and labor for the project. B. Manufacturer's field services, support, and testing requirements. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements: Minimum Building Code standards and applicable laws. 3. Section 01 61 00, Materials and Equipment Requirements: Quality of materials and equipment to be installed in the work. 4. Division 21‐23, Mechanical, and Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Materials shall be as specified in specific Sections of these Specifications. Also refer to Section 01 61 00. B. Manufacturers: Where two or more units of the same class of fixture or equipment are required, these shall be the products of a single manufacturer. However, the component parts of the system need not be the products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. C. Design Criteria: 1. Design equipment for operations at an elevation of 4,900 feet above mean sea level, unless otherwise indicated in Division 21‐23 and/or 26. 2. Coordinate details of the equipment with other related parts of the work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, controls and equipment components are compatible. 3. Design equipment to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or vibration. Sounds or vibrations noticeable outside of room in which equipment is installed, or annoying sounds or vibrations noticeable inside room, will be considered objectionable. Correct conditions considered objectionable to Architect/Engineer by means of approved vibration eliminators or by replacing equipment at Owner's option. 4. Nameplates: Provide a permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power‐operated equipment indicating the manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, speed, capacity, power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates in easily read locations. D. Design underground piping systems, joints, couplings, valves, vaults and other appurtenances to function under all conditions of load to be encountered on the site, including but not limited to: 1. Soils conditions, including expansion and contraction. 2. Water table conditions. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with industry standards, except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. C. Comply with applicable Building Codes, except when specified materials, equipment, systems, tolerances or workmanship requirements indicate more rigid or restrictive standards. 1. Applicable codes are considered to be only minimum standards. D. Contractor and Subcontractor Qualifications: Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Maple Hill Park 01 45 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Subcontractors shall be certified by the manufacturer as an approved installer, when specified in specific Sections. 2. Refer to Sections 01 11 00 and 01 31 23 for other qualification requirements. E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed for the appropriate loads and sized to withstand stresses, vibration and racking. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGER A. Designate an on‐site party responsible for overseeing the Contractor's conformance to environmental and LEED goals for the project and implementing procedures for environmental protection. 1. Qualifications: Minimum three (3) years construction experience on projects of similar size and scope, minimum three (3) years experience with environmental procedures similar to those of this project, a LEED Accredited Professional and familiarity with environmental regulations applicable to construction operations. 2. Responsibilities shall include: a. Compliance with applicable Federal, State, and local environmental regulations, including maintaining required documentation. b. Implementation of the Construction Waste Management Plan. c. Implementation of the IAQ Management Plan. d. Implementation of the Environmental Protection Plan. e. Training for Contractor personnel in accordance with their position requirements. f. Monitoring and documentation of environmental procedures. 3. Contractor's Environmental Training Program: Contractor shall provide environmental training for workers performing work on the project site, including the following: a. Overview of environmental issues related to the Project. b. Review of site specific procedures and management plans: 1) Section 01 35 66: Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management. 2) Section 01 74 19: Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Green Building Rating Programs: Submit evidence of familiarity with USGBC LEED version as specified in Section 01 35 66. 1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's printed instructions in the quantity specified for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, startup, adjusting and finishing. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions in full detail. Include each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. When required by individual Specification section, submit manufacturer's written maintenance instructions for the Owner's use after occupancy. 1.06 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in respective Specifications section, require supplier and manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, installation and workmanship of various materials. For equipment, this shall also include startup, testing and balancing of equipment as applicable and to make appropriate recommendations. B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 03 11 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of required formwork for cast‐in‐place concrete. B. Furnish and install prefabricated, premolded form materials, including but not limited to: C. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates, dovetail slots and anchors and other accessories required to be cast into concrete work. D. Furnish and install prefabricated joint fillers, bond breakers, form ties and other miscellaneous accessories. E. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork. F. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections. G. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories: Cast‐in‐place prefabricated metal reglets, key‐ways, anchor slots, expansion joint assemblies and other specialty metal accessories. 3. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 4. Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete: Forms for precast architectural concrete. 5. Section 07 14 00, Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing: Cast‐in‐place prefabricated waterstops. 6. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 7. Division 21‐23, Mechanical: Requirements for shop drawings of hydronic piping to be cast into concrete work. 8. Division 26, Electrical: Requirements for shop drawings of conduit routing to be cast into concrete work. 9. Section 31 23 00, Excavating, Filling and Grading. 10. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 11. Section 31 63 29, Drilled Concrete Piers: Concrete formwork for piers. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Embedded plates for precast concrete wall panel attachment shall be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", unless otherwise shown. B. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 347: Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 2. ASTM D1056: Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 3. ASTM D1667: Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – PVC (Poly Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed‐Cell). 4. ASTM D1751: Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non‐extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 5. ASTM D1752: Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. Maple Hill Park 03 11 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and maintenance of formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety. D. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during placement of concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide positive means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation instructions for all void form, form‐coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties and accessories. B. Samples: Submit pattern illustrations or samples for stamped pattern concrete forms for selection by the Architect. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE A. Construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with prefabricated sections of metal‐framed, metal or plastic panel‐type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, solid exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Do not use any forms having defects on contact surfaces. 1. Plywood forms will not be acceptable. 2. Facing of metal framed formwork shall be sufficiently thick to withstand pressure of wet concrete without bow or deflection. B. Chamfer exposed external corners and edges, using chamfer strips accurately fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight‐edge joints. 1. Chamfer Size(s): As indicated on the Drawings, or if not specifically shown, use 3/4" minimum. C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where special joints may be required. D. Arrangement for sheets or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical. Form ties shall be spaced uniformly and aligned horizontally and vertically where locations are exposed to view in the completed Project. 2.02 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for a tight fit. 1. Drilled Pier or Caisson Liners: Refer to Section 31 63 29. B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork. 2.03 JOINT FILLERS A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol‐based compound, filler shall be non‐bituminous, non‐extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752. In all other joints, filler shall be bituminous Maple Hill Park 03 11 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Non‐Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal. B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous‐Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO‐M213. Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal. C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide minimum two (2) layers 15‐lb. non‐bituminous felt bond breaker. D. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non‐bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler material. 2.04 INSERTS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Keyways: Provide nominal 1‐1/2" deep formed keyways in all construction "cold" joints in cast‐in‐place concrete walls, slabs and joints between walls and slabs, as shown on the Drawings. B. Form Ties: Provide factory‐fabricated break‐back, removable, or snap‐type form ties designed to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no metal within 1/2" of concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic‐coated or hot‐dipped galvanized at exposed concrete with cone‐shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton, Gates, Heckman, Richmond or approved equal. C. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil‐type form coating compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro‐Coat, Euclid Eucoslip, J & P Tex‐Mastic or approved equal. 1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish requirements of concrete to be exposed to view. D. Metal Inserts: Provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with bolts, nuts, washers, 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise shown, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Gateway, Dayton or approved equal. E. Embedded Connector Plates or Sleeves: Embedded plates, sleeves or other accessory items as shown on the Drawings and as coordinated with the approved precast concrete shop drawings. Plates connecting precast to cast‐in‐place concrete shall be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. F. Embedded Plates, Sleeves and Anchor Bolts: Miscellaneous embedded items furnished by other Sections. Refer to the appropriate Section(s) in these Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 31 23 23. If the foundation structure design shown on the Structural Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary preparations for construction of specified joints in cast‐in‐place concrete work. 1. Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the Drawings. C. Ensure that connector plates, sleeves, dovetail anchor slots and other concrete accessories embedded in concrete are properly located, aligned and secured prior to placing concrete. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished Maple Hill Park 03 11 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 structures. Use selected material to obtain the required finishes. Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00. B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast‐in‐place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be required to prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied. D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place and securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations of openings, recesses, chases and other built‐in items shall be obtained from the Contractor or the trades involved. 3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement of reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow excess coating material to accu‐ mulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for required concrete finishes. C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete. D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable. E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets. F. Place void form material to create a continuous void space under all grade beams; omit directly above caissons or footings. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF JOINT FILLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Installation of joint fillers, bond breakers, keyways and other accessory joint materials is specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 3.05 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Extend shoring from ground floor to underside of composite floor decking at upper level. B. Perform removal of shores in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support the work until concrete has reached a 2,500 psi compressive strength. Obtain approval from the Structural Engineer for the proposed reshoring sequence. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and similar parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing that curing and protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements for hot‐ and cold‐weather concreting in Section 03 30 00. B. Formwork for beam soffits, slabs and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall remain in place at least 14 days or until concrete has reached its specified 28‐day strength. C. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00. D. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03 30 00 immediately after removal of forms. E. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed in the final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or other finishes. Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03 30 00. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 03 15 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 03 15 00 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish cast‐in and/or surface‐mounted prefinished metal concrete accessories, including metal keyed slab joints, expansion joints, reglets, dovetail anchors and anchor slots and flashings. B. Installation of same, unless provided to others or arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete 5. Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete. 6. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 7. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Concrete accessories shall be fabricated by a company specializing in the fabrication of the specified product, with a minimum of five (5) years of successful experience. C. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product data and specifications for each type of concrete accessory item specified. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete accessories in manufacturer's original, sealed containers. Store in secure and protected location, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written one (1) year warranty for all prefabricated metal inserts and/or accessories covering defects in materials or workmanship. Maple Hill Park 03 15 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish miscellaneous prefabricated metal concrete accessories, intended for cast‐in and/or surface‐mounted installations, as specified herein. B. Cast‐in Reglets: 26‐gage galvanized steel, Type CO‐Concrete, by Fry Reglet, Alhambra, CA, or approved equal. Type shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application. C. Keyed Cold and Construction Joints: Interlocking, horizontal, tongue‐and‐groove continuous keyways, 26‐ gage galvanized steel, depth(s) as required for slab thickness. Provide splice plates and other accessories by same manufacturer as required for complete installation. 1. Keyed Kold Joint component system by Burke Company, San Mateo, CA, (800) 423‐9140, or approved equal. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 50% minimum. E. Flashings: Copper, copper/lead or PVC as manufactured by Phoenix Building Products or equal, as recommended for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the lines and levels of all walls and floor slabs to receive the prefabricated concrete accessories and joint materials specified in this Section, and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation or performance of the accessories or joint systems. Do not commence work until such defects are corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates. B. Ensure that cast‐in concrete accessories are delivered to the site in a timely manner prior to pouring concrete. C. Supply to appropriate Sections components required to be cast‐in or embedded in concrete or masonry, complete with necessary setting templates. D. When supplied to other Sections, ensure that concrete accessory components are properly located and installed. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. General: Install all concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Install concrete accessories straight, level and plumb, in proper alignment, and properly placed in locations shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions. 1. Accurately place cast‐in accessories to be flush with finished concrete surfaces. C. Ensure concrete accessories are installed to provide required bond with concrete and/or masonry and prevent pullout or spalling of surfaces. D. Ensure expansion joints are installed to provide required tolerances for building movement, both vertically and horizontally. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 03 20 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, bend and install all reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports. B. Furnish and install fiber reinforcing materials. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 5. Section 03 41 00, Precast Structural Concrete. 6. Section 03 48 00, Precast Concrete Specialties. 7. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 8. Section 31 23 00, Excavating, Filling and Grading. 9. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 318: ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. ACI 315: Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 3. ACI 315‐05: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 4. ASTM A416: Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven‐Wire for Prestressed Concrete. 5. ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon‐Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A706: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low‐Alloy Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A1064: Standard Specification for Carbon‐Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 8. ASTM C1116: Standard Specification for Fiber‐Reinforced Concrete. 9. CRSI: Manual of Standard Practice. 10. CRSI: Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 11. CRSI: Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports. 12. AWS D12.1: Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. 13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. General: Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with the latest edition of ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures, and as detailed on the Drawings. C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Refer to Section 03 30 00 for requirements. D. Contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Architect/Engineer for the following items: 1. Relocation of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be violated. 2. Bar chairs and spacers. 3. Splices not shown on the Drawings and mechanical connectors. 4. Bending of reinforcement embedded in hardened concrete. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. Maple Hill Park 03 20 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel larger than #3 bars, indicating bending and cutting, preformed corners and intersections. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar schedules, stirrup or tie spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. Include all special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Show all grade beam and wall reinforcement on elevations drawn at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1'‐0". 1. Shop drawing submittal may be waived for reinforcing bars small enough to be field bent, if requested by Contractor in writing and approved by Structural Engineer. Structural Engineer must observe reinforcement prior to concrete placement. B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and chemical tests of reinforcing steel and post‐tensioning strands, if requested by the Structural Engineer. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Notify the Owner's testing and inspection agency and Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of closing of forms and/or placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in place can be made. Do not cover any reinforcement with formingk or concrete until reinforcement has been checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or concreting operations. B. Testing of reinforcing welds and splices will be as specified in Section 01 45 23. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcing steel to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings. B. Deliver fiber reinforcing in manufacturer's original, sealed bags or containers. Store in dry location, out of direct sunlight, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in place, it shall be protected by suitable covering. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Bars: ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, 60 KSI, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond‐reducing coatings. B. Ties, Stirrups and Field Bent Bars: #3 or smaller, may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted when approved by the Structural Engineer. D. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold‐drawn wire conforming to ASTM A1064. E. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, conforming to ASTM C1116, Type III, Fiber Mesh 650, Fiber Mesh, Inc., Chattanooga, TN, or equal. Maple Hill Park 03 20 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 75% minimum. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non‐metallic devices are not acceptable. B. For concrete slab‐on‐grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of reinforcement for slabs‐on‐grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height. C. For exposed‐to‐view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot‐dipped galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected. D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold‐drawn wire of at least 16‐gage. 2.03 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING STEEL A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will not injure material. B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted unless using ASTM A706, 60 KSI reinforcing. C. Where reinforcing bars are shown field welded to structural steel, bars shall be furnished by rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. Reinforcing bars shown as shop welded to a steel fabricated assembly shall be furnished and welded in place by the structural steel fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 31 23 23. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. 3.02 SPLICES A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Structural Engineer. B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 315 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset vertical lap splices at least one bar diameter. C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires is not less than two (2) full mesh spaces. Lace splices together with 16‐gage wire. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust, scale, dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce bond. B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and ACI 318. C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or hangers as recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab‐on‐grade work. Support bars in slabs‐on‐grade and Maple Hill Park 03 20 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 footings with approved accessories. D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/‐ 1/4", except that minimum spacing between bars shall be to a tolerance of +/‐ 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The Structural Engineer's approval must be obtained prior to moving bars under these circumstances. E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete. F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection shown on the Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional concrete cover unless expressly approved by the Structural Engineer. G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid of template before concrete starts to set. H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints. 3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the Drawings and shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete placement and hooked into position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required elevation prior to concrete placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in structural slabs to maintain proper locations as shown on the Drawings. B. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining pieces as specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 1. Use of coiled rolls is not allowed. 3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. 1‐1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings and/or as scheduled herein: 1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured‐in‐place concrete flatwork, including interior slabs‐ on‐grade, interior normal weight or lightweight concrete toppings, exterior breezeway slabs and toppings, patios, exterior concrete drives, apron pavements and curb and gutter sections, sidewalks, etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced with steel or wire materials. 3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beams, cores of insulated concrete forming (ICF) system, piers and caissons. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install cast‐in‐place concrete for footings, foundations, piers, caissons, walls, slabs‐on‐grade and any other concrete work required but not itemized. B. Furnish and install cast‐in‐place concrete for thrust restraint, encasement or other work. C. Furnish and place granular sub‐base under slabs‐on‐grade. D. Furnish and install patterned and/or colored concrete slabs‐on‐grade, where specifically shown on the Drawings, using forms specified in Section 03 11 00. E. Furnish and install cast‐in‐place concrete curb and gutter sections, valley pans, catch basins, sidewalks, sports court, exterior concrete flatwork and other site concrete work, unless furnished and installed by Section 32 13 13. F. Furnish and install cast‐in‐place concrete for site lighting pole bases, bollard bases, bicycle rack embedments, play area curb edging and other miscellaneous related sitework. G. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs. H. Furnishing and placing joint materials. I. Furnish and install cast‐in concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise. J. Apply cementitious smoothing and resurfacing coating for vertical surfaces where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. K. Apply sandblast finish to exposed concrete surfaces where specified. L. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 45 23, Testing. 3. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 5. Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories. 6. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 7. Section 03 41 00, Precast Structural Concrete. 8. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. 9. Section 07 11 00, Dampproofing. 10. Section 07 14 00, Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing. 11. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation. 12. Section 07 21 13, Foundation Insulation 13. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 14. Division 23, Mechanical. 15. Division 26, Electrical. 16. Section 31 23 00, Excavating, Filling and Grading. 17. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 18. Section 31 63 29, Drilled Concrete Piers. 19. Section 32 13 13, Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 20. Division 32, Exterior Improvements: Sections related to site furnishings, playground and playfield equipment, etc. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 301: Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete. 4. ACI 304: Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 5. ACI 305: Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306: Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ASTM C31: Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 8. ASTM C39: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 9. ASTM C94: Standard Specification for Ready‐Mixed Concrete. 10. ASTM C33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 11. ASTM C138: Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 12. ASTM C143: Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic‐Cement Concrete. 13. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 14. ASTM C172: Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 15. ASTM C231: Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 16. ASTM C260: Standard Specification for Air‐Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 17. ASTM C494: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 18. ASTM C618: Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 19. ASTM C856: Standard Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened Concrete. 20. ASTM C1116: Standard Specification for Fiber‐Reinforced Concrete. 21. ASTM D5084: Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of Saturated Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter. 22. Applicable provisions of Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards (LCUASS) or similar document for specific jurisdictions, for concrete curb and gutter and concrete pavement work within public rights‐of‐way. 23. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality assurance program to monitor the composition of the ready‐mixed concrete provided for this project. The quality assurance program shall detail: 1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical admixtures and water. 2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es). 3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es). 4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials. C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP‐15, "Field Reference Manual" in the field office at all times. D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work. The foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction, including formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of the foreman to the Architect. E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to concrete work and for any additional testing of work in place which may be required. F. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 301 for approval by the Architect/Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete at least fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report: 1. Project identification. 2. Concrete class. 3. Specified properties for concrete. 4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 5. Cement type and brand. 6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures. 7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard. 8. Required strength qualification data for each property specified for design mix in accordance with ACI 301. 9. Unit weight. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and concrete stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds. C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with paragraph 1.02.B. D. Certificates: 1. Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates. 2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified in paragraph 2.05. E. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer’s review, if requested, all delivery tickets for each load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, cement brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as water/cement ratio), amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount of admixture, number of yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time. F. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 INSPECTION A. Provide free access for the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency to locations where concrete materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and reinforcing for a given pour has been approved by the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency. B. Provide minimum 24 hours advance notice for inspection to the Architect/Engineer/Inspection Agency, but ensure that forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at the time of notification. 1.05 TESTING A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent approved by the Owner. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm. C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work. D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compressive test specimens, or when the indication of change requires. 4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field‐cured test specimens as specified in ASTM C31. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 6. Moisture Permeability: Test placed and cured concrete for moisture and pH levels prior to installation of flooring materials in accordance with ASTM D5084. E. Compressive Strength Tests: 1. ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix design placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one (1) specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28 days, and one (1) specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When the frequency of testing will provide less than three (3) strength tests for a given mix design, conduct testing from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than three (3) are used. 3. Testing for Drilled Pier Concrete: If more than one pier is cast from the same truckload, take one (1) set per truckload. If more than one truckload is placed in a pier, take one (1) set per pier. 4. Report test results in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor and ready‐ mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of the concrete supplier and truck number, name of the concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7‐day tests and 28‐day tests. 5. The testing agency will make additional tests of in‐place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing agency shall conduct tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in‐place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, by load testing specified in ACI 318 or other acceptable non‐ destructive testing methods, as directed. The Contractor shall pay for this additional testing. F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. G. Air Entrainment Test: One (1) air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 F and below, and when 80 F and above and each time a set of compression test specimens are made. 1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air content outside the specified values. B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory‐cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28‐day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete and no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete which the test represents. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and warehouse set. B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile. C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges. D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is completely placed. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless adequate Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 protection is provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or damage the surface finish. B. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 2. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than the following: Minimum Concrete Temp. Degrees F Air Temp. Section with Least Dimension Degrees F Under 12" 12" and Over 30 to 45 60 50 0 to 30 65 55 Below 0 70 60 3. When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80 F. 4. Prior to placing concrete, all ice, snow, surface and subsurface frost shall be removed and the temperature of the surfaces to be in contact with the new concrete shall be raised above 35 F. 5. Protect the concrete from freezing during specified curing period. 6. Heated enclosures shall be strong and windproof to ensure adequate protection of corners, edges and thin sections. Do not permit heating units to locally heat or dry the concrete. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours, unless the concrete is protected from exposure to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. C. Hot Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 90 F or above. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 85 F. 3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 90 F by spraying with water prior to placing concrete. 4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 270 F or more. 5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or exceeds 0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour. 6. Approved set‐retarding and water‐reducing admixtures may be used with the Architect/ Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90 F or above to offset the accelerating effects of high temperatures. 1.09 WARRANTIES A. Provide Installer’s written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and subgrade failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. Owner’s Representative shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor. B. Admixture Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 10‐year warranty covering materials and installation of water vapor reducing admixture. Warranty shall cover damage caused by the presence of water or water vapor transmission from cast‐in‐place concrete. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, as indicated on the Structural Drawings or specified for design mixes in paragraph 3.02. Use only one (1) brand of cement for the entire Project. B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes. D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Air‐Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal. 2. Non‐Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo‐Lith, Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal. 5. Water Vapor Reducer: Calcium silicate hydrate (CSH), Type S, Vapor Lock 20/20 or approved equal. 6. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 7. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically prohibited. 8. Color Additive: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of color(s), Davis Color or equal. Provide colored concrete where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 9. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03 20 00 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section. F. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric‐based water repellent admixture, Xypex or approved equal. G. Sustainability Design Criteria: Refer to paragraph 3.02, Design Mixes, of this Section. 2.02 NON‐SHRINK GROUT A. Provide premixed, factory‐packaged non‐shrink, non‐metallic grouting compounds specified in Section 05 12 00. 2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze‐thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL‐B‐19235. 1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld‐PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid Eucoweld, Protex Proweld‐D, or equal. B. Provide a two‐component, all‐purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or corrections. 1. Protex Probond ET‐150, Sika Colma‐Dur, or equal. 2.04 SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING A. General: A blend of white and gray Portland cement, dry polymers and aggregates providing a smooth, textured patching material for thin, vertical surface repairs and coating applications. Product shall not contain gypsum. B. Compressive Strength: 800 psi at 1 day; 3,000 psi at 7 days; 4,000 psi at 28 days. C. Adhesion: Polymer modified for increased adhesion. D. Color: To match concrete. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. 3‐2‐1 by U. S. Spec, Denver, CO, (303) 778‐7227, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03 11 00. B. Grade Beam Void Forms: Cardboard type, sizes as indicated on the Drawings, specified in Section 03 11 00. C. Miscellaneous Cast‐in‐Place Accessories: Refer to Section 03 15 00. D. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03 20 00. 2.06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Provide moisture‐retaining cover of waterproof sheet materials complying with ASTM C171, Type I or Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Type II, polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHO M‐171, polyethylene coated burlap. ‐ or, at Contractor's option ‐ A. Provide membrane‐forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, specified below. Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied finishes. 1. Approved Product: E‐Cure by Spec Chem LLC, Kansas City, MO, (866) 791‐8700, or approved equal. 2.07 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified. 2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or other deleterious material. B. Liquid Water‐Dissipating Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure‐N‐Seal W by Sonneborne or equal. VOC not to exceed 350 g/L. 1. Color: Clear. C. Non‐Slip Abrasive Aggregate: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate for non‐slip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory‐graded, packaged, rust‐proof and non‐glazing and that is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials (Sonneborne Frictex, Toch Brothers Toxgrip, Grace Durafax, Sonneborne Frictex 176), Grip‐it. D. Color Hardener: Dry, shake‐on surface treatment consisting of silica, mineral oxide pigments and portland cement, Bomanite Color Hardener or equal. E. Waterproofing Membrane: Refer to Section 07 14 00. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835‐3434, as basis of design. 2. Ashford Formula by Curecrete Distribution, Inc., Springville, UT, (800) 998‐5664. 3. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co., Denver, CO, (303) 825‐2211. 4. Zerovac Technology, LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 331‐6181. 5. L. M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800‐9900, represented locally by Conrep West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740‐7787. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable, except as limited above. 2.08 UNDER‐SLAB MATERIALS A. Granular Sub‐Base: 3/8" to 3/4" angular gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Soils Report. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Notify any trades that may have items to be recessed or embedded in concrete, or that may require openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays in the work. This work may include, but is not limited to: Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Site furnishings specified in Section 32 33 00. 2. Fencing specified in Sections 32 31 13 or 32 31 19. 3. Bicycle racks and lockers specified in Section 12 93 13. 4. Concrete reinforcing specified in Section 03 20 00. 5. Concrete accessories specified in Section 03 15 00. 6. Pipe, tube and ornamental metal railings specified in Division 5. 7. Inlaid artwork, furnished by others. 8. Mechanical work specified in Division 23. 9. Electrical work specified in Division 26. B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete against frozen ground. C. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under detrimental weather conditions. D. Notify the Architect/Structural Engineer/Special Inspector at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has observed reinforcement and other work in place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the Construction Documents. E. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03 11 00. F. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 31 23 23. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise the Architect/Structural Engineer/Special Inspector before proceeding with work of this Section. G. Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are properly placed, as specified in Section 03 11 00. H. Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are properly located and installed, as specified in other Sections. I. Smoothing and Resurfacing Coating: All surfaces in contact with coating shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants. J. Acid Etching: Where concrete stains or other applications require acid etching of concrete slabs‐on‐grade, the acid etching shall be scheduled and performed prior to installation of steel stud framing, handrails, guardrails, or other metal materials, fixtures or equipment. Refer to Section 03 35 13. 3.02 DESIGN MIXES A. Structural and Architectural Concrete: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Structural Drawings or specified herein for specific locations. B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer. C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work. D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense. E. Admixtures: Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by paragraph 2.01.E of this Section, and/or proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete. F. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory‐cured cylinders will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to paragraph 1.05 for testing requirements. G. Concrete Mixes: 1. Class I: For below grade piers and caissons, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type II cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 3" to 5" slump. Air entrained 5% to 7%. No fly ash substitution. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Class II: For foundation walls and grade beams, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type I cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 2" to 4" slump, air entrained 5% to 7%. 3. Class III: For interior slabs‐on‐grade, 4,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type I cement/cubic yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 4% to 6%, fibermesh. 4. Class IV: For interior concrete topping, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacs of Type I cement/cubic yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment, fibermesh. 5. Class IV: For exterior slabs‐on‐grade and flatwork, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II Portland cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment, fibermesh. Add selected color additive where shown on the Drawings. 6. Class V: For exterior concrete topping, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II Portland cement/cubic yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 5% to 7%, fibermesh. 7. Class VI: For architectural, fiber‐formed columns: 4,500 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II Portland cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment, fibermesh. Add color additive where shown on the Drawings. 8. Class VII: For exterior curbs, gutters, concrete pavements and sitework: Conform to City of Fort Collins engineering standards, unless otherwise directed by the Owner or Engineer. Refer to Section 32 13 13. 9. Except as excluded, fly ash may be substituted for Portland cement to a maximum of 15% by weight; 20% maximum where exposed in the final structure. If used, no further cement reduction due to use of water‐reducing agent will be allowed. H. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: a. Recycled Aggregate: 30% minimum. b. Fly Ash: As specified in subparagraph 3.02 H above or on the Structural Drawings. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. Concrete mix products shall be extracted and manufactured within 500 miles of project site. 3. Low Emitting Materials: As specified in paragraph 2.07 above. I. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project may be used, providing the following are submitted for the Architect/Engi‐ neer's approval for each class of concrete: 1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results. 2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 7‐ and 28‐day concrete strength test made during the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard deviation for these tests. 3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last six (6) months. 4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 301. 5. Documentation of compliance with specified LEED design criteria. J. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03 20 00. 3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING A. Ready‐mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of ACI 614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and deliver concrete of specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction schedule. B. Site‐mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure, mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, except as specified herein. C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall be rejected. D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum permissible water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 PREPARATION OF INSERTS, EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete work. B. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts. C. Accurately position and securely fasten all anchor bolts, castings, steel shapes, conduit, sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials to be embedded in the concrete. "Wet‐stabbing" of anchor bolts is not allowed. D. Install conduits between reinforcing steel in walls, slabs or columns with reinforcing in both faces and below reinforcing in slabs with only one (1) layer of reinforcing steel. E. Embedments shall be clean when installed. Remove concrete spatter from all surfaces not in contact with concrete. 3.05 PLACING UNDER‐SLAB MATERIALS A. Granular Sub‐Base: Place a minimum of 4" (200mm) of gravel over compacted sub‐base, level and compact thoroughly, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Transit‐mixed concrete shall be truck‐mixed in accordance with "Specification for Ready‐Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94. B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 70 F +/‐ 20 F at the time of placing, unless prior permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these tolerances. C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without segregation, contamination or loss of material. Maximum not‐to‐exceed from introduction of water to placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms with drop chutes, baffles or other methods which will prevent segregation. Comply with the requirements of ACI 614. 1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction staging and other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete placement as may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Concrete shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from frost, ice, mud, standing or running water. E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been removed from the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials have been removed from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Forms shall be wetted, oiled or treated with an approved form‐coating material prior to placing concrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned, secured in position, inspected and approved by the Architect/Engineer before starting the pouring of concrete. F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as to avoid rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring. G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required by specific conditions of the work, i.e., round, tubular fiber‐formed columns. Place successive layers at such speed so that the preceding layer is still plastic. H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air pockets, working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts to prevent the formation of voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading or rodding. Do not over‐vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints. 2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well spaced by continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. I. Post‐Tensioned Slabs‐on‐Grade: Refer to Section 03 38 00. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable defective areas immediately after form removal. B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas. C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide smooth rubbed finish on any formed surfaces exposed to view, including but not limited to the following: 1. Wlls or grade beams with 12" or more of exposed vertical surface shall receive rubbed finish. 2. Retaining walls and foundation walls at loading dock. 3. Site lighting pole bases or other related work, where base has 12" or more of exposed vertical surface. D. Strip forms while concrete is still green and steel trowel surfaces to a dense, hard finish with corners, intersections and terminations chamfered 1/2" and smooth. 1. Repair and patch all tie holes and defects with mortar. Remove all fins and projections. 2. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and floated to a texture consistent to that of formed surfaces. Final treatment of formed surfaces shall continue uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3. Strike chamfered edges and corners of exposed concrete clean, straight and true to line. E. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as specified below in this section. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINT FILLERS AND MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers and Materials: Refer to Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming, and paragraph 2.05 of this Section. B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near the middle of the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations. C. Control Joints: Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form or saw cut control joints and place expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following requirements: 1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'‐0" maximum intervals each way so as not to encompass an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as shown on the Drawings, or as required by the Soils Report. 2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural weakness. 3. Saw cut control joints shall be cut to a depth of one‐fourth (1/4) the thickness of the slab, unless indicated otherwise on the Structural Drawings. D. Interior Construction "Cold" Joints: Keyed construction "cold" joints in walls and/or slabs‐on‐grade shall be formed with prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown. 1. Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns. 2. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately before placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs and beams, apply a neat cement grout. E. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum 30# non‐bituminous building felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs‐on‐grade and vertical wall surfaces. F. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non‐bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler material. G. Exterior Slab, Curb and Gutter Control Joints: Tool or saw joints to a depth of one‐fourth (1/4) the thickness of the slab, where indicated on the plans. Refer to Section 32 13 13 for joint spacing in concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk and exterior flatwork sections. 3.09 FINISHING FLATWORK A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with the Architect in the field prior to proceeding with this work. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 12 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power‐driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power‐driven floats or by hand‐floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power‐driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand‐troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor coverings system. D. Non‐Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap belt transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom finish after floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementitious finishes. Coordinate final texture with the Architect prior to application. E. Finishing Slabs at Floor Drains: Hold elevation of concrete slabs‐on‐grade around floor drains level to within 16" around each drain location, then shape surface to elevation of drains as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for special sloped areas of concrete slabs‐on‐grade to floor or trench drains. F. Slab Finish Schedule: Refer to Part 4, Schedules, at the end of this Section. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast‐in‐place concrete work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0‐10': 1/4" maximum. b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum. 2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings. 3. Variation in Grade: a. 0‐10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs. b. 10‐20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs. c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs. 4. Variation in Plan: a. 0‐20': 1/2". b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, +1/2" for footings. 5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings. 6. Variation in Openings: a. Location: 1/4". B. Slab Tolerances: 1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10' maximum. 2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: 1/4" in 10' maximum. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. B. Refer to Section 03 11 00 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing. C. Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not necessarily consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 F. Wood forms shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an approved curing method must be started immediately. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 13 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Cure slabs by approved moisture‐retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept continuously wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with specified finishes. Specific approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion. F. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 90 F. When necessary to prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. G. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When atmospheric temperature is 40 F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than 50 F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat. H. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 F in any one (1) hour or 50 F in any 24‐hour period. 3.12 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials. B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Concrete Sidewalks, Slabs, Aprons and Curb and Gutter Sections: Damp cure and Lapidolith, white pigment. 2. Exposed Surfaces of Retaining Walls: Kure‐N‐Seal. 3. Concrete not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure‐N‐Seal. C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the following schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use. 1. Slabs to Receive No Flooring: Kure‐N‐Seal. 2. Concrete Not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure‐N‐Seal. D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. E. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3) coats with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final application has dried. 3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE APPLICATIONS A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on the Drawings or required by the work. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations. Comply with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Items include but are not limited to: 1. Electrical transformers. Coordinate sizes of transformer bases and other equipment with the governmental agency or utility having jurisdiction. B. Site Concrete Work: Provide miscellaneous site cast‐in‐place concrete items as detailed on the Drawings or specified herein, to include but not be limited to: 1. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Specified in Section 32 13 13. 2. Concrete retaining walls and seating walls. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 14 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Base and/or pier foundations for site lighting fixtures and poles, site signage, fencing and gates, pipe bollards and miscellaneous site furnishings. 4. Miscellaneous site precast concrete items, including downspout splashblocks. Refer to Section 03 48 00, Precast Concrete Accessories. 3.14 APPLICATION OF SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING A. General: Prepare surfaces to receive coating per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 1. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants. 2. Remove unsound concrete to ensure a good bond. 3. Mechanically abrade smooth, dense surfaces to provide necessary bonding. 4. Moisten area prior to application. 5. Maintain contact areas between 40 F and 90 F prior to repair and during initial curing period. B. Mixing: Use a mechanical mixer with rotating blades on low rpm for 3‐5 minutes to achieve desired consistency. C. Placing: Place material consistently without multiple layers, using a putty knife, trowel or sponge float. 1. Apply in applications from feather edge to 1/8" thickness. 2. For areas greater than 1/8" thick, apply U. S. Spec Quickset 20 to within 1/16" of final repair, then apply finish coat. D. Finishing: Follow standard ACI curing practices. 3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express direction of the Architect. C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion. 3.16 PATCHING AND POINTING A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to view, as defined herein. B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place. C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in‐place construction. D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Exposed cast‐in‐place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Consolidation and monolithic surfaces, including honeycombing. 2. Shrinkage cracking. 3. Slab finishes. 4. Tolerances specified. 5. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing. 6. Joint materials and placement. 7. Surfaces of fiber formed architectural columns. 8. Specialty slab finishes, i.e. stamped pattern concrete, for accuracy of placement, alignment and flushness of pattern, surfaces and finishes. B. Power wash, or clean by other acceptable means, all dampproofing or waterproofing overspray or other surface visual defect. Maple Hill Park 03 30 00 ‐ 15 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Moisture Permeability Testing: Test placed and cured cast‐in‐place concrete floor slabs, prior to installation of flooring materials, in accordance with ASTM D5084. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES A. Exterior Sidewalks and Ramps: Non‐slip broom or sweat finish. B. Exterior Pavilion Slabs: Non‐slip broom or sweat finish. C. Exterior Slabs and Aprons: Non‐slip broom or sweat finish, unless scheduled for other finishes. D. Exterior Curb and Gutter and Concrete Pavements: Conform to applicable City of Fort Collins and/or CDOT standards. 4.02 INTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES A. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and erect insulated precast architectural concrete wall and roof panels, including grout or dry pack as necessary to complete all connections. B. Fabricate forms for precast wall panels, veneer panels, wall caps and copings, and miscellaneous shapes. C. Provide all anchor bolts, inserts, embedded plates and other hardware or attachments cast into poured‐ in‐place concrete or welded to supporting structural frame. These items will be installed by the Contractor to the layouts shown on the approved shop drawings. D. Furnish and apply clear silicone‐based water repellent sealer, unless provided by others. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings: Pre‐installation conferences. 2. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 3. Section 01 43 39, Mock‐ups. 4. Section 01 45 23, Testing. 5. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 6. Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories. 7. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 8. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 9. Section 04 05 13, Masonry Mortar 10. Section 04 05 16, Masonry Grout. 11. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry: Installation of precast concrete caps, copings and header/sill units. 12. Section 07 19 00, Water Repellent Sealers. 13. Section 07 76 00, Precast Concrete Roof Pavers – Open Joint Pedestal‐Mount. 14. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 15. Section 09 97 23, Concrete and Masonry Coatings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. PCI MNL‐117: Manual for Quality Control for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products. 3. PCI MNL‐120: Design Handbook on Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 4. PCI MNL‐123: Manual on Design of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 5. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 6. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 7. ASTM A416: Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven‐Wire for Prestressed Concrete. 8. ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon‐Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A1065: Standard Specification for Carbon‐Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 10. ASTM C33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 11. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 12. AWS D12.1: Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Wall Panels: Fabricators of the architectural precast work shall have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience and be normally engaged in work of this scope. Additionally, work of this Section shall only be performed by approved subcontractors subscribing to the plant certification program of the Precast Concrete Institute (PCI). The following fabricators are approved: 1. Stresscon Corp., Dacono, CO, (303) 659‐6661. 2. Rocky Mountain Prestress, Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 480‐1111. 3. Additional fabricators requesting approval must make application to the Architect/Engineer at ten (10) business days before bid opening. Fabrication plants shall not be located more than 200 miles from the project site, unless otherwise approved by the Owner and Structural Engineer. C. Erection shall be done by qualified masons having experience in the successful installation of architectural precast work. D. Welders Qualifications: AWS D1.1 qualified. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Design precast architectural concrete units in accordance with ACI 318. B. Design architectural concrete units under the direct supervision of a Colorado registered professional engineer fully experienced in design of precast concrete structural units. C. Design precast concrete units to support the calculated live and dead loads. Wall panels, beams and columns shall be designed for gravity, wind and seismic loads. The manufacturer shall also design and install any additional reinforcing required for transit and erection stresses. D. Design precast concrete units and component connections to withstand weight of and forces subjected to precast concrete units. Design to provide for anticipated building movement. Provide adjustment connections to accommodate misalignment of structure. E. Design precast concrete units and connections to accommodate, by means of expansion joints, movement in structure and between cladding elements and structure without permanent distortion, damage to components, wracking of joint connections or breakage of seals. F. Design precast concrete units to industry standards for dimensions, structural characteristics, etc., unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section. G. Manufacture precast concrete units to ensure similarity of dimension and finish throughout. H. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review, deviation in design or dimensions required. I. Permissible Design Deviations: 1. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Architect/Engineer's approval of the manufacturer's proposed design, supported by complete design calculations and drawings prepared by a registered engineer. 2. Dead load of any design deviation shall not be greater than the weight of the materials indicated on the contract drawings. Effects of live, wind and seismic loads must be included in the design deviations. 1.04 TESTING A. Fabricator shall be responsible for regular testing of concrete and maintaining records of all stressing and casting operations as required herein. Manufacturing and testing procedures shall be in general compliance with "PCI‐MNL 117 Manual for Quality Control". 1. Additional tests of materials and equipment may be requested by the Architect/Engineer. Provide all materials required for testing and allow reasonable access for inspectors. Any additional testing and/or inspection will be performed by an independent testing laboratory. B. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by independent testing agent as specified in Section 01 45 23. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in Section 01 45 23. C. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed concrete mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work. Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. F. Four (4) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cu. yds. of concrete. Compressive tests shall be conducted at seven (7) days; two at 28 days and one (1) shall be held and disposed of at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings indicating the following: 1. All dimensions. 2. Location of each item in the completed structure. 3. Reinforcing steel and embed plate details. 4. Concrete strength required at time of lifting and at 28 days. 5. Admixtures to be used. 6. Connection details. 7. Openings and miscellaneous hardware provided for other trades, if any. 8. Type of finish and location. 9. Texture and finish for stair treads and other specialty items. 10. Identifying marks for each member. 11. Lifting hooks and/or handling points. 12. Sequence of erection and any special handling instruction or bracing required. B. Design Calculations: Provide design calculations prepared by a registered Colorado engineer for reinforcing, hoisting and connection and anchorage devices, for Engineer's review. Review is for checking general compliance with Contract Documents and does not relieve manufacturer of structural responsibility. C. Samples: The fabricator shall prepare three (3) samples showing the color and textures of precast units for Architect's approval prior to fabrication of the units. Samples shall be at least 12" x 12" x 1" thick. D. Miscellaneous: Submit the following when requested by the Architect/Engineer prior to manufacturing precast items: 1. Certified mill tests of reinforcing steel proposed for use on this project. 2. Concrete mix design and test results at time of release and at 28 days for mix proposed for use on this project. 3. Calibration records for jacking equipment. E. Do not proceed with fabrication until shop drawings and design calculations have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer and Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to check the erection shop drawings and to ensure their conformance with the overall building dimensions and to resolve any conflicts between the precast/pre‐stressed concrete work, his work and that of other trades prior to his approval of the shop drawings. F. Mock‐ups: Refer to Section 01 43 39 for requirements for mock‐ups, including precast concrete units. G. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle precast units in positions consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Store and handle units in manner to prevent excessive stresses. Handle and install units in a manner ensuring proper safety and alignment. Where temporary bracing is required, it shall be maintained until there are adequate permanent connections. Temporary bracing shall not damage any part of the Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 structure. C. Block and laterally brace precast units during transport and while stored onsite. Provide lateral bracing sufficient to prevent bowing and warping. 1. Blocking and Bracing: Clean, non‐staining and that will not prevent uniform curing of exposed surfaces. D. Provide edges of units with adequate protection to prevent staining, chipping or spalling of concrete. Damaged units will be rejected. E. Repair any damage suffered during storage, transportation and erection to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Clean units after erection when required to permit application of finishes. F. Precast concrete contractor shall be responsible for the design of all hooks, brackets and handling gear. Where the erection is by others, the method shall be that approved in writing by this contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE WALL PANELS A. General: Plant‐cast precast concrete insulated wall panels, consisting of structural concrete exterior and interior faces with a core of rigid insulation. 1. Structural Type: Vertical load‐bearing. 2. Thickness: 8" total panel thickness; 2" exterior face and 2" interior face over 4" rigid insulation core. a. Thermal Performance: R‐value of approximately 8.0 (weighted average method). b. Acoustical Performance: STC rating of 52 minimum. B. Concrete Materials: All materials used shall comply with the requirements of the codes and standards listed herein, with the following limitations and exceptions: 1. Concrete for walls, beams, column and stairs shall be made with stone aggregate. 2. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 3. Absorption, Cold Water Test: 5% maximum. 4. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white and/or pigmented additives as required to achieve color match. 5. Aggregate: As required to achieve color match and specified strength. C. Finishes: Smooth. D. Insulated Core: Molded, expanded polystyrene or polyurethane insulation, as required for specified R‐ value. E. Reinforcing: Non‐prestressed reinforcement shall consist of reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60, and welded wire mesh conforming to ASTM A185, except that column ties, beam stirrups and anchors welded to embedded plates shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 40. F. Cast‐In Headers, Anchors, Plates, etc.: 1. As required of stainless steel or galvanized steel. 2. Accessories as specified in Section 03 15 00. G. Clear Sealer: Clear, penetrating silicone‐based water repellent sealer, breathable to allow moisture vapor transmission, specifically formulated for precast concrete and other dense vertical surfaces, Protex Silicone Seal or approved equal. H. Non‐Shrink Grout: Provide premixed factory packaged non‐metallic grouting compound. I. Joint Sealants: Non‐staining polysulfide, silicone and polyurethane sealant, FS TT‐S‐00227, Type 1, self‐ leveling, or Type 2, non‐sag, Class A. Color to match adjacent concrete. 1. Primer: Non‐staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non‐corrosive and non‐staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. J. Approved Precast Panel Type: Styrocore Insulated Wall Systems by Stresscon, as basis of design. K. Approved Fabricators: As specified in paragraph 1.02.C above. L. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: a. Recycled Aggregate: 15% maximum. Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 b. Fly Ash: Not applicable. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. 2.02 FORMWORK A. General: Forms for precast architectural concrete wall panels shall be fabricated by the precast fabricator, constructed of wood, metal or fiberglass as required to form panels of specified types, dimensions, thickness(es), section(s), details, finish, texture and color. 1. Forms fabricated for use in this project shall remain the property of the fabricator. B. Fabricator shall provide formwork for wall caps and copings, header/sill units and other miscellaneous precast concrete moldings as required to produce materials of the specified quality. Forms may be fabricated of wood, metal or fiberglass, of sufficient strength, rigidity and quality. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Produce precast concrete wall panels and other units of the highest quality from approved concrete mix designs and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Any changes made in the approved mix design during production must be approved in advance by the Architect/Engineer. B. Insulated Precast Wall Panels: Fabricate insulated precast concrete sandwich panels in strict accordance with the approved fabricators' system specifications and recommendations. Provide solid reinforced panel edges, below‐grade sections and parapet sections, including all embedded attachments and anchorages required for erection. C. Permissible Design Deviations: Refer to paragraph 1.03. Design Criteria above. D. Sizes shall be accurate with proper allowances for fitting to each other and to other building materials. All surfaces shall be true and straight‐edged with a uniform finish on all exposed surfaces. E. Surfaces shall be dense and firm and shall withstand vigorous cleaning and scrubbing with a stiff fiber brush and diluted muriatic acid (5%) cleaning solution. F. Unformed surfaces (back surface of wall panels) shall be satisfactorily smooth so as to allow the panels to be used as a parapet surface for installation of the single‐ply roof membrane without the use of a plywood liner, or to allow the installation of z‐furring channels with the required flatness and flushness specified for gypsum wallboard finish systems. G. Provide 1/2" chamfers at all exposed edges and corners as detailed on the Drawings. H. Column caps and wall coping units and window sills shall be fabricated to overhang the masonry walls 1" on each side, or as shown on the Drawings for specific applications. Underside of each overhanging edge shall have a formed, V‐groove drip edge. I. Units with imperfections in exposed surfaces such as form joint lines, uneven color, honeycombing, cracks, etc. will not be acceptable. J. Placement of Reinforcement: 1. Provide minimum reinforcing protection in accordance with ACI 318. 2. Place one (1) #5 bar minimum with 2'‐0" projection around all sides of openings. 3. Wire mesh reinforcement must lap on full mesh spacing at side and end laps and be wired together. K. Sealer: Plant apply two (2) coats of specified clear silicone sealer, unless field application of sealer or other high performance coating is specified in other Sections. 2.04 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES A. General: Dimensions of precast concrete wall panels shall be as shown on the Drawings. Products shall be fabricated and furnished to the following tolerances: 1. Bowing: a. Bowing: Length of bow/360 or 3/4" maximum. b. Differential Bowing, Two (2) Adjacent Members: 1/4". Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Warpage: Maximum warpage of one (1) corner from the nearest corner, 1/16"/ft. to nearest corner. 3. Thickness: ‐1/8", + 1/4". 4. Squareness: 1/8" per 6 ft. or 1/4" maximum, whichever is greater. 5. Dimensions: a. 10' or under: 1/8". b. 10' to 20': + 1/8", ‐ 3/16". c. 20' to 30': + 1/8", ‐ 1/4". d. Over 30': 1/4". 6. Weld Plates, Anchors and Inserts: Within 3/4" of centerline. 7. Blockouts and Reinforcement: Within 1/4" of the indicated position to meet structural requirements, otherwise 1/2". 8. Length and Width of Blockouts: 1/4". B. General: Dimensions of precast concrete caps, copings, sills/headers and miscellaneous units shall be as shown on the Drawings. Products shall be fabricated and furnished to the following tolerances, in accordance with PCI MNL‐116: 1. Length and cross‐section: a. Length: +/‐ 3/4", or +/‐ per 10 ft. of length, whichever is greater. b. Cross‐sectional dimensions: Less than 24", +/‐ 3/8"; 24" to 36", +/‐ 1/2"; over 36", +/‐ 5/8". c. End squareness: 1/2" max. 2. Horizontal alignment (sweep): a. Length of sweep 360 or 3/4" minimum b. Max. of 1" gap between 2 adjacent members due to sweep. 3. Camber, when applicable: a. Camber deviation from design: +/‐ 1/4" per 10 ft. length. b. Camber differential between adjacent members, after installation: 1/4" per 10 ft. length, 3/4" max. 2.05 FINISHES A. General: Precast architectural concrete units shall be fabricated in accordance with PCI‐MNL 117. B. Facing mixes may be used at the option of the manufacturer, providing it becomes an integral part of the total panel thickness, without cold joint separation. C. Finishes shall be as specified by the Architect, and actual finishing techniques shall be developed by the fabricator so as to meet the architectural specifications. Appropriate samples shall be supplied for approval prior to any full scale production. D. Unformed surfaces shall be screeded to proper levels and finished according to use as follows: 1. Steel Trowel Finish: For all interior exposed surfaces of wall panels, beams and columns. Troweling shall produce a dense surface, uniform in texture and appearance. 2. Float Finish: For wall surfaces unexposed to view, or to receive insulation, furring or other finish material. Finish to a smooth, level surface. Refer to Paragraph 2.05, Fabrication, above. E. No chipped, cracked, warped or otherwise damaged members shall be installed. Before any members are shipped to the job site, notify the Architect and obtain approval for shipment. Damage may be repaired by the manufacturer and will be deemed acceptable if the structural adequacy and aesthetic appearance is not impaired, subject to Architect's approval. F. Openings, Holes, and Attachments: 1. Provide all openings and attachments for fixtures or equipment shown on the Drawings. 2. Other openings, inserts and fittings shall be located, furnished and installed by the trade requiring same after the precast products have been erected. Subject to approval of the Architect, precast products may be drilled or "shot", provided no contact is made with the reinforcing steel. Should spalling occur, it shall be repaired by the trade doing the drilling or shooting. Maintain minimum edge distances recommended by insert manufacturer. Any procedure which may alter manufacturer's warranty must be approved in writing by the precast Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 fabricator. 2.06 PRIMER AND PAINT FOR STEEL CONNECTORS A. General: Concealed connectors for architectural precast concrete wall panels shall remain unfinished. Exposed connectors shall be field finished unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT‐P‐636, manufacturer's standard red. Field touch‐up paint shall be the same as shop paint. 1. Primer: Conform to FS TT‐P‐31, red. C. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and for all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi‐Mastic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall examine lines and levels of footings, foundation walls, beams, columns, or foundation and support systems scheduled to receive architectural precast concrete wall panels (units) prior to starting erection. Report in writing to Architect/Engineer any condition that may potentially affect proper installation. Do not commence work until such defects are corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates. 1. Precast concrete contractor shall bring to the attention of the General Contractor any obvious weakness in the work supporting the structural precast concrete. 2. Do not erect units unless bearing surfaces are at proper elevations. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies. B. Field verify dimensions affecting the work of this Section prior to fabrication. C. Store, handle and protect architectural precast concrete on site as specified in paragraph 1.06 above. 1. Units shall be stored on planking and protected to prevent chipping, staining or weathering before installation in the work. Location of storage to be coordinated with the Owner. 2. Units that are stained, chipped or otherwise damaged during storage or installation shall be rejected. 3. Repair or replace damaged panels, at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer. 4. Lift or support members at points that are acceptable to the Manufacturer. D. Ensure that embedded plates, angles or other attachment devices supplied by other trades are properly located and installed. 3.02 COORDINATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Pre‐Installation Conference: Refer to Section 01 31 19. B. Access for Precast Concrete Erection Equipment: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain access and operating space for the equipment of the precast structural concrete contractor. Such access may consist of, but need not be limited to, roads, ramps and crossings capable of supporting cranes and trucks normal to erection operations of this type. Foundation and utility excavations shall be backfilled where necessary and in accordance with the schedule of erection mutually agreed on between this contractor and the precast concrete erection contractor. C. Coordination of Precast Concrete with Other Trades: The General Contractor shall acquaint other trades with the necessity of providing information required to locate openings, inserts and any other appurtenances required by these trades in the architectural precast concrete. D. Enclosure of Precast Concrete: General Contractor shall not enclose any of the precast concrete work until the alignment and connections have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. E. Work Supporting Precast Architectural Concrete: Anchor bolts, embedded plates and angles shall be supplied by the precast concrete contractor and installed by the General Contractor. 1. Tolerances in placing anchor bolts are: Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 a. Alignments: 3/8". b. Level: 1/2". 3.03 ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE WALL PANELS A. General: Installation of precast architectural concrete wall panels shall be performed by the Fabricator or a competent Erection Contractor who has experience in the erection of this type of material. Members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided by the Fabricator. Erection procedures, temporary shoring and bracing, and inducted loads during erection shall comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Installer shall furnish all necessary hoisting equipment. B. Alignment: Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved erection drawings. Erect units level, plumb, square and true within allowable tolerances. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably leveled out by jacking, loading, or any other feasible method as recommended by the Manufacturer and acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. C. Immediately after erection and alignment of the precast members, dry pack horizontal joints between precast wall panels and their supporting structure. Engineer's observation of connections is required prior to covering. D. Field Welding: Field welding shall be done by qualified welders, using equipment and materials compatible to the base metal. Methods shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D12.1. Securely fasten units in place by welding, locations and lengths as specified in the approved erection drawings. E. Grouting: Grout all joints at bearing locations of wall panels to provide continuous support, minimum 1" thick. 3.04 PANEL JOINT ALIGNMENT A. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved erection drawings. B. Maintain the following joint tolerances for erected precast concrete units: 1. Face Width of Joint: +/‐ 3/16". 2. Step in Face: Maximum 1/4". 3. Jog in Alignment of Edges: Maximum 1/4". 3.05 ANCHORAGE A. All units shall be secured to adjacent materials to prevent any movement of the units during setting. Field anchor bolts, stay bolts, ties, braces, rods, etc. required for fixing the units in place shall be furnished by this contractor. Drawings showing recommended anchorage plan shall be furnished by the precast concrete manufacturer. B. Securely fasten units in place by welding. Touch‐up field welds. C. Apply mastic over all connections below finish grade. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Furnish and install joint materials and sealants, unless furnished by Section 07 92 00. B. All vertical and horizontal joints between wall and/or roof panels shall be caulked where exposed to view in the finished project. 3.07 CLEANING AND APPLICATION OF SEALER A. Clean weld marks or other marks, debris or dirt from exposed surfaces of units. Execute a final clean down and remove dirt and stains that are a direct result of the erection process. B. Water Repellent Sealer: Apply two (2) coats of sealer, specified in Section 07 19 00, unless factory applied. Maple Hill Park 03 45 00 ‐ 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.08 DAMAGE AND REPAIR A. Minor cracking, chips, and spalls less than 1/4" in any dimension which occur during transit, delivery, handling, storage, and installation will be permitted if they are not detrimental to the final appearance, in the sole opinion of the Architect and Owner. No unsightly imperfections or structural defects will be permitted unless satisfactorily repaired. B. Contractor shall ensure that due care is exercised by other trades and shall be responsible for any subsequent damage or soiling to the precast concrete units from these sources. C. Contractor shall protect the installed precast concrete stair treads for the duration of the construction period. Means and materials shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 04 05 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 04 05 13 MASONRY MORTARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent and materials for new concrete block masonry units. B. Furnish and install mortar and materials for setting new precast concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 45 23, Testing: Mortar testing. 3. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Section 04 05 16, Masonry Grouting. 5. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 6. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers: Sanded caulk at joints of stone walkway slabs, stair landings, steps and risers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C144: Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 2. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C207: Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 4. ASTM C270: Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 5. ASTM C476: Standard Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 6. ASTM C952: Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units. 7. ASTM E514: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 8. PCA, current edition. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of masonry mortar specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection by the Architect. C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04 21 13 and/or 04 22 00 (04 01 20) for sample panel requirements. Mortar color shall be reviewed for approval by the Architect. D. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. Maple Hill Park 04 05 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.04 TESTING A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, conforming to ASTM C952, E514 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions or Section 01 45 23. Test samples shall be taken at random to provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications shall be removed from the job and replaced. 1. Refer to Section 04 21 13, 04 22 00 and/or 04 43 00 for mortar testing requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of mortar between 70 F and 100 F. B. Contractor shall use only one (1) type mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement is not permitted. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MASONRY MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction. C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144. D. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption. E. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted. F. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric‐based water repellent admixture, conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok for Mortar by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226‐1766, or approved equal. 1. Integral water repellent shall be used in all concrete unit masonry construction. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar Mixes for Structural Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated lime for all new masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: 1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1. 2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime. 3. 2‐1/4 to 3‐1/2 parts damp, loose sand. 4. Integral water repellent. 5. Mortar coloring. B. Mortar Mixes for Brick, Concrete Unit or Stone Masonry Veneer: ASTM C270, Type N mortar with hydrated lime for all new veneer masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: 1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1. 2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime. 3. 2‐1/4 to 3‐1/2 parts damp, loose sand. 4. Integral water repellent. 5. Mortar coloring. C. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. Maple Hill Park 04 05 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer. 3.02 BATCH CONTROL A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Hand mixing in a wheelbarrow or other uncontrolled method is not acceptable. C. Do not use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2‐1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2‐1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. 1. Ensure addition of integral water repellent for all exterior masonry construction, proportioned as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80 F, and 2‐1/2 hours at temperatures under 50 F. 3.03 JOINTS AND MASONRY COURSING A. General: Lay coursed modular units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. B. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Lay units with "buttered" joints, thickness to match existing, unless otherwise indicated to maintain bond alignment with existing brick masonry work. C. Bond Pattern and Joint Type: Refer to Section 04 21 13 and/or 04 22 00. D. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. E. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work. F. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. G. Clean soiled surfaces using a non‐acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 04 05 16 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 04 05 16 MASONRY GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install grout materials for new concrete block masonry units. B. Furnish and install grout for hollow metal door frames, unless arranged for otherwise. G. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 45 23, Testing: Grout testing. 3. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Section 03 48 00, Precast Concrete Specialties. 5. Section 04 05 13, Masonry Mortaring. 6. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 7. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C144: Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 2. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C207: Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 4. ASTM C404: Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 5. ASTM C476: Standard Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 6. ASTM C952: Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units. 7. ASTM D445: Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids (and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity). 8. ASTM E514: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 9. PCA, current edition. 10. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 11. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of masonry grout specified or required for project conditions, including certification that each type complies with the specifications. B. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. Maple Hill Park 04 05 16 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.04 TESTING A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, conforming to ASTM C952, E514 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions or Section 01 45 23. Test samples shall be taken at random to provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications shall be removed from the job and replaced. 1. Refer to Section 04 22 00 for grout testing requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of grout between 70 F and 100 F. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MASONRY GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction. C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144. D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8". E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Grout Coloring: Natural. G. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted. H. Integral Water Repellent: Not applicable. 2.02 GROUT MIXES A. Grout Mixes for Structural Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C476 with hydrated lime for all grouting of cells in new concrete unit masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: 1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1. 2. 2‐1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand. 3. 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. 4. Pozzolan as per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Air entrainment shall be not more than 5% by volume. 6. Slump: 8" minimum. B. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements. C. Non‐Shrink Structural Grout: Refer to Section 05 12 00. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer. Maple Hill Park 04 05 16 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.02 BATCH CONTROL A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for grout can be accurately controlled and maintained. B. Mix grout ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Hand mixing in a wheelbarrow or other uncontrolled method is not acceptable. C. Do not use grout which has begun to set or if more than 2‐1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2‐1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. D. Use grout within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80 F, and 2‐1/2 hours at temperatures under 50 F. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY GROUT A. General: Mix and install grout materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Install grout in all cells of concrete unit masonry indicated on the Structural Drawings, or specified to be reinforced. Refer to Section 04 22 00 for additional requirements, including non‐structural locations requiring grouted cells. C. Install grout in lifts not to exceed 48", unless otherwise indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Hollow Metal Door Frames: Install grout materials in hollow metal door frames installed in concrete unit masonry walls in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Install grout in lifts not to exceed 48", unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install structural, load‐bearing plain concrete unit masonry, with integral water repellent, including units and special shapes, mortar, grout, ties, anchors and accessories. B. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry horizontal joint and vertical reinforcing. C. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings, cavity filter fabric, cavity filler, and create weepholes in veneer and/or composite wall construction. D. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other related work furnished by others to be built into concrete unit masonry. E. Furnish and install masonry grout for grouted cells of concrete unit masonry. F. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work. G. Clean new and/or existing concrete unit masonry and remove surplus material and waste. H. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 43 39, Mock‐ups. 3. Section 01 45 23, Testing: Structural concrete unit masonry testing. 4. Section 01 45 33, Special Inspections. 5. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 6. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 7. Section 04 15 13, Masonry Mortar. 8. Section 04 15 16, Masonry Grout. 9. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals. 10. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation. 11. Section 07 62 13, Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 12. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 13. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A116: Standard Specification for Metallic‐Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. 2. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM C31: Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 4. ASTM C39: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C62, Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 6. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C216, Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 8. ASTM C652, Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 9. ASTM C1088, Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale. 10. ASTM C1314: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 11. ASTM E514: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 12. ANSI A‐41.1: Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures. 13. ACI 530.1: Standard Specification for Tolerances. 14. Applicable Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute technical recommendations. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 15. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Masonry Installer Qualifications: Installation of concrete masonry units shall be by masons skilled in the installation of all specified masonry materials and accessories, with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar scale and complexity. C. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for each type and finish of concrete masonry unit and each type of masonry reinforcing and anchorage specialty specified. B. Samples: Submit samples of each specified masonry unit for approval before delivery to the site, unless only standard, plain concrete unit masonry is used. Samples for integrally colored and/or faced units shall include shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture of each type of masonry unit specified. Samples for plain concrete unit masonry shall include bullnosed external corner(s). Final approval shall be by the Architect. One (1) color and size for each different type of unit specified shall be used throughout the project. C. Samples: Submit samples of flexible masonry flashings and other specified masonry accessory materials. D. Sample Panel: Erect minimum 4'‐0" x 4'‐0" sample panel consisting of approved concrete unit masonry that satisfactorily shows proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and workmanship. Sample panel of materials using split‐face or other textured block shall be constructed showing a corner condition. 1. Contractor shall not continue work until Architect and Owner's representative have accepted sample panel. 2. Sample panel shall remain on site until work of this Section is complete and will be used as standard of comparison for balance of work. 3. Sample panel may be constructed as a part of the permanent building construction if approved by the Architect. E. Masonry Wall Reinforcing Shop Drawings: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement”. Show elevations of reinforced walls including: bar sizes, location and quantities of reinforcing steel, location and arrangement of supporting and spacing devices, bending and cutting schedules, size and location of all openings, pockets, embedments and anchor bolts, top and bottom elevations of walls and bearing elevations of all elements supported, all masonry control joints and all other framing and/or special conditions affecting the work. F. Certificates: Submit certificates with test data or other supporting documentation attesting to test results and date of block casting. Certification shall include: 1. Masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Date of block casting. G. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage, contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be used. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Deliver flexible masonry flashing and other accessories in manufacturer's original unbroken rolls, cartons or containers. C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 1.05 TESTING OF CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Test reports for each type of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Testing is to be performed by an independent testing laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C140 and ASTM E514. Reports shall include the following: 1. Compressive strength. 2. Water absorption. 3. Complete identification of units, including size, grade and type. 4. Date of block casting. B. If results of test and/or inspections do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents or are otherwise unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall proceed as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Additional costs resulting because of retesting, load testing, removal and replacement of masonry, damage to the work of other trades shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Structural Engineer shall have the right to order tests of any material entering into the masonry work or any other tests deemed necessary to determine whether materials and methods in use are such as to produce work of necessary quality, to order test under load of any portion of completed structure when conditions have been such as to leave doubt as to adequacy of the structure to serve purposes for which it is intended and to order change in proportions or material at Contractor's expense, if work of required quality cannot be obtained with materials and/or proportions furnished by the Contractor. D. Materials or proportions of materials entering into masonry walls shall not be changed, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Materials from any new source or changes in proportions shall be subject to all required tests, which shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate and provide every assistance to facilitate inspection and testing. 2. Furnish mix designs for mortar and grout prior to commencement of work, submit to the Architect mix designs and test results for each type of grout, all with materials and in proportions proposed to be used in the actual construction. No work shall commence until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer. 3. Furnish materials and labor required to make and handle test specimens at the project site under proposed job conditions. 4. Furnish temporary facilities for field‐cured specimens. 5. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for completion of quality tests. 1.06 TESTING OF MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. 1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1) minute. 2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar into cylinder using a flat‐end stick or fingers. 3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to laboratory. 4. Contractor’s Option: Contractor may substitute a prism test of in‐place concrete unit masonry construction, in lieu of specified mortar testing, upon prior approval of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Grout: Make one (1) set of three (3) 3" x 3" x 6" high specimens for each type of grout and type of wall where used each day grout is poured. Break one (1) specimen at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. On a flat non‐absorbent base, form a space 3" x 3" x 6" high, using masonry units having same moisture condition as those being laid. 2. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass through the liner into masonry units. 3. Thoroughly mix the grout to obtain fully representative mix and place into molds in two (2) layers. Puddle each layer with 1" x 2" stick to eliminate air bubbles. 4. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory. C. After 48‐hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31. D. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. E. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms, breaking stresses and nature of break. F. Masonry Preconstruction Prism Testing: 1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, in accordance with ASTM C1314. 2. Current Prism Test: Prisms shall be ungrouted with only face shell bedding and capping. 3. Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens. 4. One set of five (5) prisms of each type of unit and each type of masonry assemblage shall be built and tested using the materials and proportions specified for the project. The average of the prisms shall exceed the specified 28‐day strength (f’m). As an alternate, a prism test record consisting of at least 30 prism tests may be submitted to substantiate f’m. These prisms shall have been constructed under the observations of and have been constructed with similar materials to these specified for this Project. The average compressive strength of these tests shall exceed 1.33 f’m. G. Special Inspection: Refer to paragraph 3.19 below for requirements. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. During freezing or near‐freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50 F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress. C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non‐staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place. D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced until permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story under construction. E. Cold Weather Masonry Installation: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not use antifreeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. 4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air temperature is below 32 F. 5. Do not heat water above 106 F. 6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall not be less than 50 F or more than 100 F. 7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as follows: a. When air temperature is below 40 F and above 32 F, heat mixing water. Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers. b. When air temperature is below 32 F and above 20 F, heat both sand and mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40 F on both sides of walls by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 c. When air temperature is 20 F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40 F shall be maintained within enclosures for 48 hours. d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland cement is used with the Engineer's approval. F. Hot Weather Masonry Installation: 1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature drying of mortar. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD PLAIN CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Plain Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 2,800 psi normal or light‐weight, load‐ bearing units. 1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 8" deep units, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Color: Natural. 3. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric‐based water repellent admixture, conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226‐1766, or approved equal. a. None required for plain concrete unit masonry used as structural back‐up material in composite wall construction, or for interior walls. b. None required for plain concrete unit masonry where covered with stucco and/or plaster on both faces. B. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or deleterious matter. C. Bond Beam Units: All bond beam units shall have knockout webs and open bottoms, except at masonry lintels over openings. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. D. Lintel Units: All lintel units shall have solid bottoms, cast as U‐shaped units in lengths as required for project conditions. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. E. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings or as required: 1. Knock‐out bond beam units at bearing and top course of walls and in other locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Bullnose external corners. 3. Bullnose corners at all corners of window jambs and door jambs (both sides of walls) of interior exposed concrete unit masonry. F. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Robinson Block Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 390‐5477, (800) 284‐8037. 2. Basalite Concrete Products LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 292‐2345. 3. Powers Masonry Supply, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484‐1292. 4. Trenwyth by Superlite Block, Phoenix, AZ, (800) 331‐9823. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance and range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) specified above in the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable. 2.02 MASONRY REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES A. General: Corrosion‐resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable portions of ASTM A153, ASTM A116 or other standards. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03 20 00. C. Veneer and Horizontal Reinforcing Types: 1. Wire Mesh: Minimum 30‐gage plain wire. Mesh shall be 1/2" width, 1" (25mm) less than width of masonry. 2. Truss‐ or Ladder‐Type for Single Wythe Masonry: Prefabricated welded wire units, 6" (8") deep structural units, with matching corner and tee units. Wire shall be 9‐gage, with single pair of deformed side rods and continuous plain diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Dur‐O‐Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO, (303) 321‐1836. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 621‐4140. 3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are acceptable. 2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Masonry Flashings: Non‐reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric sheeting, 20 mil minimum thickness. 1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi minimum, ASTM D412. 2. Elongation: 250% minimum, ASTM D412. 3. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum. 4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of ‐20 F minimum. 5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. 6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi‐Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc., Somerville, MA, (800) 397‐2687, or approved equal. B. Control Joints: Non‐asphaltic‐type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown on the Drawings. 2.04 SEALER A. Integral Water Repellent: Provide as admixture in casting of concrete masonry units, specified in paragraph 2.01 above. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Masonry Installer shall inspect the concrete foundations, slabs or other substrates and conditions where concrete unit masonry work is scheduled, and notify Contractor in writing of any condition that might be detrimental to the structural stability, weathertightness or appearance of the finished installation. Do not proceed with installation until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. B. Ensure items built‐in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. C. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place concrete unit masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings. D. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. E. Ensure that minimum 1" air space between masonry veneer units and composite wall rigid board insulation, wall sheathing or masonry backup construction is maintained. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Chases and recesses shall be built in and not cut in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. G. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth. H. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws. I. Bearing for horizontal load‐carrying members shall be of grouted masonry as shown on the Drawings. If no detail is shown, bearing under beams shall consist of grouted masonry at least 8" x 16" in plan and 16" deep. J. Mask or otherwise protect doors and frames, louvers, mechanical and electrical equipment and other miscellaneous accessories not scheduled to receive masonry sealers prior to application of spray‐ or brush‐applied sealers. 3.02 CURING OF MASONRY UNITS A. General: Concrete masonry units shall be cured for minimum of 28 days from the date of casting before being delivered to the site and installed in masonry walls. Consult with Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute as necessary. B. Certification: Provide written certification or other documentation attesting to date of block casting, as specified in paragraph 1.03 above. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHINGS A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations specified herein as shown on the Drawings. Place flashings, filter fabric and other cavity drainage materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as detailed on the Drawings. B. Cavity Filter Fabric and Drainage Course: Drape cavity filter fabric above weep level in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Place cavity filler in filter fabric. C. Place weep holes through bottom course of single wythe veneer, single wythe structural, composite or cavity wall masonry construction as shown on the Drawings, but in no case to exceed 48" o.c. Form weep holes with specified cotton sash cord or other approved material, spaced as specified. Coordinate with Architect in the field as necessary. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Refer to Sections 04 15 13, Masonry Mortar, and 04 15 16 Masonry Grout, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and grout mixes. B. Ensure that concrete masonry units have properly cured prior to installation, as specified in 3.02 above. C. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course one (1) block unit and mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the Drawings. D. Lay first course of concrete unit masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled cores. Lay subsequent courses in face‐shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other work. Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. E. Bullnose or Other Special Shapes: Lay units to form special coursing patterns, or where special shapes are specified or indicated on the Drawings for certain conditions. F. Align cells to be filled with grout to provide continuous, unobstructed vertical space. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight, true and unchipped edges. H. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. I. Where knock‐out bond beams are specified, place wire mesh in joints below bond beam to stop flow of grout, except at reinforced vertical cells. J. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners. Clean excess mortar from cores to be grouted. K. Tolerances: Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1/8". Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 L. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.06. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints. B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: Lay with full mortar coverage over horizontal and vertical face shells. C. Starting Joint: Provide full mortar coverage on bed, except that area where grout occurs shall be kept free from mortar. D. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed. E. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown. F. Non‐Bearing Walls: Provide masonry bond at all corners. Except at bonded corners, walls shall be tied together with strips of wire mesh placed not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 3.06 TOOLING A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where required. 1. Both Faces of Exposed Interior Walls: Tooled concave joints. B. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled. C. Weeps: (Optional) When mortar has reached proper consistency, remove cotton sash cord material to form smooth, dense weep holes. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous ladder‐ or truss‐type horizontal joint reinforcement, unless specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on the Drawings. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices. B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint between first and second course and then at regular intervals not exceeding 16" o.c. vertically. C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face‐shell mortar beds and are fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. D. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints immediately above and below openings or recesses in walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24" beyond end of sills or lintels or to end of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24". E. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively. F. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the Drawings. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING BARS A. Reinforcing bars shall be straight, except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed. Bars partially embedded in masonry shall not be field‐bent, except as shown on the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer. B. Bars shall be free of loose rust, mud, oil or other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond. C. Splices shall be made only at locations shown on the Drawings or where specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer. Bars shall be lapped as specified in the Structural Drawings and be separated by 1 bar diameter or wired together. D. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed into position indicated on the Drawings using reinforcing bar positioners and secured rigidly against displacement within a tolerance of 1/4". E. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from masonry and not less than 1 bar diameter between bars. F. Vertical reinforcing shall be placed in masonry cores as shown or specified on the Drawings, including but not limited to the following locations: Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Load‐bearing masonry walls, reinforcing bars spaced as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Cores of all external and internal corners. 3. Cores in jambs of all door and window openings in load‐bearing walls. 4. Cores below bearing of structural members, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in paragraph 3.01 above. 5. Cores in runs of load‐bearing walls not to exceed 48" o.c., if not otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. G. Horizontal bars shall be placed in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond‐beam or through‐block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. H. When foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical unit core, it shall not be sloped more than 1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Dowel shall be grouted into core in vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent cell to vertical wall reinforcing. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ANCHORS A. Embedded Anchor Slots and Masonry Anchors: Refer to Section 03 15 00. B. Provide masonry anchors at maximum 16" o.c. vertically at each embedded anchor slot location, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 GROUTING OF MASONRY UNITS A. General: Grout cells of hollow concrete unit masonry where indicated on the Structural Drawings or required by project conditions, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. All vertical cells to be reinforced as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. All horizontal cells of bond beam or lintel beam units as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 3. Walls Supporting Fixtures: Non‐bearing walls supporting wall‐hung toilet fixtures or other equipment or accessories shall be fully grouted at cores containing anchorage devices. B. When laying masonry units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent excess mortar from squeezing out and falling into air space or cells to be grouted or sand‐filled. Mortar which projects more than 3/8" into grout space shall be removed. C. Grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place. D. To control area to be grouted, use metal lath or masonry dam. Do not use paper or wood. E. Pour grout into horizontal members at maximum 48" o.c. F. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one (1) continuous operation. G. Vertical cells containing reinforcement and cells of walls scheduled to be filled shall be grouted solidly. Pours shall be stopped 1‐1/2" below top of course, except at top of wall, to form a key at pour joints. Provide clean‐out openings at bottom of each pour for inspection. H. Grouting Masonry of Hollow Units: Walls shall be erected and grouted in lifts not higher than 8'. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment and shall have clear unobstructed cell area of at least 2" x 3". 1. Grout Spaces Less Than 2" in Width: Walls shall be grouted in heights of less than 8" or six (6) times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less. Pour grout up to 1" from top of lower wythe. One (1) wythe of wall shall be laid up higher than the other, but not more than 16". Grout joint shall be at least 1" wide and shall be filled solidly with grout. 2. Grout Spaces 2" or More in Width: Grout space must be cleaned and inspected before grouting. Wall shall be grouted in heights of 2' or less for spaces less than 4" wide and in heights of 4' or less for spaces 4" or wider. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF LINTELS A. General: Install loose lintels where shown on the Drawings or required for a complete installation. Refer to the Structural Drawings for loose lintel schedule. B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry unit lintels where shown and whenever openings of more than 12" but less than 30" are shown without steel or other lintels. Temporarily support formed‐in‐place lintels. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide one (1) #5 reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall thickness. Fill Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 lintel units solidly with grout. C. Bearing: Unless otherwise shown, provide minimum bearing of 6" for openings less than 6'‐0" wide and 8" for wider openings. D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed in joint for caulking as specified in Section 07 92 00. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in concrete unit masonry as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise detailed. B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking and sealants. C. Control Joint Spacing: Refer to the Drawings for joint locations. If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints maximum 20'‐0" o.c. for unbroken lengths of concrete unit masonry, except as specified herein: 1. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure, at wall openings and at control joints located in the floor slab when walls are supported on the slab. 2. Wall Openings: Where doors, windows, louvers or other wall openings in masonry occur, control joints shall be placed on one (1) side of openings less than 6'‐0" wide, on both (2) sides of openings 6'‐0" wide or greater, or at locations and spacings shown on the Drawings, but in no case less than 12'‐0" o.c. Joints at lintels or headers shall be offset 4" (6") (8") or as required by structural bearing requirements, with joint offset using slip plane formed by building paper or other approved material. 3. External Corners: Place control joints at maximum 4'‐0" to 6'‐0" from all bonded external corners. 4. Internal Corners: Form cold isolation joints at all internal corners. 5. Masonry Veneer: Locate vertical control joints in continuous runs of masonry veneer so ratio of horizontal run to vertical height of veneer does not exceed 4:1, or 20'‐0", whichever is greater. 6. Masonry Veneer: Locate control joints within 2'‐0" maximum of all bonded external corners. 7. Masonry Veneer: Provide at least one (1) control joint in each wall plane. 3.13 BUILT‐IN WORK A. As work progresses, build‐in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechanical accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items plumb and true to line. 3.14 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location. B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 3.15 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION AND OTHER FILL MATERIALS A. Composite Wall Insulation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Refer to Section 07 21 00. 3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General: All new and/or existing concrete unit masonry, where exposed to view in the completed work and not scheduled to be painted, shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of the work. B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning concrete unit masonry. Never clean concrete unit masonry before mortar has set, minimum 14 days. 1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of mortar. Maple Hill Park 04 22 00 ‐ 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate and 1/3 cup household detergent to one gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff fiber brush only. 3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low‐pressure water immediately after scrubbing to remove all cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs. Water pressure shall not exceed 500 psi. C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non‐acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non‐metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings, if specified. D. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel. B. All concrete unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction. C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces that are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction of the Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered acceptable. D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel. E. Special Inspection: Special inspection shall be performed for compliance with the Structural Drawings and standards cited herein. Also refer to Section 04 45 33. Special inspection shall include the following: 1. Observe preparation of all masonry prisms and preparation of all grout and mortar specimens. 2. Verify all embedded bolts, plates and dowels are installed, are the correct size, have the proper embedment, and are otherwise as specified. 3. Verify masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials meet the requirements of the contract documents. Verify all materials are properly stored. 4. For masonry constructed by low‐lift grouting techniques, observe the following at least two (2) times each day that masonry construction is in progress (low‐lift grouting is grouting which does not require clean‐outs): a. Observe proportioning, mixing and placing of mortar and grout. Observe cleanliness of grout cavities. Observe placement of masonry units including construction details, procedures and workmanship. Observe grout consolidation and reconsolidation. b. Observe type, size and location of reinforcing, ties and accessories. Observe placement, splice locations and splice lengths. 5. Daily reports of all special inspections shall be prepared and distributed as specified in Section 01 45 00, Quality Control, with 48 hours of the time the inspections were made. Provide other reports as required by the governing building code. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 INTERIOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. General: Install specified concrete unit masonry units as shown on the Drawings and/or in the following interior locations: 1. Interior Load‐Bearing Walls: 8" deep plain concrete unit masonry. 2. Interior Plumbing Walls for Wall‐Hung Toilets or Urinals: 8" deep plain concrete unit masonry. 3. Interior Non‐Load‐Bearing Walls: 4" deep plain concrete unit masonry. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, fabricate and erect all structural steel framing, including columns, girders, beams, purlins, bridging, bracing and other framing members. B. Furnish and fabricate items to be embedded in concrete or masonry such as anchor bolts, angles or plates for attachment of structural steel and other work, except embedded items for attachment of precast concrete, which will be furnished by the precast manufacturer for installation by the General Contractor. C. Furnish, fabricate and install miscellaneous non‐structural steel items, such as pipe bollards, decorative perforated steel plate, trench grates and cover plates, unless furnished by Section 05 50 13 or arranged for otherwise. D. Shop prime and paint structural steel as specified. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 45 23, Testing. 3. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 4. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 5. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 6. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals. 7. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Miscellaneous metal hangers, post caps, etc. 8. Section 07 61 13, Prefinished Mechanically‐Seamed Metal Roofing. 9. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating: Field finishing of exposed structural steel, where specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Embedded steel items for attachment of precast concrete wall panels will be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. B. Structural steel specified in this Section shall be fabricated and erected as a part of the prefabricated steel structures specified in Section 13 34 19 and shall be the responsibility of the prefabricated steel structures manufacturer and erector, unless otherwise approved by the Architect and Structural Engineer and coordinated by the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AISC: Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 2. AISC: Manual of Steel Construction. 3. AISC: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, current edition, as amended below. a. Section 3.1: Revise the second paragraph to read: "The Contract Documents shall clearly show the work that is to be performed and shall give the following information with sufficient dimensions to accurately convey the quantity and nature of the structural steel to be fabricated." b. Section 3.2: Replace the entire section with the following: "Requirements for structural steel including dimensions, arrangement and details shall be shown in the overall contract document package. Fabricator shall be responsible for incorporating all such information from structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings, as well as Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 those of other disciplines." c. Section 3.5: Delete all text after the first sentence. d. Section 3.6: Replace the text of the entire section with the following: "When the fast‐ track project delivery system is selected, release of structural drawings shall constitute release for construction only, if specifically noted on the drawing. Drawings that indicate "not for construction" shall not be used for detailing." e. Section 4.2: 3rd paragraph: Eliminate the following: "When requested to do so by the Owner's Designated Representative for Design". f. Section 4.4: Revise 2nd sentence to read the following: "These drawings shall be returned in accordance with the schedule defined in Division 1 of the project specification. In the absence of this requirement, the Owner's Designated Representative for Design shall return submittals within 14 days of receipt from the Owner's Designated Representative for Design for Construction." g. Section 6.4.4: Page 33: Revise statement "For the purpose of inspection, camber shall be measured in the fabricator's shop in the unstressed condition", to read "camber specified on the drawings is intended to be camber at the time of erection with decking placed prior to placing concrete. Owner's Designated Representative for Construction shall submit methods for controlling deflections on beams with inadequate camber prior to placing concrete on deck." h. Section 6.5.3: Page 38: Revise definition to read "two mils" (0.05 mm). i. Section 7.10.3, Page 47: Refer to the design criteria in the general notes on the drawings for definition of the complete lateral load resisting system for the steel frame. The Contractor shall notify the Erector in accordance with Section 7.10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges of all bracing requirements beyond those required to support the bare steel frame. 4. AISC: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 5. AWS: Code for Welding in Building Construction. 6. AESS: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel. 7. ASTM A29: Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot‐Wrought, General Requirements. 8. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 9. ASTM A108: Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold‐Finished. 10. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 11. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot‐Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 12. ASTM A307: Standard Specification for Low‐Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 13. ASTM A325: Standard Specification for High‐Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 14. ASTM A449: Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat‐Treated, 120/105/90 ksi minimum Tensile Strength. 15. ASTM A500‐B: Standard Specification for Cold‐Formed Welded and Seamless Structural Steel. 16. ASTM A519: Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 17. ASTM A525: Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot‐Dipped Process. 18. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 19. ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High‐Strength, Low‐Alloy Columbium‐Vanadium Structural Steel. 20. ASTM A780: Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot‐Dip Galvanized Coatings. 21. ASTM C1107: Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic‐Cement Grout (Non‐Shrink). 22. ASTM E119: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 23. ASTM F1852: Standard Specification for "Twist Off" Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi minimum Tensile Strength. Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 24. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated as an AISC Certified Plant, Category Std. 1. Alternate Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum of 5 years of submitted, documented experience with a record of successful in‐ service performance on projects with similar materials, design and scope to this Project. If a non‐ AISC certified Fabricator is chosen for the Project, all of Section 1.04 testing shall be by the Special Inspector. C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved. 1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification. D. Erector Qualifications: A qualified Erector who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC‐Certified Erector, Category CSE. 1. Alternate Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years of submitted, documented experience with a record of successful in‐ service performance on projects with similar materials, design and scope to this Project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Test Reports: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and chemical tests of structural steel and high‐strength bolts, if requested by Structural Engineer. B. Specifications: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions showing compliance with the specifications for filler metal for welding, shop paint and grout. C. Calibration Data: Submit procedure for calibration of wrenches and installation of high‐strength bolts for Engineer's approval. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s written product literature for any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including job standards for shop and field connections, anchor bolt and base plate plans, erection drawings for framing, and detail drawings of all structural members. 1. Erection drawings shall show all necessary erection details, location, type and size of all bolts and welds, clearly distinguishing between shop and field bolts and welds. F. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. 1.05 TESTING A. Shop Inspection and Testing: For fabrication shops which participate in the AISC Certification Program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD (Standard for Steel Building Structures), the following required special inspections and tests may be performed by the fabricators designated in‐house inspector in lieu of the independent special inspector. 1. Testing agency shall obtain copies of certifications of all welders and conduct shop inspections and tests during fabrication of structural steel. Reports shall include: welder's certifications, type of test, type and location of all defects and measures taken to correct defects, statement of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop connections and other data and information pertinent to proper completion of shop connections. 2. Visually inspect members for cracks, bends, warps, kinks, and ASTM identification. Visually compare fabricated members and assemblies with approved shop drawings. Report exceptions and deviations. 3. Inspect and test welding and bolting during fabrication in accordance with referenced specifications and as follows: 4. Shop Welding: Visually inspect all welds. Check size, length, pinholes, undercut and overlap. a. Inspect fillet welds as follows: 1) Single‐pass fillet welds: Visually inspect. 2) Multiple‐pass fillet welds: Visually Inspect Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 b. Inspect groove welds as follows: 1) Partial penetration welds: Visually inspect. 2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method. c. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owner's testing agency at Contractors expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected, then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing method. Repeat this 10% additional testing process until the rejection rate drops below in 10%. 5. ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts: Inspect and test in accordance with "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". When "slip‐critical" (SC) bolts are to be installed, verify certification of fabricators tension measuring device used to determine bolt tension. Verify that pre‐installation tests and installation procedures meet ASTM requirements. Inspect 100% of slip critical connections. 6. Reporting: Special Inspector (or Fabricator's designated in‐house inspector) shall provide written reports indentifying tests and inspections performed and attesting to the acceptance of the affected work. Include reports of non‐conforming work along with acceptable corrective work. B. Field Inspection and Testing: 1. Field Assembly: Inspect steel frame to verify compliance with details shown on approved drawings including, but not limited to: bracing, stiffening, member locations and proper application of joint details at connections. 2. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection in accordance with AWS Code and as follows: a. Obtain copies of welders' certifications and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and location of all defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Check for size, length, pinholes, undercut and overlap. Test suspected defects using magnetic particle method for fillet welds and methods below for groove welds. c. Inspect fillet welds as follows: 1) Single‐pass fillet welds: Visually inspect 2) Multiple‐pass fillet welds: Visually inspect d. Inspect groove welds as follows: 1) Partial Penetration welds: Visually inspect. 2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method. e. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owners testing agency at Contractors expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected, then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing methods. Repeat this 10% additional testing process unit the rejection rate drops below one in ten. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast‐in‐place concrete to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast‐in‐ place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer. C. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES A. Wide Flange Rolled Shapes and WT Sections: Comply with ASTM A992, 50 ksi. B. Other Rolled Steel Shapes, Channels and Angles: Comply with ASTM A572‐50, 50 ksi. C. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold‐rolled steel tubing, fully welded constructions. Comply with ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi. D. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B, 46 ksi. E. Solid Steel Bars and Plates: Comply with ASTM A36, 36 ksi. F. Primer/Finish: Refer to paragraph 2.04 below. 2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Regular low‐carbon steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A. B. High‐Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts and nuts and hardened washers complying with ASTM A325, ASTM F1852 or ASTM A490. C. Electrodes for manual shielded and metal arc welding shall be covered mild steel electrodes conforming to the AWS Code and ASTM A233, Series E‐60 and E‐70. D. Bare electrodes and granular flux for submerged arc welding shall conform to the AWS Code and ASTM A588, Series F‐60 and F‐70. 2.03 FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL A. General: Structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance with the referenced codes, AISC Specifications and standards and in compliance with the final approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. B. Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel defined as Exposed Structural Steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating and shop priming. 3. Welds: Provide continuous fillet welds. a. Contour and blend. b. Grind smooth, including sheared edges. c. Remove field‐welding and erection aids. d. Fill weld access holes and grind smooth. 4. Use industry standard blocking and coping tolerances. C. Shop‐fabricate and assemble sections in largest practical components for delivery and erection on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings. 1. Trusses: Shop‐fabricate structural steel trusses in one assembly for delivery to the site. 2. Beam Connectors: Shop‐fabricate structural steel tube columns, connector plates and beam seats. D. Properly mark and match mark all materials for field assembly. Coordinate fabrication and delivery sequence to expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Plates and anchor bolts to be built into concrete work shall be shipped loose. E. Type of connection most suitable to shop or field facilities shall be used, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. F. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. Secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling will not be permitted on the job without the approval of the Structural Engineer. Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 G. Steel to be Exposed in Finished Structure: All steel trusses, truss connector plates, beam seats, beams, columns, purlins and other items to be exposed in the completed work shall be fabricated and cut square, true and uniform, with uneven, rough or abraded edges sanded smooth. 2.04 SURFACES PREPARATION AND PRIMER A. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT‐P‐636, manufacturer's standard red. Field touch‐up paint shall be the same as shop paint. B. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi‐Mastic. C. Primer: Conform to FS TT‐P‐31, red. 2.05 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop priming/painting shall be provided for the following project conditions: 1. Structural Steel to be Exposed in the Final Construction: Shop prime and paint. No further field finish will be specified, other than required touch‐up of shop finish. B. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or other foreign materials. C. Where specified above, apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils. 2.06 NON‐SHRINK GROUT A. Provide factory‐packaged non‐shrink non‐metallic flowable grout where shown on the Drawings, manufactured by Embeco, Five Star or equal. 1. One (1) day compressive strength of 5,000 psi minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the structural steel work. Do not begin work until conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. B. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of structural steel members prior to commencing erection. C. Prior to start of erection of the steel, Erector shall verify the location of embedded anchor bolts and report deviations from the anchor bolt setting plan to the General Contractor in writing. D. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. E. Make provision for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection. F. Pre‐Installation Conference: Refer to Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of structural steel members prior to commencing installation. B. Contractor shall ensure the structural stability of the roof and floor framing components during removal or modification of any existing connectors, and the installation of new connectors. 1. Shore or brace walls and framing members as necessary. Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Field welding as a part of this work shall only be allowed where specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the repair or replacement of any existing construction damaged or destroyed by this work at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. 3.03 SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Weld or bolt shop connections, unless otherwise shown. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are shown or specified. Use bolts conforming to ASTM A325, unless otherwise shown. 1. All welds exposed to view are to be "Architectural Grade". B. No one‐sided connections shall be used, unless specifically shown on the Drawings. C. Detailing and fabrication of high‐strength bolted joints shall conform to "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Connections are designed as bearing connections, unless otherwise noted on the Structural Drawings. D. Finish work in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Work shall be true and free from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects. 3.04 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL A. General: Erect steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice and other specified requirements, including special provision of CSHA and COSH. B. Erection equipment shall be of adequate capacity to perform all work safely. Do not use floor and roof systems of building to support erection equipment. C. Maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary shoring and bracing as required. D. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated within specified AISC erection tolerances. Align and adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. E. Clean bearing and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. 1. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice. Leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70 F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates on steel wedges or on other adjustable devices. Tighten anchor bolts after the supporting members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims. G. High‐strength bolting shall be in accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints. Testing of high‐ strength bolting procedures shall be as specified in Section 01 45 23. H. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors. All gas cutting must have prior approval of the Engineer. I. Attach headed stud shear connectors if specified, to beams by automatic end welding in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. J. Where reinforcing bars are shown welded to structural steel, bars are to be furnished by rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. K. Field Modifications: Written approval of the Structural Engineer must be obtained before using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. Contractor shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field. 3.05 CLEANING AND FIELD PAINTING A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing. B. Paint only when ambient air temperature is above 40 F. Surfaces to be painted shall be free of rust, oil, dirt and mud. Immediately after erection, touch‐up field welds, bolted connections and abrasions of the shop coat. Maple Hill Park 05 12 00 ‐ 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Apply asphaltic paint to portions of columns, including base plate that will be below grade or top of slab‐ on‐grade, and to all connections or other surfaces exposed in crawlspaces or to be in contact with concrete in exterior applications. D. Wash down all structural steel framing upon completion of erection. E. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating, for field finishing of exposed steel surfaces. 3.06 PLACEMENT OF NON‐SHRINK GROUT A. Inspect surfaces prior to placement of grout. Check for cleanliness and proper placement and installation of steel work to be in general conformance with the Drawings. B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Pack grout solid taking care that there are no voids. Refrain from tightening anchor bolts until grout has set and cured. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Refer to Structural Drawings for complete steel inspection table or schedule. B. Shop‐ and field‐welding of exposed structural steel members shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Alignment and spacing of members. 2. Flushness and plumb of adjacent members. 3. Quantity and size of bolts or other fasteners. 4. Quality and appearance of finished welds. 5. Alignment of bolts and other attachments, where exposed to view in finished structure. 6. Consistency of bolt length beyond nuts, where exposed to view in finished structure. Where exposed to view, excess bolt length shall be cut back to consistent length, 1/2" beyond nut unless otherwise approved. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 05 50 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Fabricate and install miscellaneous items of steel or ferrous metals as shown on the Drawings or required by the work, including but not limited to: 1. Pipe bollards. 2. Decorative steel angle trims. 3. Steel plate toilet partition screens and toilet accessories. 4. Miscellaneous steel channels, angles, lintels, and straps, if not furnished by other Sections. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 05 52 13, Pipe and Tube Railings. 4. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. 1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete. B. Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete. C. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry: Loose lintels and metal fabrications laid into concrete block masonry. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A29: Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot‐Wrought, General Requirements. 2. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot‐Dipped, Zinc‐Coated, Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A108: Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold‐Finished. 5. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot‐Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 7. ASTM A307: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A325: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 9. ASTM A449: Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat‐Treated, 120/105/90 ksi minimum Tensile Strength. 10. ASTM A519: Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 11. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 12. ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High‐Strength, Low‐Alloy Columbium‐Vanadium Structural Steel. 13. ASTM B209: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy Sheet and Plate. 14. ASTM B221: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 15. ASTM B633: Standard Specification for Electrode‐posited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 16. AAMA: Applicable standards. Maple Hill Park 05 50 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 17. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code. 18. FS TT‐P‐86: Paint, Red‐Lead Base, Ready Mixed. 19. FS TT‐P‐645: Primer, Paint, Zinc‐Chromate, Alkyd Type. 20. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved. 1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification. D. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of expanded metal mesh screen/steel angle frame panels, indicating dimensions, components, spacing of predrilled holes for anchorage, finishes and shop welds or other attachments. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections, indicating dimensions, components, spacing of predrilled holes for anchorage, finishes and shop welds or other attachments. D. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts, loose lintels and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast‐in‐place concrete or masonry construction to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast‐in‐place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer. C. Storage of Steel Materials: Steel members stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A36 and/or ASTM A572‐50, as applicable, 50 ksi. Refer to the Drawings for thicknesses and/or gages. 1. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High‐strength type recommended for structural steel joints, ASTM A307. 2. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded. 3. Primer: Zinc‐chromate alkyd FS TT‐P‐645. Maple Hill Park 05 50 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. B. Structural Steel Plate: Conform to ASTM A108. 1. Thickness(es): 1/4" or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded. 3. Primer: Zinc‐chromate alkyd FS TT‐P‐645. 4. Finish: Factory primed for field finishing. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. C. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold‐rolled steel tubing, fully welded construction. Conform to ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Structural Steel Pipe: Conform to ASTM A53, Grade B. E. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 60% minimum. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Refer to Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel, for general steel fabrication requirements. B. Exposed Structural Steel: Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel defined as Exposed Structural Steel. 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating and shop priming. 3. Welds: Provide continuous fillet welds. a. Contour and blend. b. Grind smooth, including sheared edges. c. Remove field‐welding and erection aids. d. Fill weld access holes and grind smooth. 4. Use industry standard blocking and coping tolerances. C. Shop‐fabricate and assemble items in largest practical components for delivery and installation on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings. D. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. E. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces. 1. All welds exposed to view to be "Architectural Grade". F. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified. G. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to prime painting. H. Prime paint items for field finishing as specified in Section 09 91 00. Do not shop‐prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. Shop‐prime in one (1) coat. I. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all metal surfaces below grade or in contact with concrete, where materials are not powder‐coated, factory primed or zinc coated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until such conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section and coordinate fit and installation details with related trades prior to fabrication. Maple Hill Park 05 50 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates. D. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis. E. Pipe Bollards: Ensure that bollards have been properly located in relation to openings in concrete, masonry or other materials or equipment to be protected by the bollards. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by specific site requirements, locate bollards as follows: 1. Jambs: Centerline of bollard aligned with centerline of jamb opening, and placed 12" out from face of wall. 2. Corners: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from corner in both directions. 3. Equipment: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from edge or corner of gas meters, electrical transformers, pad‐mounted condensing units and other equipment. Coordinate clearance requirements with utility providers, as applicable. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. General: Install prefabricated steel, ferrous and non‐ferrous metal items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion. B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. C. Replace items damaged in course of installation. Field repairs for non‐prefinished items are acceptable, as approved by the Architect and Owner. 1. Damaged prefinished aluminum or stainless steel items, or items with scratched or abraded finishes, will be rejected and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Pipe Bollards: Embed bollards minimum 24" deep into concrete piers with a minimum dimension of 12" diameter x 36" depth below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1. Fill bollards with concrete and form top surface smooth, dense, and flush or crowned to a maximum of 1/4" to allow proper drainage. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all metal surfaces in preparation for field finishing. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND FERROUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. Pipe Bollards: 4" or 6" o.d. (as indicated on the Drawings) steel pipe x 4'‐0" (where mounted to steel plate) or 6'‐0" long (where embedded 24" into concrete piers), concrete filled, as detailed on the Drawings. B. Folding Panel Partition Supports: Continuous steel beam or channel header support for folding panel partitions, as detailed on the Drawings. C. Miscellaneous Steel Channels, Angles, Lintels and Straps: Furnish under this Section, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Steel Plate Toilet Partition Screens and Toilet Accessories: 1. Fabricate and install steel plate toilet partition screens without doors as detailed on the Drawings or attached hereto. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 05 52 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish miscellaneous ferrous metal pipe and tube railings, with associated fittings. B. Furnish miscellaneous ferrous metal pipe and tube railings, with associated fittings, for installation at cast‐ in‐place concrete stairs and ramps. C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 69, Enterprise Green Communities Guidelines. 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete: Fabrications cast into concrete. 4. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals. 5. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. 6. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot‐Dipped, Zinc‐Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108: Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold‐Finished. 4. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot‐Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A307: Standard Specification for Low‐Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 7. ASTM A449: Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat‐Treated, 120/105/90 ksi minimum Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A500‐B: Standard Specification for Cold‐Formed Welded and Seamless Structural Steel. 9. ASTM A519: Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 10. ASTM A525: Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot‐Dipped Process. 11. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 12. ASTM E985: Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 13. FS TT‐P‐31: Standard Specification for Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, red and brown. 14. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code. 15. Railing system shall be designed to conform to building code and ADA requirements for openings and stress. 16. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all railing configurations, stamped and signed by a licensed Colorado professional engineer, indicating component materials, shapes, fabrication, finish, layout and configuration, anchorage and mounting details and relationships to adjacent and adjoining work. Maple Hill Park 05 52 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of specified wire mesh, minimum 12" x 12" each, for approval prior to fabrication. C. Certified Test Reports: Submit test reports from a licensed Colorado professional engineer or a qualified independent testing agency indicating compliance with ASTM E985 and certifying that the design of the railing systems meets the design criteria specified in paragraph 1.04 below. D. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations prepared by a Colorado professional engineer, or other engineering support documentation as may be required by the local Building Official. E. Building Permit: Prepare and submit drawings, calculations, certified test reports and other information as may be required to secure building permit by local Building Official, if requested. F. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Handrail and guardrail components shall be engineered, fabricated and installed to meet all current building code requirements, whether specifically detailed on the Drawings or not, including but not limited to: 1. Railing extensions at the top and bottom of stair runs and ramps. 2. Railing returns to walls. 3. Uninterrupted grip on railings. 4. Spacing between handrail and guardrail components. 5. Height of handrails and guardrails. B. Installed railing systems shall be designed and engineered to resist minimum lateral force of 50 lbs. per lineal foot, or 200 lbs. at any point at top member, whichever is greater, without permanent set or damage to members or anchors. C. Removable Sections: Fabricate removable sections of metal railing system as shown on the Drawings, or as required to meet the design intent as described on the Drawings. Specific details shall be approved in the shop drawings. D. Design Calculations: Prepare and submit design calculations as specified in paragraph 1.03 above. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated sections to the site in fabricator's original protective packaging. B. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors. C. Protect materials and primed finishes from damage during handling and installation. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide fabricator's written 2‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE AND TUBE RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railing Materials: 1. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B. 2. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold‐rolled steel tubing, comply with ASTM A500, Grade B. 3. Structural Steel, Plates and Bars: Comply with ASTM A572 and A36, matching specifications of Section 05 12 00. B. Posts and Rails: Steel pipe and tube members, fully welded construction, configurations as shown on the Drawings. Maple Hill Park 05 52 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Handrail Brackets and Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard handrail saddle bracket, or other as detailed on the Drawings or recommended by fabricator. D. Embedded Pipe Sleeves: Same materials as handrails and/or guardrails being anchored, one (1) diameter size larger or as recommended by fabricator, hot‐dipped galvanized. E. Finish(es): 1. Shop‐prime fabricated items not scheduled for galvanizing, painted in one (1) coat. 2. Hot‐dipped galvanize all exterior materials and assemblies to be in contact with concrete. 3. Stainless Steel: #4 brushed or satin finish. F. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 60% minimum. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. G. Approved Fabricators: 1. Front Range Steel, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 482‐9083. 2. Steel Fabricators, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484‐2752. 3. Tiger Steel, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 482‐2324. 4. Cutting Edge Steel, Denver, CO, (303) 659‐3180. 5. Colorado Iron and Metal Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 530‐0300. 6. Steel fabricators providing products of the same function, design, performance and quality are acceptable. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate metal railing systems in accordance with the approved shop drawings and as detailed on the Drawings. B. Fabricate metal railing systems to meet the design criteria specified in paragraph 1.04 above. C. Fit and shop‐assemble in largest practical sections for delivery and installation as approved in shop drawings. D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of handrails and guardrails. E. Fabricate removable sections of metal railing system as detailed on the Drawings, using pipe sleeves for embedded attachments in concrete. F. Shop welding to be "Architectural Grade". Grind all welds smooth and prime. Clean all extraneous materials from welding. Whenever possible, fabricate with seams on underside of assembled section. G. Use approved automotive body putty wherever to fill out joints to create smooth, monolithic appearance. Follow manufacturer's directions for application and sanding techniques. Repeat process until smooth, monolithic appearance is achieved. H. Shop‐prime or hot‐dipped galvanize in one (1) coat, as scheduled. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop priming/painting shall be provided for the following project conditions: 1. Structural Steel to be Exposed in the Final Construction: Shop prime for field finishing. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. B. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or other foreign materials. C. Where specified above, apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils. D. Do not paint surfaces of steel in contact areas to be welded or contact surfaces of friction‐type high‐ strength bolted connections. Protect machine‐finished surfaces against corrosion. Do not paint surfaces of steel embedded in concrete. E. Do not paint/prime interior steel surfaces to receive application of spray‐applied fireproofing. Maple Hill Park 05 52 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 COORDINATION WITH RELATED WORK A. Fabricator to coordinate work of this Section with work of Section 32 31 19, Decorative Metal Fences and Gates, to extent possible for uniformity of fabrication and appearance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Fabricator shall field verify all dimensions and site conditions prior to the fabrication of the metal railing and guardrail systems, and notify the Contractor of any condition that would adversely affect the installation, structural capacity, building code compliance, performance or appearance of the finished installation. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Fabricator. B. Fabricator to coordinate work of this Section with Section 05 51 00, Metal Stairs, as required for accurate and complete installation of steel stairs, if not furnished by same fabricator. C. Fabricator to coordinate work of this Section with Section 32 31 19, Decorative Metal Fences and Gates, as required for accurate and complete installation of handrails and guardrails, if not furnished by same fabricator. D. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates. E. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS A. General: Install metal railing and guardrail systems in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Erect work plumb, rigid, square, level, accurate to sizes and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. C. Field grind shop welds as necessary to achieve specified visual quality, to the satisfaction of the Architect. Touch‐up shop prime coat. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing. B. Protect installed railing and guardrail systems and finish from damage during other construction. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Installation of pipe and tube railing systems shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the shop drawings. B. Steel components, surfaces and connections shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Smoothness and flushness of tube and pipe surfaces. 2. Smoothness and appearance of shop and field welds. 3. Smoothness of bends and curved sections. 4. Uniformity and appearance of attachments. 5. Conformance with applicable building code provisions, i.e., maximum opening between handrails and guardrail rails or pickets, handrail grip, handrail and guardrail height, handrail extensions and returns to walls. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited to: 1. Miscellaneous furring, stripping, blocking and sleepers. 2. Redwood or pressure‐treated wood plates. 3. Miscellaneous wall‐mounted plywood backer boards for electrical and related equipment. B. Furnish and install pressure‐treated and/or fire‐treated wood materials. C. Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or accessory materials required for a complete installation. D. Installation of prefabricated wood beams, floor joists, roof trusses and miscellaneous blocking and bridging. E. Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 06 17 00, Shop Fabricated Structural Wood. 5. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. 6. Section 07 62 13, Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 7. Section 09 93 00, Staining and Transparent Finishing. 8. Division 22, Plumbing. 9. Division 23, HVAC. 10. Division 26, Electrical. 11. Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process. 3. ASTM D7033: Standard Practice for Establishing Design Capacities for Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Wood‐Based Structural‐Use Panels. 4. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood. 5. PS 2‐92: Performance Standard for Wood‐Based Structural Use Panels. 6. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard. 7. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 8. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide. 9. AWPA: Applicable provisions of American Wood‐Preservers' Association, including: a. AWPA C1: All timber products – preservative treatment by pressure processes. b. AWPA C2: Lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties – preservative treatment by pressure processes. c. AWPA C4: Poles – preservative treatment by pressure processes. d. AWPA C9: Plywood ‐ preservative treatment by pressure processes. e. AWPA C14: Wood for highway construction ‐ preservative treatment by pressure processes. f. AWPA C15: Wood for commercial‐residential construction – preservative treatment by pressure processes. Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 g. AWPA C16: Wood used on farms ‐ preservative treatment by pressure processes. h. AWPA C17: Playground equipment treated with inorganic preservatives ‐ preservative treatment by pressure processes. i. AWPA C22: Lumber and plywood for permanent wood foundations ‐ preservative treatment by pressure processes. 10. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 11. California Redwood Association. 12. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency certified by National Forest Products Association (NFPA). C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood Association. D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood Products Association. E. Pressure‐Treated Lumber: Pressure‐treated lumber materials shall not contain chromated copper arsenate (CCA). F. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Preservative Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified standards, process employed and preservative retention values. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for prefabricated wood‐polymer composite decking. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 Sustainability Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. 2. Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that they do not contain any added urea‐formaldehyde in resins. 3. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 4. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 5. Invoices and chain of custody certificates for products containing FSC certified wood. Include statement of cost for each certified wood product, excluding labor and costs for installation. Invoices must show the chain of custody number. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at jobsite. B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work. C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. D. Pressure‐Treated Wood Materials: Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant. E. Deliver nails, bolts, anchorages, adhesives, hardware and other packaged materials in manufacturer's original unbroken boxes, cartons or containers, with labels intact. Store in secure, protected locations, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.05 COMPLIANCE A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or to be stored at the jobsite. Cull lumber pieces as specified in paragraph 3.01 below. B. Promptly remove non‐complying materials from the jobsite and replace with materials meeting the requirements of this Section. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for pressure‐treated wood products covering defects in materials and workmanship. B. Provide manufacturer's written 1‐year warranty for epoxy‐type wood repair materials covering defects in materials and workmanship. 1. Installation Warranty: Installing contractor shall provide a 2‐year written warranty covering installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S‐Dry) S4S, of the following species and grades: 1. Structural Framing: Hem‐Fir #2 or better, minimum 1,300 psi fiber stress in bending, unless other grades and stresses are indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Blocking and Miscellaneous Furring and Stripping: Douglas Fir or Hem‐Fir, construction grade or better. B. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for Multi‐Purpose Construction Adhesives, 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives or 250 g/L for architectural sealants. 2. Composite wood and agrifiber products containing no added urea formaldehyde in binding agents. 3. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 4. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. 5. At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products. 2.02 PRESSURE‐TREATED ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Semi‐Concealed Structural Members: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S‐Dry) S4S, with preservative treatment specified below, of the following species and grades: 1. Structural Framing: Hem‐Fir #2 or better, 1,300 psi fiber stress in bending. B. Sustainability Design Criteria: None. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. ACQ Preserve by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC, and distributed locally by ECO Products, Boulder, CO, (303) 449‐1876, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality, and meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.09 below, are acceptable. 2.03 PLYWOOD MATERIALS A. General: APA‐rated softwood plywood, meeting the grading requirements of PS‐1. 1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'‐0" wide x 8'‐0", 9'‐0" or 10'‐0" lengths x thicknesses as shown Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 on the Drawings. B. Interior Exposed Plywood: A/D or A/C, Interior APA, for painted opaque finish. C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for Multi‐Purpose Construction Adhesives, 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives or 250 g/L for architectural sealants. 2. Composite wood and agrifiber products containing no added urea formaldehyde in resins. 3. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 4. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. 5. At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA. 2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652‐4000. 3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and performance are acceptable. 2.04 FASTENERS, ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high‐humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact with concrete. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES A. Construction Adhesives: Low‐viscosity, mastic‐type, multipurpose adhesive, formulated for field‐gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications: 1. Reference Standards: Comply with the following minimum standards: a. APA Spec. AFG‐01. b. ASTM D3498 and C557. c. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin #60. 2. Type: Synthetic elastomeric polymer, VOC compliant. a. Calculated VOC: 47 g/L maximum. 3. Base: Synthetic elastomer. 4. Consistency: Approx. 130,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer. 5. Weight/Gallon: 10.4 lbs. minimum. 6. Solids content: 78%. 7. Strength: ASTM D3498. 8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158 F by ASTM D572‐61. 9. Water Resistance: Waterproof. 10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel. 11. Application Temperature: 0‐100 F. 12. Service Range: ‐20 to 120 F. 13. Material Suitability: Select appropriate adhesive product(s) for materials/products to be field bonded, including but not limited to: a. Medium‐ and heavy‐duty construction adhesives. b. Drywall adhesive. c. Subfloor adhesive. d. Polyurethane adhesive. e. Repair construction adhesive. f. Resilient base adhesive. g. FRP adhesive. h. Multipurpose flooring adhesive. Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 i. Ceramic tile adhesive. j. Ceiling tile adhesive. B. Wood Adhesives: General purpose, medium‐duty wood adhesive for new construction, repairs and rehabilitation. 1. Use water resistive or waterproof type as needed for specific project conditions. 2. Approved Products: Titebond II (water resistive) or Titebond III (waterproof), or equal. C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for Multi‐Purpose Construction Adhesives or 140 g/L for Structural Wood Adhesives. D. Approved Product and Manufacturer: 1. Titebond VOC‐Compliant Adhesives, manufactured by Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (800) 347‐4583, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, design, quality, performance and VOC compliance are acceptable. 2.06 PREFABRICATED COMPOSITE DECKING A. General: Wood‐polymer composite decking, manufactured from reclaimed plastic and waste wood products. 1. Size: Nominal 3/4" x 4" planks. 2. Size: Nominal 5/4" x 5/4" planks. B. Attachments: Hot‐dipped galvanized or stainless steel deck screws. C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard medium brown, weathering to a driftwood gray. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. ChoiceDek, manufactured by Weyerhauser. 2. Trex Wood‐Polymer Composite, manufactured by Mobil Chemical Co., Norwalk, CT, (800) 289‐ 8739. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of the same design, function, performance and appearance are acceptable. 2.07 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the Drawings or specified herein to be pressure‐treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2, C9, C14, C15, C16, C17 or ICBO ER4981, as applicable. Pressure‐treat items with waterborne preservatives complying with WPA LP‐ 2, except that in no case shall chromated copper arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 18% for plywood. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements. 1. Application Rates: Apply specified preservative treatment as follows, or as recommended by approved manufacturers: a. Preservative treatment for above ground use: 0.25 lb./cu.ft. minimum. b. Preservative treatment where in contact with ground: 0.40 lb./cu.ft. minimum. 2. Treated wood products shall be used in the following locations, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings: a. In contact with roofing, flashing or waterproofing. b. In contact with masonry or concrete. c. In contact, or within 6" of grade. d. Within 12" of grade in crawlspace areas. e. Exposed to weather. f. Other locations indicated. Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. General: For new construction, the Contractor shall inspect the concrete or masonry walls and foundation structures and/or concrete flatwork that will support the rough carpentry structures associated with the work of this Project, and notify the Architect/Engineer of any condition that may affect the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY A. General: 1. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels; do not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4" in 10'‐0". 2. Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein. 3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 4. Construct and erect required built‐up beams, headers and curbs. 5. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations. 6. Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the same direction for vertical or horizontal application. 7. Make bearings full and uniform for solid support. 8. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members. 9. Where scheduled, leave wood surfaces prepared for finishing specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating, and Section 09 93 00, Staining and Transparent Finishing. 10. Coordinate rough openings for non‐cased and trimmed doors and windows where gypsum board returns are detailed at bulkheads, jambs and headers. Framed opening shall be square and plumb to within 1/16" vertically from floor to header at trimmer and 1/16" horizontally between trimmers at header. B. Fastening: 1. Bolting: a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. b. Drill straight and true from one side only. c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts. 2. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain the following tolerances for all rough carpentry work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0‐10': 1/4" maximum 2. Variation in Plan: a. 0‐10': 1/4" maximum b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum 3. Variation in Openings: a. Size: +/‐1/8" b. Location: +/‐1/4" Maple Hill Park 06 10 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to ensure the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and systems of the project. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 06 15 33 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 06 15 33 - WOOD PATIO DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall supply the labor, tools, equipment and materials for proper construction of the boardwalk. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS A. Division 32: Concrete for Exterior Improvements. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Contract, and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s data for decking material. B. A physical sample of the Manufacturer’s color samples for decking material (not printed material). C. Shop drawings indicating joist hanger types and confirming locations. D. Manufacturer’s product information for fasteners. 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Recycled Plastic Lumber / Wood-Polymer lumber weighs more than natural wood and it's more flexible. Special care should be taken when handling. Do not attempt to lift similar volumes of MoistureShield lumber as you do wood. B. When storing Wood-Polymer lumber and other lumber at the job site, be sure to place on a flat surface. C. When stacking units, supports should start at each end and be spaced 24" on center. Supports should line up vertically, PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. LUMBER 1. Decking: 2" x 6" (8’ minimum length) nominal size. Decking to be recycled plastic lumber by MoistureShield Vantage Composite Decking (866.729.2378), , or approved equivalent. 2. Surface Texture: Woodgrain. 3. Color to be determined from Manufacturer’s full range. B. FASTENERS C. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized self tapping screws, carriage bolts, nuts and washers. D. References to bolts or machine bolts (MBs) are for structural quality through bolts equal to or better than American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM Standard A 307, Grade A. RFB and SSTB bolts are also ASTM A307, Grade A. Maple Hill Park 06 15 33 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete Footings, Pedestals and Abutments: 3500 psi concrete in accordance with Division 32 – Concrete for Exterior Improvements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT A. Stake bench locations as shown on the Drawings. B. Lumber spans shall not exceed those shown in the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Secure decking to framing with screws. E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 LAYOUT A. Final grading shall be complete before beginning concrete pedestal installation. B. Mid-Joist: Space mid-joist so decking span is maximum of 12" and attach to beams as detailed. C. Decking: Install level at the specified elevation, in a manner so ends are flush with adjacent concrete. Fasten as detailed. 1. Cutting Decking: For best results, use carbide tipped blades and router bits. Blades with fewer teeth (18-24 for 71/4" circular sawblade) work best. 2. Drilling Decking: When drilling large or deep holes, periodically lift the drill out of the hole to draw the shavings out. 3. Nailing and Fastening Decking: Fasten deck planks at each joist location with two stainless steel screws. Pre-drilling may be necessary. Do not drill holes larger than ¾ of the screw/bolt diameter. Most screws will cause wood polymer lumber to "mushroom" up over the screw head. Simply tap down with a hammer to hide the fastener or pre-drill to reduce the "mushroom" effect. a. A 1/4” gap is required for width-to-width joints. For cold weather installations, 3/8" is recommended. D. Post Base: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations, and in conformance with the Drawings. E. Workmanship: The bench construction shall be plumb, both in line and transverse to the bench, straight and rigid with boards held firmly in place. Details of construction, not specified, shall be performed in keeping with good standard decking practice. Maple Hill Park 06 15 33 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 REPLACEMENT A. Finished surfaces bearing hammer marks, splits, mars, and/or defects of any nature shall be replaced prior to acceptance. B. Members showing effects of excessive shrinkage and checking during the guarantee period shall be removed and replaced. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning Decking: 1. For stains caused by mold, mildew, berries and leaves, conventional deck washes containing detergent and sodium hypochlorite work well. 2. For rust stains, ground-in dirt and grime, use cleaners containing phosphoric acid which are commonly available in home centers and hardware stores. 3. For tougher stains, such as oil or grease, scrub with a detergent containing a degreasing agent as soon as the stain occurs. 4. A light sanding with a medium grit sandpaper works well in removing grease stains that have been allowed to set. This area will weather again as it did after installation. 5. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for more information. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 06 17 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 06 17 00 SHOP FABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish tongue‐and‐groove, laminated structural wood roof decking, for exposed installation. B. Furnish steel hardware and connector plates, saddles, beam seats, post caps, etc., unless furnished by Division 5, Metals. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 04 35 66, Green Building Guidelines. 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Hangers and clips, preservative treatment, and installation of prefabricated wood items. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards and Source Quality Control: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process. 2. ASTM D2559: Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions. 3. Fabricate in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 56‐73 and bear AITC or CITC quality mark. 4. Parallel Strand Lumber Beams: Design and fabricate in accordance with National Evaluation Service Inc., NER‐481, or Canadian Construction Materials Centre, CCMC‐11161‐R. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator shall be licensed by American or Canadian Institute of Timber Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and specifications showing compliance with requirements of this Section. 1. Include drawings, specifications and product data for all components and parts of structural system, spacing and layout of members, gusset plates and connectors. Clearly mark all components and parts. Show critical dimensions for determining fit and placement in building, as well as the loads that members are designed to support. 2. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria. 3. Include erection drawings for identification and assembly of parts. 4. Indicate loads for all joist hangers and other connectors. 5. Drawings: Stamp and signature of licensed Colorado Professional Engineer responsible for preparation of roof truss shop drawings. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Truss Design Calculations: Submit calculations stamped and signed by a licensed Colorado Professional Engineer. 2. Testing Data: a. Fire assemblies as indicated on the Drawings. b. Sound control assemblies as indicated on the Drawings. Maple Hill Park 06 17 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Building Permit: Prepare and submit drawings, calculations, specifications and other information as may be required to secure building permit by local Building Official. D. Refer to paragraph 2.01.C. for submittals required prior to bidding for approval of equals. 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Prefabricated structural wood members and components shall be designed under the supervision of a licensed Colorado Professional Engineer. Designs shall be in accordance with allowable values assigned by the local Building Official. Only connections and webs currently approved by Research Committee of ICBO are acceptable for use. B. Design and fabricate in compliance with latest edition of the applicable building code. Refer to Section 01 41 00. C. Structural Requirements: Design and construct structural system to comply with the criteria indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Deflection Criteria: Floor systems shall be designed for maximum deflection of L/480 for live load, L/360 for total loads, unless more stringent criteria are indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prefabricated wood beams shall be wrapped separately with heavy water‐repellent cover. Protect against damage in transit and on site. B. Prefabricated wood decking shall be bundled and wrapped with heavy water‐repellent cover. Protect against damage in transit and on site. C. Store and handle to ensure maintenance of appearance and to prevent damage. D. Store joists in vertical position, on racks to prevent contact with the ground and cover until ready for installation. E. Store roof trusses on site to prevent warping or splitting of members or loosening of gusset plate connectors. Store on racks to prevent contact with the ground and cover until ready for installation. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for all prefabricated wood products covering manufacturing errors, and defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED WOOD DECKING A. General: Prefabricated, prefinished tongue‐and‐groove, glue laminated structural wood decking, kiln dried Douglas Fir or Larch, minimum 2,640 psi fiber stress. 1. Board Size(s): Nominal 3" deep x 6" wide, with integral tongue‐and‐groove. Board lengths shall be one (1) continuous length unless approved otherwise. 2. Moisture Content: 10‐12% average; 15% maximum. B. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard exterior, waterproof type with mold inhibitor. C. Appearance/Grade: Supreme grade. D. Deck Pattern: Square edge joint. E. Surface Texture: Rough sawn. F. Finish: Prefinished by manufacturer. Stain color shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s full line of finishes. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Lock‐Deck Laminated Decking by Shelton Lam and Deck, Chehalis, WA, and distributed locally by Timberweld, Aurora, CO, (303) 361‐9191. 2. Filler King Co., Homedale, ID, (208) 337‐3134. 3. Timber Systems, Mason, MI, (800) 686‐6995. Maple Hill Park 06 17 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance, quality and appearance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glue: Exterior type with mold inhibitor. B. Miscellaneous Hardware: Refer to Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals. C. Steel Connector Plates and Beam Seats: Refer to Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel. 2.12 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Preservative Treatment: Refer to specifications in Section 06 10 00 for pressure‐treatments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until shop drawings and design calculations (when required) have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer. B. Installer shall examine the foundations, rough framing and other substrates under which the prefabricated structural wood components are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD A. Installation: Refer to Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 06 20 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all hardwood finish carpentry, running and standing trim, casings and base. B. Fabrication and field workmanship standards for miscellaneous exterior and interior wood materials specified in other Sections. C. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise: 1. Hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Finish hardware specified in Division 8. 3. Building specialties specified in Division 10. 4. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals: Mounting Brackets. 4. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 6. Section 08 71 00, Commercial Finish Hardware. 7. Section 08 74 00, Access Control Finish Hardware. 8. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. 9. Section 09 93 00, Staining and Transparent Finishing. 10. Section 10 44 00, Fire Protection Specialties. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations and quality standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). B. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and quality requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. PS 51: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 2. PS 58: Basic Hardwood. 3. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 5. California Redwood Association. 6. Janka Hardness Test: Standard Test for Rating the Relative Hardness of Wood (scale of 0 to 4,000). 7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. C. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature illustrating all items of specified shelving systems and hardware. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all prefabricated millwork components. Maple Hill Park 06 20 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Samples: Submit one (1) representative sample of each type or style of wood or MDF casing, base, trim, railing or stair baluster specified or required for a complete installation. D. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 Sustainability Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. 2. Manufacturer's product data for paints and stains, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 3. Product data for composite wood or agrifiber products indicating that they do not contain any added urea‐formaldehyde in resins. 4. Adhesive manufacturer's product data for each adhesive used indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde. 5. Product Data indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. 6. Certificates of chain‐of‐custody signed by manufacturers certifying that products specifed to be made from certified wood were made from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC‐ accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria". Include evidence that mill is certified for chain‐of‐custody by an FSC‐accredited certification body. Invoices must show chain of custody number. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver materials and fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are prepared to receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. B. Deliver hardware and other finish carpentry items to the project site in manufacturer's unbroken cartons, with labels intact. C. Store indoors in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 F, maximum relative humidity of 25‐55%. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 2‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship for all hardware and shelving components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Hardwood: Graded in accordance with AWI requirements, maximum moisture content of 6%. 1. Poplar, Custom Grade, S4S, Plain Sawn: a. Running and standing wood trim, casings, mouldings, field‐fabricated cabinetry face frames, railings, transom/mullion trims and chair rails for opaque finish. B. Nails: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application; non‐rust finish in concealed location and finish to match material in exposed locations. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Product Data: Wood glues with VOC content not exceeding 30 g/L; adhesives and sealants with VOC content not exceeding 70 g/L for multi‐purpose construction adhesives, 140 g/L for structural wood adhesives or 250 g/L for architectural sealants. 2. Product Data: For adhesives and composite wood products, indicating that product contains no added urea formaldehyde. 3. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 4. At least 50% by cost FSC certified wood products. Maple Hill Park 06 20 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.02 FABRICATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. General: Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with site‐determined measurements. 1. Grade: Custom Grade or better. B. Fabricate railing systems to meet the design criteria specified in paragraph 1.04 above. C. Shop‐fabricate finish carpentry items to greatest extent practicable. Shop‐assemble finish carpentry items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. 1. Fabricate 1‐1/2" thick units by shop laminating two (2) pieces of 3/4" material, staggering joints. D. Field‐fabricated running and standing trim and other finish carpentry items shall be fabricated in accordance with the workmanship standards specified in paragraph 3.02 below. E. Attachments: Fabricate all finish carpentry items for countersunk attachment to substrates. Provide wood plugs, same species as surrounding wood. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer shall field measure rough framing and/or finished conditions as required for the successful installation of all finish carpentry items. B. Installer shall examine the rough framing, wall blocking and other substrates and finishes under which the finish carpentry work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the fabrication or installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions. C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all finish carpentry materials and culling any material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit defects such as knots, checks, splits, warping, bowing or excessive variation in color or grain. All materials installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP FOR SITE‐FABRICATED FINISH CARPENTRY A. General: Site fabricate running and standing trim, casings, base and other finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI for custom grade finish carpentry, and in accordance with site‐ determined measurements. B. Scribe, miter and join running and standing trim accurately and neatly to conform to details. C. Layout running and standing trim and other site‐fabricated finish carpentry work to balance lengths of material at each end of runs. Use longest possible lengths of material; joints will not be allowed where single‐length pieces can be used, in accordance with the following: 1. Running and standing trim, where grain is parallel to the length of the piece: 8'‐0" long minimum. 2. Running and standing trim, where grain is perpendicular to the length of the piece: 4'‐0" long minimum. 3. No lengths less than 24" long will be allowed. D. All vertical end joints of finished carpentry along the run of running or standing trim shall have scarf‐type joints. E. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. General: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place rigid, plumb and square in a manner consistent with AWI requirements and recommendations for custom grade finish carpentry. Maple Hill Park 06 20 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Materials shall be installed in accordance with site‐determined measurements. When necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. Ensure tolerances of not more than 1/8" in 10'. C. Tolerances: Conform to applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry. D. Countersink semi‐concealed anchorage devices used for wall‐mount components and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush and ensure that direction of grain matches surrounding wood where scheduled for transparent finish. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS A. Install doors and frames, windows, finish door hardware, cabinet and drawer hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties and equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY FOR FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. 1. Items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. 2. Items to receive opaque finishes, caulk all joints in running and standing trim. C. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, outlet boxes and other fixtures and equipment. Verify locations of cutouts from site dimensions. D. Fiberboard: MDF carpentry items shall be factory primed. E. Refer to Sections 09 91 00, Painting and Coating, and 09 93 00, Staining and Transparent Finishing, for field finishing. 3.06 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Install finish carpentry items at mounting heights shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All items in handicapped accessible areas shall comply with American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 2012. B. Consult with Architect for mounting heights of items not specifically listed. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 14 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID‐APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare and prime surfaces to receive waterproofing. B. Furnish and install fluid‐applied membrane waterproofing system at earth sheltered, cast‐in‐place concrete roof, walls and retaining walls. C. Furnish and install prefabricated waterstops or other accessory materials. D. Seal joints and protrusions through waterproofing. E. Furnish and install protection material over applied waterproofing, where walls are backfilled. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 5. Section 07 21 13, Foundation Insulation: Rigid board insulation and prefabricated drainage board materials. 6. Section 07 65 26, Self‐Adhering Sheet Flashing: Sheet‐type through‐wall flashing membranes. 7. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 8. Division 22, Plumbing: Piping penetrations and flashings. 9. Division 26, Electrical: Conduit penetrations and flashings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C1305: Standard Test Method for Crack Bridging Ability of Liquid‐Applied Waterproofing Membrane. 2. ASTM D41: Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 3. ASTM D312: Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 4. ASTM D4541: Standard Test Method for Pull‐Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. 5. ASTM E72: Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 6. ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Pressure Difference. 7. ASTM E2178: Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. 8. ICC‐ES AC212, Acceptance Criteria for Liquid‐Applied Vapor Barriers. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer/Applicator Qualifications: Installer/Applicator shall be ABAA‐approved or manufacturer‐trained, with minimum five (5) years successful experience installing the specified products on projects of similar scale and complexity. C. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for each type of waterproofing specified, including instructions for proper application, including technical specifications and details showing Maple Hill Park 07 14 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 fabrication, installation, anchorage and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. 1. Renovation and Preservation Projects: Also submit manufacturer's written product literature for products for cleaning and/or removal of existing waterproofing materials. B. Certifications: Submit evidence of Installer/Applicator qualifications, specifically that they are ABAA‐ approved or manufacturer‐trained. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 LEED Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the materials to the jobsite in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at the time of use. B. Maintain the products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, installation and concealment. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions: Comply with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the application and curing of the waterproofing materials. B. Do not apply waterproofing materials unless ambient air temperature is above 40 F. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 5‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. B. Provide installer's written 5‐year warranty covering application. C. Should water penetrate through the work of this Section within five (5) years following the date of Substantial Completion of the work, and promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner to that affect, the materials supplier will provide such additional waterproofing and protection board materials as are required, and the Contractor and applicator will provide such equipment, labor and other materials as are required and will properly repair the area through which water penetrated. 1. Should the water penetration be due to faulty original workmanship or materials of this Section, the equipment, labor and materials will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Should the water penetration not be due to faulty original workmanship or labor of this Section, the equipment, labor and materials provided under this Article will be paid for promptly by the Owner at the current rates of the Contractor, applicator and materials applier. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUID MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM A. General: Provide types and product selections indicated for waterproofing or, where not otherwise indicated, provide type recommended specifically by manufacturer for application indicated, complying with ASTM C1305 and other applicable ASTM testing standards. B. Type: Liquid cold‐applied membrane waterproofing system, consisting of single‐component, moisture‐ curing bitumen modified polyurethane membrane and multi‐layer fiber protection board. 1. Wet Mil Thickness: 60 mils minimum. 2. Application Rate: 25 sq. ft. per gallon. C. Cleaning and Removal Products: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer, as appropriate for project conditions and as required for proper adhesion of specified new waterproofing materials. D. Protection Board: Multi‐layer, 50 mil fiberboard, bonded and laminated with a water‐resistive adhesive. 1. Protection Course II by Sonneborne or equal. Maple Hill Park 07 14 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect. F. Sustainability Design Criteria: None. G. Approved Product and Manufacturer: 1. MasterSeal Series, Shakopee, MN, (800) 433‐9517, as the basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. Submit manufacturer's product literature with request. 2.02 FLUID‐APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM A. General: Provide types and product selections indicated for waterproofing or, where not otherwise indicated, provide type recommended specifically by manufacturer for application indicated, complying with ASTM C1305 and other applicable ASTM testing standards. B. Type: Liquid hot‐applied membrane waterproofing system, consisting of single‐component, moisture‐ curing bitumen modified polyurethane membrane and multi‐layer fiber protection board. 1. Wet Mil Thickness: 60 mils minimum. 2. Application Rate: 25 sq. ft. per gallon. C. Cleaning and Removal Products: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer, as appropriate for project conditions and as required for proper adhesion of specified new waterproofing materials. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: None. E. Approved Product and Manufacturer: 1. Hydrotech Ultimate Assembly by American Hydrotech, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 877‐6125, as the basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. Submit manufacturer's product literature with request. F. Insulation Protection Board: High‐density rigid polystyrene insulation board with 3/8" thick latex modified concrete facing. 1. Compressive Strength: 40 psi minimum. 2. Approved Product: Hydroguard by Hydrotech, or approved equal. G. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.03 SUBSURFACE ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Foundation Insulation: Specified in Section 07 21 13. B. Perimeter Drainage Tile: Specified in Section 31 23 23, as shown on the Drawings and/or as required by the Soils Report. C. Swellstop‐Type Waterstops: Prefabricated, strip applied flexible butyl rubber and swellable clay or mastic type waterproofing compound that swells upon contact with water to form a permanent compression seal in non‐moving concrete joints. 1. Size: 3/4" x 1" continuous strip materials, manufacturer's standard roll length. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: None. E. Approved Product(s): 1. Swellstop‐Type Waterstop: Swellstop 594 or Lockstop 595 by Greenstreak, as basis of design, specific product as recommended by the manufacturer for specific project conditions. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Greenstreak Group, Inc., St. Louis, MO, (800) 325‐9504. 2. Manufacturers providing products of same type, function, performance and quality are acceptable. Maple Hill Park 07 14 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed, and notify Contractor of any conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Applicator. B. Ensure that surfaces to receive waterproofing materials are fully cured, dry and free from frost, oil, grease, form release agents, curing compounds, laitance and loose materials detrimental to adhesion and application of waterproofing. C. Remove loose materials and foreign matter with scraper, wire brush or other recommended method. Remove grease or oil with solvent, effective alkaline cleaner or detergent and scrub surfaces clean with water. D. Seal construction joints occurring below grade, including joints between concrete walls, footings and floor slabs. Ensure that coating is continuous and free from breaks and pinholes. Form cover at junctions of horizontal and vertical surfaces for drainage away from the structure. E. Seal around items and services projecting through waterproofing surfaces. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ensure that sealed areas are moisture‐tight. F. Apply approved filler material recommended by the manufacturer to fill gaps or voids as may be necessary. 3.02 PRE‐INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. General: Contractor shall conduct a pre‐installation meeting to discuss installation requirements for the sheet membrane waterproofing system, to include: 1. General Contractor. 2. Installing Contractor. 3. Manufacturer's Technical Representative. 4. Owner's principal representative. 5. Architect (for fluid‐applied waterproofing as part of walls/building envelope assembly. B. At the pre‐installation meeting, review the areas scheduled to receive waterproofing and reach agreement on installation procedures to be used. C. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. D. Manufacturer shall have no responsibility for inspection of the completed installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLUID MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM A. General: Install waterproofing in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction and with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. All tie holes, deep honeycombs (over 1/4") and exposed reinforcing steel shall be filled or covered as specified above prior to application of waterproofing. C. Pre‐striping: Prior to application of final membrane, all joints, cracks and openings around projecting items shall be sealed by caulking or pre‐striping with a preliminary coat of specified waterproofing, applied by a trowel or stiff bristle brush. Allow to cure overnight before proceeding with final membrane. D. Apply final fluid membrane by the following method, or as recommended by the manufacturer for this application: 1. Roller. 2. Squeegee. E. Verify the applied thickness with a wet mil gauge as the application proceeds. F. Verify integrity of the cured application by damming all horizontal surfaces and flooding with a minimum of 2" of water, in the presence of the Owner's principal representative, and allowing water to stand for 24‐48 hours. 1. If repairs are required, drain the area and allow to completely dry before reapplying membrane. Maple Hill Park 07 14 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 G. Coverage: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, apply from bottom of footings to top of all walls, bottom of footings to within 2" of finish grade for all retaining walls, entire surface of all earth‐sheltered roofs, and from top of elevator pit down to and around pit floor, covering all foundations, footings, etc., as required for the particular application. 1. Chalk line of proposed finish grade on surfaces of retaining walls to accurately layout limits of waterproofing. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF SUBSURFACE ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Install waterstops or other accessory materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. All waterstops shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's current recommendations for joint dimension(s) specific to the Project. B. Ensure that strip‐applied swellstops are installed to completely fill joints when activated by water. Take precautions to pre‐wet materials during installation. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION MATERIAL A. General: Install specified protection material over cured membrane waterproofing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Protection Board: Protect waterproofing from damage during backfill operations by adhering protective materials over treated surfaces. Use of waterproofing materials as an adhesive is not acceptable. C. Foundation Insulation: Installation specified in Section 07 21 13. D. Backfill within seven (7) days of application, but not before allowing 24‐48 hours for curing of the waterproofing, or as recommended by the manufacturer. Ensure that backfill is placed so as not to dislodge the protective material, rupture or damage the waterproofing membrane. E. Reapply waterproofing where damaged by backfilling or compaction process to provide continuous, moisture‐tight membrane. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install specified fluid membrane waterproofing materials to below‐grade concrete or concrete unit masonry surfaces adjacent to earthen backfill, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Below‐grade surfaces of earth‐sheltered foundation walls and footings adjacent to finished or unfinished interior spaces. 2. Other areas where shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions. B. Waterproofing is not required at the following locations: 1. Below‐grade pier caps at slab‐on‐grade conditions. 2. Below‐grade caissons and piers. C. Install specified fluid‐applied materials to above‐grade elevated decks, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Elevated plaza deck. Also refer to Section 07 76 00. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install building insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for building elements and spaces, including: 1. Unfaced rigid board insulation as continuous insulation layer at exterior concrete mass wall construction. B. Installation of insulation materials furnished as part of the prefabricated steel building systems, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 5. Section 07 14 00, Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing: Protection board. 6. Section 07 21 13, Foundation Insulation 7. Section 07 22 00, Roof and Deck Insulation: Rigid board insulation. 8. Section 07 53 16, Elastomeric Sheet Roofing – Fully‐Adhered. 9. Section 07 55 00, Protected Membrane Roofing. 10. Section 07 92 00, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 11. Divisions 21 Fire Suppression, 22 Plumbing and 23 HVAC: Ductwork and piping insulation requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 2. ASTM C167: Standard Test Method for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal Insulations. 3. ASTM C203: Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block‐Type Thermal Insulation. 4. ASTM C209: Standard Test Method for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 5. ASTM C423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 6. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady‐State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C553: Standard Specification for Mineral‐Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 8. ASTM C578: Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C591: Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 10. ASTM C612: Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 11. ASTM C665: Standard Specification for Mineral‐Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. 12. ASTM C739: Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Loose‐Fill Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C1029: Standard Specification for Spray‐Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation. 14. ASTM C1104: Standard Test Method for Determining the Water Vapor Absorption of Unfaced Mineral Fiber Insulation. Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 15. ASTM C1289: Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 16. ASTM C1338: Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings. 17. ASTM C1363: Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 18. ASTM C1497: Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Stabilized Thermal Insulation. 19. ASTM D1621: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 20. ASTM D1622: Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 21. ASTM D2126: Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 22. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 23. ASTM E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 24. ASTM E136: Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 C. 25. ASTM E814: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems. 26. ASTM E2357: Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies. 27. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non‐Load‐Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible (Foam Plastic) Components. a. Applicable to Type I, II, III or IV construction (greater than 40' in height). 28. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and added urea formaldehyde and are non‐toxic. C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior building installations shall be GreenGuard certified for indoor air quality. D. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that R‐values listed in their written product literature represents the Long‐Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) values, not initial installed values. E. Certification: Installer shall install an insulation certification card upon completion of the insulation work as specified in paragraph 3.04. F. Applicator Qualifications: Spray polyurethane foam applicator shall be certified by Thermal and Air Barrier Wall System manufacturer. 1. Applicator shall be, during the bidding period as well as for the duration of the installation, officially recognized as a licensed contractor by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). The Applicator shall carry liability insurance and bonding. 2. Each worker who is installing air barriers must be either a certified applicator or an installer who is registered with ABAA. 3. Each lead certified applicator can supervise a maximum of five registered installers. The certified applicator shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the installation of air barriers of the types being applied. Lead certified applicators shall perform or directly supervise all air/vapor barrier work on the project. 4. Air/vapor barrier applicators must be trained and certified by ABAA/NECA (National Energy Conservation Association) and PSDI (Professional Skills Development Institute for energy conservation) in accordance with the training requirements outlined in the ULC S705.2‐02 Installation Standard. G. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Thermal Performance: Furnish and install thermal insulation materials to meet the following minimum R‐ value standards, based upon the 2015 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), Zone 5, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Drawings or required by the jurisdiction with authority over the Project. Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Group B and Other Occupancies: 1. Foundations (Below Grade Walls): R‐7.5 ci. 2. Walls: a. Mass: R‐11. 4 ci. 3. Floors: a. Unheated Slabs‐on‐Grade: R‐10 for 24" below. b. Heated Slabs‐on‐Grade: R‐15 for 36" below. c. Joist/Framed: R‐30. d. Steel Floor Joists: R‐38. 4. Roofs: a. Insulation Entirely Above Roof Deck: R‐25 ci. b. Attic and Other: R‐38. C. Definitions: 1. ci: Continuous insulation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of insulation material specified. Clearly mark each submittal for R‐value (LTTR) of insulation material being furnished. B. Certifications or Test Reports: Provide certifications as indicated in paragraph 1.02 above, and test reports indicating compliance with NFPA 285, if applicable. C. Certifications: Provide evidence to the Architect of licensing and certification under the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABBA) Quality Assurance Program. D. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 Sustainability Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. 2. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 3. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver thermal insulation materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified by name, brand, type and grade. Exercise care to avoid damage during unloading, storing and installation. B. Store, protect and handle thermal insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent damage, contamination and deterioration. Keep materials free of dirt and other foreign matter. 1. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches. 2. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light‐colored tarp or equal. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install spray foam work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer’s specific environmental requirements and conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements. Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R‐value of insulation materials for the following terms: 1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Refer to Design Criteria in paragraph 1.03 above for thermal performance and fire resistance criteria. 2.02 UNFACED EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. General: High‐density, extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation, complying with ASTM C578 and D1621, and FS HH‐I‐524C, Type IV. Compressive strength of 25 psi. K‐value of 0.20. 1. R‐value (LTTR): 5.0 minimum per inch at 75 F, tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and C518. 2. Board Size(s): 48" wide x 96" long. 3. Thickness: 2". 4. Board Edges: Shiplap on long edges. B. Flashing Tape: Manufacturer's recommended 6" wide x 100' rolls, self‐adhering, tear‐resistant board joint tape. 1. Approved Product: Weathermate Straight Flashing by Dow Chemical Co., or approved equal. C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Styrofoam Cavitymate SC by Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (866) 583‐2583, as the basis of design. 2. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, IL. 3. Amofoam CM or RCY, Amoco Foam Products Co., Atlanta, GA, (800) 241‐4402. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. 2.03 FOIL‐FACED EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION A. General: Aluminum foil‐faced, glass fiber reinforced polyisocyanurate foam rigid board insulation, complying with ASTM C1289 and D1621, and FS HH‐I‐1972/1, Class 2. Density not less than 2.0 pcf; compressive strength of 25 psi. 1. R‐value (LTTR): 7.2 minimum per inch at 75 F (6.5 minimum per inch for unfaced), tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and C518. 2. Board Size(s): 48" wide x 96" long. 3. Thickness: 1‐1/2". 4. Board Edges: Shiplap on long edges. B. Flashing Tape: Manufacturer's recommended 6" wide x 100' rolls, self‐adhering, tear‐resistant board joint tape. 1. Approved Product: Weathermate Straight Flashing by Dow Chemical Co., or approved equal C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 25% minimum. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Thermax by Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (866) 583‐2583, as the basis of design. 2. Hunter Panels, Portland, ME, (888) 746‐1114. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 INSULATION ATTACHMENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive or Attachments: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, capable of securely adhering insulation to applicable surfaces. B. Vapor Barrier: Specified in Section 07 26 00. C. Provide other accessories as required for a complete and thermally enclosed installation. D. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. All adhesives shall comply with Rule 1168 of the South Coast Air Quality Management District. 2. All caulks and sealants shall comply with Regulation 8, Rule 51 of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the surfaces, substrates, wall, floor and attic/ceiling cavities and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Ensure that building shell has been completely and properly "dried in" prior to installation of thermal insulation materials. C. Ensure that insulation baffles have been properly installed in attic spaces. D. Ensure that all electrical lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment and other devices protruding into rafter, attic or soffit cavities are properly rated to be in contact with insulation. If they are not, Contractor shall build enclosures around such fixtures to hold insulation materials away as required by the fixture manufacturer's warranty and installation requirements. Maintain tops of enclosures open to allow adequate ventilation of fixtures and devices. (Notify Architect of any non‐complying materials.) E. Ensure that all existing and/or new electrical wiring, junction boxes and other devices protruding into wall cavities are properly rated to be in contact with foamed‐in insulation materials. F. Installer shall discuss specific site conditions with the Architect concerning the proper selection of appropriate materials for ceiling/attic installations, as referenced in Paragraph 3.03. G. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. General: Install specified thermal insulation materials where shown on the Drawings or scheduled in Part 4 of this Section. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. B. Continuous Building Envelope Compliance: Ensure that no thermal bridges within the exterior shell of the building are left uninsulated, complying with the requirements of the IECC, current edition. C. Install insulation to fit tightly between framing members and fill all voids. Ensure that batt‐type insulation materials are installed without crushing or overly compressing the batt thickness. D. Ensure that insulation materials are properly supported in suspended installations, or where installed to underside of roof decks. E. Fit insulation tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane of insulation; fit insulation to outside of plumbing in exterior walls. F. Ensure that cavities, chases and other void spaces open to attics, crawlspaces, etc. are sealed with insulation, unless used as approved mechanical plenums. G. Protection: Ensure that insulation materials are properly covered and protected by other building materials, where required by applicable codes. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written Maple Hill Park 07 21 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult with manufacturer's technical representative before proceeding with the work. B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges. D. Secure rigid insulation in place using material of panel width required for spacing of wall framing. Place insulation horizontally, stagger vertical joints and fit tightly without gaps. E. Install specified self‐adhering flashing tape at all insulation board joints. F. Refer to Section 07 21 13 for installation of rigid insulation on perimeter foundation walls and underside of slabs. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBOSSED ALUMINUM FACED (FOIL‐FACED) EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult with manufacturer's technical representative before proceeding with the work. B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges. D. Secure rigid insulation in place using material of panel width required for spacing of metal wall furring, specified in Section 09 22 16. Place insulation horizontally, stagger vertical joints and fit tightly without gaps. E. Install specified self‐adhering flashing tape at all insulation board joints. F. Install insulation with foil‐face to the warm side of building spaces using method recommended by manufacturer with specified adhesive. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install unfaced extruded polystyrene board insulation in the following locations: 1. Foundation insulation, specified in Section 07 21 13. 2. Other locations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Install embossed‐aluminum faced (foil‐faced) extruded polyisocyanurate board insulation in the following locations: 1. Exterior face of concrete exterior mass wall construction as continuous insulation layer. 2. Interior surfaces of perimeter masonry walls for concealed installation. 3. Other locations as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 21 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 21 13 FOUNDATION INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install foundation insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for building elements, including: 1. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior perimeter foundation walls. 2. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior perimeter grade beams. 3. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior walls. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐In‐Place Concrete. 4. Section 07 14 00, Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing: Rigid board insulation as protection board. 5. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation. 6. Section 07 22 00, Roof and Deck Insulation: Rigid board insulation. 7. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting: Foundation excavation. 8. Section 32 13 13, Exterior Concrete Paving. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 2. ASTM C167: Standard Test Method for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal Insulations. 3. ASTM C203: Standard Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block‐Type Thermal Insulation. 4. ASTM C209: Standard Test Method for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 5. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady‐State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 6. ASTM C553: Standard Specification for Mineral‐Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 7. ASTM C578: Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C591: Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C665: Standard Specification for Mineral‐Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. 10. ASTM C1289: Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 11. ASTM C1363: Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 12. ASTM C1497: Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Stabilized Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM D1621: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 14. ASTM D1622: Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 15. ASTM D1777: Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials. 16. ASTM D2126: Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 17. ASTM D4355: Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. Maple Hill Park 07 21 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 18. ASTM D4491: Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permitivity. 19. ASTM D4632: Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. 20. ASTM D4716: Standard Test Method for Determining the (In‐Plane) Flow Rate per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head. 21. ASTM D4751: Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Open Size of a Geotextile. 22. ASTM D4833: Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products. 23. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 24. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos and urea formaldehyde and are non‐toxic. C. Certification: Fiberglass materials for interior crawlspace installations shall be GreenGuard certified for indoor air quality. D. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product literature and specifications indicating compliance with the requirements of Section for each type of insulation material specified. Clearly mark each submittal for R‐value of insulation material being furnished. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature, specifications and test data for prefabricated drainage board materials. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish materials in manufacturer’s original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder’s torches. C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light‐colored tarp or equal. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Insulation Materials: Provide the manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R‐value of insulation materials for the following terms: 1. Extruded Polystyrene Rigid Board Insulation: Two (2) years. B. Prefabricated Drainage Board: Provide manufacturer's written one‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 UNFACED EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. General: Comply with FS HH‐I‐524C, Type IV, high‐density, unfaced extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation, square edges. Compressive strength of 25 psi. R‐value of 5.0 minimum per inch at 75 F. K‐ value of 0.20. 1. Apply at perimeter foundation walls of new construction as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Apply at perimeter grade beams of new construction as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Apply beneath concrete slabs‐on‐grade at perimeter exterior foundation walls. 4. Apply as protection board where specified as part of waterproofing and/or dampproofing systems. Refer to Sections 07 14 00 and 07 11 00. Maple Hill Park 07 21 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 5. Size(s): 4'‐0" x 8'‐0" long, or manufacturer's standard board sizes. 6. Thickness(es): 2" thick, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. B. Edges: Tongue‐and‐groove. C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 25% minimum. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, (800) 232‐2436. 2. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, IL. 3. Amofoam CM or RCY, Amoco Foam Products Co., Atlanta, GA, (800) 241‐4402. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the foundation and/or grade beam surfaces and crawlspace conditions under which the foundation insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Ensure that dampproofing or waterproofing has been properly applied, inspected and approved prior to beginning installation of foundation insulation system. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. Fit insulation tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through plane of insulation. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION A. General: Install rigid board insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. If instructions do not apply to project conditions, consult with manufacturer’s technical representative before proceeding with the work. B. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive board insulation are clean, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. C. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Use board insulation free of broken or chipped edges. D. Secure rigid insulation on perimeter foundation walls and/or grade beams with specified adhesive or other attachment using spot or bead method in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s recommendations. Place insulation horizontally and stagger vertical joints. E. Exterior Face of Foundation Walls or Grade Beams: For conditions where rigid board insulation is installed to the exterior face of foundation walls and/or grade beams, extend insulation to within 2" of finished grade elevation, and protect top edge with flexible fabric‐type flashing membrane approved by insulation manufacturer. Attach flashing to foundation wall and/or grade beam and extend down face of rigid board insulation 12" minimum. Where concrete sidewalks or aprons abut the exterior foundation, extend insulation up to underside of sidewalk or apron unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. F. Beneath Slabs‐on‐Grade: For conditions where rigid board insulation is installed beneath concrete slabs‐ on‐grade, use full 4'‐0" wide boards along full perimeter of all exterior foundation walls or grade beams, as shown on the Drawings. 1. Coordinate placement with granular sub‐base material. 2. Coordinate placement with below‐slab vapor barrier, specified in Section 07 26 00. G. As Dampproofing or Waterproofing Protection Board: Refer to Sections 07 14 00 or 07 11 00. Maple Hill Park 07 21 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 FOUNDATION INSULATION INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install unfaced extruded polystyrene board insulation in the following locations: 1. Vertical face of foundation walls and grade beams. 2. Vertical face of earth sheltered walls. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 22 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install high‐strength rigid board‐type roof insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for rooftop decks and roof gardens. B. Furnish and install fire‐rated glass‐faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board over rigid roof insulation, if specified. C. Furnish and install polyisocyanurate cover board over rigid roof insulation, if specified. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Insulation and replacement of existing roof sheathing. 4. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation. 5. Section 07 21 13, Foundation Insulation. 6. Section 07 53 16, Elastomeric Sheet Roofing – Fully‐Adhered. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 2. ASTM C209: Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 3. ASTM C518: Standard Test Method for Steady‐State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C578: Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 5. ASTM C591: Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 6. ASTM C1289: Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 7. ASTM D1621: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 8. ASTM D1622: Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 9. ASTM D2126: Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 10. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 12. PIMA, Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association: Technical Bulletin 101. 13. CAN/ULC 5770: Long‐Term Thermal Resistance of Materials. 14. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that insulation materials supplied are compatible with sheet roofing membrane specified. C. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials supplied are free from asbestos and urea formaldehyde and are non‐toxic. D. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that R‐values listed in their written product literature represents the Long‐Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) values, not initial installed values. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. Maple Hill Park 07 22 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating that materials supplied meet the requirements of this Section. Clearly mark each submittal for LTTR R‐value of materials being furnished. B. sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 2. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish material in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches. C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light‐colored tarp or equal. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R‐value of insulation materials in conjunction with the warranty specified for the membrane roofing specified in Section 07 53 16. 1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single‐ply membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 2.02 UNFACED EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION A. General: Closed‐cell polyisocyanurate foam insulation board, L1.L. Class A, FM I‐90, complying with ASTM C591 or C1289 (as applicable) and D1621. 1. R‐Value (LTTR): 5.7 per inch, aged per ASTM C518. Provide total roof system R‐value of 30 minimum, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. K‐Value: 3. Thickness: As required to meet thermal requirements specified above. In no case shall thickness be less than that required to meet Factory Mutual I‐90 criteria. 4. Properties: a. Compressive Strength: 25 psi minimum, ASTM D1621. b. Water Absorption: Less than 1, ASTM C209. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 2 perm. inches, ASTM E96. d. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2% linear change, ASTM D2126. e. Service Temperature: ‐100 F to 250 F. f. Product Density: 2, ASTM D1622. g. Flame Spread: Less than 25 (Class A), ASTM E84. 5. Board Size: 4’‐0” wide x 8’‐0” long or manufacturer's standard. 6. Facings: Manufacturer's standard organic/inorganic facers. Maple Hill Park 07 22 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Fiber Cants: Provide fiber cants, complying with the sheet roofing manufacturer's requirements and compatible with the insulation materials specified, if required by the manufacturer for the roofing system specified. C. Accessories: Provide other products as required by manufacturer for a complete and thermally sealed system. D. Wood Blocking and Stripping: Refer to Section 06 10 00. E. Fasteners: Screws, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for mechanical attachment to roof sheathing. 1. Sure‐Seal fasteners and insulation plates by Carlisle or equal. F. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 25% minimum. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in compliance with Section 01 35 66. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654‐3103. 2. Apache Building Products, Co., Belvedere, IL, (800) 435‐5493. 3. Carpenter Insulation Co., Richmond, VA, (800) 722‐2272. 4. NRG Barriers, Inc., Sanford, ME, (800) 343‐1285. 5. Rmax, Inc., Dallas, TX, (800) 527‐0890. 6. Temple‐EasTex, Inc., Diboll, TX, (800) 231‐6060. 7. Thermal Systems, Inc., Huntington Beach, CA, (714) 895‐7117. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. 2.03 POLYISOCYANURATE COVER OR RECOVER BOARD A. General: Furnish manufacturer's standard 1/4" thick, non fire‐rated, high‐density polyisocyanurate board sheathing, 4'‐0" wide x 8'‐0" long or manufacturer's standard, if required by applicable building codes or project conditions. 1. Invinsa Roof Board by Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654‐3103, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable, if approved by roof insulation and/or roofing manufacturer as part of the specified roof assembly. 2.04 ADHESIVES AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulation Adhesive (Cold Application): 2‐part polyurethane insulation adhesive, Johns Manville, used to attach insulation boards or deck cover boards to the roof deck or to other insulation boards. 1. Approved Products: Johns Manville 2‐Part UIA, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the roof substrate and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrate. B. Refer to Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry, for inspection and replacement of deteriorated wood plank roof decking. C. Thoroughly clean the new steel deck substrate prior to installation of rigid board insulation systems. D. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive roof insulation are clean, dry, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. E. Take all necessary precautions to prevent screws or other attachments from penetrating exposed, finished surfaces of existing tongue‐in‐grove wood plank decking. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing or replacing any damaged decking, at the Owner’s option. Maple Hill Park 07 22 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of ultimate responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS A. General: Install built‐up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Roof valleys, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 2. Roof parapets, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 3. Mechanical equipment curbs. 4. Skylight curbs. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION A. General: Install rigid board insulation systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes and insurance requirements and meet the requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. (edit) 1. Installation: Mechanically‐attached with cover board specified below. 2. Installation: Adhesive‐adhered with specified 2‐part polyurethane insulation adhesive. B. Install roof insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Boards shall be installed with long joints continuous and end joints staggered. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. C. Apply treated wood blocking at perimeter parapet, same thickness as insulation, to provide starter strip, if recommended by the manufacturer. D. Take necessary precautions to prevent breakage of rigid insulation materials laid directly over fluted metal roof deck. Limit foot traffic on completed sections. Remove and replace any broken panels. E. Cut around rooftop equipment curbs, skylights, pipe vents and exhaust fans to provide tight‐fitting joints. Cut into roof drains as required for proper drainage. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD A. General: Install fire‐rated cover board in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes, insurance requirements and meet the fire rating requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Installation: Adhesive‐adhered with specified 2‐part polyurethane insulation adhesive. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Continually protect the roof insulation from moisture by installing only as much insulation as can be properly covered by the sheet roofing each day. Provide temporary water seals, temporary ballast and end‐of‐workday water cut‐offs. Protect insulation from wind blow‐off during all phases of construction. B. Clean and protect exposed surfaces of insulation and leave prepared for roofing application. Refer to Section 07 53 16. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install unfaced high‐strength polyisocyanurate board insulation in the following locations: 1. Below topping slab and materials as part of elevated exterior deck assembly. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 53 16 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING – FULLY‐ADHERED PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Clean roof deck substrates in preparation for roofing and insulation installation. B. Install all roof insulation and protection boards, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Furnish and install fully‐adhered sheet roofing system. D. Furnish and install miscellaneous roofing specialties as noted, including parapet flashings, edge flashings and terminations and counter flashings, unless arranged for otherwise. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation. 4. Section 07 22 00, Roof and Deck Insulation. 5. Section 07 62 13, Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 6. Section 07 62 16, Aluminum Flashings and Trim. 7. Division 23, H.V.A.C. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM D4637: Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single‐Ply Roof Membrane. 2. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. ASTM E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E1980: Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low‐ Sloped Opaque Surfaces. 5. Applicable tests as specified herein of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 7. International Building Code, current edition: Wind exposure classification. 8. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Materials and installation shall comply with applicable standards and recommendations of the Rubber Manufacturers Association and the Single‐Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI). C. Materials shall be supplied and installed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer or certified by the manufacturer as a qualified installer of the specified products. D. All work of this Section shall be performed by a single installer, who shall have minimum five (5) years of successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. E. Approved Subcontractors: 1. Douglas Roofing Company, Greeley, CO, (970) 482‐1218. 2. Front Range Roofing Systems, Inc., Greeley, CO, (970) 224‐5052. 3. Colorado Moisture Control, Loveland, CO, (970) 667‐7700. 4. Equals as approved by the Architect meeting requirements specified above. Submit qualifications statement listing similar experience with request. F. Installer shall certify that all roof system materials provided are compatible with the roof system assembly specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. G. Design Criteria: Roof design shall meet the minimum requirements of the Single‐Ply Roofing Institute for the specified roofing system type, unless more stringent requirements are required by the jurisdiction Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 with authority over the project. 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. 2. Internal Fire Resistance: Factory Mutual (FM) Class I. 3. Wind Resistance: 100 mph, Exposure C (UBC) for fully‐adhered systems. 4. Warranty shall meet wind resistance defined above. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and installation instructions for sheet roofing installation, surface conditioner compatibility, elastomeric flashings, joint cover sheet and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of roofing membrane. B. Warranties: Submit sample warranties, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 78 36. C. Design and Specification Approval: Prior to starting roofing, Contractor shall submit a letter certifying that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with elastomeric sheet roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations and will permit materials to be applied and cured in accordance with those recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Do not apply sheet roofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 F. 2. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 F. 3. Do not apply sheet roofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials, insulation and accessories in manufacturer's protective containers with labels intact and legible, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. B. Handle rolled goods as required to prevent damage. Store all materials on clean, raised platforms with weather‐protective coverings. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 15‐year system warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and covering all specified design criteria. Warranty shall be written to cover the wind resistance specified in paragraph 1.02.G above. B. Provide manufacturer's written extended 20‐year warranty covering defects in materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fully‐Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing System: Single‐ply elastomeric sheet roofing fully‐adhered over fire‐rated cover board and rigid board roof insulation. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION A. Membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 1. Rigid Board Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07 22 00. 2. Tapered Rigid Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07 22 16. Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.03 EPDM SHEET ROOFING MATERIALS A. Membrane: Fully‐adhered 90 mil thick non‐reinforced EPDM, Class A complying with ASTM E84, and conforming to the following minimum criteria: 1. Roll Width: 10'‐0" wide, or manufacturer’s standard width. 2. Color: Black. 3. Properties: a. Tensile Strength: 1,650 psi minimum, ASTM D412. b. Elongation: 450% minimum, ASTM D412. c. Specific Gravity: 1.15 +/‐ .05, ASTM D297. d. Hardness: 60 +/‐ 10, ASTM D2240. e. Tear Strength: 275 lbs/in. minimum, ASTM D624. f. Factory Seam Strength: Membrane rupture, ASTM D816 modified. g. Water Vapor Perm: 2.0 perm‐mils, ASTM E96. h. Ozone Resistance: No cracks, ASTM D1149. i. Heat Aging (28 days at 240 F): Tensile minimum 1,300 psi and elongation minimum 295%, ASTM D573; tear minimum 125 lbs/in., ASTM D624. j. Brittleness Temperature: ‐75 F, ASTM D476. k. Resistance to Water: Less than 2%, ASTM D471. l. Tolerance on Nominal Thickness: +/‐ 10, ASTM D412. m. Density: .28 psf, minimum for .045 sheet. n. Sheet Composition: 100% weight of polymer that is EPDM, ASTM D297; 30% weight of sheet that is EPDM polymer. o. Design Criteria: Refer to paragraph 1.02.F. above. B. Batten Strips: Manufacturer's standard 1" x 18‐gage aluminized steel strapping. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard corrosion‐resistant type, compatible with materials being attached. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concrete fastener for mechanically‐attached insulation into existing concrete deck. 1. Sure Seal Concrete Fasteners by Carlisle or approved equal. E. Flashing: 1/16" thick uncured EPDM forming flashing as furnished by membrane manufacturer. F. Bonding Adhesive: Furnished by membrane manufacturer, compatible with all materials to which the membrane is to be bonded. G. Splicing Cement and Lap Sealant: For sealing the exposed edge of the splices, shall be trowel or gun consistency as furnished by membrane manufacturer. H. Lap Sealant: Compatible with materials with which it is used, shall be trowel or gun consistency, furnished by membrane manufacturer. I. Water Cut‐Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. J. Molded Pipe Flashing: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. K. Nite Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. L. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. M. Rubber Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Extruded nailing strips and fasteners furnished by membrane manufacturer. N. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer. O. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sure‐Seal elastomeric membrane by Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA, (800) 233‐0551. 2. Firestone Building Products Co., Indianapolis, IN, (800) 428‐4442. 3. Versico, Inc., Akron, OH, (800) 992‐7663. 4. John Mansville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654‐3103. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design, quality and performance are acceptable, only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Walkway Pavers: Precast concrete interlocking ballast block pavers, extent as shown on the Drawings: 1. Size: Normal 12" x 16" x 1‐1/2" thick. Sizes varying from these standards shall conform to layout shown on the Drawings. 2. Profile: Interlocking type, bi‐directional drainage. 3. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum. 4. Weight: 10 lbs/sq. ft. minimum to 13 lbs/sq. ft. maximum. 5. Density: 145 lbs/cu. ft. 6. Water Absorption: 5% maximum. 7. Performance: Meets or exceeds criteria established by ICBO, UL, and Factory Mutual for intended use. 8. Approved Manufacturers: a. Interlocking Ballast Pavers by Westile, Inc., Littleton, CO, (800) 433‐8453 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer shall thoroughly examine surfaces and substrates to receive fully‐adhered sheet roofing materials prior to commencing work. Report in writing to the Contractor any condition that may potentially affect proper application or warranty. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Roofing Subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces. B. Ensure that drains, sleeves and curbs which pass through surfaces to receive roofing are rigidly installed. C. Ensure that concrete HVAC equipment pads are properly formed and installed prior to beginning installation. D. Ensure flatness and tightness of joints in deck sheathing. 1. Test pullout capacity of mechanical fasteners in the presence of the roofing manufacturer's technical representative, if required by the manufacturer as a condition of the warranty. E. Ensure that roof deck and/or insulation board surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be detrimental to the successful installation of sheet roofing. Remove foreign materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect pavements and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Lap suitable protective materials at least 6". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work. 2. Protect parapets and adjacent surfaces not designated to receive roofing. B. Deck Surfaces: Dry and broom clean surfaces of foreign matter detrimental to installation of roofing. C. Joints in Deck: Seal cracks and joints with recommended material and sealant. Use proper depth‐to‐ width ratio as recommended by the sealant manufacturer in accordance with Section 07 92 00. D. Start the installation only in the presence of the manufacturer's technical representative, if required as a condition of the warranty. E. Make temporary provisions for supporting existing gas piping, electrical conduit and other services to remain during reroofing. F. Ensure that prefabricated, self‐flashing skylight units are properly located and attached in place. G. Ensure that prefabricated, self‐flashing roof hatch units are properly located and installed. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEET ROOFING A. Install rigid or tapered rigid insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions and Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 recommendations and as specified in Section 07 22 00 and 07 22 16. B. Install fire‐rated cover board over rigid board roof insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, if specified. Refer to Section 06 16 43 or 07 22 00. C. General: Install fully‐adhered single‐ply sheet roofing in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Loosely lay sheet membrane over roof insulation. Allow membrane to relax minimum thirty (30) minutes before adhering or splicing. 2. Membrane: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. Laps shall run parallel to slope of the roof, unless approved otherwise. Apply adjoining sheets by lapping the edges and splicing. Attach membrane to perimeter edges, nailers and penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3. Fasteners: Mechanically attach membrane at maximum 1'‐0" o.c. along all seams, unless otherwise required by the manufacturer's installation specifications. Fasteners shall extend through the rigid board roof insulation and cover board and be securely attached to the original wood roof deck. 4. Fasteners (Field and Parapet Conditions): Mechanically attach membrane in the field of the roof as required by the manufacturer's specific requirements for this Project. Spacing of fasteners along projecting parapet walls shall be decreased as necessary in accordance with both the manufacturer and code mandated requirements, based on parapet height and related factors. 5. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details. D. Installation shall be performed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer. E. Adhesive apply sheet roofing to perimeter edges, lay seam edges 3" and seal. Seal sheet roofing with 3" lap where metal collars or flanges are required. F. Apply isolating sections for roof control/expansion joints. G. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal ends and edges to each other and to adjoining surfaces with uniform fillet bead of sealant. H. Flash and seal watertight any items projecting through membrane with counterflashing membrane material. 1. Provide and install prefabricated sheet metal boots at all pipe vents and other roof penetrations. Solder joints as specified in Section 07 62 13. I. Apply precut disks of sheet roofing material to cover and protect fasteners in the field. J. Manufacturer’s Details: Install the sheet roofing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard details subject to actual field conditions. Installing contractor shall receive approval from the manufacturer’s technical field representative for deviation from any of the manufacturer’s standard details, including but not limited to: 1. Gravel stop edge flashings. 2. Fastener splice. 3. Membrane splice or lap. 4. Roof drain flashings. 5. Thru‐wall scupper flashings. 6. Vent pipe flashings. 7. Equipment curb flashings. 8. Applications where parapet wall terminations and other areas exposed to view are also subject to approval and modification by the Architect. K. Exercise all required care not to damage the elastic sheet roofing or the completed single‐ply membrane roof assembly. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY PROTECTION A. General: Install walkway protection panels in locations and patterns indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Apply additional layer of single‐ply roof membrane below landscape material, if required by the manufacturer. Maple Hill Park 07 53 16 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Make terminations and cuts according to manufacturer's standard details and recommendations. C. Adhere panels to sheet roofing membrane in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 3.05 TESTING A. Contractor shall perform a flood test for the watertightness of the roof membrane. The test shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's principal representative. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and details. Written letters of acceptance shall be sent to the Owner's principal representative and the Architect. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site. B. Remove excess adhesives or other materials from adjacent surfaces, including metal surfaces of flashings and rooftop equipment. C. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil‐based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 61 13 PREFINISHED MECHANICALLY‐SEAMED METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install prefinished metal roofing, mechanically‐seamed, complete with all associated copings, flashings and trims. B. Furnish and install prefinished metal fascia systems, as a part of the prefinished roofing system, complete with all associated attachments and trims. C. Furnish and install protective underlayments. D. Furnish all equipment required for field forming and cutting operations of the prefinished metal roofing system. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 07 62 13, Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process. 2. ASTM A792: Standard Specification for Steel sheet, 55% Aluminum‐Zinc Alloy‐Coated by the Hot‐ Dip Process. 3. ASTM A924: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic‐Coated by the Hot‐Dip Process. 4. ASTM B209: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. ASTM D226: Standard Specification for Asphalt‐Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 6. ASTM D522: Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 7. ASTM D1970: Standard Test Method for Self‐Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 8. ASTM D2626: Standard Specification for Asphalt‐Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing. 9. ASTM E72: Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. 10. ASTM E330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 11. ASTM E1680: Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 12. ASTM E1980: Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low‐ Sloped Opaque Surfaces. 13. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Handbook. 14. UL 580: Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 15. UL 1897: Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems. 16. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 17. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Prefinished roofing material shall be by a manufacturer who has fabricated metal roofing systems of the specified type, quality and performance for a minimum of ten (10) years. C. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by an installer with minimum of five (5) years successful experience on projects of similar scale and complexity. 1. Certification: Installer shall be a manufacturer‐certified installer, and provide copy of such certification as specified in paragraph 1.03 below. D. Manufacturer shall ensure the compatibility of all components, accessories and equipment that are part of the fabrication of the roofing and the overall quality and reliability of the system. E. Manufacturer shall be responsible for any redesign of the basic building components, roof panel layout or accessories required by variance between the manufacturer's standard fabrication process and that shown on the Drawings as the basis of design. F. Design Criteria: 1. Roof Live Load (snow): 30 psf. 2. Horizontal Wind Load: 100 mph wind loading, Exposure C, IBC current edition. G. Manufacturer will provide a field representative for on‐site inspection of the components to ensure that the installation is complete and weathertight and meets the factory quality control requirements of the manufacturer and as specified in this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and specifications illustrating the proposed roofing materials and components showing compliance with the requirements of this Section. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating proposed panelization of the roofs, fabrication and mechanical‐seaming details, trims, closures and accessories, and installation details and instructions. C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of prefinished metal textures and colors for selection by the Architect. 1. Submit sample of roofing system, minimum 12" x 12", illustrating typical mechanically‐seamed flat seam condition. D. Installer Certification: Submit manufacturer’s letter or certificate demonstrating certification by the manufacturer. E. Test Data: Submit air infiltration test data specified in paragraph 1.05 below. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Installer shall coordinate the delivery schedule for the roofing systems with the Contractor to assure that all roof and wall substrates are properly prepared when the components are delivered to the site. 1.05 TESTING A. Manufacturer shall submit negative load test performed by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E330. When tested in multiple spans of three (3) or more sections, the .032" roofing/siding material shall span 5'‐6" and withstand a negative load of 40 psf without damage; .040" roofing/siding material shall span 6'‐8" and withstand a negative load of 50 psf without damage. B. Seals between pans shall be affected such that at 18 psf static pressure, air infiltration shall not exceed .012 cfm/sq. ft. Manufacturer shall submit air infiltration tests performed by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM E1680. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 2‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, including installation on the site. Warranty shall be written to cover the wind resistance specified in paragraph 1.02 F above. B. Provide manufacturer's extended written 20‐year warranty covering failure of the specified finish. Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFINISHED, ARCHITECTURAL MECHANICALLY‐SEAMED METAL ROOFING A. General: Prefinished, non‐structural metal roofing shall be factory fabricated and field rolled and seamed, using site‐based manufacturer‐approved equipment suitable for application. System shall include all ridge and hip caps and/or seams, parapet flashings and caps, flashings, copings, trims and accessories necessary for a complete and weathertight installation. 1. Roofing Type: Standing, narrow profile interlocked seams with flat pans. 2. Solar Reflectance Index: SRI shall be greater than 29, when tested in accordance with ASTM E‐ 1980. B. Materials: 24‐gage minimum galvanized steel or .032" aluminum alloy, 3004 coil stock. 1. Texture: Smooth. 2. Striation Ribs in Pans: None. 3. Finish: Prefinished by manufacturer, Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating, minimum 1 mil thick consisting of a prime coat and finish coat. 4. Color: Architect shall select color(s) from the manufacturer's full line of standard prefinished colors. A maximum of three (3) different colors may be used for this project. C. Fabrication: Roll‐form manufacturer's prefinished coil stock to produce finished, exposed pan width of 18" maximum, flat panel. 1. Panelization of roofing shall be as shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise approved. Factory fabricate to the greatest extent possible. 2. Panel Clips: 30‐gage stainless steel, fabricated to be interlockable with sheet, if used. 3. Pan Lengths: Form pans to run full length from eave or pitch break to ridge, without horizontal joints. 4. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2". Miter and seam corners. 5. Standing Seams: Form material for standing seams at spacing specified for finished, exposed pan width. Seam height shall be 1‐1/2" maximum, narrow profile with maximum 1/2" width. D. Installation Type: Interlocking, standing seam, manufacturer's mechanically‐seamed double lock system to provide 180° seams. E. Hip and Ridge Cap/Closure Trims: Manufacturer's standard prefinished, prefabricated cap trim assemblies, compatible with the roofing system specified. F. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be aluminum, steel or the same material as the prefinished roofing and shall be concealed, except as shown on the Drawings. 1. Staples: Standard epoxy‐coated steel. 2. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard. G. Approved System and Manufacturers: 1. Zee‐Lock Double‐Lock Standing Seam Roofing by Berridge Manufacturing, Houston, TX, (800) 669‐0009, as the basis of design. 2. Aeicor Metal Products, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, FL, (305) 974‐3300. 3. AEP‐Span, Tacoma, WA, (800) 733‐4955. 4. A & S Building Systems, Inc., Caryville, TN, (615) 426‐2141. 5. Atas Aluminum Corp., Allentown, PA, (215) 395‐8445. 6. Firestone Metal Products, Anoka, MN, (800) 426‐7737. 7. Delcoa Industries, Inc., Pompano Beach, FL, (305) 979‐5004. 8. Englert, Inc., Perth Amboy, NJ, and represented locally in Commerce City, CO, (303) 288‐8070. 9. Follansbee Steel, Follansbee, WV, (304) 527‐1260. 10. MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Houston, TX, (877) 713‐6224. 11. Merchant and Evans, Inc., Burlington, NJ, (609) 387‐3033. 12. M M Systems Corp., Tucker, GA, (800) 241‐3460. 13. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp., Louisville, KY, (502) 855‐4300. 14. Overly Manufacturing Co., Greensburg, PA, (412) 834‐7300. 15. Petersen Aluminum Corp., Elk Grove Village, IL, (800) 722‐2523. 16. Ultra Seam, Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 292‐1511. Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 17. Manufacturers providing prefinished metal roofing systems of same design, appearance, function, quality, performance and components are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. All systems shall be based upon the specified systems and components. Alternate manufacturers accepted by the Architect prior to bid date shall not relieve the manufacturers of an obligation to, at his own expense, make changes in the structure, etc. as necessary to accommodate the alternate systems. 2.02 ASSOCIATED FLASHINGS AND TRIMS A. Contractor shall coordinate the furnishing of associated fascias, flashings and trims specified in other Sections for exposed locations with the work of this Section. Such work shall be by the same manufacturer/installer as the prefinished metal roofing to the greatest extent possible. B. Gage: Provide the following minimum gages for accessory materials: 1. 22‐gage for vertical fascias. Provide 1/2" hemmed edge as shown on the Drawings. 2. 24‐gage for roof edge, parapet cap and step flashings. 3. 24‐gage for ridge and hip cap flashings. 4. 24‐gage for other miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages. 2.03 UNDERLAYMENTS A. Primary Underlayment: Asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting requirements of ASTM D‐2626‐81 without perforations. Provide minimum 30 lb. weight for felt sheets, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Secondary Underlayment: Self‐adhesive, 40 mil, UL Class A elastomeric single‐ply roofing underlayment, grey‐black, 3'‐0" or 6'‐0" wide rolls, Ice and Water Shield by GPC Applied Technologies Inc. (Grace), Cambridge, MA, (617) 876‐1400, or approved equal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Prefinished metal roofing system shall be factory fabricated, rolled and finished for field forming, installation and seaming. B. Fascias, Flashings and Trims: Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 1. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'‐0" will not be allowed. 2. Joints and seams exposed to view are to be flat‐lock type, except corners, or detailed as flat‐butt joints with back‐up plate. Open‐lap seams are not permitted for joints exposed to view. Seal all seams with elastic cement. 3. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight, square design to allow for curves in plane of fascias and trims, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. Fascias: Where dimension of vertical fascias exceeds 12", fabricate as stepped fascia as detailed on the Drawings; or if not shown, fabricate with one (1) horizontal rigidizing striation rib for each 6" of fascia depth exceeding 12". 5. Backpaint materials with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. C. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and details. 1. Drip/Fascia Flashings: As shown on the Drawings. 2.05 FIELD EQUIPMENT A. Installer shall furnish and maintain all site‐based cutting, forming and seaming equipment as necessary to fabricate and install all metal roofing, flashings, accessories and trim for a complete and weathertight installation. Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which metal roofing work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unacceptable conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Installer shall be responsible for ensuring delivery of the prefinished materials and roll‐forming equipment to the site, as specified in paragraph 1.04. C. Installer shall coordinate the work of this Section with other contractors and equipment suppliers as required for a complete and weathertight installation. D. Ensure that substrate is sound, dry, properly sloped for drainage and securely anchored in position. E. Ensure that proper subframing and/or blocking has been installed as required for installation of the prefinished systems. F. Ensure that adjacent work of other trades has been completed and approved prior to beginning work, to the greatest extent possible. G. Ensure that structural steel framing or other substrate for mechanical equipment screen enclosures is properly located, sized and rigidly installed prior to beginning work. H. Verify requirements for secondary underlayments with the Building Official with jurisdiction over this Project. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Primary Underlayment: 1. Over entire roof deck area, place piles of 36" wide underlayment, with ends and edges weatherlapped minimum 6". Stagger end joints of each consecutive layer. 2. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof. 3. Weatherlap and seal with plastic cement items protecting through or mounted on roof. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PREFINISHED METAL ROOFING A. General: Field fabrication and installation shall be done in accordance with all applicable building codes, standards and the written instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the approved prefinished metal roofing. Roofing shall be anchored firmly into position, forming a completely watertight and weathertight installation. 1. Field Fabrication Details: All aspects of field rolling, cutting and installation processes shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, including but not limited to, the following: a. Pan length, including separation from adjacent pans at roof valleys. b. Fascias. c. Ridge cap flashings. d. Hip cap or transition flashings. e. Drip edge flashings at gutters. f. Eave and rake edge flashings. 2. Fabricate and install prefinished metal roofing to allow for expansion and contraction of all components and assemblies without compromising the structural capacity or weathertightness of the system. B. Roofing shall be formed on the job site in continuous lengths, manufactured to actual field measurements. Horizontal lap joints are not acceptable. Neoprene secured by metal profile closures shall be provided when a one‐piece change of direction is not applicable. Hold‐down brackets shall allow for thermal movement and shall be installed at each panel joint. Longitudinal spacing of hold‐down brackets shall be arranged to allow for positive uniform load of 40 psf (1915.2 pascals), negative uniform load of 30 psf (1436.4 pascals) or other required loading. No perforations shall be made in roofing or Maple Hill Park 07 61 13 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 siding by fasteners, except as shown on the Drawings. C. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual specifications shall govern for material and workmanship not otherwise specified herein. D. Standing Seam System: Standing seams of the prefinished roof system shall be formed 1‐1/2" high maximum and mechanically closed in the field with manufacturer's continuous seaming equipment. Install cleats at spacing recommended by manufacturer for pan width, roof span and wind exposure. The roofing system shall be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Ribs shall be equidistant from rake ends, corners, hips, mullions, etc. in accordance with design concept and as shown on the Drawings. 1. Cut ends of pans and standing seams on curved roof edges to produce a uniformly formed and smooth edge. 2. Finish exposed ends of standing seams in accordance with manufacturer’s standard details and the approved shop drawings. 3. Hip Transitions: Soldered transitions are required where shown on the Drawings, or specified elsewhere in this Section. In these applications, hip closure cap flashings will not be acceptable. E. Lapped Seam System: Lapped seams of the prefinished roof system shall be 16" and shall be securely lapped and sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Roofing system shall be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Ribs shall be equidistant from corners, hips, mullions, etc. in accordance with the design concept and as shown on the Drawings. F. Prefinished Fascia: Install fascia in sections using longest possible length pieces. Miter external corners. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF COORDINATING RIDGE AND HIP CLOSURE ASSEMBLIES A. General: Install all associated continuous ridge cap assemblies and other ridge and hip closure trims as required for a complete and weathertight prefinished metal roofing installation. B. Prefinished Ventilating Ridge Caps: Install continuous ventilating ridge cap section in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations and details. 1. Ensure manufacturer's details for ridge flashings and sealants are strictly followed. Install continuous prefabricated ridge flashing beneath continuous prefabricated plastic vent material. Set Z‐purlins in continuous bead of sealant. 2. Install continuous prefabricated vent material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations over ridge flashings. 3. Install continuous prefinished, prefabricated ridge cap trim over prefabricated vent material, with hemmed edge interlocked with continuous cleats. C. Ridge Closures: Ridge lines of the prefinished roof system shall be closed with manufacturer’s standard ridge cap flashing trims, unless a continuous pan break over the ridge is specifically specified. D. Miscellaneous Flashings and Break Metal: Form sheet materials as detailed on the Drawings for miscellaneous flashings, counterflashings and trims. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Installer shall thoroughly clean installed prefinished roof panels and trim, using only cleaning products recommended by the manufacturer for this application. Cleaning operation shall not mar or abrade the metal finish. B. Do not permit unnecessary walking on the finished roofing system. Require all personnel to wear rubber‐ soled shoes when installing or walking on the finished roof. C. Remove all excess material and scraps from the site. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 07 92 00 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces. B. Furnish and install joint backing materials. C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in exterior applications. D. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in interior applications. E. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants to seal joints in penetrations through wall, floor and ceiling systems, and other locations as required for Energy Star or International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) compliance. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming: Joint fillers for cast‐in‐place concrete work. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 5. Section 03 41 00, Precast Structural Concrete. 6. Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete: Joint sealants. 7. Section 03 48 00, Precast Concrete Specialties: Joint sealants. 8. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry: Joint sealants. 9. Section 07 14 00, Fluid‐Applied Waterproofing. 10. Section 07 19 00, Water Repellent Sealers. 11. Section 07 62 16, Aluminum Flashings and Trim. 12. All Sections of Division 8, Openings. 13. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating: Joints of walls and/or ceilings of dissimilar colors. 14. Section 10 28 13, Commercial Toilet and Bath Accessories. 15. Division 22, Plumbing. 16. Division 23, H.V.A.C. 17. Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C510: Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single‐ or Multi‐Component Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C603: Standard Test Method for Extrusion Rate and Application Life of Elastomeric Sealants. 3. ASTM C639: Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of Elastomeric Sealants. 4. ASTM C661: Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric‐Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. 5. ASTM C679: Standard Test Method for Tack‐Free Time of Elastomeric Sealants. 6. ASTM C711: Standard Test Method for Low‐Temperature Flexibility and Tenacity of One‐Part, Elastomeric, Solvent‐Release Type Sealants. 7. ASTM C712: Standard Test Method for Bubbling of One‐Part, Elastomeric, Solvent‐Release Type Sealants. 8. ASTM C719: Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement Hockman Cycle. 9. ASTM C731: Standard Test Method for Extrudability After Package Aging of Latex Sealants. 10. ASTM C732: Standard Test Method for Aging Effects of Artificial Weathering on Latex Sealants. Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 11. ASTM C734: Standard Test Method for Low‐Temperature Flexibility of Latex Sealants After Artificial Weathering. 12. ASTM C736: Standard Test Method for Extension Recovery and Adhesion of Latex Sealants. 13. ASTM C792: Standard Test Method for Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking and Chalking of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 14. ASTM C793: Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory‐Accelerated Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 15. ASTM C794: Standard Test Method for Adhesion‐in‐Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 16. ASTM C834: Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 17. ASTM C920: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 18. ASTM C961: Standard Test Method for Lap Shear Strength of Sealants. 19. ASTM C972: Standard Test Method for Compression‐Recovery of Tape Sealant. 20. ASTM C1016: Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Absorption of Sealant Backing. 21. ASTM C1021: Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants. 22. ASTM C1183: Standard Test Method for Extrusion Rate of Elastomeric Sealants. 23. ASTM C1193: Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 24. ASTM C1241: Standard Test Method for Volume Shrinkage of Latex Sealants During Cure. 25. ASTM C1246: Standard Test Method for Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants After Cure. 26. ASTM C1248: Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants. 27. ASTM C1311: Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. 28. ASTM C1501: Standard Test Method for Color Stability of Building Construction Sealants as Determined by Laboratory‐Accelerated Weathering Procedures. 29. ASTM C1520: Standard Guide for Paintability of Latex Sealants. 30. ASTM C1521: Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints. 31. ASTM C1523: Standard Test Method for Determining Modulus, Tear and Adhesion Properties of Precured Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 32. ASTM D1056: Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 33. ASTM E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 34. ASTM E2690: Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Caulks and Sealants to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics. 35. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non‐Load‐Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components. 36. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be continuously employed in work of this type. C. Installer Qualifications: Installers of firestopping materials and sealants shall be adequately trained in the manufacturer's installation requirements. If the Contractor places responsibility for installation on multiple subcontractors, the Contractor shall remain responsible for the completed applications. 1. Installer shall be a Certified Installer of firestopping materials and sealants, if required by the jurisdiction with authority over the Project. D. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and conditions under which sealants are to be installed. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material required. Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect. C. Sample Installation: Select a test area for each major exterior building material or system and install caulking. Notify the Architect and Owner for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with caulking. The test area will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking and sealant work. D. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for adhesives and sealants inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 Sustainability Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver tubes of caulking compounds and sealants in manufacturer's original cartons, with labels intact. B. Store on site in secure location, protected from excessive heat or cold in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below 40 F or above 100 F. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high early bond strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress by subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to avoid delay of project. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 5‐year warranty covering defects in materials when such materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's product data sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper application or curing, or when the materials installed are not appropriate for that application, joint type or other factor beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period of five (5) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials. 2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth. B. Exterior: One‐ or two‐part polyurethane‐based elastomeric sealants complying with FS TT‐S‐00230, Class A, Type I (self‐leveling) or Type II (non‐sag), and applicable ASTM standards. 1. One‐Part Sealant: MasterSeal NP‐1 by BASF as basis of design, or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. 2. Two‐Part Sealant: MasterSeal NP‐2 by BASF as basis of design, or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application.. C. Interior: One‐part silicone‐based non‐sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew complying with FS TT‐ S‐01543, Class A, and FF TT‐S‐00230, Class A, and applicable ASTM standards. 1. MasterSeal Omniseal and OmniPlus by BASF as basis of design, or as recommended by Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 manufacturer for type of application. D. Interior Paintable: One‐part non‐sag mildew‐resistant acrylic emulsion sealant complying with applicable ASTM standards, paintable. 1. MasterSeal Sonolac by BASF as basis of design, or as recommended by the manufacturer for type of application. 2. Use this product as "cosmetic" sealant layer where specified in this Section, unless other product is recommended by the manufacturer or installer, or for other applications. E. Concrete Slab Joints: One‐part non‐priming urethane‐based self‐leveling pourable sealant complying with FS TT‐S‐00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use), and applicable ASTM standards. 1. MasterSeal SL‐1 by BASF as basis of design, or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. F. Color(s): 1. Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless indicated otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection, including variations from this policy. 3. Clear silicone sealant shall be installed at the following locations, including but not limited to: a. Perimeter of rimless vitreous china toilet and bath fixtures, tubs, water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories. b. Perimeter of stainless steel kitchen and bar sinks. c. Perimeter edges of stainless steel kitchen equipment adjacent to walls, floors, ceilings or soffits. d. Perimeter edges of stainless steel countertops and backsplashes to walls. e. Joints between plastic laminate finished countertops and backsplashes, including offsets in countertop heights. G. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. VOC Content of Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to Regulation 8, Rule 51 of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD). a. Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. MasterSeal Series by BASF (formerly Sonneborn), Shakopee, MN, (800) 433‐9571, as basis of design. 2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321‐7906. 3. Schnee‐Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255‐9427. 4. Sikaflex by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ. 5. Dow Corning Corp., Midland, MI, (800) 248‐2481. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Primer: Non‐staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Joint Cleaner: Non‐corrosive and non‐staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round polyethylene foam rod, over‐sized 30‐50%, as recommended by manufacturer of sealant used. 1. Provide closed cell or open cell foam rod materials, as recommended by the Installer for specific applications. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure‐sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. E. Joint Fillers for Cast‐in‐Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03 11 00. F. Sand for Sanded Caulk Applications: Fine grit natural sand, as approved by the Architect and Owner. "Pre‐sanded" caulking and sealant materials are not acceptable. G. Application Equipment: Pump‐type hand "gun" applicators, as recommended by manufacturer for specific materials being installed. Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Size(s): As required for tubes of caulking compounds and sealants. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing rabbet and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and curing of sealants. Do not proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required bonding of sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere. E. Ensure that sealants for fire‐rated assemblies are the appropriate type and material for the specific UL assembly indicated. F. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. G. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. H. Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly. I. Install bond breaker where required. J. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by sealant materials. K. Sample Installation: Prepare sample area(s) as specified in paragraph 1.03 above. Do not proceed with the work until sample area(s) has been approved by the Architect and Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. General: Install caulking compounds and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. 1. Seal joints in rough framing, gypsum wallboard, penetrations through wall, floor and ceiling systems, and other locations as required for Energy Star or International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) compliance. Ensure that installation results in complete and continuous air barrier for all interior conditioned spaces. B. Installation of sealants, caulking and firestopping materials shall be by qualified and trained Installers. Installation of firestopping materials shall be by Certified Installers, if required by the jurisdiction with authority over the Project. C. Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces. D. Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags. E. Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not allow sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant materials off adjacent surfaces. F. Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of the Architect or the Owner. G. Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or discolored by work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect or the Owner. H. Install layer of "cosmetic" sealant over fire caulking where exposed to view in the finished project. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK A. Exterior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion and control/construction joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings, retaining walls and site walls. Maple Hill Park 07 92 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Expansion and control/construction joints in exterior concrete pavements, aprons, sidewalks, ramps and curb and gutter sections. 3. Vertical expansion and control joints in concrete unit and brick masonry walls. 4. Vertical expansion and control joints in concrete unit, brick, stone or simulated stone veneer. 5. Vertical joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels. 6. Vertical and horizontal joints between units of modular precast concrete accessories. 7. Perimeter of exterior window and door frames. 8. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 9. Perimeter joints of metal flashings, counterflashings, reglets and similar accessories. 10. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project. 11. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the Architect. B. Interior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion joints and control/construction joints in interior concrete slabs where surfaces are scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view. 2. Vertical joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels. 3. Horizontal joints between interior concrete slabs and precast concrete wall panels or masonry walls. 4. Joints between junctions as required for Energy Star or IECC compliance. 5. Penetrations through wall, floor and ceiling systems between units, as required for Energy Star or IECC compliance. 6. Perimeter of casework, cabinetry, countertops and backsplashes. 7. Perimeter of toilet fixtures, water closets, urinals, sinks and lavatories. 8. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 9. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project. 10. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the Architect. C. Install sealants for firestopping systems in the following locations: 1. Duct, cable, conduit and pipe penetrations through fire‐rated partition walls. 2. Openings between walls and roof/ceilings of fire‐rated assemblies. 3. Openings between walls and soffits of fire‐rated assemblies. 4. Other locations indicated or required for types of fire separations specified, or as required by applicable building codes. D. Refer to other Division 32 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other materials. E. Exterior materials/systems not to receive sealants, including but not limited to: 1. Weepholes in brick, concrete unit or stone masonry walls. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish standard exterior and interior hollow metal doors and fully‐welded frames. B. Grout cores of exterior hollow metal frames where shown on the Drawings or specified herein, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchorages. 4. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Anchorages. 5. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry: Installation of doors and frames. 6. Section 07 21 00, Thermal Building Insulation: Foam insulation at perimeter of door and window frames. 7. Section 08 71 00, Commercial Finish Hardware. 8. Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. 9. Division 23, Mechanical: Mechanical units and louvers installed in hollow metal doors and/or frames. 10. Division 26, Electrical. 11. Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. SDI‐100: Recommended Specifications of Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute (SDI). 2. ASTM A1008: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold‐Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High‐ Strength Low‐Alloy, High‐Strength Low‐Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened and Bake Hardenable. 3. NFPA 80: Fire‐Rated Door Assemblies. 4. NFPA 65: Smoke‐Control Door Assemblies. 5. UL‐10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI). C. Manufacturer shall comply with all requirements of Underwriters Laboratories where labeled doors and frames are required. D. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature indicating compliance with all requirements for hollow metal doors and frames specified herein. Indicate required SDI compliance, grades, face sheet and core construction, insulation in cores (as applicable), fabrication and installation details. B. Door Schedules: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or numbers for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcement and location of cutouts for louvers or glazing. Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Samples: Submit representative sample of corner section of standard hollow metal doors and frames to Architect for approval. Sample section shall indicate all details of construction and finish. E. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product data for interior paints and coatings (if used) used inside the weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used does not exceed the limits listed in Division 1 Sustainability Requirements or the requirements of individual specification sections. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 3. Product data for regional materials indicating name, physical address and distance in miles (as the crow flies) from Project to the material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest or recovery for each raw material. Include statement of cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle all hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. B. Provide packaging, including corner guards, separators, spreaders, banding and plastic or vinyl wrappings as required to protect all metal doors and frames during transportation and storage. C. Store doors upright, in a protected area, off the ground, with air space between individual pieces. Protect all finished surfaces. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s written 2‐year warranty for standard steel doors and frames, covering materials and workmanship, including dimensional stability, flushness of door faces, squareness of doors and frames, and shop finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Hollow metal doors shall be cold‐rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher‐leveled, all bonderized steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI‐100, except as amended in this Section, and conforming to ASTM A1008. 1. Type: Composite construction with flush faces and seamless with hemmed edges. Provide insulated doors where scheduled. a. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy‐duty, Model 1, full flush design. b. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy‐duty, Model 1, full flush design. 2. Construction: Steel face sheets bonded to 1‐3/4" honeycomb or unitized steel core, 14‐gage top and bottom channels and 7‐gage hinge reinforcement. Provide full urethane core on exterior doors or where scheduled to be insulated door. Furnish the following minimum face sheets: a. Exterior Doors: 16‐gage. b. Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 16‐gage. c. All Other Interior Doors: 18‐gage. 3. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings, 1‐3/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Style: a. "Regent Door" by Ceco as basis of design for honeycomb core. b. "Imperial Door" by Ceco as basis of design for insulated core. c. "Medallion Door" by Ceco as basis of design for unitized steel core. 5. Finish: Shop‐prime as specified below. Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 25% post‐consumer minimum. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Corp., Brentwood, TN, distributed locally by Architectural Doors, Denver, CO, (303) 322‐ 1410, as basis of design. 2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423‐1334. 3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447‐5687. 4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl‐Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733‐5909. 5. Manufacturers providing products of same design, performance and function are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Hollow metal frames shall be cold‐rolled or hot‐rolled, pickled and oiled steel, all bonderized sheets, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI‐100, except as amended by this Section, and conforming to ASTM A1008. Except where other gages are indicated or specified, fabricate frames from steel not lighter than the following: a. Exterior Doors: 14‐gage. b. Single Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 14‐gage. 1. Type: Mitered corners, fully welded frames. Knockdown‐type frames are not permitted. 2. Sizes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Finish: Shop‐primed as specified below. 4. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type, minimum three (3) per jamb, equally spaced. 5. Jamb Anchors: a. Masonry or Architectural Precast Concrete Construction: Corrugated or other deformed type, adjustable anchors, four (4) per jamb. 6. Floor Anchors: One (1) per jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material. a. Thickness: 0.042" minimum. 7. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames. a. Thickness: 0.016" minimum. 8. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames. a. Thickness: 0.016" minimum. B. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: 25% post‐consumer minimum. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Corp., Oak Brook, IL, distributed locally by Ceco Door Division, Fountain, CO, (303) 382‐ 7930, as basis of design. 2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423‐1334. 3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447‐5687. 4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl‐Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733‐5909. 5. Manufacturers shall be the same as those for hollow metal doors. 2.03 DOOR AND FRAME PROFILES A. Hollow Metal Frames for Doors: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 5‐3/4" deep, double‐rabbeted, with 7/16" returns, or as shown on the Drawings or required by specified wall construction, except as noted below. Fabricator to verify profile specified with wall construction and furnish jamb sections with the required depth. 1. Head Sections: Provide 4" head sections for frames where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Frames at 4" Framing: 2" wide x 6 1/4" deep, double rabbeted with 7/16" returns. 3. Frames at 6" Framing: 2" wide x 8‐1/4" deep, double rabbeted with 7/16" returns. 4. Sill Sections of Transoms: As shown on the Drawings. B. Miscellaneous Filler and Closure Shapes: Fully weld to standard profiles and grind smooth as detailed on the Drawings. Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 FABRICATION OF HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Fabricate doors in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and recommendations. B. Fabricate doors of type, sizes, materials and designs indicated. Provide door clearance of 1/8" at jambs and heads and 5/8" at bottoms. Doors shall have lock edges beveled 1/8" in 2". C. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Form moulded members straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are invisible after finishing. D. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and grind smooth. Close top and bottom edges of all hollow metal exterior doors to provide a weather seal, provided as part of door construction. E. Fabricate exterior doors with face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame members. Form perimeter frame with continuous one‐piece channel at hinge edge, continuous one‐piece channel at lock edge and channels at top and bottom. Inner frame members shall be continuous one‐piece vertical steel rib stiffeners spaced not to exceed 6" o.c. Face sheets are to be continuously arc welded to perimeter channels. Weld face sheets to interior frame members in manner to provide a door with smooth surfaces. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound‐deadened and insulated full height of door. F. Fabricate interior doors with honeycomb core and steel face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame members, same as specified above. G. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive all mortise‐type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive surface‐applied hardware as required. Gages of metal for reinforcing plates shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of hardware used and size and thickness of doors. H. Reinforce and prepare doors and/or frames to receive access control systems and other specialty hardware. Refer to Section 08 74 00 and Division 26, Electrical, for hardware and wiring requirements. I. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish. J. Electrical Raceways: Provide hollow metal doors to receive electrified hardware with concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through‐wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware groups in Division 08 finish hardware sections. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. K. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer. 2.05 FABRICATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and recommendations. B. Form frames of steel to sizes, gages, profiles and shapes as detailed. Frames shall be combination‐type with integral trim and fabricated with full‐welded type construction at joints. C. Form frames with full mitered corners and stops, butt T‐joints of frames and continuously weld all joints for full depth and width of frame and trim. Close all contact edges tight and dress all welds on exposed surfaces smooth and flush. D. Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and shall join with and be secured to heads and jambs with continuous butt‐welded joints. Reinforce joints between members with concealed clip angles of same thickness as frame. E. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Fabricate moulded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true alignment and fastenings concealed. F. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements. 1. Prepare frames at factory by templates for installation of specified type hardware. Welding of hinges to frames is not acceptable. Provide frames to receive surface‐applied hardware with reinforcing plates only. Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. 2. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 and 28 specifications. G. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 H. Electrical Thru‐Wiring: Provide hollow metal frames receiving electrified hardware with loose wiring harness (not attached to open throat components or installed in closed mullion tubes) and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electric through‐wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware groups in Division 8 sections "Commercial Door Hardware" and "Access Control Hardware". I. Electrical Knock‐out Boxes: Factory weld 18‐gage electrical knock‐out boxes to frame for electrical hardware preps, including but not limited to, electric through wire transfer hardware, electrical raceways and wiring harnesses, door position switches, electric strikes, magnetic locks, and jamb‐mounted card readers as specified in hardware groups in Division 8 finish hardware sections. 1. Provide electrical knock‐out boxes with a dual 1/2" and 3/4" knock‐outs. 2. Conduit to be coordinated and installed in the field (Division 26) from middle hinge box and strike box to door position box. 3. Electrical knock‐out boxes to comply with NFPA requirements and fit electrical door hardware as specified in hardware groups in Division 8 finish hardware sections. 4. Electrical knock‐out boxes for continuous hinges should be located in the center of the vertical dimension on the hinge jamb. J. Provide jamb anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for type of wall substrate. 1. Fabricate jambs of frames with dimples for machine bolt anchorage specified in paragraph 2.02 above. K. Provide floor anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for anchoring frame to type of floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for two (2) 3/8" anchor bolts. L. Removable Mullions: Provide manufacturer's standard machine screw connections, including mullion clips. M. Provide predrilled holes or other attachment or anchorage devices supplied by or required by other Sections. N. Place minimum of three (3) silencers on each interior single door frame. Space equally along jamb strike. Set out and adjust lock strikes to provide clearance for silencers. Delete silencers where door jamb gaskets or continuous weather‐stripping are specified in Section 08 71 00. O. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish. P. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer as specified below. Q. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland cement‐based grout or mortar, coat inside surfaces of frame throat with a water‐based bituminous or asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance with UL‐10C and applied to the frame at the project site under a third party independent follow‐up service procedure. Coating shall not be factory‐ applied. 2.06 FINISHES A. Shop‐prime by manufacturer using a phosphatized treatment followed by a prime coat paint finish to all surfaces. Clean and chemically treat surfaces to ensure complete paint adherence. Follow with a baked‐ on coat of rust‐inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc‐chromate or synthetic resin primer on all surfaces. Air‐drying is acceptable when metal is electro‐galvanized. Field finishing is specified in Section 09 91 00. B. Shop‐prime by manufacturer using a hot‐dipped galvanized process in accordance with ASTM A525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. Field finishing is specified in Section 09 91 00. C. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. For stains and sealers, if used, stain product not exceeding 250 g/L and sealer product not exceeding 350 g/L for varnish and 550 g/L for lacquer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the substrates, wall openings and conditions under which the hollow metal door Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Contractor shall field verify opening dimensions, finished wall thickness(es) and conditions governing the work of this Section prior to beginning fabrication. C. Contractor shall verify depth of all frames with specified wall constructions prior to fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or propose required modifications in the shop drawings, noted as deviations as specified in Section 01 33 23. D. For welded frames, provide temporary steel shipping spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after installation; otherwise remove spreaders when frames are set and anchored. In place of spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size, door swing and other pertinent information. Number frames to correspond to opening numbers on construction drawings. E. For frames to be fully grouted, ensure that inside surfaces have been coated with specified bituminous or asphaltic emulsion coating prior to installation. F. Ensure that air infiltration wrap has been properly installed and approved prior to beginning installation of the door frames. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: Installation of hollow metal doors and frames is specified in Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. B. Install frames and doors in accordance with SDI‐100, except as amended in this Section. Remove shipping spreaders, set frames in position, plumb, align and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with power fasteners. Provide wood spreaders to maintain jamb alignment. Build wall anchors into walls, or secure to adjoining construction as indicated or specified. Where frames require ceiling struts or other overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or structural framing above, as indicated or as required by site conditions. C. Frames: Install hollow metal frames plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". Ensure frames are accurately and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. D. Multiple Frame Sections: Field weld multiple sections of built‐up clerestory window frames, as approved in the shop drawings. All field welds shall be full welds, and meet workmanship quality standards of shop welding for flushness and smoothness. E. Grout all exterior hollow metal frames full with masonry mortar after installation in masonry or concrete construction; foam in insulation in frames scheduled for insulated doors in other construction, and frames in fire‐rated assemblies where required by the applicable assembly. F. Ensure that foam insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00, has been installed around all door and window frames prior to installation of gypsum wallboard and/or interior casings and trims. G. Doors: Install hollow metal doors plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08 71 00 and adjust as necessary for proper operation. H. After installation, touch‐up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical to that used for shop coat. I. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors, sidelites, and transoms, where scheduled. J. Coordinate installation of mechanical units or louvers, furnished by Division 23, into hollow metal doors and/or frames, if applicable. Ensure the compatibility of sizes, materials, finishes and anchorages. K. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking of hardware is unacceptable. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at site. After installation, protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Maple Hill Park 08 11 13 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Clean all surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames, and leave prepared for field finishing. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting and Coating. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 08 62 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 08 62 00 SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish prefabricated, round tubular skylight units, complete with domed cap, tubular metal shaft, integral roof curbs/flashings and interior diffusers. B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 07 22 00, Roof and Deck Insulation. 4. Section 07 53 16, Elastomeric Sheet Roofing – Fully‐Adhered. 5. Section 07 54 16, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully‐Adhered. 6. Section 07 61 13, Prefinished Mechanically‐Seamed Metal Roofing. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc‐Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc‐Iron Alloy‐ Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot‐Dip Process. 2. ASTM E283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 3. ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. UL 325: Standards for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems. 5. NFPA70: National Electrical Code. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have minimum five (5) years experience fabricating modular skylight units for projects of similar scale and complexity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and/or shop drawings indicating materials, unit sizes and assembly and installation details. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated skylight glazing units and integral frames to site in unbroken factory cartons. B. Store in a secure location and protect finishes and glazing from damage until installation. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard written five‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship and unit leakage. Maple Hill Park 08 62 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TUBULAR UNIT SKYLIGHTS A. General: Factory‐fabricated round tubular skylight units, complete with domed cap, tubular reflective metal shaft sections, integral roof curbs, flashings, interior ceiling diffusers and all related accessories and trims. 1. Size(s): 21" diameter. B. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact‐resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. 1. Outer Dome Glazing: 0.125" minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material and meeting characteristics of DR‐101 blend. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard prismatic pattern molded into dome to capture low angle sunlight. 3. Reflector: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015", positioned in dome to capture low angle sunlight. C. Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak‐proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and tope of tube. 1. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant, meeting ASTM A653/A A653M or ASTM A463/A 463M, 0.028" thick. 2. Base Pitch (Slope): Flat, no pitch 4" and 6" high, D. Dome Ring: Attached to top of base section, 0.090" nominal thickness, injection molded high impact acrylic, to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. E. Reflective Extension Tube: Aluminum sheet, 0.015" thickness. 1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%. 2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed +2 or be less than –2 as determined in accordance with ASTM E308. 3. Tube Diameter: Approximately 21". F. Reflective 30 Adjustable Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness .015". 1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%. G. Reflective 90 Adjustable Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness .018". 1. Interior Finish: High reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface greater than 99%. Total solar spectrum less than 93%. H. Ceiling Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic, 0.100" nominal thickness. I. Dress Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic, 0.100" nominal thickness. Prevents air infiltration and condensation from attic spaces. J. Dual Glazed Diffuser Assembly: 1. Upper Glazing: Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material, 0.040" nominal thickness. 2. Lower Glazing: Molded polycarbonate plastic classified as CC1 material, 0.022" nominal thickness. 3. Lower Glazing: Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material, 0.090" nominal thickness. K. Accessories: 1. Flashing Turret Extensions: Provide manufacturer's standard extensions for applications requiring additional lengths of 2" to 48" extensions. Contractor shall field verify extension length(s) required. L. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non‐magnetic steel, non‐corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. M. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. N. Performance Criteria: Completed tubular skylight system assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed .30 cfm/sf aperture, with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Maple Hill Park 08 62 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 16.5 psf pressure differential, with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. 3. Uniform Load Test: a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make system inoperable or cause permanent deflection of any section in excess of 1% of its span at a positive load of 110 psf or negative load of 60 psf. b. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E330. 4. Fire Testing: a. Class B Burning Brand: Burning brand shall self‐extinguish without transferring the fire to the dome, in accordance with UBC Standard 15‐2, ASTM E108 and UL 790. b. Self‐Ignition Temperature ‐ greater than 650 F: In accordance with ASTM D1929‐68 (1975). c. Smoke Density – Rating no greater than 75: No greater than 450, in accordance with ASTM E84‐91A in way intended for use. d. Rate of Burn – Minimum Burning Rate: 2.5"/min, classification CC‐2, in accordance with ASTM D635‐74. O. Approved Models and Manufacturers: 1. Model 330 DS (21") Daylighting System by Solatube International Inc., Vista, CA, (888) 765‐2882, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing prefabricated, tubular skylight units of the same type, design, appearance, quality and performance are acceptable. 2.06 SKYLIGHT FABRICATION A. General: Skylight units shall be factory‐fabricated using the manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and self‐flashing curb. B. Fabricate self‐flashing curb in height required for roof deck insulation shown on the Drawings or specified in Section 07 22 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall inspect the framed openings, surfaces and conditions of the substrates to receive the prefabricated skylight units and notify Contractor of any condition that will be detrimental to the successful installation, performance or weathertightness of the finished installation. Do not proceed with installation until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. B. Field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section. C. Prepare mounting substrate as per manufacturer's requirements. D. Coordinate size of new framed curb opening with manufacturer’s standard unit approved by Architect and pre‐engineered metal roof curb supplied by the steel building supplier. E. Ensure that structural framing and edge angles for new curb openings have been properly installed, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. F. Ensure that existing self‐flashing curbs to be reused are securely anchored to existing roof deck. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SKYLIGHT UNITS A. General: Install prefabricated skylight units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner and Contractor. Make corrections in installation methods if needed prior to proceeding with installation of subsequent units. Maple Hill Park 08 62 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Protect installed skylights and glazing from damage by adjacent construction. Units with marred surfaces or scratched glazing shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish finish hardware for new exterior doors, other than that specified in specific door Sections. B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 63, Sustainability Requirements. 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Door and frame preparation for hardware. 5. Division 26, Electrical: Conduit and line voltage wiring for access control door hardware. 6. Division 26, Electrical and/or Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security: Low voltage wiring and transformers for access control door hardware. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. BHMA: Applicable standards for finish door hardware. 2. ANSI A115.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1‐3/4" Doors. 3. ANSI A115.4: Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. 4. ANSI A115.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single‐Acting. 5. ANSI A156.1: Butts and Hinges. 6. ANSI A156.2: Locks and Lock Trim. 7. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers). 8. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim. 9. ANSI A117.1‐1992: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 10. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 11. Applicable provisions of the codes as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for the Project, indicating door location, type, quantity required, style, finish and keying group. B. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and respective Sections of Divisions 8 and 13 prior to hardware installation. C. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. 1.04 KEYING A. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock. B. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group. C. Provide two (2) grand master keys, if required. D. Provide one (1) master key for installation in the key access box, specified in Section 10520, for fire department use. E. Master Key Groups (review with Owner and Architect): 1. Key entire building to Owner's existing Master key system. 2. Key all building entry doors together. Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1AA, 2AA, etc.). When keys are turned over to Owner at completion of the project, secure keys with same keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation. G. Key Blanks: Provide Owner with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from this contract. 1. Quantity: 5. H. Deliver keys to the Owner. 1.05 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA) A. F‐81 (451) Office or Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side, except when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob is locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn button must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob. B. F‐86 (457) Storeroom/Utility Space Door Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Outside knob is always fixed. C. F‐91 Door Locks: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key from both sides. D. Deadlocks: 1. E‐2141: Deadbolt operated by key from either side. Bolt automatically deadlocks when fully thrown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH HARDWARE A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products listed are indicative of the design, grade, construction, size and type to be used by the listed manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and design are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section. 1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager, Mont‐Hard or McKinney. 2. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma. 3. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets: a. Commercial Line: Schlage only. 4. Deadbolts: Schlage. 5. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero, Master Manufacturers or Barrier Systems by Hager. 6. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufacturers. 7. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc. or Barrier Systems by Hager. 8. Electric Power Supply: Securitron, BPS‐24‐1 with battery. 9. Panic Set: Securitron, TSB‐3CL touch bar. 10. Electronic Timer: Access Support, DT‐7. 11. Electromagnetic Lock: Magnalock Model 62, with bracket as required by location. 12. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design, appearance, quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding except where restricted elsewhere in this Section. B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a minimum to the extent scheduled: 1. All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project. 2. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets shall be by the same manufacturer and of the same finish, unless otherwise indicated. Coordination of keying shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier for these items. 3. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory. Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed by the Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal. D. Special Requirements: 1. All hinges shall be ball‐bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non‐removable pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors. 2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise specified. 3. All deadbolts specified for required exit or egress doors shall be provided with lever or paddle type operators on the interior. 4. Provide concave‐shaped wall stops where scheduled with privacy‐type push button locksets. Use convex‐shaped wall stops elsewhere. 5. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on active side, or as recommended by the supplier. 6. Closers shall be provided with hold‐open capability, except where part of a fire‐rated door assembly. 7. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the room side of all doors where possible. Regular arm‐type closers are acceptable for pull side applications. E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1, current edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility, and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. 1. All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Refer to paragraph 2.01.A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types of finish hardware. 2. Baldwin Brass, San Bruno, CA, (415) 588‐8480. 3. Bommer, Landrum, SC, (800) 334‐1654. 4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Charlotte, NC, (800) 543‐3658. 5. Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA, (800) 523‐8483. 6. Emtek Products, Inc., Industry, CA, (800) 356‐2741. 7. Glynn‐Johnson, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 613‐8940. 8. Hager Companies, St. Louis, MO, (800) 325‐9995. 9. Ilco Unican, Winston Salem, NC, (800) 849‐8324. 10. LCN, Princeton, IL, (800) 526‐2400. 11. Pemko, Ventura, CA, (800) 283‐9988. 12. Omnia Industries Inc., (800) 310‐7960. 13. Sargent Manufacturing Co., New Haven, CT, (800) 727‐5477. 14. Schlage Lock Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 264‐5300. 15. The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT, (800) 337‐4393. 16. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA, (323) 262‐4191. 17. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 897‐9944. 18. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance, design and finishes are acceptable, unless limited by the specific requirements of this Section. 2.02 COMMERCIAL HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.01 above. B. Commercial Line: Heavy‐duty, commercial grade hardware. 1. Schlage D Series key in lever handle, as basis of design C. Commercial Grade Trims: 1. Lever trim: Sparta by Schlage as basis of design. D. Panic Set Trims: Securitron. E. Commercial Line Finish: US26D, Satin Chromium. F. Threshold Finish: Mill finish cast or extruded bronze. Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.03 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS A. Approved Models and Manufacturers, as basis of design: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: Product lines specified above, 2‐3/4" backset. 2. Hinges: McKinney TA2714, Stanley or Hager BB1279, steel, full‐mortised, 5‐knuckle ball bearing, 4‐1/2" x 4‐1/2", NRP. a. Use 3‐1/2" x 3‐1/2" hinges at 1‐3/8" hollow‐core doors and in other locations required for proper template spacing and anchorage of hinge to door frame. 3. Deadbolts: a. Commercial Line: Heavy‐duty, with interchangeable core, Schlage B‐700 Series, as basis of design. 4. Closers: LCN 4000 Series, with full molded cover. Provide delayed‐action option where scheduled. 5. Push Plates/Pull Bars: Master Manufacturing M‐604 x M‐163, 8". 6. Kickplates: Trimco, 10" x length recommended for door width, 16‐gage, (.050" aluminum) (polished brass), beveled edges. 7. Saddle Thresholds: Pemko 271A‐5, flat, or Reese S483AV‐5" with integral vinyl stop. All thresholds shall be handicapped accessible. 8. Door Shoes/Sweep: Pemko 217 AV extruded aluminum with vinyl insert for 1‐3/4" doors. Verify compatibility with specified threshold. 9. Door Astragal/Meeting Stile Closure for Paired Doors: Pemko 357SP with silicone. Brush type not acceptable, unless otherwise approved. 10. Sweep: Pemko 307AV. 11. Door Smoke Gaskets: Pemko S88D. 12. Weatherstripping: Pemko 303AV for wood doors/frames; Pemko 316AV for hollow metal doors/frames. 13. Wall Stop: Ives 407. Use wall‐type, unless door position requires otherwise. 14. Floor Stop: Ives 438. 15. Wall Stop/Holder: Ives 449 holder and stop. 16. Floor Stop/Holder: Ives 450 holder and stop. 17. Door Bottom: Pemko 317AN. Mount with neoprene bulb under door if conditions permit. 18. Panic Set: Securitron. B. Furnish hardware items as listed in Schedule at the end of this Section, complete to the function intended. C. Furnish all accessory hardware items as required for a complete installation, including strikes and anchorage devices. 2.04 SPECIALTY FINISH HARDWARE A. Electronic, Timer‐Controlled Magnetic Lock: Low‐voltage electronic magnetic lock with a holding force of at least 1,200 lbs. for standard 1‐3/4" hollow metal door applications. 1. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC. 2. Current Draw: 0.50 amp at 24 volts. 3. Door/Frame Mounting Position: Manufacturer's standard head mounting. 4. Options: Provide manufacturer's standard adjustable time delay to allow automatic delay relocking signal from 4 to 30 seconds. 5. Power Supply: UL‐listed modular power unit with plug‐in dual control modules and field‐ selectable 12/24V output voltage, 510 Series by Locknetics or approved equal. Provide the following power supply options: a. Time Delay Module: Plug‐in PC card providing an adjustable (0‐30 seconds) delay on relock. 6. Accessories and Hardware: Provide all required accessories, strikes, hardware, trims and other items necessary for a complete and operational locking system. 7. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish, to match finishes specified in paragraph 2.02 above. 8. Approved Manufacturers: a. Magforce 390. Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 b. 510 Series by Locknetics, Hamden, CT, as basis of design. c. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. B. Electronic Lockset Controller: Manufacturer's standard, general‐purpose 24‐hour digital timer, to be compatible with the electronic lockset specified in paragraph A above, with single pole, single throw heavy duty switch rated for 40 amps at 120 volts. 1. Controller shall provide accurate, dependable, fully automatic control on a daily repeating cycle for a 7‐day period. 2. Time of Day Clock: Manufacturer's standard 60‐minute vernier time digital clock. 3. Housing: NEMA‐1 type indoor cabinet of heavy gage sheet steel with permanently hinged, lockable cover. Provide manufacturer's standard knockouts for conduit/wire connections. 4. Manual Control: Provide manufacturer's standard manual operation by means of an ON/OFF switch. Such manual override will not interfere with subsequent automatic operations or require reprogramming of the timer. 5. Finish: Housing shall be manufacturer's standard gray enamel finish. 6. Approved Manufacturers: a. DT7 Automatic Time Switch by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design. b. Manufacturer providing products of same design, function, performance and quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided controller is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic lockset. C. Control Stations: Manufacturer’s standard manual override/emergency exit touch bar, to allow the electronic magnet to be released from the inside of the room. 1. Touch Bar: Manufacturer’s standard 36" long touch bar, handicapped accessible, clear finish. 2. Status Indicator Lights: None. 3. Provide one (1) manual touch bar in each restroom and change room equipped with the specified electronic magnetic lock. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. TSB Series by Securitron, Sparks, NV, as basis of design. b. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function, performance and quality are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding, provided manual control station is by the same manufacturer as the specified electronic lockset. D. Secondary Control Stations: Use motion detector/occupancy sensor for secondary control station. Magnetic lock shall not engage while occupancy sensor identifies room as occupied. See Electrical for specified occupancy sensor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to the successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. B. Ensure that door cutouts or bores for hardware and frame cutouts for strike plates are properly aligned. C. Ensure that the Owner's existing security alarm, resident call, automatic locking or other communicating systems tied to the door hardware have been bypassed prior to commencing work. These systems shall remain powered for all doors not affected by new work. D. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been painted, stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, using proper templates. Installation is specified in Section 06 20 00. Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for new doors, from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified elsewhere. 2. Pulls and Push Plates: 39". 3. Deadlocks: 48". 4. Wide‐Angle Viewer: 60" and 40", unless other accessible height is approved. C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with ANSI A117.1‐1992 and ADA‐1990 requirements. D. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary for smooth operation. E. Adjust operating force for all door closers for compliance with applicable codes and handicapped accessibility standards. 3.03 HARDWARE FURNISHED TO OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Hardware supplier to provide templates to door fabricator. 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and other movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify the Architect prior to bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be allowed by the Owner or the Architect. B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items, but it is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary for a complete installation, particularly in regard to fire‐rated door assemblies. Where items are referred to in the singular, they shall be furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation. C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each other and with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with both related hardware items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used. D. Hardware Notes: 1. Ea. refers to each leaf. 2. LH refers to left‐hand leaf only. 3. RH refers to right‐hand leaf only. 4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier. PART 4 SCHEDULE 4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS Group A 1 ea. Deadlock 1 ea. Emergency exit touch bar 1 ea. Magnetic lock 1‐1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges (1 electric hinge) 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Threshold 2 ea. Kickplates 1 ea. Push/pull 1 ea. Door stop 1 ea. Door bottom Maple Hill Park 08 71 00 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1 set Weatherstripping 1 Power supply 1 Battery 1 Timer Group B 1 ea. Lockset F‐86 1 ea. Deadlock 1‐1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Door stop w/hold open 1 ea. Door bottom 1 set Weatherstripping Group C 1 ea. Hasp and latch 1‐1/2 pr. ea. leaf Hinges 1 ea. Door stop w/hold open 1 ea. Door bottom 1 set Weatherstripping END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 10 28 13 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 10 28 13 COMMERCIAL TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install stainless steel, commercial quality toilet, bath and janitorial accessories and associated hardware. B. Furnish and install stainless steel surface‐mounted, horizontal baby changing station. C. Furnish rough‐in frames supplied to other Sections. D. Furnish electric hand dryers. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects). 2. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 3. Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. 4. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 5. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 6. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metals: Sheet steel toilet partitions. 7. Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry: Framing of rough openings and blocking. 8. Division 22, Mechanical: Fixtures, sinks and lavatories. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Certain toilet accessories shall be furnished by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as scheduled in this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat‐Resisting Chromium‐Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 2. ASTM A269: Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 3. ASTM A276: Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. ASTM A366: Cold‐Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality. 5. ASTM F593: Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. 6. ASTM F594: Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 7. ASTM F2285: Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Stations for Commercial Use. 8. ANSI A117.1: American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Accessories shall be provided by manufacturers with minimum 10 years successful experience in manufacturing components specified in this Section. C. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer, and have minimum 5 years successful experience in projects of similar scale and complexity. D. Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout the project. E. Sustainability Compliance: Refer to Section 01 35 66 for submittal and documentation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product list and data sheets indicating materials, components, Maple Hill Park 10 28 13 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 finishes and method of installation. B. Samples: Provide one (1) sample of representative accessory specified herein, upon request by the Architect. Sample will be returned upon approval. C. Sustainability Submittals: 1. Product Data or other documentation from material manufacturer indicating percentages, by weight, of post‐consumer and pre‐consumer recycled content. Include statement of material costs for each product having recycled content, excluding labor costs for installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver accessories in manufacturer's unbroken cartons or boxes. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. B. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of the work of this Section. C. Recycle packaging materials in accordance with the specified waste management plan. D. Owner‐Furnished Accessories: Contractor shall receive, store and protect the accessories furnished by the Owner. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's 2‐year written warranty for all accessories covering defects in materials and workmanship. B. Baby Changing Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard 5‐year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, including a provision for replacement caused by vandalism. C. Electric Hand Dryers: Provide manufacturer's 5‐year written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Type: Surface‐mounted or semi‐recessed construction, commercial quality accessories, as scheduled in paragraph 2.02. B. Stainless Steel or Metal Components: 1. Sheet Steel: Complying with ASTM A366, cold‐rolled stretcher leveled, 1.25 oz./sq. ft. galvanized coating. 2. Stainless Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A167, commercial grade, 22‐gage. 3. Stainless Steel Tubing: Complying with ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded. 4. Stainless Steel Bars and Miscellaneous Shapes: Complying with ASTM A276. C. Anchorage and Attachment Devices: 1. Adhesive: Epoxy‐type contact cement. 2. Fasteners, Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel, complying with ASTM F593 and F594. 3. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by manufacturer for component and substrate. 4. Anchor Plates: Steel anchor plates as recommended by manufacturer for secure installation. D. Fabrication: 1. Weld and grind smooth all joints of fabricated components. 2. Form exposed surfaces from one (1) sheet of stock, free of joints. 3. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. 4. Form surfaces flat and without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. 5. Back‐prime components where accessories will be in contact with dissimilar building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 6. Hot‐dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. Maple Hill Park 10 28 13 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 7. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Keying: Key all new accessories together. F. Finishes: 1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Satin finish. 2. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin finish. G. Mounting: Concealed‐screw mounting, unless otherwise indicated. Surface‐mounted type, unless scheduled as semi‐recessed. H. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. I. Approved Manufacturers: 1. General: Accessory lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer throughout the project, at least to the extent scheduled. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., N. Hollywood, CA, (818) 982‐9600, and represented locally in Denver, CO, (303) 429‐0133, as basis of design. 3. Bradley Corporation, Menomonee Falls, WI, (414) 354‐0100. 4. American Specialties, Inc., Yonkers, NY, (914) 476‐9000. 5. A&J Washroom Accessories, New Windsor, NY, (914) 562‐3332. 6. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (Gamco), Durant, OK, (800) 451‐5766. 7. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance, design and appearance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 BABY CHANGING STATIONS A. Stainless Steel Baby Changing Station: FDA‐approved molded high‐density polyethylene (HDPE) clad in 18‐gage Type 304 stainless steel, brushed finish, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285. 1. Type: Horizontal‐mount style. 2. Operation: Concealed pneumatic cylinder providing controlled, slow opening and closing. 3. Hinge Mechanism: Reinforced full‐length steel‐on‐steel hinge with integrated hook plate. 4. Changing Surface: 420 sq. in. minimum, contoured, concave and smooth. 5. Safety Straps: Replaceable, snap‐lock, nylon protective holding straps. 6. Mounting: Manufacturer‐provided mounting hardware and 12‐gage steel mounting brackets. 7. Instruction Graphics: Universal molded instructions graphics and safety messages in multiple languages. 8. Approved Model and Manufacturer: Koala Model KB111‐SSRE by Koala Kare Products, Centennial, CO, (888) 733‐3456, or approved equal. 2.03 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS A. General: Fully‐recessed type, porcelain enameled steel housing, U.L.‐listed, 115V, 20 amp, 2300 watts, 50/60 Hz. B. Operation: Manual push‐button. C. Drying Cycle: 30 seconds. D. Features: 1. Fixed nozzle. 2. Provide ground fault interrupter type (GFI) where required by mounting location and governing codes. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard porcelain enamel, with stainless steel nozzle, push button and trims. F. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. G. Sustainability Design Criteria: 1. Recycled Content: No minimum requirement, but Contractor to provide information on recycled content. 2. Local/Regional Materials, Manufactured and Harvested Locally: Contractor to provide information on locally manufactured and locally extracted, harvested or recovered materials, in Maple Hill Park 10 28 13 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 compliance with Section 01 35 66. H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Model RA‐5, manual operation, by World Dryer, Berkeley, IL, (800) 449‐6950. No exceptions. 2.04 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bars, as basis of design: 1. 3‐Piece Horizontal and Vertical at HC Accessible Toilet Compartments: Bobrick B‐6806 x 18", 36" and 42" to 48" lengths with peened gripping surfaces, concealed mounting, 1‐1/2" diameter. B. Mirrors, as basis of design: 1. Sheet Stainless Steel Mirrors: Bobrick B‐1556 surface‐mounted sheet stainless steel, 24" x 36" unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with mounting screws. C. Mop and Broom Holders: Bobrick B‐223 surface‐mounted holder, 24" long with three (3) holders. D. Electric Hand Dryer: Specified in paragraph 2.03 above. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough‐in frames to the job site at appropriate time for building into the work. Provide templates and rough‐in measurements to the Contractor as required. B. Before starting work, notify the Contractor in writing of any conflicts detrimental to the installation or operation of the accessories. C. Ensure that proper blocking has been provided in walls as required for installation of recessed and surface‐mounted accessories and grab bars. D. Ensure that cutouts in specified toilet partitions for thru‐partition mounted accessories have been properly located and sized. Provide templates and rough‐in dimensions to the toilet partition manufacturer. E. Coordinate exact location of accessories with the Architect as necessary. F. Ensure that electrical conduit has been properly located and installed to location(s) of electric hand dryers. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. General: Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Install stainless steel accessories using stainless steel screws, bolts or other attachments. B. Install accessories true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Install Owner‐furnished toilet and bath accessories as scheduled on the Drawings or specified herein, including but not limited to: 1. Surface‐mounted toilet paper holders. 3.04 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Install accessories in public restrooms and other spaces at mounting heights to comply with American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1, current edition, and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), 2012, for handicapped accessible accessories: 1. Mounting Heights (above finished floor): a. Horizontal Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 33"‐36". b. Vertical Grab Bars, Toilet Compartments: 39"‐41" from wall and finished floor. c. Grab Bars, Showers: 33"‐36". Maple Hill Park 10 28 13 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 d. Toilet Paper Holders or Dispensers: 20" to centerline of roller. Verify clearances with grab bars. e. Mirrors: 38" to bottom edge, or as shown on the Drawings. f. Electric Hand Dryers: As recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 48" maximum to operating device/nozzle. B. Balance of accessories not located in handicapped accessible areas to be mounted at manufacturer's recommended height. Comply with all governing regulations. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Quantities are the responsibility of the Contractor. Refer to the Drawings for locations. B. Women's Restroom #1: 1. Grab bars, 3‐piece, as shown on the Drawings. 2. Toilet Paper Holders: One (1) multi‐roll holder per toilet compartment. 3. Baby Changing Station: One (1). 4. Full Mirror. C. Men's Restroom #3: 1. Grab Bars, 3‐piece, as shown on the Drawings. 2. Toilet Paper Holders: One (1) multi‐roll holder per toilet compartment. 3. Baby Changing Station: One (1). 4. Full Mirror. D. Chase Room #2: 1. Mop and Broom Holder: One (1) per mop sink. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 11 65 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 11 65 00 – ATHLETIC AND RECREATIONAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete B. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork and Grading 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Basketball Equipment B. Related Requirements 1. Section 03 30 00 “Cast in Place Concrete” for installing pipe sleeves cast in concrete footings 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch long linear components and 4-inch square sheet components. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide a two-year warrantee (unless otherwise noted) from the date of Substantial Completion. The minimum two-year warranty applies to all aspects of this section including installation and materials. B. Guarantee material used in this section against defects due to any cause for a period of two full tears from the date of acceptance of work. C. Replace materials when it is no longer in satisfactory condition as determined by the City Representative for the duration of the Warranty Period. Make replacements within fourteen days of notification from City Representative. D. This guarantee will not be enforced should materials be subject to vandalism; improper maintenance procedures carried out by the Owner resulting in damage, or other similar circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor. Maple Hill Park 11 65 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT A. Basketball Post: Gared Sports, Inc. model GN 45 Gooseneck Post, 4.5” O.C heavy duty galvanized steel post with four-foot extension, as distributed by Garretson’s Sport Center, Greeley, CO (970) 353-8068, or approved equivalent. B. Backboard: Gared Sports, Inc. model 1850, as distributed by Garretson’s Sport Center, Greeley, CO (970) 353-8068, or approved equivalent. C. Goal: Gared Sports, Inc. Titan Goal model 7750 (with GGN chain net) as distributed by Garretson’s Sport Center, Greeley, CO (970) 353-8068, or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and condition, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C. Install athletic equipment level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings and with the manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 11 69 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 11 69 00 – PLAYGROUND SAFETY SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Organic loose-fill surface. 2. Playground Subdrain 3. Geotextile Filter Fabric 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation. According to CPSC No. 325, this means "the fall height below which a life-threatening head injury would not be expected to occur.” 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Impact Attenuation: According to ASTM F 1292. B. Accessibility of Surface Systems: According to ASTM F 1951. C. Minimum Characteristics for Organic Loose-Fill Surfaces: According to ASTM F 2075. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Test results confirming product has been tested and in compliance with ASTM F-1292-99. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of playground surface system indicated. D. Minimum 1-quart loose-fill surface sealed in a container or storage bag. E. Minimum 12-by-12-inch Sample of geotextile filter fabric. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. G. Material Certificates: For each playground surface system product, signed by manufacturers. H. Maintenance Data: For playground surface system to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ANSI Z34.1 for testing indicated. Maple Hill Park 11 69 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Source Limitations: Obtain playground surface system materials, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide secondary materials including from source recommended by manufacturer of playground surface system materials. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit playground surface system installation to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of playground surface systems with installation of playground equipment by others. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of playground surface system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Reduction in impact attenuation, and deterioration of surface and other materials beyond normal ware and weathering. 2. Warranty Period: a. Organic Loose Fill Surface - Three year manufacturer’s warranty for from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Organic loose fill surface: 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ORGANIC LOOSE-FILL SURFACE A. Engineered Wood Fibers: Random-sized wood fibers, in manufacturer's standard fiber size, approximately 10 times longer than wide; containing no bark, leaves, twigs, or foreign or toxic materials according to ASTM F 2075; graded according to manufacturer's standard specification for material consistency for playground surfaces and for accessibility according to ASTM F 1951. 1. Compressed Material Depth: Not less than twelve-inches (12”) or as indicated on the plan 2.02 PLAYGROUND SUBDRAIN Maple Hill Park 11 69 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 A. Subdrain Collection Pipe beneath Safety Surfacing shall be 4” HDPE Corrugated Perforated Pipe and associated/similarly constructed fittings. B. Subdrain Collection Pipe that is not located beneath the safety surfacing shall be 4” Corrugated HDPE pipe, solid wall pipe and associated/similarly constructed fittings C. Where pipe “daylights” cut exposed end pipe to match slope of adjacent areas, and provide end of pipe with vandal and pest proof cap. Place end of pipe between boulders. 2.03 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRIC A. Soil Separator: Made from non-woven polyester fibers mechanically bonded by needling. Fabric shall meet or exceed the following properties: Property Units Method Grab Strength (min.) 90 lbs. ASTMD-4632 Grab Elongation (min.) 70 lbs. ASTMD-4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength (min.) 40 lbs. ASTMD-4533 Puncture Strength 50 lbs. ASTMD-3787 Mullen Burst Strength 140 lbs. ASTMD-3786 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to playground surface system manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions. Verify that subdrain grades provide positive drainage towards subdrain collection pipe. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with playground surface system manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install playground surface system over area and in thickness indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF LOOSE-FILL PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEMS A. Loose Fill: Place playground surface system materials including manufacturer's standard amount of excess material for compacting mechanically to required depths after Installation of playground equipment support posts and foundations. B. Compacting and Grading: Uniformly compact and grade loose-fill according to manufacturer's written instructions to an even surface free from irregular surface changes as indicated. C. Finish Grading: Hand rake to a smooth finished surface and to required elevations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Maple Hill Park 11 69 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 A. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of playground surface system shall take place according to ASTM F 1292. B. Remove and replace applications of playground surface system where test results indicate that it does not comply with requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with requirements. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 11 65 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 11 65 00 – SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 30 – Cast in Place Concrete 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Drinking Fountain 2. Bike Rack 3. Picnic Table 4. Trash Receptacle 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1. Shop drawings and technical literature from the manufacturer 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Workmanship, fabrication and shop connections shall be in accordance with AWS and AISC specifications. B. Welding shall be done by welder(s) certified for AWS, D.1 structural welding requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery requirements with manufacturer. B. Products shall be delivered to the project site in good condition, and shall be contained in the Manufacturer’s crate/packaging. The Contractor shall not accept delivery of damaged items. Products shall free from defects and damage. Damaged products shall be replaced by the manufacturer at no additional cost. C. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for unloading, lifting, and placement. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Guarantee material used in this section against defects due to any cause for a period of one (1) full year from the date of Substantial Completion of work. B. Replace materials when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the Town Representative for the duration of the Warranty Period. Make replacements within fourteen days of notification from the Town Representative. Maple Hill Park 11 65 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. This guarantee will not be enforced should materials be subject to vandalism; improper maintenance procedures carried out by the Owner involving resulting in damage, or other similar circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 DRINKING FOUNTAIN A. Manufacturer: Most Dependable Fountain B. Model: 10155 SMSS (Pet Fountain Included) C. Finish: Textured Black Powdercoat D. Mounting: Surface Mount E. Phone: (800) 552-6331 F. Quantity: Per plans and details. 2.02 BIKE RACK A. Manufacturer: Belson Outdoors B. Model: Arc Rack C. Color: Matte Black D. Mounting: Surface Mounted E. Factory Representative: 800.323.5664 F. Quantity: Per plans and details 2.03 PICNIC TABLE A. Manufacturer: ULINE B. Model: 6’ Aluminum Table (Model H-3745) C. Color: Aluminum D. Mounting: Model H-3748 (Sold Seperately) E. Factory Representative: 800.295.5517 F. Quantity: Per plans and details 2.04 TRASH RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturer: Prestwick Limited B. Model: FL-RCD40 C. Trim Color: Black D. Panel Colors: (1) Black, (1) Blue E. Mounting: Surface Mount. F. Contact: 888-342-6981 Maple Hill Park 11 65 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 G. Quantity: 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Installation shall be in accordance with the plans and details and with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Site Furnishing shall be installed in the locations and quantities shown on the plan and details. C. Furnishings shall be installed plumb. Provide leveling nuts and fill gap with non-shrink grout as required. D. Where applicable, the Owner’s Representative shall approve the site furnishing locations prior to fastening in place. E. Use templates, provided by the manufacturer, to properly position mounting bolts. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 31 23 23 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contractor shall provide excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work related to building structures. B. Prepare subgrade for building slabs, sidewalks, site pavements and other structural improvements. C. Shore and brace excavations as required. D. Dewater excavations as necessary. E. Finish grading and place topsoil adjacent to structures and other areas of the site disturbed by construction activities, unless arranged for otherwise. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 14 13, Access to Site. 2. Section 01 35 66, Green Building Guidelines (for non‐LEED certified projects.) 3. Section 01 45 23, Testing: Soils Report. 4. Section 01 57 13, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 5. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 6. Section 07 21 13, Foundation Insulation: Rigid board insulation and prefabricated drainage board materials. 7. Section 07 26 00, Vapor Retarders and Barriers: Vapor barriers beneath concrete slab‐on‐grades. 8. Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing: Finish Grading. 9. Section 31 12 00, Selective Clearing and Pruning. 10. Section 31 23 00, Excavating, Filling and Grading: Retaining walls and sitework unrelated to structures. 11. Section 31 23 33, Trenching, Backfilling and Grading. 12. Applicable Division 32 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil. 13. Section 33 41 00, Storm Drainage Utilities: Perimeter drain system. 14. Applicable Sections of Division 23, Mechanical, and Division 26, Electrical Specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Soil Compaction Tests: 1. ASTM D698: Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft‐lbf/ft3). a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment of the testing laboratory. b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed. c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material encountered or utilized. d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity. 2. ASTM D1557: Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft‐lbf/ft3). 3. ASTM D1777: Standard Test Method for Thickness of Textile Materials. 4. ASTM D4253: Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. 5. ASTM D4254: Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. 6. ASTM D4355: Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus. 7. ASTM D4491: Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permitivity. 8. ASTM D4632: Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles. 9. ASTM D4751: Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Open Size of a Geotextile. 10. ASTM D4833: Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products. 11. ASTM D7382: Standard Test Methods for Determination of Maximum Dry Unit Weight and Water Content Range for Effective Compaction of Granular Soils Using a Vibrating Hammer. C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of supplier. 1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the following reference standards. a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. b. ASTM D2049. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson dated January 10, 2017 is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such conditions. C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. D. Underground Obstructions: 1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings. However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered. 2. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation. 3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in the event of conflict. a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict. b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Architect/Engineer. 4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and appurtenances. 5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall apply: a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials. b. Restore to original conditions or better. 6. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction. E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic. B. Protect existing trees to remain. C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance with requirements of Sections 01 14 13; 01 31 13 and 01 41 00. Protect all utilities which are to remain. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation in safe and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction. E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and governing authorities. F. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structures, service lines and pipe chases which may be damaged by excavation work. G. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost. H. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work. 1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work. B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper performance of the work. C. Soils Engineer shall make an open‐hole inspection of the excavation for each building prior to the placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Soils Engineer shall also inspect structural backfill for building foundations and/or slabs‐on‐grade prior to forming of footings or grade beams, if not supported on undisturbed soil. D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified. E. Compaction Tests: 1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for interior or exterior concrete slabs‐ on‐grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork, unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report. 2. Foundation Walls: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test for each 50 lin. ft., or portion thereof, of building perimeter for compaction adjacent to building foundation walls, unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report. 3. Retaining Walls: Refer to Section 31 23 00. 4. Asphalt Paving: Refer to Section 32 12 16. 5. Utility Trenches: Refer to Section 31 23 33. F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make necessary repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of settlement for a period of two (2) years after Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS A. General: Use onsite or imported soil approved by the Soils Engineer for rough fill and for backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material shall be clean, compactable earth, free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic substances or large rocks. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Structural Fill: On‐site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials approved by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and extended to original undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where approved on‐site material is available or where shown on the Drawings. 1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of less than 1%. C. Existing On‐site Fill: Existing on‐site fill previously placed on the site in an uncontrolled manner to construct parking areas and landscape slopes. Considered unsuitable for support of foundations, wall backfill and slabs‐on‐grade. May be used as structural fill underneath exterior concrete flatwork or general overlot fill provided all debris, overside material (greater than 6") and organic matter is removed. D. Native Sands: On‐site excavated native granular materials generally usable for fills and embankment construction with drying, wetting or other reworking as necessary to obtain conformance to the Drawings and Specifications. May be used as structural fill beneath concrete floor slab or as wall backfill. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use. E. Bedrock: On‐site sandstone and claystone bedrock, medium hard to very hard. Utilizing heavy duty excavation equipment should be anticipated when excavations extend into hard to very hard bedrock. May be placed in landscape areas. F. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non‐porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel graded from 3/8" to 1‐1/2". G. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of organic debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve. H. Embankment Material: Refer to Section 31 23 00. I. Topsoil: Refer to landscaping sections of Division 32. J. Drainage Fill: Natural or crushed stone or gravel with 100% passing a 1" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve. K. Aggregate Base: Refer to Section 32 12 16 and/or 32 13 13. L. Unsuitable Materials: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris or materials having unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work. All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. 1. Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper gradation will not be classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating or blending with other materials as determined by the Soils Engineer. 2.02 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Geotech Drainage Fabric: Mirafi 140 N filter fabric or equal, unless another specific material is called for on the Civil Drawings, in which case that material will govern. B. Perimeter Drainage Tile: Perforated PVC pipe, minimum 4" diameter, or other sizes as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional excavation is authorized by the Architect/Engineer and/or rock excavation is encountered. Do not proceed with the work until the material has been cross‐sectioned and classified. 1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on‐site soils and other materials indicated on the Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface soil data and not classified as rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated without drilling, blasting or ripping, or boulders larger than 1/2 cu. Yd. in volume. B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. 1. Ensure that modifications to the existing site irrigation system have been completed, or lines shut off or capped within the area of construction, prior to beginning work. C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and wattles or other required accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan, or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01 57 13, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. D. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas within construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect/Engineer. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. Also refer to Section 31 12 00. 1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the Architect/Engineer. E. Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all workers and the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and barricades. F. Contractor shall adequately shore or support and brace during excavation of existing soils adjacent to building foundation walls. G. Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls, grade beams, and pier caps prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and compacting operations. H. Geotechnical Engineer: The Soils Engineer shall inspect the natural soil at the bottom of excavations for structures, prior to forming or placing foundations. Provide Engineer with 48 hours notice (exclusive of weekends and holidays) when the areas are expected to be ready for such inspections. 1. Do not prepare subgrade or place concrete until such inspection has taken place (or waived by Engineer) and resulting recommendations of Engineer have been carried out. 3.02 ROUGH GRADING A. Rough grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations ready for finish grading and surface treatment. Maintain the following: 1. Planting Areas: 6" below finished grade elevation. 2. Concrete Sidewalks: 4" below finished grade elevation, unless granular backfill is specified below walks. 3. Building Slabs‐on‐Grade: 8" minimum below finished slab elevation, or as required by the Soils Report for the slab thickness and thickness of granular backfill specified. 4. Site Pavements: As required by the Soils Report for the slab thickness or overall pavement thickness specified. Refer to Sections 32 12 16 and 32 13 13. B. Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify surface to depth of 6", bring to 2% wet of optimum moisture and compact as follows: 1. Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density at 2% wet of optimum moisture content ASTM D698. 2. Pavement Areas: 95% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698. 3. Planting Areas: 90% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698. C. Place fill in lifts of 6" to 8" maximum loose layers, bring to 2% wet of OMC and compact each layer as specified above. D. Stockpile existing topsoil and fill materials removed from excavation for reuse in final grading. E. Contractor shall take special care in rough grading and filling of site areas which can lead to non‐uniform settling and compaction. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: Excavate site to the extent required for new construction. 1. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing grade elevations. 2. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect/Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3. Under footings, foundation walls, grade beams, retaining walls or other structural elements, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering required top elevation. a. Coordinate with Structural Engineer for additional reinforcing requirements at taller foundation walls. 4. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified in paragraph 3.02.C. B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this Project without written authorization from the Owner's principal representative. C. Stability of Excavation: 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Ensure the stability of materials under foundation structures of existing buildings adjacent to new excavations. Shore and brace as required during excavation and maintain until new foundations or compacted backfill materials are in place. 3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. 4. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph 3.06. D. Sheeting and Shoring: 1. Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as necessary to prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work. 2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused by earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and position. 3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or horizontal thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe. E. Material Storage: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required for backfilling. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Stockpile materials away from sidewalks, streets, alleys and other public areas that are to remain accessible during construction. Maintain site access as required for workers and the Owner. Refer to Section 01 14 13 for required site access. 4. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph 3.09. F. Excavation for Trenches: Refer to Section 31 23 33, Trenching, Backfilling and Grading. G. Weather Protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 F. 2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather. 3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces. 4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment. 5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. General: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/‐ 0.10' and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and inspection. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. C. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph 3.06. D. Do not interfere with normal 45 bearing splay of any foundation. E. Under building slabs, remove minimum 8" of existing material below finished slab elevation. F. Bottom of perimeter drain shall be sloped uniformly at 0.5% minimum to sump pump or gravity discharge, as shown on the Drawings. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. General: Do not start backfilling until utility services, dampproofing or waterproofing systems, foundation insulation and/or prefabricated drainage board materials have been inspected and approved. B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition. C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy. D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill materials. E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required density. F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use a method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system. H. Where imbalanced pressures will develop on foundation walls in basement or crawlspace situations, ensure that floor framing and decking is in place prior to backfilling. I. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance and leave in place until their removal is approved by Architect/Engineer. H. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. I. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures. J. Utility Trench Backfill: Refer to Section 31 23 33, Trenching, Backfilling and Grading. K. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs‐on‐grade, as specified in paragraph 3.02 above. 3.06 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On‐site natural soils, devoid of debris, or imported, non‐expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD. B. Building Slabs: On‐site natural soils or select granular non‐expansive materials approved by the Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 95% of SPD. C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD. D. Site Pavements and Sidewalks: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course. Compact each layer of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM D698‐78. E. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD. F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and materials being compacted. 1. Sheepfoot Roller: If used provide with cleaner bars attached as to prevent the accumulation of materials between the tamper feet. 2. Rollers: Use rollers so designed that the effective weight can be increased as required to obtain specified compaction. 3. Vibrating plate compactors. G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.07 FINISH GRADING A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been contaminated with petroleum products. B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within 0.10' of required subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation. C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 5% for the first 10', unless indicated otherwise on the Civil Drawings. D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified. Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement. E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features as shown on the Drawings. 3.08 PLACING TOPSOIL A. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section, unless provided by Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, or arranged for otherwise. B. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6" in all site areas disturbed by new construction, using suitable stockpiled, on‐site material, supplemented with imported material as required. C. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather. D. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas receiving sod, mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing. E. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading. F. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage which may be caused by grading equipment. G. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6" without specific approval of the Architect. H. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping specified in other Sections of Division 32. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of compaction methods with specified density in accordance with: 1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil ‐ Aggregate In‐Place by Nuclear Methods, or, 2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In‐Place by the Sand Cone Method. 3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In‐Place by Rubber‐Balloon Method. B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above. C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/‐ 2% of optimum moisture. Add water, harrow, disc, blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture content and adequate protection. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work of this Section by the Owner. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. Maple Hill Park 31 23 23 ‐ 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Excess Fill: Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off of Owner's property. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 31 63 29 ‐ 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drill pier shafts as indicated on the Drawings, including locations, diameters of shafts, top elevations, estimated lengths measured in feet from the top of pier, minimum penetration into bearing strata, minimum length and details of construction. Piers shall be drilled in locations as shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to: 1. Exterior grade beams and pilasters of structures. B. Furnish and place shaft liner materials, if specified. C. Furnish and place steel reinforcing materials. D. Furnish and place concrete for drilled piers. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 2. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents: Caisson boring logs. 3. Section 31 23 23, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Grading. 4. Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 5. Section 03 30 00, Cast‐in‐Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Perform all work in accordance with local and state ordinances and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01 41 00, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Work of this Section shall be performed by a specialist in drilled pier construction. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson dated January 10, 2017, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. The Contractor is to examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. B. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review, showing locations and all details necessary for fabrication and placing of reinforcement, without reference to the Drawings. B. Boring Log: Submit sample form of caisson boring log, complying with requirements of Section 01 78 39. 1.05 SURVEY WORK A. General Contractor shall conduct the layout work for each pier to the lines and levels required before excavation. Record and maintain all information pertinent to each pier, cooperate with testing and inspection agencies to provide data for their reports and submit a report to the Architect/Engineer containing the following for each caisson: 1. Identification mark. 2. Diameter. Maple Hill Park 31 63 29 ‐ 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Actual centerline location. 4. Actual bottom and top elevations and top of bedrock elevation, including overrun or underrun. 5. Variation of shaft from plumb. 6. Description of soil materials. 7. Description, location and dimension of obstructions. 8. Description, diameter, and top and bottom elevations of temporary or permanent casings. 9. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground and means of control. 10. Size, number and position of reinforcing steel, including dowels. 11. Deviations from specified tolerances (shaft location and plumbness). 12. Water conditions during drilling and concrete placing. 13. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 14. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 15. Locations of construction joints. 16. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered and deviations from requirements. 17. Bottom and top elevations and top of bedrock. 18. Overrun or underrun. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Concrete testing will be performed as specified in Sections 01 45 23 and 03 30 00. B. The Owner shall employ a Soils Engineer to inspect the bearing material. If the bearing stratum at design depth is not suitable, the excavation shall be drilled deeper as directed by the Soils Engineer or the Architect/Engineer. Maximum length for any pier shall not exceed 30 pier diameters. Where the specified pier type would exceed this length, the pier shall be redrilled to the next larger diameter with 2' minimum additional penetration than the original pier type. Reinforce in accordance with the pier schedule for the larger diameter or with steel area of 0.005 times the gross pier area. C. Holes shall be inspected by the Architect/Engineer immediately prior to placing concrete. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours before drilling operations. D. Coordinate all testing operations and notify necessary parties as required so tests can be scheduled. 1.07 BASIS OF BID A. Lump sum bids shall be based on the number of piers, design lengths and diameters as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Actual lengths may vary according to the actual bedrock elevation and the bearing value of material encountered. Bids quoted shall include full compensation for labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete installation. B. Final payment will be based on actual lengths of various diameter piers, in place and accepted. Adjustment of the Contract Sum will be based on the net difference between the total footage of overruns and underruns. Total footage shall be determined by actual length of the concrete pier required to meet minimum total length and minimum penetration requirements. Minimum total length of piers shall be as noted on the Drawings and in the Soils Report. C. The Contractor shall quote in his Proposal the unit price per foot for overruns and underruns. Refer to Bid Form and Section 01 22 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Materials and resulting concrete shall be as specified in Sections 03 20 00 and 03 30 00. Maple Hill Park 31 63 29 ‐ 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: Use equipment of sufficient size and capacity to excavate shafts to depths, diameters, sizes and penetrations indicated and within the specified tolerances. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and provide sufficient quantity of equipment to maintain the projected schedule of the work. B. General Contractor shall perform cutting, filling and compacting operations as required to provide access for drilling equipment and shall remove excess excavated material. C. If refusal is encountered before required length of penetration is attained, notify Architect/Engineer immediately. D. Oversize pier holes by not more than 1/2" on all sides of the shaft to accommodate insertion of liner. Clean shafts of all debris. E. Cut shear rings into sides of bedrock at quantities, intervals, locations and dimensions shown on the Drawings, if applicable. Clean shafts of all debris. 3.02 DEWATERING A. Place no concrete in more than 6" of water. Properly dewater hole if more than this is present. If water cannot be removed from excavation, halt drilling operations and notify the Soils Engineer. Concrete shall be placed under water using a "tremie" or other approved methods. 3.03 TEMPORARY SHAFT PROTECTION A. When required to prevent cave‐ins, to dewater or for inspection of bearing surfaces, provide full length watertight steel casings of sufficient thickness to withstand compression, displacement and withdrawal stresses. Place in manner to form seal at bedrock when required to dewater hole. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Locate centerline of piers on centerline of bearing construction, unless otherwise shown. Do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Centerline Location: 5% of actual diameter. 2. Variation to Plumb: 1‐1/2% of total depth. 3. Area (at any Horizontal Plane): 5% of design area. 4. Minimum Total Length: As scheduled on the Structural Drawings. 5. Minimum Penetration into Firm Bedrock: As scheduled on the Structural Drawings. B. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide additional or corrective construction acceptable to the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Prior to placing concrete, furnish and install all reinforcing and dowels as shown on the Drawings. Install anchor bolts furnished by others. B. Design, fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be as specified in Section 03 20 00 and shown on the Drawings. C. Before placing, clean reinforcing of loose rust, scale, mud and other material which could affect bond. D. Place reinforcing accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole. Hold securely in place during concreting, using templates for dowels and anchor bolts. E. Cross‐stake locations of all piers so that centerlines may be retained after drilling for use in placing dowels and anchor bolts. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Fill piers with concrete immediately after drilling and inspection. Maple Hill Park 31 63 29 ‐ 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Pour concrete into clean, dry excavations by means that will ensure against segregation of the aggregates. Do not allow concrete to hit sides of excavation or reinforcement. Provide mechanical vibration for consolidation of at least the top 5' of each shaft. C. Piers shall be poured in one (1) continuous operation. If necessary to stop concreting, bring concrete to a true level surface inside the pier and install dowels of size and number as required by the Structural Engineer. D. Maintain vertical sides of shaft at top to prevent concrete from mushrooming. Use appropriate cylindrical forms if sides are not vertical. Provide protection around top of excavation to prevent entry of soil or other foreign matter until concrete has set. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Walkways and Plazas. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” 2. 31 20 00 “Earth Moving 3. 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" 4. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by Terracon, January 10, 2017 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Integral Color Pigments. 8. Chemical Stain. 9. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 10. Joint fillers. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. E. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of decorative cement concrete pavement systems. F. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, colors and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owners Representative. 2. Notify Owners Representative seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Owners Representative’s approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Owner’s Representative. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.’ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.02 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. See Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT A. Provide where indicated on plans. B. Fiber reinforcement shall comply with Division 03 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A, flat sheet. E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A, Grade 60; deformed. F. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fas- tening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar sup- ports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified. 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing Compound for Standard Grey Concrete: Prokrete Apromulsion @ 50A, white or Approved Substitution. 2.06 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751 B. Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete: 1. Manufacturer: Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 a. Davis Colors manufactured by Davis Colors; phone 213-269-7311, or approved equivalent. b. Or equivalent, approved by Owner’s Representative. 2. Materials: Pigments shall contain pure, concentrated mineral pigments especially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979. 3. Packaging: If pigments are to be added to mix at Site, furnish pigments in pre-measured Mix-Ready disintegrating bags to minimize job site waste. 4. Colors: As indicated on the drawings a. Concrete mix shall contain the dosage rate of pigments indicated in the Manufactuer’s instructions. Dosage rate shall be based on weight of portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, lime and other cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand. Refer to the site plans for locations of the various colors of concrete. 2.07 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project. B. Refer to Drawings for cement type specified. C. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. D. Mix Design: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Ready Mixed Concrete: ASTM C 94/ C 94M. 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I except use Type II or V as required by Soils Report, 6 sacks per cubic yard minimum. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Clean, hard, and durable coarse aggregate, conforming to ASTM C33, 0.75" maximum size. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project. 4. Water: Potable source free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids, and organic mat-ter. 5. Slump: 1" to 4". 6. Water Cement Ratio: 0.44-0.48 maximum. 7. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi minimum. 8. Comply with the requirements of the project Geotechnical Engineering Report. E. Cement: Color shall be gray. F. Sand: Clean, hard, and durable washed concrete sand, conforming to ASTM C33.Color shall be locally available natural sand. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project. G. Admixtures: 1. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C 260/ C 260 M, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures, to achieve 5 to 7 percent entrained air. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. 3. Prohibited Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures or thiocyanate. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.03 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least twenty-four (24) hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals indicated on the Drawings. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction /Control Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-third of the concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. H. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. K. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.07 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power- driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. C. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.08 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with twelve (12) inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least twelve (12) inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.09 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one (1) composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five (5) compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at seven (7) days and two (2) specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any three (3) consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner’s Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Owners Representative, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. Maple Hill Park 32 13 13 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least fourteen (14) days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two (2) days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 13 73 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 13 73 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03, ‘Concrete Paving’ 2. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by CTL Thompson (January10, 2017) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint- sealant samples in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Maple Hill Park 32 13 73 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, non- sag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS. 1. Products: a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. c. Approved substitute. Maple Hill Park 32 13 73 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 2.05 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Maple Hill Park 32 13 73 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.05 PROTECTION 3.06 Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 15 40 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 15 40 – CRUSHED STONE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install: 1. Crusher Fines. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS A. Section 31 00 00: Earthwork. B. Section 31 10 00: Site Preparation and Conditioning. C. Section 32 92 00: Lawns and Grasses. D Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving E. Geotechnical Engineering Report prepared by CTL Thompson (January 10, 2017) F. Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Contract, and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. Gravel Materials: Subject to inspection and acceptance. Provide source location and sample if requested prior to delivery to site. 2. Inspection will be made periodically during path installation, and at project completion and end of warranty period. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sample of crusher fines as specified to the Owner’s Representative for approval at least 48 hours prior to installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stockpile delivered materials near path location. B. Material will be inspected upon delivery to site. C. Immediately remove unacceptable material from site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Visit site to determine existing conditions. B. Path construction to precede seeding and planting operations. Maple Hill Park 32 15 40 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Crusher Fines. Color - Brown. 1. 1/4" minus crusher fines gravel - 2 parts. 2. 3/16" crusher fines gravel - 1 part. B. Stabilizer. 1. Manufacturer: Stabilizer Solutions, 800.336.2468 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Visit site to determine existing conditions. B. Centerline of path to follow existing graded alignment per plans. Obtain Landscape Architect approval for deviations. C. Grades: Verify grades of path to not exceed 5%. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage existing utilities in or near the project area. B. General: Do not perform work when existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory results. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Cut and remove woody or herbaceous vegetation within the path area. Haul debris off-site. D. Scrape 3" - 6" deep trail bed 2' wider than ultimate trail width. Deposit soils from excavation on sides of trail. E. Grade subgrade level and compact with sheepsfoot roller to 95% optimum density, in accordance with AASHTO T-99. Contractor is not required to scarify and re-compact the next 6" below this sub-grade level. 1. Inspect exposed surface for unsuitable soil, areas of loose or soft soil, disturbed or moist soils. 2. Remove soft, yielding subgrade material and backfill with 1 1/2" pit run. F. Excavated sections and adjacent areas shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. Crusher fines shall not be installed until subgrade is approved by Owner’s Representative. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stabilizer: Pre-mix with crusher fines and install per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Compacted Gravel Crusher Fines: Maple Hill Park 32 15 40 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Spread thoroughly mixed portions of crusher fines gravel uniformly and in even stream along trail bed. 2. Rake gravel crusher fines to uniform 4"-5" with 2% max. cross slope, per details. 3. Backfill excavation to ultimate trail edge with scraper spoils, using backfill to hold edge of gravel crusher fines in place. 4. Immediately roll gravel material and excavated area with self-propelled, vibratory roller of sufficient weight to compact crusher fines into smooth firm surface. Rolling shall continue until material is firmly locked and keyed together. The appearance and surface shall be uniform with ridges removed. Surface shall not vary more than 1/2" when measured with a ten foot straight edge applied parallel to the centerline. Correct any variation by loosening, reshaping and re-rolling. When finished, compacted trail shall be a minimum of 4" deep in all locations. a. In any areas where there are underground pipes, use extreme caution when compacting trail to protect pipe. Discuss alternative compaction methods with Owner’s Representative prior to execution for approval if pipe hazard is anticipated. 5. At completion of surfacing, remove excess spoils from along trail edge and deposit on site as directed by Owner’s Representative. 6. Rake along all trail edges to ensure finished appearance and positive drainage away from trail and into new drainage structures or swales. 7. Water activates stabilizer. It is essential that stabilizer be watered thoroughly through the entire depth. To achieve saturation of stabilized aggregate profile, 25 to 45-gallons of water per 1-ton must be applied. During water application, test moisture penetration using a probing device reaching full depth. 3.04 CLEANING A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for daily removal of mud and debris from road surfaces on a daily basis 1. Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off-site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for making a reasonable effort to protect the work from vandalism. Vandalism shall be brought to the attention of the Owner. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 40 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 40 00 – SITE ROCK WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section shall include excavation, grading and installation of site boulders placed at the locations shown on the Drawings. The materials to be used for the construction of such structures shall be as specified herein. Site Rock Work includes the following: 1. Landscape Boulders 2. Stepping Stones 3. Pond Edge Rip Rap 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 32 13 12 “Concrete Paving” B. Section 31 10 00 “Site Preparation and Conditioning” 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit three (3) samples of each stone type that represents the full range of colors/staining that can be expected. 1.04 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain each type or class of material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's / supplier’s plant / from one source. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Contractor to guarantee walls from settling, shifting or structural failure for a period of one year from final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BOULDERS A. Approved Suppliers: 1. Albert Frei and Sons. (303) 289-1837 2. The Gallegos Corporation (970) 926.3737 3. Colorado Materials, Inc. (303) 682-2314 4. Or approved equivalent. B. Boulder – Type A: 1. Stone Type: Mountain Granite 2. Color: Black/Grey 3. Size: 18” Urban Drainage Boulders, Appx 18” Tall x 30” Wide x 24” Deep, 1/2 Ton Minimum Size Maple Hill Park 32 40 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.02 STEPPING STONES A. Approved Suppliers: 1. Pioneer Sand Company, Inc. (303) 841-3737 2. Landscape Solutions and Supply, (720) 220-6481 3. Colorado Materials, Inc. (303) 682-2314 4. Or approved equivalent. B. Stepping Stones: 1. Stone Type: Colorado Buff Sandstone 2. Color: Tan 3. Thickness: Per plans and details 4. Size: Per plan and details 5. Edges: fractured, irregular shape 6. Surface: Top surface of stepping stones shall be free from fractures, and clefts exceeding 1/8” in height, and surface shall be stable and durable. 2.03 POND EDGE RIP RAP A. Approved Suppliers: 1. Albert Frei and Sons. (303) 289-1837 2. The Gallegos Corporation (970) 926.3737 3. Colorado Materials, Inc. (303) 682-2314 4. Or approved equivalent. B. Pond Edge Rip Rap 1. Stone Type: Mountain Granite 2. Color: Black/Grey 3. Size: Type M 2.04 AGGREGATE BACKFILL A. Approved Suppliers: 1. Albert Frei and Sons. (303) 289-1837 2. The Gallegos Corporation (970) 926.3737 3. Colorado Materials, Inc. (303) 682-2314 4. Or approved equivalent. B. AGGREGATE BACKFILL 1. Stone Type: Mountain Granite 2. Color: Black/Grey Maple Hill Park 32 40 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Size: 3/4“ Angular Crushed Rock Clean, Washed PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SELECTION OF STONE A. Owner’s Representative shall be contacted to participate in selection of boulders/stone at stone supplier’s yard at Owner’s representative option. If stone supplier’s yard is not local, the Contractor shall submit photos of available stones/boulders for Owner’s review/selection. 3.02 HANDLING A. Handling of the boulders shall be carried out in such a way that the boulders are not damaged or scarred. Damage stones/boulders may be rejected by the Owner Representative. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions and grades area as specified and indicated before beginning work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by the Installer. 3.04 PLACEMENT A. Placement of Landscape Boulders and Boulders Placed in Paved Areas: 1. Place boulders in the configuration shown on the Drawings. 2. Place boulders with most attractive face up (as determined by Owner’s Representative) facing activity areas, unless otherwise noted or directed by the Owner’s Representative. 3. Compact subgrade beneath boulders to 95 standard proctor density. 4. Boulders shall be seated firmly in place and shall not wobble or move after installation is complete. 5. Bury approximately 1/3 the height of the stone/boulder, unless otherwise noted. Expose boulder face as indicated on the details and grading plan. 6. Locations and quantity shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Final placement of boulders shall be reviewed and approved on site by the Owner’s Representative prior to placing paving, surfacing and landscaping in abutting areas. B. Placement of Stepping Stones: 1. Place stepping stones in the configuration shown in the plans and details. 2. Place stepping stones with most attractive face up (as determined by Owner’s Representative) facing activity areas, unless otherwise noted or directed by the Owner’s Representative. 3. Stepping stones shall be seated firmly in place and shall not wobble or move after installation is complete. Maple Hill Park 32 40 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. Locations and quantity shall be as indicated in the Drawings. Final placement of stepping stones shall be reviewed and approved on site by the Owner’s Representative prior to final installation. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Remove unneeded stone debris from the site. B. Clean dirt, debris, trash and other deleterious material from stone surfaces and surrounding areas. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 81 00 PUMPING SYSTEM INTAKE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the pump station intake system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of pre-cast wet well sections. C. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of wet well intake pipe, intake screen and other components specified in the Construction Documents. D. Coordination with site work, grading, pump system installation, building/enclosure construction and any necessary dewatering. 1.02 DISCREPANCIES A. It is the intent of these plans and specifications that the pump system intake be complete and functional. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that the equipment furnished is compatible and adheres to all regulations. Note any discrepancies immediately and report to the Owner’s Representative for clarification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings, and materials associated with the installation of the pre-cast concrete wet well, intake screen and intake piping. Quantities of materials need not be included. B. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for all equipment supplied. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details or specifications. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. D. Testing: Submit a proof of testing report following completion of each test listed in the Specifications or Construction Documents. Unless otherwise noted, include name of test, date of test, name of the individual completing the test, name of the company completing the test and a summary of the test results. If system fails test, document any and all retests until system passes test. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Work and materials must be in accordance with the latest edition of the International Building Code, International Plumbing Code, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities. B. When the construction documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. If quantities are provided either in specifications or on these drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. D. Pre-cast concrete wet well shop drawings from the manufacturer must be signed and sealed by a State of Colorado Registered Professional Engineer - Structural. 1.05 TESTING A. Notify the Owner’s Representative five days in advance of testing. B. Hydrostatic Testing: 1. Hydrostatic pressure testing of PVC intake piping must be conducted prior to backfilling wet well or installation of intake screen. Plug the end of intake pipe and fill wet well to normal water level. Allow water level in wet well stabilizes for a period of one hour. Mark water level. Then Intake pipe leakage test will be deemed acceptable if the static water level in the wet well remains constant for 6- hours after stabilization without providing additional water. 2. Subsections of intake pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Owner’s Representative. 3. Furnish pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retests. 4. All costs, including travel expenses for site visits by the Engineer, for any re-inspection that may be required due to non-compliance with the Construction Documents must be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Compaction Testing: 1. Conduct compaction testing for every 2-feet of compacted backfill. Testing must be completed by an independent agency. 2. The test results must be provided to the contractor and Owner’s Representative within 1 business day. 3. If any tested section fails test, the Contractor must excavate backfill material and compact per the specifications. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS A. The purpose of on-site reviews by the Owner’s Representative is to observe the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents and to address questions with regards to the irrigation pump system intake installation. 1. Scheduled reviews such as those for testing should be scheduled with the Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications. 2. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project. 3. A Final Inspection will occur at the completion of the installation. The intent of the Final Inspection is to verify that all installation; testing; maintenance and operation submittals; and project record drawing submittals are completed prior to the start of the Maintenance and Guarantee/Warranty periods. 4. All costs, including travel expenses and site visits by the Owner’s Representative(s) for additional Inspection(s) that may be required after the Final Inspection due to non- compliance with the Construction Documents are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1.07 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives concrete and plumbing materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty pump system intake materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner’s Representative. B. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. D. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY A. Materials used in the system must be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and must be the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Make complete submittals of all manufacturers’ data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that they: 1. Have investigated the proposed substitution and found that it is the same or better quality, level, capacity, function, or appearance than the specified product, and can demonstrate that to the Owner’s Representative or Engineer. 2. Will coordinate the installation and make all modifications to the work which may be required for complete installation and operation of the system. C. The Owner’s Representative will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection. D. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL A. Provide shop drawings showing complete information for the fabrication and installation of the precast concrete sections. Include special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. B. Provide layout dimensions, and identification of each precast unit. Detail inserts, connections, blockouts, joints, accessories and openings. C. Manufacturer of precast concrete units is responsible for design of reinforcement and its placement. Fabricate units with concrete having minimum compressive strength of 4,000 PSI at 28 days using Type I-II cement. 1. Furnish test reports of concrete indicating compressive strength. 2. Certify that the concrete units fabricated and installed will support the required design loads. D. Fabricate precast sections in conformance with ASTM C-478 designation for manufacturing, testing, and quality control. E. Furnish precast units with concrete finish equal to smooth steel formed as-cast concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, minor cracking, chips and spalls, and normal color variations will be permitted. F. Furnish precast concrete sections manufactured with tongue and groove joints installed with a joint sealant. G. Furnish access steps with epoxy coating and rubber step. H. Seal intake pipe penetration as described in the Construction Documents. I. Furnish shop drawing with Registered Professional Engineers (PE) seal. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. 2. Use rubber-gasketed pipe equipped with factory installed reinforced gaskets. Use Gasketed pipe joints conforming to “Laboratory Qualifying Tests” section of ASTM D3139. Use gasket material conforming to ASTM F477. Use Harco or approved equal rubber-gasketed deep bell ductile iron fittings conforming to ASTM A-536 and ASTM F-477. Use lubricant approved by pipe manufacturer. 2.05 FILL MATERIALS A. Stabilization material 1. Provide self compacting material as base beneath the wet well. B. Structural Fill and Backfill 1. Non-expansive earth materials obtained off site to be used for fill material. 2. Organic materials, silts, claystone, other bedrock, and high plasticity clays will not be allowed. 3. Free of trash, glass, broken concrete, or other damaging material. 4. Free of rocks and stones larger than 2” in diameter. 5. Import additional material, if required, using an approved self compacting pit run sand or gravel. 2.06 LAKE INTAKE SCREEN A. Lake Intake Screen: as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Provide any special tools or servicing tools for screen as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. A. Verify locations of underground utilities. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.02 DRAINAGE, DEWATERING, AND EROSION CONTROL A. Comply with all Federal, State, and Local Regulations dealing with site drainage, dewatering, and erosion control including permitting requirements. B. Provide all means necessary to accomplish drainage, dewatering, and erosion control required for completion of the project. C. Provide drainage control measures to prevent surface runoff from entering excavations. D. Manage all surface water and pumped water to minimize sediment transport. E. Dewater each excavation area to lower the ground water level to a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the excavation. F. Maintain the lowered ground water level and keep excavations free of standing water until the construction is completed to the extent that no damage to the subgrade, structure, or other work will result from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or seepage. G. Use sumps, gravel blankets, well points, drainage lines, or other means necessary to accomplish the above. 3.03 SHEETING AND SHORING A. Use sheeting and shoring where banks are not cut back on a stable slope and as necessary to prevent caving or sliding; and to protect the work and adjacent structures and facilities. All work must conform to current applicable regulations. B. Sheeting and shoring must be designed by a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the State of Colorado, to withstand all applicable earth, surcharge, and hydrostatic loads and must be built and maintained in accordance with the design. 1. Provide shop drawings for system designed and sealed by Professional Engineer. C. Support sheeting to avoid load concentration or horizontal thrust on underground structures. D. Sheeting removal: 1. Remove sheeting material as required for backfill and compaction process only. 2. Use effective methods to protect construction, other structures, utilities, and properties during sheeting removal. 3. Fill voids left by sheeting removal with dry compacted sand. 3.04 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Excavate to permit the pipes and the precast wet well to be set at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe to finish grade) per installation details. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill must be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum diameter. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe must be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. D. Backfill pipe in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6- inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil. E. Backfill pre-cast concrete wet well in following manner: 1. Backfill the area around the wet well by depositing the backfill material equally around the circumference / perimeter of the pre-cast wet well in 6-inch lifts and compacting to 95% Standard Proctor Density (SPD). F. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades. G. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner’s Representative for trench depth adjustments. 3.05 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Coordinate exact location and alignment of fixtures with Owner’s Representative prior to installation. B. Install units on a 12-inch gravel subbase over compacted subgrade in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Lift, place, and secure units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Do not install units until supporting members are in place and secured. 1. Lift only at lifting points provided and install temporary shoring and bracing as necessary. 2. Level units accurately and in acceptable condition to allow installation of subsequent work. 3. Grout all joints and repair damaged exposed surfaces as required. 4. Install LinkSeal for pipe penetrations into wet well in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.06 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. Maple Hill Park 32 81 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. 3. Join pipe according to industry standards and manufacturer's recommendation. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. PVC intake pipe: Use pipe lubricant and join in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry standards. 2. Do not strike ductile iron fittings with metallic tools. Cushion blows with wood block or similar shock absorber. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF LAKE INTAKE SCREEN A. Intake Screen: Provide where indicated on drawings and in accordance to manufacturer’s guidelines. B. Tools: Prior to the Final Review, supply to the Owner’s Representative, operating keys, servicing tools, and any other items indicated on the drawings. C. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details to be part of the pump intake system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.08 PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS A. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded. B. Record pipe alterations. Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points. C. Turn over the Project Documents to the Owner’s Representative. Completion of the Project Documents will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of pump systems intake system installation. The Owner has retained the Engineer to prepare the Record Drawings from the Contractor’s Project Documents. 3.09 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. A. Remove all debris and foreign material from the construction area and wet well. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 82 00 VERTICAL TURBINE IRRIGATION PUMP SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete manufacturing of the vertical turbine pumping system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees as required by local utilities and regulations. B. Coordination of Utility Locates (“Call Before You Dig”) C. Services of a factory-trained field service person to supervise assembly, installation, and start-up of the pumping system, training of maintenance staff, and provision of O&M manual. D. Furnishing and installation of a prefabricated, vertical turbine type pumping system including pumps, motors, electrical controls, and other items as specified. E. Maintenance period. 1.02 DISCREPANCIES A. It is the intent of these plans and specification that the irrigation pump system be complete and operational. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that the equipment furnished is compatible and adheres to all regulations. Any discrepancies should be noted immediately and should be reported in writing to the Owner’s Representative for clarification. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Electric Engineering including provision and installation of electrical transformer on site. B. Building Foundation and Slab. C. Pumping System Intake. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List: Include pipe, valves, fittings, pumps and motors, control system components, and electrical equipment. Quantities of materials need not be included. B. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, performance curves, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list. Submit complete instructions for installation, operation, and recommended maintenance of the pump system. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Maintenance Manual: Submit four copies of a bound maintenance manual that includes all manufacturers’ data listed above and recommended operating procedures and preventive maintenance procedures. Include guide for troubleshooting operational problems with the pump station and complete documentation for programming, recommended settings and adjustments. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of proposed pump system. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Submit technical data sheets, electrical schematics, sequence of operation, UL listing authorization form. Note modifications to the installation drawings. The construction documents show a typical layout, elevation view, and critical dimensions for the pump system, building, wet well, etc. Pump system manufacturer is responsible for layout and design of the pump system supplied, and any special coordination issues that affect the critical dimensions, layout, or orientation of the pump system. E. The station must be completely wired, piped, hydraulically, electrically, and flow tested to full station capacity at factory prior to shipment to job site. F. Documentation of testing report must include name of test, date of test, name of the individual completing the test, name of the company completing the test, and a summary of the test results. If system fails any test, document any and retest until system passes test. G. Testing report must be verified by Owner’s Representative prior to pump station shipment. H. Record drawings as required in the specifications. 1.05 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Work and materials must be in accordance with the latest edition of the International Building Code, the International Electric Code, the International Plumbing Code, and applicable laws and regulations of the local governing authorities. B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. All electrical control panels with controls must be built in accordance to N.E.C., U.L. and E.T.L. standards. The electrical components and enclosure must be labeled as a complete U.L. listed assembly with manufacturer’s U.L. label applied to the door. All equipment and wiring must be mounted within the enclosure and labeled for proper identification. D. Provide single source responsibility for the manufacture, warranty, service, operation, and installation of a prefabricated, skid mounted, fully automatic variable speed pumping system as described in construction documents. Pumping system must conform to the following specifications in all respects. This specification covers the minimum requirements; however, it should not be construed as all inclusive. 1.06 TESTING A. Notify the Owner’s Representative three days (72 hours) in advance of testing. B. On completion of installation of the pumping station, all discharge pipe and valves must be hydrostatically tested at 150% of the maximum pump shutoff head. C. Bump manual motor starter controls to prove correct rotation and secure local inspection/approval. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Test, verify, and demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative the proper operation of all control and safety shut off devices. E. Verify flow and discharge pressure from the pump system and demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative system performance based on the specified values. F. All costs, including travel expenses and site visits by the Engineer, for any additional reviews that may be required due to non-compliance with the Construction Documents must be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. G. Coordinate with General Contractor to ensure the availability of water sources prior to construction. 1.07 REVIEWS The purpose of on-site reviews by Owner’s representative(s) is to observe the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents and to address questions with regards to the pump installation. A. Scheduled reviews such as those for testing should be scheduled with the Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications. B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project. C. Final review will occur at the completion of the pumping system installation and Record Drawings submittal. D. All costs, including travel expenses and site visits by the Owner’s Representative(s) for additional inspection(s) required after the Final Inspection due to non-compliance with the Construction Documents are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1.08 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A. The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to ensure that the Owner receives materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. B. The manufacturer must warrant the pumping system to be free of defects and product malfunctions for a period of one (1) year from date of start up. C. The pump station control panel must be unconditionally warranted for five (5) years from the date of start up. The pumping manufacturer is responsible for all warranties, pass through warranties are not acceptable. D. Failures caused by lightning strikes, power surges, flooding, operator abuse, or acts of God are excluded from warranty coverage. E. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner’s Representative. F. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY A. Materials used in the system must be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and must be the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Make complete submittals of all manufacturers’ data showing compliance with the Construction Documents. B. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that they: 1. Have investigated the proposed substitution and found that it is the same or better quality, level, capacity, function, or appearance than the specified product, and can demonstrate that to the Owner’s Representative and the Engineer. 2. Will coordinate the installation and make all modifications to the work, which are required for the complete installation and operation of the system. C. The Owner’s Representative and the Engineer will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection. D. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The prefabricated pumping station must have a capacity and a station discharge pressure downstream of all pump system components as shown on the drawings. Provide pressure maintenance pump. The station must be completely piped, wired, hydraulically and electrically tested on a structural steel skid before shipment to the job site. B. Refer to construction documents for flow and pressure discharge requirements of the pump system. C. Construction must include skid assembly to support all components during shipping and to serve as the installed mounting base. Base must be of sufficient size and strength to resist twisting and bending from hydraulic forces and support the full weight of pumps and motors. D. The pump station and related equipment must meet all the general and technical specifications; must be designed, fabricated and installed in a professional manner; and must be delivered within the negotiated schedule. E. Provide a factory-trained technician to supervise the installation of the pump station, pumps, and motors. F. In addition to the time required for installation supervision, the technician must provide a minimum of one (1) day of training for the Owner’s staff in the operation, maintenance, and programming of the pumping system. G. All pump station components must be supplied by and is the responsibility of one manufacturer, even though others manufactured some components. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 H. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. RAIN BIRD. Representative: Mark Austin 720-810-7066 2.04 PUMPS A. Main Pumps: Furnish main vertical turbine type pump, electric motor driven, 1800 nominal rpm, complete with the required length of threaded column assembly, galvanized steel basket type suction strainer, and cast iron discharge head. B. Pressure Maintenance Pump: Furnish one submersible pump, electric motor driven, 1800 nominal rpm, complete with the required length of threaded column assembly, galvanized steel basket type suction strainer, and cast iron discharge head for pressure maintenance pump. C. Bowl assemblies including the suction, intermediate, and discharge bowls must be furnished in cast iron, enamel lined with flanged connections. Furnish bronze statically balanced impellers that are adjustable vertically by an adjusting nut located at the top of the hollow-shaft motor. D. Pump efficiency must be minimum 80% at the specified operating point. The performance curve of each pump selected must be continuously rising as the shutoff condition is approached. The impeller diameter selected must be less than the maximum diameter available. E. Furnish each pump with a flanged, cast iron or fabricated steel discharge head complete with a mechanical seal. F. All bowl bearings must be constructed of bronze, all column bearings must be fluted rubber. Each pump shaft, column line shaft, and pump motor shaft must be turned, ground and polished 416 stainless steel sized to transmit full nameplate HP of the motor. Minimum acceptable shaft size is 1-inch. G. All shaft couplings must be threaded and machined from 300 series stainless steel. Furnish two piece headshaft assembly. Each motor shaft must be removable and couple to the pump head shaft between the bottom of the motor and the packing gland with sufficient clearance to allow removal of the packing gland assembly without motor removal. H. Furnish an overall pump length to within bottom of the wet well distance indicated on plan. Field verify exact length prior to ordering pump station. I. Furnish separate multistage, submersible type pump for pressure maintenance pump. Pump must be equipped with a motor shroud for proper cooling of submersible motor and stainless steel suction screen. J. Furnish pumps with motor protection controls. Pump furnished must be a Goulds, Grundfos or approved equal. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.05 MOTORS A. Each pump driving motor must be squirrel cage induction vertical hollow-shaft type. The connection to the pump shaft shall be bolted-down type couplings in the motor. The temperature rise of the motor shall be to NEMA standard MG-1-12. Motors to be Premium Efficient with Class F installation. A thrust bearing of ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic thrust of the pump shall be incorporated into the motor. The bearings shall be B10 rating with average life no less than five years continuous operation. The motor must be of proper size to drive the pump at any point on the operation curve without exceeding the percent of the motor horsepower nameplate rating. B. Furnish motors manufactured in U.S.A. of proper size to drive the pump, with a 1.15 service factor, at any point on its operation curve without exceeding motor horsepower nameplate rating. C. Furnish motor thrust bearings of ample capacity to accommodate the weight of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic thrust of the pump at shutoff conditions. Furnish motor bearings rated for a minimum service life not less than five years continuous operation at the design rating point. D. The pump shafts must be connected to the motor by a bolted down coupling at the top of each motor. All couplings must be equipped with non-reversing ratchets. E. Supply each motor with a 120 volt space heater in the motor windings to prevent condensation during non-use times. The heaters must deactivate while the motors are operating. 2.06 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Fabricated Piping: All fabricated piping must conform to ASTM specifications A53 for Grade B welded or seamless pipe. Piping 16" and smaller must be Schedule 40. All welding flanges must be forged steel with slip-on or welding neck type. All welding fittings must be seamless, conforming to ASTM Specification A234, with pressure rating not less than 150 psi. All pressurized tube fittings must be copper or brass. B. Dogleg Piping: Coat interior of all pump station dogleg drop piping using Scotch Kote 134 or equal fusion bonded epoxy coating prior to shipment of the skid. C. Use fabricated steel piping above grade unless specified otherwise on the construction documents. Coat all steel installed below grade with coal tar epoxy and wrap pipe in a polyethylene encasement (polywrap). D. Filter Flush Piping; 1. Use fabricated SCH 40 steel piping above grade unless specified otherwise on the construction documents. Coat steel with coal tar epoxy and wrap pipe in a polyethylene encasement (polywrap) below grade. 2. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding below grade outside of pump station enclosure. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Use Class 200, SDR 21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241 where noted below grade between the pump building and the irrigation pond. 2.07 VALVES A. Air/Vacuum Release Valve: 1. Provide a continuous-acting, combination air/vacuum release valve to release excess air from the filter. The valve must be capable of releasing air during filling and pump operation and also open in a vacuum condition to allow air to enter the filter when piping is drained. Valve must have a cast iron body rated for 300 PSI, stainless steel trim and float ball, Buna N and viton seats. 2. Drain Valves: Drains are to be provided from any possible low point in the system and are to consist of 1/4" brass angle valves unless otherwise noted. Drain piping is to be furnished so that no drain water runs out on top of the deck plate, but either under deck plate, or directly into the trench drain or wet well. They include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Provide drain in the pump discharge manifold between pump check valves and control valve. 4. Provide 3/4" brass hose bib in the discharge piping to function as a washdown connection and also function as a drain. B. Check Valves: Pump check valves must be of the silent operating, non-slam type, cast iron bodied with bronze and stainless steel trim. Sealing surfaces must utilize resilient Buna N rubber. The valve design must incorporate a center guided, spring-loaded poppet, guided at opposite ends and having a short linear stroke that generates a flow area equal to the pipe diameter. Valves must be sized to permit full pump capacity to discharge through them without exceeding a pressure drop of 2.5 PSI. Furnish check valves on the discharge of each pump and on the discharge of each filter. C. Isolation Valves: Valves must be butterfly type with the position lever or gear hand wheels and rated at 200 psi WOG working pressure. Trim must include stainless steel stem, bronze streamlined disc, and full faced resilient seat. Isolation valves must be installed on the discharge side of each pump. The pump system must also be furnished with a main station isolation valve located in the discharge manifold. D. Pressure Relief Valve: Furnish pressure relief valve and bypass piping to wet well installed on the discharge piping upstream of the pressure regulating valve. Size pressure relief valve to bypass sufficient water to avoid operating pumps at or near shut off head conditions. 2.08 GAUGES A. Gauges and switch gauges must be isolated from all electrical switch gear and control panels. Gauges must be provided at appropriate locations to read inlet pressure and discharge manifold pressure. Switch gauges must be 4" diameter vibration/pulsation dampened. Pressure gauges must be 2.5" diameter, glycerin filled, with ANSI Class B accuracy. Install ball valves to provide total isolation of all pressure gauges. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.09 ELECTRICAL A. Electrical Supply: The power supply to the station must be three phase, 208 volt, and 60 hertz, for full voltage across the line motor starting. B. Enclosures: 1. The pumping station electrical controls must be mounted in a self contained NEMA 4 (minimum NEMA rating) enclosure with a drip lip fabricated from not less than 12 gauge steel. Door gasket seals must be neoprene sponge, sufficient to protect interior components from weather and dust. The electrical panel doors must be constructed from 12-gauge steel with integral locking screws and latches. 2. Provide operating handle for the main station power disconnect on the front of the panel. Furnish weatherproof and dust proof external operating devices. 3. All internal components of the enclosures must be mounted on removable back panels. Mounting screws for components must not be tapped in the panel enclosure. 4. All internal wiring within, and interconnecting between, the panels must be complete and no field wiring within the panels must be required. Wiring troughs and cable raceways must be self-contained within the enclosures and no external cable trays or wiring troughs are permitted. 5. No pressure gauges, pressure switches, water activated devices, or water lines of any sort must be installed in any electrical control panel. All adjustments and maintenance must be able to be done from the front of the control enclosure. A complete wiring circuit and legend with all terminals, components, and wiring identification must be provided. Main disconnect must be interlocked with door. 6. A three-pole, main station disconnect must be contained within the enclosure. Disconnect must isolate all power to the control enclosure. The disconnect must have an operating handle mounted in the enclosure door, mechanically interlocked to prevent entry while disconnect is in the ON position. 7. All electrical starter and control panels must be assembled from components that are U.L. listed and each completed panel must be U.L. listed as an Industrial Control Panel. 8. A water cooled heat exchanger must be included to cool the enclosure and reject heat from the VFD. Open type cooling systems allowing outside ambient air to enter the panel are not acceptable. Water discharges to wet well. 9. Provide corrosion inhibiting modules in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Pump Motor Starters, Disconnect, and Electrical Switch Gear: 1. The pump motor starters must be contained within a single NEMA 4 enclosure with a single access door and main disconnect. Each starter must be protected on each power leg by a time delay fuse of the appropriate amperage. Motor starter coils must be 120 volt operated. 2. Overload relays must be ambient-compensating type installed on each power leg and must be set to trip at 105% of motor full-load current rating. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Variable Speed Master Controls and Display: 1. Provide complete instrumentation and controls to automatically start, stop and modulate pump speed(s) to smoothly, efficiently and reliably pump variable flow rates at a constant discharge pressure. Provide full alarms and safety features needed to protect the equipment and irrigation piping system. 2. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): Provide a digital, pulse width modulation (PWM) VFD with IGBT transistors for the main vertical turbine irrigation pump to meet following criteria: a. A minimum wire to wire efficiency of 98.5%, and must be rated up to 550-volt operation in order to eliminate nuisance tripping at marginally high voltage conditions. b. Front end protected by fast acting semiconductor fuses. Any VFD error messages must be displayed on a 40-character LCD readout in English or any one of 8 other languages. c. Fault protection circuits: Over-current (200%), over-voltage (130%), under- voltage (60%), over-temperature (70o C), ground fault, and motor overload. d. Capable of starting into a rotating load and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping. e. Automatic extended power loss ride through circuit, which will utilize the inertia of the pump to keep the drive powered. The minimum power loss ride-through must be one cycle based on full load and no inertia. f. Provide VFD optimized for a 3 kHz carrier frequency to reduce motor noise and employing three current limit circuits to provide "tripless" operation. g. Operating information must be displayed on the VFD LCD: KWH, elapsed time, Output frequency (Hz), motor speed (RPM), motor current (amps), and voltage. Line reactor will be installed on input of VFD to protect against voltage transients. h. Manufactured by Mitsubishi or equal. i. Conforms to IEEE519 harmonic limits standards. 3. Pressure Transducer: Pressure transducer must be utilized for providing all pressure signals for the control logic. a. Provide a solid-state bonded strain gauge type pressure transducer with an accuracy of plus/minus 0.20%. Housing must be stainless steel NEMA 4 with 304L stainless steel wetted parts. Plastic transducer housings are not acceptable. b. Furnish a transducer rated for station discharge pressure as shown on technical data sheet that will provide gauge pressure output, rather than an absolute. 4. Controls: All control logic must be handled by an industrial grade programmable logic controller (PLC) with a 40 character LED industrial operator interface providing data entry and read-out capabilities: a. Touchscreen – Mitsubishi or Equal. b. Provide PLC with LED indicators for input, output, and four (4) diagnostic read- outs showing PC Run, CPU Fault, I/O Fault, and communication. Provide an LED visual status light for each I/O to indicate on/off status. c. Provide PLC with a built in EEPROM, capacitor, and battery for memory backup. A surge suppressor must be mounted on input of PLC for power transient suppression. d. Logic operates electronic butterfly valve located with water meter (refer to plans) using water level probes to maintain water level in pond. e. All logic for system control, timing, and control of VFD speed must be handled by the PLC. No external relay logic and/or timers are permitted. A separate set point controller is not acceptable. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 f. PLC must have a built in clock calendar. The PLC must be of the type manufactured by Toshiba, Siemens, Allen Bradley, Mitsubishi, or Engineer approved equal. 5. Alarms and shutdowns: a. Low discharge pressure (with override switch)* b. High discharge pressure c. Low lake level (Attempts restart)* d. Phase loss (Attempts restart)* e. Low voltage (Attempts restart)* f. Phase unbalance (Attempts restart)* g. Individual motor overload/phase loss (indicates which individual motor was shut down) h. VFD fault (shutdown VFD pump only and attempts restart).* i. *Three failed restarts in 15-minute period will give hard shutdown. j. A red general alarm light will indicate all alarms. Specific alarm conditions along with procedures for correction will be displayed in English on the operator interface display (OID). 6. Panel face switches and lights: a. Individual pump run lights and pump on/off switches b. System Hand/Off/Automatic switch or switches c. Mode Select switch -- allows automatic bypass mode of operation that can be used if VFDs should fail. d. VFD selector switch -- in manual mode, allows user to select which pump will be run off the VFDs. e. Reset -- Acknowledges pump station alarms f. Low discharge pressure override switch -- disables low discharge pressure alarm g. PLC bypass switch mounted inside panel allows user to manually operate pumps should PLC fail. 7. Software: a. Software will be included to automatically and gradually ramp up irrigation system pressure to the desired operating pressure (i.e., 1 PSI every 3 seconds) without overshooting design pressure. This feature operates whenever pressure drops below set point pressure. This ramp up time is fully adjustable by the operator. This control feature is based on an increase in pressure over a pre- defined time period. The acceleration control on the VFD is NOT an acceptable means of adjusting pressure ramp up speed. b. Software will be included for optionally maintaining a lower irrigation system pressure when not irrigating. Reduced pressure values will be shown in the technical data sheet. Controls will cycle the PM pump at these reduced pressures during non-irrigation times and pressure will gradually increase to design pressure when the irrigation periods begin. c. Neither flow meter nor VFD output frequency must be used for shutting down VFD driven pump. Controls and software must incorporate a method to eliminate excessive cycling of VFD pump at very low flow conditions, yet not run the pump excessively under no flow conditions. d. Provide automatic alternation of VFD driven pump accomplished by incorporating dual mechanically and electrically interlocked contactors. e. Real time clock calendar allows PLC to internally provide all date and time functions used above. f. Two separately adjustable PID control loops for both low flow and high flow pressure stability. g. Provide system that allows user to field select either two modes of VFD operation. Auto switch VFD option allows VFD to sequentially start pump. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 h. Shutoff algorithm for fixed speed pump to minimize pump cycling while also remaining responsive to sudden flow reductions. Minimum run timers alone for minimizing fixed speed pump cycling is not acceptable. Discharging through relief valve during pump transitions is not acceptable. i. System can be immediately and directly switched from manual to automatic mode of operation. This allows for manual pressurization and immediate switching capability to automatic. j. Light test sequence. Pressing the reset button for 5 seconds illuminates all lights. k. Rate of pressure change algorithm to rapidly determine if there is an irrigation demand and immediately cycle on the VFD pump, in lieu of waiting for pressure to drop to a predetermined start pressure. l. All pump station shutdowns must be of the controlled type which sequentially phase pumps off at user selectable internals to reduce water hammer within the irrigation system. E. Operator Interface Device (OID): 8. The pump station must include a NEMA 4, 40 character LED display and keypad mounted on the control panel door. This device will allow the operator to view and selectively modify all registers in the PLC. The unit must store its messages in non- volatile memory. The operator interface device must incorporate password protection for protecting data integrity. The device will allow for display and modification of all timers, set points, lockout times, etc. The device must communicate with the PLC through the programming port, and must include an RS232 communications port allowing a printer to be attached for real time station status logging. 9. The OID must be an information system only and not required for pump station operation. No switches, reset buttons, general alarm light, run lights are included within this unit. This pump station will be fully functional in the event the OID unit should fail. 10. In addition to normal data entry keys, the device must include a minimum of the following function keys labeled: a. Event. Displays one of three data logging functions. (1) Operator can scroll through the historical pump station flows and pressures for up to the last 7 days. The operator can change sampling time periods (from 1 to 60 minutes). Averages are taken over the sample period and the average recorded with time stamp. (2) The last 128 sequential pump station events with time of occurrence. Events must include but not be limited to: all alarms, starting of individual pumps, stopping of individual pumps and changing of selector switches. (3) Station flow and pressure are shown every second for the previous 60 seconds and every minute for the previous 30 minutes. If a shutdown occurs, the flow and pressure tables are locked in so that the operator may view how the pump station was performing immediately before the shutdown occurred. (4) Status. Will display the current operating status. When the station is running, the display will show the setpoint pressure, actual pressure, flow, and pump rpm. (5) Alarm Info. It will display detailed information on the alarm, time of occurrence, pumps operating at time of alarm and how to correct the alarm condition. (6) Daily Log. It will display the following: Last time of log reset, individual pump run times, run times since last reset, pump starts, pump starts since last reset, total flow, total flow since last reset, highest flow rate with time of occurrence, alarm conditions, and times since last reset. (7) Scroll Key. Used to scroll up and down through data. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 12 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 11. Operation: a. During non-irrigation times, the pressure maintenance pump (PM) will cycle on and off as required to maintain irrigation system pressure. The cycling pressures can be user selected and can be set substantially below normal set point pressure, if desired. If the PM pump cannot maintain the desired pressure, then the VFD will start the main pump as necessary and will gradually ramp the pressure up to desired irrigation pressure. b. The pump speed will be modulated to hold a constant discharge pressure regardless of flow. c. An algorithm must be include for accurately reducing the VFD pump speed when main pump shuts down;. d. When a no flow condition occurs, the VFD pump must be turned off. F. Wiring: 1. All wiring from control panels to motors must be in liquid-tight conduit with copper conductors rated not less than 600 volts AC and of proper size to carry the full load amperage of the motors without exceeding 70% capacity of the conductor. A grounding cable must be included in the liquid- tight conduit. There must be no splices between the motor starters and the motor connection boxes. 2. Wiring to magnetic flow meter and pressure transducer must be multi-conductor shielded cable suitable for Class ll low voltage controls. G. Lightning Arrestor: 1. The main power supply feeding the pumping station must be equipped with a 3 phase secondary lighting arrestor having a breakdown current rating of not less that 60,000 amps at 14,000 volts discharge. Power supplies, 300 volts and less, must use 300 volt rated arrestor with an 800 volt spark-over voltage. Power supplies 301-600 volts must use 600 volt rated arrestors with a 1,000-volt spark-over voltage. H. Misc. Electrical Components: 1. Main Station Disconnect: A three-pole main station disconnect must be mounted in a separate NEMA 4 enclosure to completely isolate the electrical system from incoming power. The disconnect must conform to the requirements of the NEC and applicable local codes. The main station disconnect must have an operating handle on the front of the panel. 2. Secondary Control Circuit Fuses: Single-pole secondary distribution fuses with appropriate ratings must supply power to each pump starter coil circuit, the control system, and to other circuits as required. 3. Phase Failure - Low Voltage Safety Shutdown: A phase failure - low voltage system dropout relay must be provided to de-energize the individual pump controls and motor sequencing control in case of either low voltage or phase failure after a 5.0 second time delay. The resetting must be automatic after full power is restored for 5.0 seconds, with pumps sequentially restarting. The phase failure - low Voltage indicator light is to remain illuminated until manually reset. 4. Low System Pressure Safety Shutdown: Low discharge pressure is to be sensed by the pump starting set point. When the station discharge pressure decreases to this point and maintains a start signal for a preset time, the pumps will be de-energized and remains so until the circuit is manually reset. An indicator light must illuminate to Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 13 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 indicate a low discharge pressure shutdown has occurred. 5. Low Water Level Safety Shutdown: Furnish liquid level probes or pressure transducer and controls to prevent operation of the pumps when water levels in the wet well are insufficient. Furnish shutdown with automatic restart after an adjustable delay. Low water level indicator lamp must remain lit until manually reset. 6. Corrosion Inhibiting Modules: Corrosion inhibiting modules must be installed in all electrical enclosures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. I. Standards: 1. All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code Standards. Flexible conduit sections must be less than 5 feet in length. All conduit to devices must be attached securely to avoid trip hazards. 2. The manufacturer must provide a wiring schematic. The schematic must show all devices, connections and wire numbers. 3. All controls and electrical equipment must be thoroughly inspected and tested before shipment. 2.02 PIPE SUPPORT STAND A. Furnish manufactured steel pipe support stand as shown on the drawings and details. Support must be capable of supporting 500 lbs. dead load and be adjustable within the range shown on the pump piping detail. B. Furnish Standon Model S89 or S92 as required, with red oxide primer, as manufactured by Material Resources, Hillsboro, Oregon, (503) 693-0727 or approved equal. 2.03 MAGNETIC FLOW METER A. Provide magnetic type flow sensor. B. Provide a NEMA 4 digital flow meter readout compatible with flow sensor for monitoring the flow rate, totalizing gallons used, and for shifting the flow sequencing set point range. The display must be a black character, LCD type. Adjustable settings for pipe diameter and pulse output must be provided. The totalizer must be capable of counting to 2 billion gallons and it must be resettable. Both settings and the gallons total must be held in non- volatile memory (no battery required) and protected by a user defined password with a hidden override key. 2.04 AUTOMATIC BACKWASHING SCREEN FILTER A. Filter must be motor driven suction scanner with automatic backwash cycle based on pressure differential and time interval as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Provide check valve on discharge pipe downstream filter device. C. Backwash valve to be electronic butterfly valve. 2.05 ACCESS HATCH A. Provide hatch, with retractable handle, as a hinged component of the pump-mounting skid for access to wet well. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 14 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.06 PAINTING A. Painting of the entire unit must consist of a multi-step coating system which includes metal preparation, rust inhibitive prime coat, and a two part polyurethane finish having a total dry film thickness of not less that 4 mils. B. Pump station components must be painted green color. All electrical enclosures and accessory panels must be painted to a minimum thickness of 3 mils and baked at 160- 180 F. C. Provide a 1-quart can of the finish paint with the system for job site touch up use. D. Proper priming and painting of above grade steel piping outsides of pump system building is required. The color will match pump system and pre-approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to painting. 2.07 OTHER COMPONENTS A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, and any other items indicated on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details to be part of the pump system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PUMPS AND MOTORS A. Shipping, off-loading and the technical start up must be furnished by the pump station manufacturer. The pump station manufacturer must furnish location and mounting details to Owner’s Representative. B. Anchor pump system to concrete mounting pad and complete all piping connections prior to startup and operation of the pump system. C. Electrical connection must consist of a single conduit from 3 phase 208 volt disconnect to the pump station main disconnect. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Install and maintain safety fencing around all unattended excavation. Place safety signs adjacent to construction area roadway to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 15 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 PUMP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Secure all new pumps, motors, and components to concrete floor, pedestal, or pipes and complete all piping connections prior to technical start-up, testing and operation. 3.05 TECHNICAL START-UP A. Pump system manufacturer must conduct technical start-up of the pump system in the presence of Owner’s Representative. Procedures should include: 1. System start -up and pressurization. 2. Pressure, flow, automatic shut-down and programming adjustments. 3. Monitoring of irrigation cycle when possible. Technician will instruct operations personnel as to the operation, adjustment and maintenance of the irrigation pump system. 4. Owner and operator training. 3.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) copies of the bound Pump System Operation and Maintenance manuals as described in the specifications to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start up. B. Tools and Spare Parts: Prior to the Pre-Maintenance Review, supply to the Owner’s Representative operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, and any other items indicated on the drawings. C. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details to be part of the pumping system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.07 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded. B. Record pumping system alterations. Record work, which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions. C. A complete wiring circuit and legend with all terminals, components, and wiring identification must be provided on the panel doors. D. Turn over the Project Documents to the Owner’s Representative. Completion of the Project Documents will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of irrigation system installation. The Owner has retained the Engineer to prepare the Record Drawings from the Contractor’s Project Documents. Maple Hill Park 32 82 00 - 16 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.08 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS A. Pump System Maintenance: 1. Prior to Final Inspection, provide a one-day training session to Owner’s operating personnel on proper operation and maintenance of the pump system. Training session should be for a period of not less than 8-hours and cover aspects of maintaining, operating and repairing the new pump system. 2. Unless otherwise noted, provide operation and maintenance information in a 3-ring binder with table of contents and index sheet. Provide sections that are indexed and labeled. Provide the following information: a. Catalog cut sheets for pumping system. b. Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance manuals including complete documentation for programming and recommended settings and adjustments. c. Manufacturer’s Technical Service Bulletins. d. Manufacturer’s Warranty Documentation. e. Manufacturer’s guide for troubleshooting operational problems. f. Recommended routine maintenance inspections for weekly, monthly and annual inspections and recommended actions for the inspections and a recommended method for recording the findings of the inspections. g. Predictive schedule for component replacement. h. Listing of technical support contacts. 3. Operation and maintenance submittal package must be complete prior to being reviewed by the Contractor and Owner Representative. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. Upon completion of Final Review, maintain system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components as necessary. B. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period, the Owner will be responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the guarantee/warranty period, and for performing necessary minor maintenance. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. B. Manufacturer's Representative must clean all surfaces and touch up scratches with factory paint to match original. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 83 00 RAW WATER DELIVERY PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Provide labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the raw water delivery piping, fittings, and appurtenances, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"). C. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of round pre-cast manhole sections. D. Coordination with site work, grading, pond construction, pump system installation, pump enclosure construction, and any necessary dewatering. E. Preparation of Record Drawings. F. Maintenance period. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor 1. Contractor must have demonstrated, using persons directly employed by the Contractor, experience with the installation of at least five irrigation systems having large (>6-inch) diameter HDPE pipe. 2. Contractor must be licensed in State of Colorado. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Deliver four (4) copies of submittals to within 10 working days from date of Notice to Proceed. Furnish information in 3-ring binder with table of contents and index sheet. Index sections for different components and label with specification section number and name of component. Furnish submittals for components on material list. Indicate which items are being supplied on catalog cut sheets when multiple items are shown on one sheet. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. B. Materials List: Include sleeving, pipe, fittings, and valves. Include pipe sealant, and other miscellaneous items. Quantities of materials need not be included. C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on materials list. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in installation details. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to installation detail. 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Provide work and materials in accordance with latest edition of National Electric Code, Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws, regulations and codes of governing authorities. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. When contract documents call for materials or construction of better quality or larger size than required by above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide quality and size required by contract documents. C. If quantities are furnished either in specifications or on drawings, quantities are furnished for information only. It is Contractor's responsibility to determine actual quantities of material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete independent estimate of quantities and wastage. D. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing prior to construction about discrepancies between contract documents and existing site conditions or manufacturer’s specific recommendations for use of their product. E. Contractor is responsible for damage to site amenities during construction. Replace damaged items with identical materials of equal value to match existing conditions. Make replacements at no additional cost to contract price. 1.05 TESTING A. Schedule testing with Owner’s Representative a minimum of three days in advance of testing. B. Pipe jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Allow pipe jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints to cure at least 24 hours before testing. C. Subsections of pipe may be tested independently, subject to review of Owner’s Representative. D. Provide clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retests. E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: 1. Hydrostatic pressure test to be conducted for HDPE Water Delivery pipe. 2. Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure equal to 100 PSI for two hours. Test with mainline components installed. 3. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings. 4. Purge air from mainline pipe before test. Attach pressure gauge to mainline pipe in test section. 5. Observe pressure loss on pressure gauge. If pressure loss is greater than 5 PSI, identify reason for pressure loss. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat test until pressure loss is equal to or less than 5 PSI. 6. Visually inspect irrigation pipe for leakage and replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat test until pipe passes test. 7. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. F. Pre-cast concrete manhole: 1. Conduct compaction testing for every 2-feet of compacted backfill. Testing must be completed by an independent agency. 2. The test results must be provided to the contractor and Owner’s Representative within 1 business day. 3. If any tested section fails test, the Contractor must excavate backfill material and compact per the specifications. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 G. Testing Review: 1. Failure of initial testing review will require additional review. Payment of costs, including travel expenses and site visits by Owner’s Representative, for additional reviews that may be required due to non-compliance with the Construction Documents will be Contractor’s responsibility. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW The purpose of on-site reviews by Owner’s Representative is to periodically observe work in progress, Contractor's interpretation of construction documents, and to address questions with regard to installation. A. Schedule reviews or testing with Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications. B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during project. C. A review will occur at completion of system installation and Project Record Drawing submittal. 1.07 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT The purpose of guarantee/warranty is to ensure that Owner receives materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in thorough and careful manner. A. Guarantee/warranty materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for period of one year from formal written acceptance by Owner’s Representative. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape, utilities, structures and site features damaged by settlement of trenches or excavations. Repair damage to premises caused by defective items. Make repairs within seven days of notification from Owner’s Representative. B. Replace damaged items with identical materials and methods per contract documents or applicable codes. Make replacements at no additional cost to contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment, and replacements made during guarantee/warranty period. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY Use new materials without flaws or defects. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Use specified equipment, or pre-approved equal. Alternative equipment must be approved by Owner’s Representative prior to bidding. Changes and associated design costs to accommodate alternative equipment are Contractor’s responsibility. B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at Contractor’s option. 2.03 SLEEVING AND CONDUIT A. Provide PVC Class 200 pipe for conduits and sleeving (for future aeration tubing). Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Water Delivery Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use high density, extra high molecular weight polyethylene pipe (HDPE), extruded from material meeting the specifications of cell classification on PE 4710, ASTM standard D 3350, SDR 11, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM F 714 for mainline pipe. 2. Join pipe lengths using butt-fusion technique as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Join HDPE to dissimilar pipe materials using HDPE (butt-fusion) x flange adapter with ductile iron back-up ring. 3. HDPE Fittings DR11 molded for HDPE pipe from HDPE pipe manufacturer. No Contractor fabricated HDPE fittings allowed. B. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use mechanical joints conforming to ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) and ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111) or flanged fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI B16.1 (125#). 2. Use stainless steel fasteners and rubber gaskets for flanged connections. 3. Joint sealant: Use non-hardening, nontoxic pipe thread sealant formulated for use on threaded connections and approved by pipe fitting or valve manufacturer. 2.05 PIPE COMPONENTS A. Point-of-Connection: as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Water Meter and Electronic Butterfly Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. C. Settling Structure Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. D. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. E. Air Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. 2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE A. Provide shop drawings showing complete information for the fabrication and installation of the precast concrete sections. Include special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. Ensure anti-floatation collar is included. B. Provide layout dimensions, and identification of each precast unit. Detail inserts, connections, blockouts, joints, accessories and openings. C. Manufacturer of precast concrete units is responsible for design of reinforcement and its placement. Fabricate units with concrete having minimum compressive strength of 4000 PSI at 28 days using Type I-II cement. D. Furnish test reports of concrete indicating compressive strength. E. Certify that the concrete units fabricated and installed will support the required design loads. F. Fabricate precast sections in conformance with to ASTM C-478 designation for manufacturing, testing, and quality control. G. Furnish precast units with concrete finish equal to smooth steel formed as-cast concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, minor cracking, chips and spalls, and normal color variations will be permitted. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 H. Furnish manhole as shown on drawings. I. Furnish precast concrete sections manufactured with tongue and groove joints installed with a joint sealant. 2.07 OTHER COMPONENTS A. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on drawings or installation details that are part of system, even though items may not have been referenced in specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities in writing to Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing site conditions. B. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"): 1. Arrange and coordinate Utility Locates with local authorities prior to construction. 2. Pot hole existing utilities to confirm depths prior to piping installation. If existing utility depth conflicts with new pipe, contact Owner’s Representative for direction. 3. Repair underground utilities that are damaged during construction. Make repairs at no additional cost to contract price. 3.02 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Stake out system. Items staked include: pipe and pipe components. B. Install components inside of project property lines. 3.03 DRAINAGE, DEWATERING, AND EROSION CONTROL A. Comply with all Federal, State, and Local Regulations dealing with site drainage, dewatering, and erosion control including permitting requirements. B. Provide all means necessary to accomplish drainage, dewatering, and erosion control required for completion of the project. C. Provide drainage control measures to prevent surface runoff from entering excavations. D. Manage all surface water and pumped water to minimize sediment transport. E. Dewater each excavation area to lower the ground water level to a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the excavation. F. Maintain the lowered ground water level and keep excavations free of standing water until the construction is completed to the extent that no damage to the subgrade, structure, or other work will result from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or seepage. G. Use sumps, gravel blankets, well points, drainage lines, or other means necessary to accomplish the above. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 SHEETING AND SHORING A. Use sheeting and shoring where banks are not cut back on a stable slope and as necessary to prevent caving or sliding; and to protect the work and adjacent structures and facilities. All work must conform to current applicable regulations. B. Sheeting and shoring must be designed by a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in the State of Colorado, to withstand all applicable earth, surcharge, and hydrostatic loads and must be built and maintained in accordance with the design. 1. Provide shop drawings for system designed and sealed by Professional Engineer. C. Support sheeting to avoid load concentration or horizontal thrust on underground structures. D. Sheeting removal: 1. Remove sheeting material as required for backfill and compaction process only. 2. Use effective methods to protect construction, other structures, utilities, and properties during sheeting removal. 3. Fill voids left by sheeting removal with dry compacted sand. 3.05 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Excavate and install pipes at minimum cover indicated in drawings or specifications. Excavate trenches at appropriate width for connections and fittings. B. Employ horizontal boring techniques to install water delivery pipe indicated in drawings. Use care to avoid existing utilities and provides clearance per City of Fort Collins Standards. C. Minimum cover: 1. Water Delivery Pipe: 60-inch to top of pipe. Refer to plans for additional depths. Adjust depth as necessary to provide clearance to existing utilities. 2. Electrical Conduit: 30-inches to top of pipe. D. Maintain at least 15-feet clearance from centerline of trees. E. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. F. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Use backfill free from rubbish, vegetable matter, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum diameter. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Use backfill free of sharp objects next to pipe. G. Backfill buried pipe in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle lower half of trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill remainder of trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill trench by depositing backfill material equally on both sides of pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to density of surrounding soil. H. Backfill pre-cast concrete manhole in following manner: 1. Backfill the area around the manhole by depositing the backfill material equally around the circumference / perimeter of the pre-cast manhole in 6-inch lifts and compacting to 90- 95% Standard Proctor Density (SPD). I. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. J. Contact Owner’s Representative for trench depth adjustments where utilities conflict with pipe work. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.06 SLEEVING AND BORING A. As shown on drawings and details. 3.07 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and debris. Cut pipe ends square, debur and clean as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. B. HDPE Water Delivery Pipe and Fittings: 1. Join pipe in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 2. Fittings: a. Use of cross type fittings is not permitted. b. Do not strike ductile iron fittings with metallic tools. Cushion blows with wood block or similar shock absorber. C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Flanged connections: Install fittings, fasteners and gaskets in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE COMPONENTS A. Point-of-Connection: Provide where indicated on drawings and in accordance to manufacturer’s guidelines. B. Water Meter and Electronic Butterfly Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings and in accordance to manufacturers’ guidelines. C. Settling Structure Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. D. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Install at least 12- inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “GV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. E. Air Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Install at least 12- inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “AV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. 3.02 PRECAST CONCRETE A. Coordinate exact location of fixtures with Owner’s Representative prior to installation. B. Install units on a 6-inch gravel subbase over compacted subgrade in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Lift, place, and secure units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Do not install units until supporting members are in place and secured. 1. Lift only at lifting points provided and install temporary shoring and bracing as necessary. 2. Level units accurately and in acceptable condition to allow installation of subsequent work. 3. Grout all joints and repair damaged exposed surfaces as required. Maple Hill Park 32 83 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.03 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS A. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on drawings or installation details that are part of system, even though items may not have been referenced in specifications. 3.04 PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS A. Document changes to design. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until accurate “as-built” information is recorded. B. Record pipe alterations on a daily basis. Record work that is installed differently than shown on construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each valve, and pipe end. C. Obtain from Owner’s Representative a reproducible copy of drawings prior to construction completion. Drawings or CAD data files compatible with AutoCAD software can be purchased from the Engineer. Cost of reproducible drawings is $25 per sheet and cost of AutoCAD data files on diskette is $150 per project set. If AutoCAD files are requested, the Contractor must sign a data release form before files are released. Duplicate information contained on project drawings maintained on-site using technical drafting pen or CAD. Label each sheet “Record Drawing”. D. Turn over “Record Drawings” to Owner’s Representative. Completion of Record Drawings is required prior to final construction review at completion of system installation. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Remove from site machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish upon completion of work. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Provide labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"). C. Provision and connection of electrical power supply to irrigation control system. D. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire. E. Preparation of Record Drawings. F. Winterization and Spring Start-up G. Maintenance period. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Deliver four (4) copies of submittals to Owner’s Representative within 10 working days from date of Notice to Proceed. Furnish information in PDF file with table of contents and index sheet. Index sections for different components and label with specification section number and name of component. Furnish submittals for components on material list. Indicate which items are being supplied on catalog cut sheets when multiple items are shown on one sheet. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. B. Materials List: Include sleeving, pipe, fittings, mainline components, sprinkler components, drip components, control system components, shop drawings and other components shown on drawings and installation details or described herein. Include pipe sealant, wire, wire connectors, ID tags, and other miscellaneous items. Quantities of materials need not be included. C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on materials list. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in installation details. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to installation detail. 1.03 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Provide work and materials in accordance with latest edition of National Electric Code, Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws, regulations and codes of governing authorities. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. When contract documents call for materials or construction of better quality or larger size than required by above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide quality and size required by contract documents. C. If quantities are furnished either in specifications or on drawings, quantities are furnished for information only. It is Contractor's responsibility to determine actual quantities of material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete independent estimate of quantities and wastage. D. Notify Owner’s Representative in writing prior to construction about discrepancies between contract documents and existing site conditions or manufacturer’s specific recommendations for use of their product. E. Contractor is responsible for damage to new and/or existing site amenities during construction. Replace damaged items with identical materials of equal value to match existing conditions. Make replacements at no additional cost to contract price. Penalty for specific damage: as valued by an independent auditor or as mutually agreed to by Owner and Contractor. 1.04 TESTING A. Schedule testing with Owner’s Representative a minimum of three days in advance of testing. B. Mainline pipe jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Allow irrigation pipe jointed with solvent-welded PVC joints to cure at least 24 hours before testing. C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to review of Owner’s Representative. D. Provide clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retests. E. Volumetric Leakage Test: 1. Volumetric leakage test to be conducted for PVC mainline pipe. 2. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings. 3. Purge air from pipeline before test. 4. Subject mainline pipe to 140 PSI for two hours. Maintain constant pressure. Test with mainline components installed. 5. Provide all necessary pumps, bypass piping, storage tanks, meters, 3-inch test gauge, supply piping, and fittings in order to properly perform testing. 6. Testing pump must provide a continuous 140-PSI pressure to the mainline pipe. Allowable deviation in test pressure is 5-PSI during test period. Restore test pressure to 140-PSI at end of test. 7. Water added to mainline pipe must be measured volumetrically to nearest 0.10 gallons. 8. Use following table to determine maximum allowable volume lost during test: Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Leakage Allowable (Gallons per (100 Joints) / Hour) Test Pressure (PSI) PIPE SIZE (INCHES) 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 3” 0.31 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.41 0.43 0.44 0.46 0.48 4" 0.42 0.45 0.48 0.51 0.54 0.57 0.59 0.62 0.64 Note: Allowable Leakage calculated using L = (ND√P)/7400 Where: L = Allowable Leakage (gph) N = Number of Joints D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (inches) P = Average Test Pressure (psi) 9. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat test until pipe passes test. 10. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 11. Contractor may sub-contract testing to pipeline testing company approved by Owner. F. Operational Test: 1. Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. Provide either one additional personal with radio or use handheld remote to activate remote control valves from controller. Manually activating remote control valve using manual bleed mechanism at remote control valve is not an acceptable method of activation. Owner’s Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage. 2. Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational deficiencies. 3. Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage deficiencies. 4. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 5. Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to Owner. G. Copper Tracing Wire: 1. Pass current through wire and demonstrate that wire is capable of locating all mainline pipe. 2. If wire will not pass current, locate break in circuit, repair or replace wire or splice, and test until tracer wire works in accordance for its intended use. H. Control System Grounding: 1. Test for proper grounding of control system per manufacturer's recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines for acceptance. 2. Replace defective wire, grounding rods, grounding plates, or appurtenances. Repeat test until manufacturer's guidelines are met. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 I. Testing Review: 1. Failure of initial testing review will require additional review. Payment of costs, including travel expenses and site visits by Owner’s Representative, for additional reviews that may be required due to non-compliance with the Construction Documents will be Contractor’s responsibility. J. Field Mock Up: 1. Fabricate an on-site example of the following assemblies for demonstration prior to construction. The mock-ups must be presented to the Owner’s Representative and meet approval prior to construction. a. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Mock-up is to include remote control valve, wire splices, two wire cable, and decoder. b. Decoder Grounding: Mock-up is to include decoder, wire splices, and grounding equipment. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW The purpose of on-site reviews by Owner’s Representative is to periodically observe work in progress, Contractor's interpretation of construction documents, and to address questions with regard to installation. A. Schedule reviews for irrigation system layout or testing with Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications. B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during project. C. A review will occur at completion of irrigation system installation and Project Record Drawing submittal. 1.06 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT The purpose of guarantee/warranty is to ensure that Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in thorough and careful manner. A. Guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for period of one year from formal written acceptance by Owner’s Representative. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape, utilities, structures and site features damaged by settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to premises caused by defective items. Make repairs within seven days of notification from Owner’s Representative. B. Replace damaged items with identical materials and methods per contract documents or applicable codes. Make replacements at no additional cost to contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment, and replacements made during guarantee/warranty period. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY Use new materials without flaws or defects. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Use specified equipment, or pre-approved equal. Alternative equipment must be approved by Owner’s Representative and Engineer prior to bidding. Changes and associated design costs to accommodate alternative equipment are Contractor’s responsibility. B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at Contractor’s option. 2.03 SLEEVING A. Provide sleeve beneath hardscape for irrigation pipe. Provide separate sleeve beneath hardscape for wiring bundle. B. Sleeve sizing: A minimum of twice the nominal diameter of solvent-welded pipe or wiring bundle, or as indicated on drawings. Sleeve diameter for gasketed pipe must accommodate outside diameter of joint-restraint casing spacers, refer to joint-restraint manufacturer’s sizing recommendations. 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with integral belled end. 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. 3. Use rubber-gasketed pipe equipped with factory installed reinforced gaskets for mainline pipe with nominal diameter greater than or equal to 3-inches. Use Gasketed pipe joints conforming to “Laboratory Qualifying Tests” section of ASTM D3139. Use gasket material conforming to ASTM F477. Use Leemco rubber-gasketed deep bell ductile iron fittings conforming to ASTM A-536 and ASTM F-477. Use lubricant approved by pipe manufacturer. B. Lateral Pipe, Manifold Pipe, and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. 2. Use Class 160, SDR-26, rated at 160 PSI, conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than Class 160 in cases where small nominal diameters are not manufactured in Class 160. Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use UV radiation resistant Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use primer approved by pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564, of type approved by pipe manufacturer. 3. For drip irrigation laterals downstream of zone control valves, use UV radiation resistant polyethylene pipe manufactured from Prime Union Carbide G-resin 7510 Natural 7 manufactured by Union Carbide or a Union Carbide Licensee with a minimum of 2-percent carbon black. Use PVC/compression line fittings compatible with drip lateral pipe. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Ductile iron pipe: Use Class 50 conforming to ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). Use minimum of Class 53 thickness pipe for flanged piping. Use mechanical joints conforming to ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) and ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111) or flanged fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI B16.1 (125#). 2. Use stainless steel fasteners and rubber gaskets for flanged connections. 3. Use PVC Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings for threaded pipe connections. 4. Joint sealant: Use non-hardening, nontoxic pipe thread sealant formulated for use on threaded connections and approved by pipe fitting or valve manufacturer. D. Thrust Blocks: 1. Use 3,000 PSI concrete. Use commercially pre-mixed concrete unless written approval is provided by Owner’s Representative prior to construction. 2. Use 2 mil plastic protective sheeting. 3. Use No. 4 Rebar. E. Joint Restraint Harness: 1. Provide joint restraint harness components as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. For joint restraints on ductile iron pipe applications, use restraint components constructed of 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. For joint restraints on PVC pipe applications, use restraint components constructed of 60-42-10 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536-80 and ASTM F1674-96. 2. Use bolts, nuts, retaining clamps, all-thread, or other joint restraint harness materials which are zinc plated or galvanized. 2.05 MAINLINE COMPONENTS A. Flow Sensor Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. C. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. D. Air Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. 2.06 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Sprinkler Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. 2.07 DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: as presented in drawings and installation details. B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. C. Swing Check Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Drip Emitter Assembly: 1. Use emitter device as presented in drawings and installation details. 2. Use flexible plastic distribution tubing to direct water from emitter outlet to emission point. Use distribution tubing compatible with emitters. Do not exceed five feet length between emitter and distribution tubing outlet. Use tubing stakes to anchor distribution tubing. E. Flush Cap Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. F. Inline Drip Tree Ring Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. G. Inline Drip Tree Ring Flush Valve Assembly: as presented in drawings and installation details. 2.08 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Irrigation Controller Assembly: 1. As indicated on drawings and installation details. 2. Electrical conduit: Use PVC Schedule 40 conduit conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D-1785. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld sweep fittings for PVC conduit conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for buried installations. Use rigid metallic conduit with sweep elbows for above grade installations. 3. Wire markers: Prenumbered or labeled with indelible nonfading ink, made of permanent, nonfading material. 4. Lightning protection: As presented in installation details. B. Power Wire: 1. Use AWG #12, solid or stranded copper, Type UF single-conductor cable or multi- conductor with ground cable, UL approved for direct underground burial from power source to Controller Assembly. 2. Splices: Use 3M #82-A2 Series with Split Bolts or Butt Connectors for inline splices and 82-B1 or 90-B1 Series for wye splices. 3. Electrical conduit: Use PVC Schedule 40 conduit conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D-1785. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld sweep fittings for PVC conduit conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for buried installations. Use rigid metallic conduit with sweep elbows for above grade installations. 4. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide, colored red, and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." C. Two Wire Cable From Controller to Decoders: 1. Use two wire cable, decoders, and surge devices per controller manufacturer’s guidelines. 2. Splices: 3M DBR/Y-6 Wire Connector. 3. Electrical conduit: Use PVC Schedule 40 conduit conforming to dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D-1785. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld sweep fittings for PVC conduit conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for buried installations. Use rigid metallic conduit with sweep elbows for above grade installations. 4. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide, colored red, and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 D. Instrumentation: 1. As presented in the drawings and installation details. E. Tracing Wire: 1. Use AWG 14.1 solid copper, 600 volt, Type UF or PE wire, UL approved for direct underground burial. Jacket color: Yellow. 2.09 OTHER COMPONENTS A. Tools and Spare Parts: Furnish operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, spare parts and other items indicated in drawings and specifications. B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on drawings or installation details that are part of irrigation system, even though items may not have been referenced in specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities in writing to Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing site conditions. B. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"): 1. Arrange and coordinate Utility Locates with local authorities prior to construction. 2. Repair underground utilities that are damaged during construction. Make repairs at no additional cost to contract price. 3.02 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Stake out irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, sleeves, and control valves. B. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after staking has been completed. Notify Owner’s Representative one week in advance of review. Modifications will be identified by Owner’s Representative at this review. C. Install irrigation components inside of project property lines. 3.03 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Excavate and install pipes at minimum cover indicated in drawings or specifications. Excavate trenches at appropriate width for connections and fittings. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade): 1. Mainline pipe: 24-inches to top of pipe. 2. Electrical conduit: 24-inches to top of conduit. 3. Control wire: 2-inch offset from bottom of mainline pipe. 4. Lateral pipe to sprinklers: 14-inches to top of pipe. 5. Manifold pipe to drip system zone control valves: (12-inches) to top of pipe. 6. Drip lateral pipe in planting beds downstream of drip system zone control valves: Secure to finish grade with approved tubing stakes. Install and test prior to installation of landscape fabric and mulch. C. Maintain at least 15-feet clearance from centerline of trees. D. PVC lateral must be installed in open trench. Pipe pulling is not allowed. E. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. F. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Use backfill free from rubbish, vegetable matter, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum diameter. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Use backfill free of sharp objects next to pipe. G. Backfill buried pipe and sleeves in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle lower half of trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill remainder of trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill trench by depositing backfill material equally on both sides of pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to density of surrounding soil. H. Backfill buried pipe and sleeves by depositing backfill material equally on both sides of pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting each layer to 90 percent Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698-78. Contractor is responsible for costs of specified testing and any necessary retesting. Use of water for compaction, "puddling", will not be permitted. I. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways and hardscapes in separate sleeves. Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95 percent Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698-78. Contractor is responsible for costs of specified testing and any necessary retesting. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, "puddling", will not be permitted. J. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades. K. Contact Owner’s Representative for trench depth adjustments where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work. 3.04 SLEEVING AND BORING A. Provide sleeving at depth that permits encased pipe or wiring to remain at specified burial depth. B. Extend sleeve ends twelve inches beyond edge of hardscape. Cap sleeve ends and mark with stakes. Provide rope or wire through sleeve and secure to stake at surface grade at each end for future sleeve location. C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions that cannot be removed. Employ equipment and methods designed for horizontal boring. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.05 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and debris. Cut pipe ends square, debur and clean as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. 3. Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within limits of the curvature of pipe. Curvature results from bending of pipe lengths. Do not exceed pipe and fitting manufacturer’s allowable deflection at joints. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20-foot length of pipe-by-pipe size are shown in following table. SIZE RADIUS OFFSET PER 20' LENGTH 1 ½" 25' 7'-8" 2" 25' 7'8" 2 ½" 100' 1'-11" 3" 100' 1'-11" 4" 100' 1'-11" B. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe: a. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 3. Fittings: a. Use of cross type fittings is not permitted. b. Do not strike ductile iron fittings with metallic tools. Cushion blows with wood block or similar shock absorber. C. Lateral/Manifold Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before pressurizing or installing with vibratory plow. c. Snake pipe from side to side within trench. 3. UV Radiation Resistant Polyethylene Pipe: a. Join pipe in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Snake pipe from side to side within trench, on soil surface under landscape fabric, and hold in place with tubing stakes or landscape fabric staples at fittings and at maximum intervals of every five feet along pipe routing. Do not compress or crimp pipe with stake, staple or other construction activity. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. Fittings: Use of cross type fittings is not permitted. D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 2. Flanged connections: Install fittings, fasteners and gaskets in manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 3. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted. b. Apply thread sealant in manner recommended by component, pipe and sealant manufacturers and in accordance with accepted industry practices. c. Use plastic components with male threads and metal components with female threads where connection is plastic-to-metal. E. Thrust Blocks: 1. Use thrust blocks for fittings on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter, or any diameter of rubber gasketed pipe. 2. Size, orient, and place cast-in-place concrete against undisturbed soil as shown on installation details. 3. Wrap fitting or component with plastic to protect bolts, joint, gasket and fitting from concrete. Do not bury fitting or component in concrete. 4. Commercially delivered concrete requires a 3,000 PSI mix. 5. If pre-mix bags are used, mix per manufacturer’s recommendations (maximum 1 gallon of water to 80-pound bag of pre-mix). 6. Contractor is responsible for performing a slump test (minimum of 2-inches to a maximum of 4-inches) if requested by Owner’s Representative. F. Joint Restraint Harness: 1. Use on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter of rubber gasketed pipe. Use a joint restraint harness wherever joints are not positively restrained by flanged fittings, threaded fittings, and/or thrust blocks. 2. Use a joint restraint harness with transition fittings between metal and PVC pipe, where weak trench banks do not allow use of thrust blocks, or where extra support is required to retain fitting or joint. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS A. Flow Sensor Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Brand “FS” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. B. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Install atleast 12- inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “GV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. C. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Brand “QC” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. D. Air-Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on drawings or nearest high point, not closer than 2-feet from nearest fitting. Brand “AV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 12 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler: 1. Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly. 2. Provide where indicated on drawings. Use wire connectors and waterproof sealant to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Provide connectors and sealant per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Provide only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. Align grouped valve boxes in uniform patterns. Allow at least 12- inches between valve boxes. Brand controller letter and station number on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. 4. Adjust RCV assembly to regulate downstream operating pressure. 5. Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring. B. Sprinkler Assembly: 1. Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. 2. Provide per installation details at locations shown on drawings. 3. Locate rotary sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent walls, walks, curbs, fences, or edges of paved areas. 4. Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, walks, curbs, fences, or edges of paved areas. 5. Install sprinklers perpendicular to finish grade. 6. Provide appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best performance and uniform coverage. 7. Adjust radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance and uniform coverage. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Drip Remote Control Valve (DRCV) Assembly: 1. Flush mainline pipe before installing DRCV assembly. 2. Locate as shown on drawings. Connect control wires to remote control valve wires using wire connectors and waterproof sealant. Provide connectors and sealant per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Provide only one DRCV to valve box. Locate at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group DRCV assemblies together where practical. Align grouped valve boxes in uniform patterns. Allow at least 12- inches between valve boxes. Brand controller letter and station number on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. 4. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: Provide where indicated on drawings. Install at least 12- inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “ZCV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. C. Drip Emitter Assembly: 1. Locate as shown on drawings and installation details. 2. Flush lateral pipe before installing emitter assembly. 3. Cut emitter outlet distribution tubing square. 4. Use tools manufactured, and techniques recommended, by emitter manufacturer. D. Flush Cap Assembly: Provide at end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe as shown and directed on drawings and installation details. Install at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “FC” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 13 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Inline Drip Tree Ring Assembly: Install in strict accordance to manufacturer’s guidelines. F. Tree Ring Flush Valve Assembly: Provide at end of each inline drip tree ring zone as shown and directed on drawings and installation details. Install at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “TF” on valve box lid in 2- inch high letters. H. Swing Check Valve Assembly: Provide as shown and directed on drawings and installation details. Install at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. Brand “CV” on valve box lid in 2-inch high letters. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Irrigation Controller Assembly: 1. Location of controller assembly as depicted on drawings is approximate; Owner’s Representative will determine exact site location during sprinkler layout review. Install controller assembly in accordance with controller manufacturer recommendations. 2. Lightning protection: Connect to building ground per NEC code. 3. Coordinate and provide installation of electrical service in accordance with local codes. 4. Connect control wires to corresponding controller terminal. Attach wire markers to ends of control wires inside controller assembly housing. Label wires with identification number (see drawings) of remote control valve to which control wire is connected. B. Power Wire: 1. Install with minimum number of field splices. If power wire must be spliced, make splice with recommended connector, installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Locate splices in jumbo rectangular valve box. Coil 3-feet of wire in valve box. 2. Install power wire using open trenches. Use of a vibratory plow is not permitted. 3. Use green wire as common ground wire from power source to controller assembly. 4. Carefully backfill around power wire to avoid damage to wire insulation or wire connectors. 5. Install wire parallel with and below mainline pipe unless noted otherwise on plans. Install wire at depth required by local codes. 6. Provide continuous run of warning tape above power wire. Install warning tape six inches above wire. Encase power wire within electrical conduit where not installed in common trench with PVC mainline pipe. C. Two Wire Cable From Controller to Decoder: 1. Route cable with mainline pipe. Install with minimum number of field splices. 2. Install cable using open trenches. Use of vibratory plow is not permitted. 3. Provide 24-inch excess length of wire in 8-inch diameter loop at each 90-degree change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tape or tie wiring loop. Coil 30-inch length of wire within each remote control valve box. 4. Carefully backfill around cable to avoid damage to wire insulation or wire connectors. 5. If cable must be spliced, make splice with recommended wire connector, installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Locate splices in housing afforded by other control system components or separate 10-inch round valve box. Coil 3-feet of cable in valve box. 6. Install cable parallel with and offset from mainline pipe unless noted otherwise on plans. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 14 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 7. Provide continuous run of warning tape above cable when the cable is not installed adjacent to mainline pipe. Install warning tape six inches below finish grade. 8. Lightning protection: Install grounding equipment per manufacturer’s guidelines. D. Instrumentation: 1. Provide sensors as indicated on drawings and installation details, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide electrical connections between central control system hardware and sensors under direction and observation of manufacturer's personnel or trained distributor personnel. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS A. Tools and Spare Parts: Prior to Review at completion of construction, supply to Owner operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts, test equipment, and other items indicated in General Notes on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on drawings or installation details that are part of irrigation system, even though items may not have been referenced in specifications. 3.11 PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS A. Document changes to design. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until accurate “as-built” information is recorded. B. Record pipe and wiring network alterations on a daily basis. Record work that is installed differently than shown on construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation system valve, each sleeve end, each stub-out for future pipe or wiring connections, and other irrigation components enclosed within valve box. C. Obtain from Owner’s Representative a reproducible copy of drawings prior to construction completion. Reproducible drawings or CAD data files compatible with AutoCAD software can be purchased from Engineer. Duplicate information contained on project drawings maintained on-site using drafting pen or CAD. Label each sheet "Record Drawing". D. Turn over “Record Drawings” to Owner’s Representative. Completion of Record Drawings is required prior to final construction review at completion of irrigation system installation. 3.12 WINTERIZATION AND SPRING START-UP A. Winterize irrigation system in fall following completion, or partial completion, of irrigation system construction. Start-up irrigation system in spring following completion, or partial completion, of irrigation system construction. Repair any damage caused in improper winterization at no additional cost to Owner. Coordinate winterization and start-up with landscape maintenance personnel. Maple Hill Park 32 84 00 - 15 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain irrigation system for a duration of 30 calendar days from formal written acceptance by Owner’s Representative. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components in order to achieve the most desirable application of water. B. Following completion of Contractor's maintenance period, Owner will be responsible for maintaining system in working order during remainder of guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for trimming around sprinklers, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after landscape maintenance operation. 3.14 CLEANUP A. Remove from site machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish upon completion of work. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 93 00– PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 32 84 00 – Planting Irrigation C. Section 32 92 00 – Turf and Grasses 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Trees 2. Shrubs 3. Perennials 4. Weed Control Fabrics 5. Organic Mulch 6. Rock Mulch 7. Tree Stakes, guying and tree wrap 8. Landscape edging 9. Warranty 10. Maintenance 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides. C. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 32 91 13 "Soil Preparation". D. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Organic Mulch: 1-quart (1-L) volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 2. Mineral Mulch: 2 lb (1.0 kg) of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material. 3. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches, 4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior. B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. 1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances is made by Architect, who tags plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates. C. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 24 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up bare- root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times. D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. E. Handle planting stock by root ball. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two hours. Reject plants with dry roots. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: March 15 – May 30. 2. Fall Planting: September 1 – November 1. C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 24 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 24 months. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant. E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. 2.02 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. If available, mulch provided by the City of Fort Collins Forestry is preferred. 2. Type: Shredded Red Cedar Mulch, as provided by Colorado Materials, Inc, 1541 Boston Avenue, Longmont, Colorado 80501, 303-682-2314 or equivalent. a. Location: As noted on the plans. b. Size Range: Typical product size c. Color: Natural B. Rock Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of the following type, size range, and color as provided by Crystal Landscape Supplies, 6616 N Garfield Ave, Loveland, CO 80538 1. Type: 30% Type L Colorado Buff Rip Rap 30% Type 3-6” River Cobble 40% 3/4” River Rock 2. Color: Tan 2.03 WEED CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. 2.04 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.05 TREE STAKES, GUYING AND TREE WRAP A. Tree Stakes - 8 foot long, 2" diameter Lodgepole Pine or Steel “t-posts” with rubber end protectors. B. Guy Anchors - 24" long steel "t-posts” or approved equivalent. C. Guying and Staking Cord – 14 AWG wire with 1/2" x 12" PVC sleeves. D. Webbing: 2"nylon webbing or rubberized cloth. No hose permitted. E. Tree Wrap: 4" minimum width commercial tree wrap. Secure tree wrap with jute rope or a similar biodegradable material. (Tree wrap to be installed during the fall season only). F. Flags: Standard surveyor’s plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 2.06 LANDSCAPE EDGING A. Steel Edging: Standard commercial-steel edging, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Header Size: 3/32” x minimum 4 inches deep. 3. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of twelve inches (12”). 4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 5. Finish: Standard paint. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance. 3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty. B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. 3.03 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 32 91 13 “Soil Preparation”. B. Placing Planting Soil: Blend planting soil in place. C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits. 1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 2. Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock. 4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected after working hours. B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated. C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.05 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 3” above adjacent finish grades. 1. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 2. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 3. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Container-Grown Stock on Grade: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades. 1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 2. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 3. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.06 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. 3.07 TREE STABILIZATION A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as detailed using stake and guys as specified unless otherwise indicated. Do not force the tree to plumb position. If necessary, reset the tree rootball plumb. 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 1- through 5-inch caliper. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2- 1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. 3. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 3.08 GROUND COVER AND PLANTING ON GRADE A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing, unless otherwise noted. B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. C. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.09 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 4-inch average thickness, with 36-inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3. Rock Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inch average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.10 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Steel Header: Install by laying out beds scaled from the Drawings. Stake, flag, or paint proposed beds prior to installation of header and obtain review of Owner's Representative of layout prior to installation. Install header plumb with grade and stake at minimum ten (10) foot intervals. Establish top of header one inch (1") above finish grade in turf areas. Install using straight lines or long smooth curves. Provide v-shaped drainage openings two inches (2”) wide and one inch (1”) depth at low points in the bed, at outlet point for drainage appurtenances such as downspouts including overflow drains and at ten (10) foot intervals maximum. Do not install steel header around mulch rings in lawn areas. 3.11 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings from intial installation thru Substantial Completion. B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. F. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices. 3.12 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground- cover areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Maple Hill Park 32 90 00 - 12 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.13 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 6 inches or smaller in caliper size. 2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced. 3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. D. After installation and before Planting Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices. 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below: 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below: 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 91 13 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 91 13 - SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes planting soils specified by composition of mixes 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use. B. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. C. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. D. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. E. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. F. USCC: U.S. Composting Council 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified herein: 1. Imported Topsoil (if needed); 2. Organic soil amendment. B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained; providing an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture. C. Existing and imported topsoil and organic soil amendment for verification: 1. Soil Analysis: Submit copies of soil test results from Colorado State University Soils Laboratory. Submit copies of cover letter / results with recommendations. 2. Fertilizer: Submit copy of fertilizer composition to be used and the Supplier source. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field Quality Control Reports 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. Maple Hill Park 32 91 13 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Existing onsite/stockpile AND Imported (if required) Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. D. Report suitability of topsoil for bluegrass sod growth. Provide testing facility recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory topsoil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting-Soil: Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained and stockpiled on-site; modified to produce viable planting soil. Blend existing, on-site surface soil with the soil amendments and fertilizers recommended by the Soil Testing Laboratory Recommendations. B. Planting-Soil: If quantities of existing onsite topsoil do not meet the required / needed topsoil, Contractor to provide imported, naturally formed soil from off-site and modified as necessary to produce viable planting soil. 1. Sources: Topsoil should not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens; or obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass. 2. Additional Properties of Imported Soil before Amending: Soil reaction of pH 6 to 7 and minimum of 2 percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. 3. Unacceptable Properties: a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth. b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand. c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding 12 inch in any dimension. 4. Amended Soil Composition: Blend imported and/or existing, un-amended soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Organic Soil Amendment: See 2.02 below. b. Inorganic Fertilizers: See 2.03 below. Maple Hill Park 32 91 13 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.02 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance”. 1. Organic Amendment shall be Class 1 Compost, meeting the specifications and guidelines established by the Rocky Mountain Organics Council. 2.03 FERTILIZERS A. Provide commercial fertilizers as recommended by the 3rd Party onsite and if necessary imported topsoil as follows: 1. Weight of Superphosphate: As / if required if 3rd party testing analysis recommends this additive. 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer: As / if required if 3rd party testing analysis recommends this additive. 3. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer: As / if required if 3rd party testing analysis recommends this additive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Place planting soil and soil amendments according to requirements in other Specification Sections. B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil. 3.02 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of a minimum depth of 6 inches (to provide a compacted 4” min. depth in all sodded and seed areas) and stockpile until amended. B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth. C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand. 3.03 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL (EXISTING OR IMPORTED) OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE A. General: Apply and mix un-amended soil (existing or imported) with amendments on-site to produce required minimum planting soil depth. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. Maple Hill Park 32 91 13 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off the property. C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total a minimum compacted depth of 4 inches, but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments and fertilizer evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil. a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil: 3 CY/1,000 SF. b. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting. 2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 3. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place. 4. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. D. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. E. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D 698. Space tests at no less than one for each 2500 sq. ft. of in-place soil or part thereof. F. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Use amended onsite planting soil for backfill. B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. Maple Hill Park 32 91 13 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off the property unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeded Turf 2. Sodded Turf 3. Native Seed B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 20 00 - Earth Moving 2. Division 32 84 00 – Planting Irrigation 3. Division 32 90 00 - Plants 4. Division 32 92 13 – Hydro Mulching 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. C. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. D. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. E. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. H. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. I. Weeds: Including but not limited to Goathead, Bindweed, Twitch, Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Knapweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Weed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Broom Grass. 1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. B. Certification of Grass: From seed vendor for each grass seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Sod mix. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. 2. Seed mixes. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil, existing in-place surface soil, and imported or manufactured topsoil. 1. Soil analysis for each topsoil to be used. 2. Analysis for each soil amendment. 3. Analysis for each amended planting soil. F. Analysis and standards: Wherever applicable, for non-packaged materials, provide two copies of analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists. G. Planting schedule: Submit in writing two copies of proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for topsoil placing, site preparation, herbicide treatments, soil preparation, sodding, seeding, and coordination with plant procurement, planting soil preparation, plant delivery and planting. Schedule all Work during specified planting seasons. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays. H. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five (5) years experience, and certified by the State of Colorado Department of Agriculture. 5. Company approved by the sod producer or company with minimum five (5) years’ successful experience in the installation of sodded lawn areas similar in size to this project. 6. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation, maintenance, and irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior. b. Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP. c. Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL. 7. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. a. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to coordinate the process with other trades, to coordinate equipment movement within planting areas and to avoid soil compaction, to review proposed methods of installation, performance criteria, and maintenance procedures. Review underground utility location maps and plans. Equipment having low unit pressure ground contact shall be utilized within planting areas. This meeting shall be coordinated by the construction project manager, and comply with requirements in Division 1. E. Standards: All materials and methods used during this portion of the work shall meet or exceed applicable federal, state, county, and local laws and regulations. All seed shall be free from insects and disease. Species shall be true to their scientific name as specified. 1. All materials furnished shall be free of Colorado State noxious weeds as defined in Article III, Section 21-40 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins. F. Materials: The Landscape Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval a complete list of all materials to be used during this portion of the work prior to delivery of any materials to the site. Include complete data on source, amount and quality. This submittal shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution for specific items described on the plans or in these specifications unless approved in writing by the Owner. G. Plant species substitutions shall be approved by the Architect. Any changes to seed mix must be approved by City of Fort Collins Natural Areas Program staff. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. Seed: Deliver seed materials in original unopened containers, showing bearing weight, analysis, and name of supplier. Store in a manner to prevent the materials from wetting and deteriorating. 5. Fertilizer: Deliver inorganic or chemical fertilizer to site in original unopened container bearing manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark and conformance to state law, and bearing name and warranty of producer. D. Material will be inspected upon arrival at project site. Owner’s Representative will reject any opened or unacceptable materials as described above. E. Immediately remove unacceptable material from job site. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND SCHEDULING A. Work scheduling: Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the specified planting season and approved schedule. B. Planting Restrictions: Planting is preferred in spring but may be performed with written approval from Architect. Variance from the schedule shall be permitted only with written approval from the Architect. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion. C. Drill Seeding: Plant native seed areas as indicated on the drawings with a Range Drill seeder set to ¼” to ½” depth. For tight areas seed with a walk behind over seeder to ensure consistent seed application. D. Do not drill or sow seeds during windy, rainy weather or when ground is frozen or otherwise unable to be tilled. E. Seeding Season: Seeding shall occur as specified below. The following are typical Colorado schedules. Modify the following for appropriate region. Verify with local producers and contractors prior to finalizing: Native Seed October 15-December 1, March 1 – May 1 Cool Season Turf Seed Sustained soil temperature reaches 60 degrees, and a minimum of 8-12 weeks before frost. F. Sodding Season: Sodding shall be installed only after April 1 and before October 1 unless written approval is received from Architect. G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Existing conditions: 1. Existing Plants: Install sod only after all other landscape and irrigation items have been installed and accepted by the Architect. 2. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities. Perform work in a manner to avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. 3. Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, noxious materials or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 4. If weeds are present on site, treat with herbicide prior to preparing soil for installing seed or sod as specified below. I. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with construction of utilities on site. Do not begin placing topsoil until underground work and adjacent structures (building, site walls, headers, mow bands, etc.) are completed in the area. 2. Coordinate with seeding, sodding and landscape Contractor(s) approved schedule. Limit construction access to areas where topsoil has been placed if placement is completed more than 3 days prior to commencement of landscaping in the area. Limit fine grading to areas that can be prepared for planting within 24 hours after fine grading. 3. Coordinate with installation of underground irrigation system. 4. Coordinate with Contractors work requiring access to site over sod areas. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty for Seeded Turf Areas: Warrant areas in seed to be in a healthy, vigorous growing condition, and for consistency and completion of coverage for a period of two years from date of Substantial Completion as a full stand of grass. After seed germination, re-seed any spots where seed has not germinated within the total seeded area. Continue this procedure until a successful stand of grass is growing and accepted by Owner’s Representative. B. During the original warranty period, reseed at once with comparable blend/mix, those areas that have failed to achieve a stand of grass or which in the Owner’s Representative’s opinion are unhealthy. C. Reseeding will not be allowed in any season considerable unfavorable for seeding by the Owner’s Representative. 1.09 Reseed in a manner to achieve quality as originally specified. A. General: The maintenance period shall begin immediately after each area is seeded and continue until Final Acceptance of entire project or a minimum of 90 days, whichever is longer. Final Acceptance of seeded areas will not be given until Architect is satisfied with germination and a full stand of grass is in a vigorous growing condition, with consistent and complete coverage. During this time, be responsible for watering, mowing, spraying, weeding, fertilizing and all related work as necessary to ensure that seeded areas are in a vigorous growing condition. Provide all supervision, labor, material and equipment to develop and maintain seeded areas. After Final Acceptance, maintenance shall become the responsibility of the Owner’s Representative. B. The seeded areas shall be accepted on the basis of having a uniform plant growth over the entire seeded area. Two (2) months after seeding, the seeded areas shall be reviewed by the Owner’s Representative and the Contractor. Any areas (as determined by the Owner’s Representative) where the seed has failed to germinate shall be reseeded and raked to cover the seed. In any area where the seed has failed to grow, reseeding shall be at the Contractor’s expense until grass is established and accepted. Acceptable uniform plant growth shall be defined as when the scattered bare spots, not greater than one (1) square foot, and do not exceed two percent (2%) of the seeded area Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Mowing and Trimming: When turf grasses reach one and one-half inches (1-1/2”) height, begin twice weekly mowing program. Do not remove more than one-third the height of the grass blade in single mowing. Do not mow when grass is wet. Remove clippings from adjacent paved areas shall be removed and clippings from mowed turf areas shall be removed at the direction of Owner’s Representative. D. Fertilizing: 1. At time of seeding or sod: apply 18-12-6 Starter 50% Slow release w/ Crystal Green phosphorus (A 03) 2. 6 weeks past time of seeding or sod: apply 33-0-5 100% XCU slow release nitrogen 2%fe. 3. 8-10 weeks past application first application of 33-0-05: apply 33-0-5 100% XCU 2% fe 4. 10 weeks past second application of 33-0-5: apply 21-0-21 75% XCU 2% fe. 1 to 1 ratio of nitrogen to potash. E. Weed Control: Control annual weeds by mowing. Do not use herbicides unless approved by the Owner’s Representative. F. Insect and Disease Control: As needed, apply insecticide and fungicide approved by the Owner’s Representative. Contractor to provide four (4) insecticide/fungicide applications under the work of this contract. G. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3 and Division 32 9600. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Sodded Turf: Until Final Acceptance (One year). 2. Seeded Turf: Bluegrass seed maintenance will need to occur until 70% establishment has been determined by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Landscape Retainage will also be released once the establishment period is determined by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. H. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: 1. Quality: State-certified seed of grass species (Location as shown on drawings) as listed below. 2. Soil amendments: Areas to receive native seed mix as indicated in the drawings and are not to receive soil amendments. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 C. Seeded Turf: Kentucky Bluegrass/ Perennial Ryegrass Blend MVP 90/10 1. Korby Landscape LLC, 2406 E County Road 60, Wellington, Colorado, 80549, 970-232- 1127, www.korbylandscape.com D. Native Seed: As indicated on the drawings 2.02 SOD A. Turfgrass sod: Certified, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with “Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials” in TPI’s “Guideline Specifications to Turgrass Sodding.” Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Kentucky Bluegrass/ Perennial Ryegrass Blend MVP 90/10 1. Korby Landscape LLC, 2406 E County Road 60, Wellington, Colorado, 80549, 970-232- 1127, www.korbylandscape.com 2.03 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. B. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. C. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. D. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. E. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.04 FERTILIZERS A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory. C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 2.05 HERBICIDES Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 9 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 A. General: Herbicide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted herbicides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Use only with approval by Architect. Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide “Round-up” by Monsanto, or approved equal. D. All native and domestic seed areas to receive an application of Round-Up general herbicide no sooner that 7 days prior to seeding operations. Refer to 3.02C for application instructions PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finish grades are consistent with the slopes and grades indicated on the Drawings. 2. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 3. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 4. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 5. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Weed Control: If weeds are present in the area to be planted, perform herbicide treatment over the entire area to be planted. Allow sufficient time to successfully complete the entire herbicide treatment process before proceeding with planting. Repeat procedure as needed as weed growth becomes evident throughout the duration of landscape construction. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 10 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Herbicide treatment must be completed during the growing season. 2. Water surface 1/2" per week for two weeks prior to application if natural precipitation does not supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination. 3. Treat site with “Roundup” herbicide in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Two days after application water surface 1/2" per week if natural precipitation does not supply this amount to encourage weed seed germination. 5. Ten (10) days after the first “Roundup” application, review surface for evidence of plant growth. 6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4, and 5, up to three (3) applications, until there is no evidence of plant growth after a 10-day period. 7. Obtain Construction Manager’s approval of surface conditions fourteen (14) days after last herbicide application. 8. Herbicide treatments beyond the three applications shall be considered additional to the contract and will be performed at the directed of the Construction Manager after the City has approved the cost. Additional herbicide treatments required for imported topsoil shall be borne solely by the Contractor. 9. Remove plant debris from treated area. 10. Allow a minimum of 7 days after the last Round-Up application prior all seeding operations. 11. Contact Architect 48 hours in advance to review the site after each herbicide treatment. Do not proceed with additional planting until the results are approved and accepted by the Architect. 3.03 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 32 91 13 “Soil Preparation”. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation indicated in the drawings and adjacent to paving and curbs. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. 1. Remove foreign materials, stones, exceeding 1 inch, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots that can to the surface during soil amendment. 2. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Compact area to 85% in accordance with 31 20 00. 3. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive planting. C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. D. Verify that all areas are graded to drain at a minimum of 2% or as indicated on the drawings. Verify that subsurface drainage system and drain inlets if any, are operative. E. Verify that irrigation system is operable and provides adequate coverage prior to planting. F. Contact Architect Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 11 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3.04 SODDING A. After soil preparation, scarify the surface to a depth of 3/8 inch using a chain drag, chain link, or rake B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid over a 24 hour period. C. Do not lay sod on frozen ground. D. Keep soil bed slightly moist during laying of sod. E. Lay sod smoothly, edge to edge. Establish firm jointing between sod pieces with no visible soil between, do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Lay sod perpendicular to slopes. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. F. Water sod lightly as sodding progresses to prevent drying. Roll sod diagonally with a light roller, leveling irregularities, eliminating air pockets and sealing joints. Do not roll with a saturated subgrade. G. In order to facilitate drainage, place sod flush with pavement on the uphill side of pavement. Place sod slightly below pavement on the downhill side of pavement. H. Hold sod back from tree trunks in a radius of 18 inches taken from the tree trunk. I. On sod placed on three to one slopes, secure sod with stakes. Drive stakes flush with grade. J. Place signs on all newly laid sod indicating “New Sod, Please Stay Off.” Place signs at 50’ to 100’ intervals as appropriate. 3.05 SEEDING A. Definitions. 1. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. B. Seed areas indicated on drawings and areas disturbed by construction. 1. Native Seed application rates shall be as specified on the drawings. 2. Seed turf grass at a rate of 135 lbs/acre. C. Re-work previously prepared areas that have become compacted or damaged by rains or traffic. D. Apply by means of a Brillion mechanical power drawn drill seeder to a maximum depth of ¼ inch followed by packer wheels or drag chains to provide smooth finish. Seed in two passes at right angles to one another. Sow half of the seed in each pass. Provide markers or other means to assure that the successive seeded strips will overlap or be separated by a space no greater than the space between rows planted by the equipment being used. E. Broadcast or hydro seed in areas that are inaccessible or too steep to drill or as indicated on plans. Broadcast seed in two opposite directions. Rake in seed after broadcasting. F. Restore fine grade after seeding as requested by the owner’s representative. G. Cover seed to depth of 1/4 inch by raking or dragging. H. Firm seeded areas with a roller weighing maximum of 100 lbs. per foot of width. I. Hydromulch per Section 32 92 13. Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 12 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 J. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, when ground is frozen or untillable, or during windy periods. K. Selection of the time of seeding shall be Contractor’s responsibility, consistent with germination and erosion control requirements. Optimal seeding time is mid May through early September. 3.06 TURF MAINTENANCE A. General: Contractor to maintain turf from initial installation through Substantial Completion. B. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing (if this maintenance period exceeds 90 days prior to Substantial Completion), weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. C. Mow turf (thru Substantial Completion) as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. 3.07 WARRANTY / SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Owner’s Representative: 1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even- colored, viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to re-establish sodded areas that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.08 NATIVE SEEDED AREA MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish dryland native seeded areas by weeding, mowing, replanting, and other operations. Re-grade and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch as needed. B. Seed Establishment Period: 1. Seed establishment period shall begin upon the notice of “Conditional Acceptance” given by the Owner’s Representative in writing and continue until the seed is established. 2. Post “KEEP OFF GRASS” signs until seed is established. 3. Maintenance shall include herbicide weed control as necessary. Do not apply herbicide before the first mowing, do not mow before the majority of seedlings have three leaf blades. 4. Required coverage for grass seed areas shall be twenty (20) viable live seedlings of the species specified per square foot as measured from five (5) feet directly overhead. De- termination of required coverage will be based on a random sampling of the entire project area, and shall consist of a minimum of five samples, each two (2) square feet in area. Bare spots are defined as those areas larger than one square foot which do not meet the Maple Hill Park 32 92 00 - 13 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 required coverage. After the inspection it is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the required maintenance within one (1) week to insure an overall healthy established seeding condition. 5. The total area occupied by bare spots larger than 0.5 square feet must not exceed ten percent (10%) of the total seeded area. Maximum single bare spot size is one (1) square foot. All seeded grass areas which do not meet the satisfactory stand of growth qualification shall be reseeded and mulched. 6. Once the maintenance periods are completed and seed establishment is accepted, the Owner’s Representative shall issue a written notice of Final Acceptance. The guarantee period extends for one (1) growing season after Final Acceptance. 7. Provide weed control as required so that planting is reasonably free of weeds and undesirable grass species, diseases and insects. Utilize a broadleaf weed control product as required and a fall mowing to six-inches (6”) depth during the fall season for additional weed control. 3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 32 92 13 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 32 92 13 – HYDRO MULCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hydro Mulching B. Related Sections: 1. Division 32 92 00 – Turf and Grasses 2. Division 32 90 00 – Plants 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals 1. Certificates: State, Federal and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for materials showing source or origin. Submit to Owner prior to acceptance of material. 2. Contractor shall submit specifications for both the hydro mulch and organic tackifier prior to application. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with best management practices for delivery, storage and handling of material. 1.05 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Grade will have been established and seed will be in place. Repairs to seedbed due to vehicle tracking or erosion must be repaired prior to mulching. 2. Vehicular accessibility on site shall be as directed by Owner. Repair damage to prepared grounds and surfaces caused by vehicular movement during work under this section to original condition at no additional cost to Owner. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply hydro mulch when wind speed exceeds seven (7) miles per hour. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Maple Hill Park 32 92 13 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mulch: Mulch all seeded areas, including those seeded over remaining vegetation, hydro mulch with Conwed 200 and an organic tackifier or approved substitute: 1. Virgin wood cellulose fiber: May not contain any substance or fiber that may inhibit germination or growth of grass seeds and plants. 2. Dye to appropriate color to allow proper metering of application. 3. Fibers must have ability to become evenly dispersed and suspended when agitated in water. 4. When sprayed uniformly on surface of soil, fibers shall form blotter - like ground cover which readily absorbs water, and allows infiltration to underlying soil. 5. Weight specifications shall refer only to air dry weight of fibers with a standard moisture content of ten (10) percent. 6. Mulch material shall be supplied in containers not weighing over 100 pounds and showing air dry weight of fibers. 7. Organic tackifier may be supplied with hydro mulch fibers or be added at a later time. 8. Suppliers must certify that laboratory and field testing of product has been accomplished and that material meets all of the forgoing requirements for cellulose wood fiber mulch. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION B. General - Verify that existing site conditions are as specified and indicated before beginning work under this section. 1. Layout: Seeded areas will be mulched. Mulch placement shall not extend beyond seeded areas by more than five (5) feet. 2. Grades: Verify that grades are as indicated and specified. C. Unsatisfactory Conditions: Report in writing to Owner’s Representative. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions by this Contractor. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Be responsible for proper repair to landscape, utilities, walls, pavements and other site improvements damaged by operations under this Section. 2. Pay for repairs made by contractors designated by Owner’s Representative. 3. Identify mulched areas requiring protection and erect barriers for proper protection and traffic control. 4. Erosion control: Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control and prevent soil erosion, blowing soil and accumulation of wind deposited materials at the site throughout the duration of work. 3.03 MULCHING A. Hydro Mulching: Maple Hill Park 32 92 13 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 1. Mixing: Add cellulose fiber mulch after proportionate quantities of water and other accepted materials have been placed in slurry tank. Mix ingredients to form homogenous slurry. 2. Spraying: Spray apply slurry mulch uniformly over seeded areas using control of mulch as metering agent. Apply at rate of 2,500 pounds per acre plus organic tackifier at rate of 150 pounds per acre. Soil may not be visible through the hydro mulch upon completion of application. 3. Hydro mulching: Do not apply in presence of free surface water resulting from rain, melting snow or irrigation. B. Hydraulic Mulching Equipment: Include pump capable of being operated at one hundred (100) gallons a minute and at 100 P.S.I., unless otherwise directed. 1. Provide nozzle adaptable to hydraulic mulching requirements. 2. Storage tanks must have means of calculating volume used or remaining in tank. C. Timing: Mulch designated areas immediately following seed placement. Mulch must be placed within forty-eight (48) hours following seeding operation. If sections of seed are placed, mulch should follow each phase of seeding. D. Quality Control: Repair or re-mulch areas improperly mulched or damaged by Contractor's negligence, in manner specified. Mulch removed by circumstances beyond the Contractor's control shall be repaired and re-mulched as ordered by Owner Representative. Compensation for re-mulch required by circumstances beyond Contractor's control shall be calculated per the Unit Price in the Bid Form. E. The Owner’s Representative shall be notified twenty-four (24) hours prior to each application and will determine if coverage is according to specification. 3.04 NOTIFICATION OF INSPECTION A. Notification: Give notice requesting inspection by Owner’s Representative at completion of mulching operation. B. Deficiencies: If deficiencies exist, Owner’s Representative shall specify such deficiencies to the Contractor who shall make satisfactory adjustments and will again notify the Owner’s Representative for final inspection. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Remove material containers and other debris from site. Clean paved and finished surfaces soiled as a result of work under this Section in accordance with directions given by the Owner’s Representative. Clean out drainage inlet structures. Remove any accumulated soil from the surface to adjacent paved areas or undisturbed grass areas. 3.06 PROTECTION A. General: Provide and install barriers as required and as directed by the Owner’s Representative to protect mulched areas against damage from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for malicious destruction of mulch caused by others. END OF SECTION Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 1 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 SECTION 33 47 13 POND LINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Furnish labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform operations in connection with, and reasonably incidental to, complete installation of pond lining, pond edge construction, and guarantee/warranty as shown on drawings, installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Furnishing materials and qualified labor for installation of unreinforced 30-mil Reinforced Polyethylene (RPE) geomembrane liner and 8-oz non-woven geotextile liner for entire irrigation pond area as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for supplying appropriate quantity of liner materials based on construction drawings and field conditions. C. Compaction of backfill in pond perimeter area prior to excavation and trenching for pond edge and anchor trench construction. D. Furnishing materials and labor for construction of anchor trench around entire perimeter of pond. E. Furnishing materials and qualified labor for liner boots at pipe penetrations through liner material prior to installing soil cover over liner. F. Completion of earthwork by a qualified earthwork contractor meeting requirements specified herein. G. Furnishing materials and labor for installation of rock treatments. H. Coordination of pond grading with drawings and specifications or other disciplines where applicable. I. Backfill and leakage testing as required by local codes. J. Coordinate and provide services of lining manufacturer’s Technical Field Representative for a minimum of one (1) site visit during construction, including expenses, to verify and document Quality Assurance and testing procedures. 1.02 DISCREPANCIES It is the intent of these plans and specifications that pond lining system, edge treatments, and soil cover to be complete and functional. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that materials and equipment furnished is compatible with liner installation and adheres to Federal, State and local regulations. Any discrepancies must be immediately reported to Owner’s Representative for clarification prior to construction. 1.03 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installation must be performed by a contractor or field service representative approved by liner manufacturer who has previously installed a minimum of 1,000,000 sq. ft. of specified liner material in similar pond applications. Provide documentation of experience prior to construction and provide written record of presence at site during installation. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 2 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. Leak testing contractor must have qualifications and experience in conducting proposed leak detection method, having tested a minimum of 1,000,000 sq. ft. of specified liner material within previous three years. Provide leak location survey and documentation to Owner’s Representative in accordance with specified ASTM standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Deliver one PDF copy of submittals to Owner’s Representative within ten (10) working days from date of Notice to Proceed. Index sections for different components and label with specification section number and name of component. Furnish submittals for components on material list. Highlight which items are being supplied on catalog cut sheets when multiple items are shown on one sheet. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. B. Materials List: Include pond liner, geotextile, pipe boots, trenching and compaction equipment and soil cover mix specifications. Quantities of materials need not be included. C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' name and contact information, catalog cut sheets, material specifications and warranty, and installation, maintenance and operating instructions for all material supplied. 1.05 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Construction and materials must be in accordance with latest edition of International Building Code, International Plumbing Code, and applicable laws and regulations of governing authorities. B. When contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide quality and size required by contract documents. 1.06 TESTING A. Notify Owner’s Representative a minimum of three calendar days (72 hours) in advance of testing. B. On completion of installation and assembly of pond lining, all field welds must be tested. C. Non destructive seam strength testing: 1. All seams must be visually inspected for compliance with ASTM standards. 2. All field seams must be Air Lance Tested (ASTM D4437) using a minimum 50 psi air supply directed through a 3/16-inch nozzle, held not more than 2- inches from seam edge and directed at seam edge. 3. Defective seams are located when air jet causes membrane to inflate, flutter, or show a disturbance not observed in properly seamed material. D. Destructive seam strength testing: 1. Provide one (1) sample per five-hundred (500) linear feet of field seams installed. Provide independent third-party testing for bonded seam strength and peel adhesion values as indicated in materials section of these specifications. 2. Do not cut samples from portions of lining that will be submerged after construction. Provide samples from excess material outside of pond perimeter anchor trench. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 3 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Leak detection and location: 1. Provide independent third-party testing of installed lining system for leaks using a water puddle test, or equivalent method approved by Owner’s Representative. 2. Complete testing per ASTM D6747 and D7002. 3. Provide moisture to geotextile or subsurface prior to liner installation and testing if necessary to facilitate leak location and survey documentation. Do not saturate, alter compaction or create slope instability of subsurface during this process. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW A. The purpose of on-site reviews by Owner’s Representative is to periodically observe work in progress, Contractor's interpretation of construction documents, and to address questions with regard to installation. B. Scheduled reviews must be scheduled with Owner’s Representative as required by these specifications. C. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during project. D. A review will occur at completion of pond lining system installation and testing, and prior to Project Record Drawing submittal. 1.08 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A. The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to ensure that Owner receives materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. B. Provide documentation from manufacturer for minimum 15-year warranty for liner materials supplied to this project. C. For a period of one year from commencement of formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty pond grading stability, pond edge treatments, liner installation, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions that occur within maintenance period. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by settlement of trenches or excavations. Repair damage to premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven calendar days of notification from Owner’s Representative. D. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to contract price. E. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during guarantee/warranty period. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY Materials used in pond construction must be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and must be meet or exceed material standards listed in these specifications. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Make complete submittals of all manufacturers’ data showing compliance with Construction Documents. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 4 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 B. In making a request for a substitution, Contractor represents: 1. They have investigated proposed substitution and found it to be the same or better quality, capacity, function, and appearance than specified product, and can physically demonstrate that to Owner’s Representative and Engineer. 2. They will coordinate installation and make modifications required for complete installation and operation of system to meet or exceed original Construction Documents. C. Owner’s Representative and Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitution and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection prior to construction. 2.03 POND LINER A. RPE geomembrane sheeting must be manufactured from chemical resistant linear low density polyethylene with cold crack resistance and formulated with thermal and UV stabilizers. Reprocessed or reground materials are not acceptable. The use of water soluble formulation ingredients is not acceptable. B. Provide manufacturer’s current certification test results for liner materials with delivery documentation for this project showing material meets specifications. C. Furnish RPE 30-mil membrane lining consisting of 72-inch or greater widths of calendared sheeting fabricated into large sections by means of special factory- bonded seams into a single panel, or into minimum number of large panels required to fit job site. 1. Furnish sheeting that is flexible, durable, and watertight, free of pinholes, blisters, holes, or other contaminants. 2. Furnish RPE membrane material uniform in color, thickness, size and surface texture. 3. Furnish material having following minimum physical properties as specified by ASTM: a. Core Thickness: 30 mils b. Weight: Minimum specific gravity: 1.2g/cc c. Construction: 9x9-1000 Denier PET scrim reinforced polyethylene d. Tongue Tear Strength: 115 lbf e. Grab Tensile @ Break: 280 lbf f. Tensile Elongation @ Break: 30% g. Puncture Resistance: 100 lbf h. Standard OIT or High Pressure HPOIT: 150 min, 2400 min i. Hydraulic Conductivity: 2.2x10-10 cm/sec j. Maximum Static Use Temperature: 180 F k. Minimum Static Use Temperature: -70 F Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 5 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 2.04 GEOTEXTILE A. Furnish 100% polypropylene, nonwoven, needle punch, geotextile. B. Furnish material having minimum average roll values as specified by ASTM: 1. Fabric Weight: 8.0 ounces/sq. yard 2. Thickness: 85 mils min. 3. Grab Tensile Strength: 205-225 lbs. 4. Grab Elongation: 50% 5. Trapezoid Tear Strength: 80-95 lbs 6. CBR Puncture Resistance: 500-600 lbs 7. Water Flow Rate: 95-110 gpm/ft2 8. Permeability: 0.3 – 0.38 cm/sec 9. Permittivity: 1.25-1.5 sec1-1 10. U.V. Resistance: 70%/500 hrs 11. Apparent Opening Size: US Sieve 80 (0.18mm) C. Use products manufactured by SKAPS Industries, Tencate Mirafi, Inc., Propex Global, or Engineer approved equal. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide any special tools, hardware, adhesives, boots, or any special materials necessary for proper installation of liner as recommended by manufacturer. B. Use only stainless steel fasteners, washers, strapping, and other hardware that is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS A. Site Inspections: 1. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Utilities: Verify locations of underground utilities. 3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING A. Earthwork must be performed by a contractor that has previously completed earthwork for a minimum of three (3) lined pond construction projects in the last five (5) years. Provide documentation of experience and present to Owner’s Representative at pre-construct meeting before installation. B. Excavate or provide compacted fill material to permit installation of RPE liner, nonwoven geotextile and soil cover at finished grades and elevations as shown on drawings. Refer to pond grading plan for additional information. Over- excavate as necessary to provide smooth and compacted subgrade and soil cover for finished grades as specified. C. Coordinate installation of liner with landscape edge treatments. D. Contractor must submit as-constructed survey of subgrades for approval by Owner’s Representative prior to installing liner system. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 6 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 E. Subgrade must be accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative, Engineer, and lining installation contractor at slope gradation indicated on grading plans. F. Backfill and soil cover must be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, and stones larger than 1/2-inches in maximum diameter. Remove all material not suitable for backfill and soil cover. Backfill and soil cover placed next to liner must be free of sharp objects which may damage liner. 1. Maintain a minimum of 3-feet depth of clean soil cover over liner during soil cover installation for all haul roads on top of liner and geotextiles entering and exiting pond. 2. Maintain a minimum of 1’ of clean soil cover beneath all equipment during spreading and placement of soil cover on top of liner and geotextiles. 3. Use wide-track dozer or approved equal machinery to transport and place soil cover over liner. Fill and compact from bottom of pond and up slopes during installation. Do not damage installed liner during soil cover operations. G. Form ‘U’-shaped anchor trench with minimum dimensions per construction documents. After placement of liner and geotextile material in ‘U’-shaped anchor trench as shown in detail, fill anchor trench over liner and geotextile with concrete or clean fill compacted to 95% standard proctor density (SPD). H. Where utilities conflict with pond excavation or anchor trenching, contact Owner’s Representative. I. Anchor trench: 1. Stake perimeter of pond, top of anchor trench elevation, utilities, and other structures or appurtenance that may conflict with installation or placement of anchor trench. Identify locations for construction joints. 2. Coordinate exact location and placement of perimeter alignment with site layout, landscape, grading, and utility drawings and Owner’s Representative. 3. Inspect location of anchor trench and identify any areas where backfill has been deposited or existing grade has been disturbed. 4. Excavate for anchor trench using a trencher or backhoe to allow for depth and thickness as shown on details. J. Lining system: 1. Excavate to permit installation of RPE liner, nonwoven geotextile, soil cover at elevations as shown on drawings. 2. If it is discovered that utilities or other site improvements conflict with pond excavation or anchor trenching, contact Owner’s Representative for resolution prior to construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF POND LINER A. General: 1. Install RPE liner and geotextile in anchor trench as shown on details. Backfill and compact anchor trench as indicated in these specifications. 2. Installation must be performed by a contractor meeting the qualifications listed previously in these specifications. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 7 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 3. Subgrade surface (substrate) to receive liner must be compacted per liner manufacturer’s specifications, smooth and free from sharp objects that could puncture liner materials. 4. Remove all vegetation prior to installation of liner. 5. Subgrade must be accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative, Engineer, and lining installation contractor prior to installation of liner system. 6. Store RPE liner out of direct sunlight with the panels’ protective covering intact until installation. 7. Install structures and piping in pond that will require liner penetrations, mechanical attachments, or special liner interface treatments prior to liner installation as detailed. 8. Place geotextile and RPE liner over prepared surfaces in such a manner to assure minimum handling. Use sandbags (or similar ballast) to keep panels in place during installation. Avoid wrinkles in seam areas and around mechanical attachments. 9. Place liner and geotextile material in ‘U’-shaped anchor trench as shown in details, extended through, and in contact with all three sides of trench. 10. Closely fit and seal lining around inlets, outlets, and other projections through liner materials using prefabricated fittings or pipe boots where possible. 11. Do not drive any vehicle over RPE liner where specified soil cover protection does not exist. 12. Perform installation procedures, materials, workmanship, and testing in accordance with liner manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Field Joints: 1. Use approved welding methods to seal factory fabricated panels of RPE liner together in field. a. Form liner welds per manufacturer’s requirements. b. Remove dirt, dust, and other foreign materials from material and scrub mating surfaces. 2. Construct joints in a manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. C. Mechanical Attachments to Structures: Construct mechanical attachments in a manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with details and accepted industry practices. D. Repairs to RPE Liner: Make necessary repairs in a manner recommended by manufacturer prior to final acceptance of pond lining system. E. Quality of Workmanship: 1. Any lining surface showing injury due to scuffing, penetration by foreign objects or distress from rough subgrade must, as directed by Owner’s Representative, be replaced or covered and sealed with an additional layer of RPE liner material of proper size. 2. All welds must be tightly bonded upon completion of work. Maple Hill Park 33 47 13 - 8 Bid Set Fort Collins, Colorado March 29, 2017 F. Quality Assurance: Coordinate and provide services of Technical Field Representative from liner manufacturer for at least one (1) site visit during construction to observe installation, to prepare field reports documenting site visit observations, and to ensure compliance with manufacturer's installation procedures. Submit field reports to Owner’s Representative within three (3) days of site visit. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE A. Install nonwoven geotextile above RPE liner as shown in details and as recommended by manufacturer. B. Complete field welds at all overlapped liner panels. Utilize manufacturer’s recommended products and procedures for field welds and overlap dimensions. C. Secure geotextile to pipe penetrations as shown in details by overlapping fabric over top of RPE liner and under pipe boot. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF SHOTCRETE EDGES: A. Install pond edge treatments as detailed and specified in plans, details, and specifications. B. Provide layer of 8-oz nonwoven geotextile between RPE liner and shotcrete material; do not apply shotcrete directly to RPE liner under any circumstance. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS Install other materials shown on drawings or installation details to be part of pond liner and edge construction, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.07 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record and number liner panel installation and field weld locations. Include notations for liner repairs and portions of liner system that is installed differently from that shown on construction drawings. B. Document changes to design. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of construction documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until accurate “as-built” information is recorded. C. Record alterations on a daily basis. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each liner penetration. D. Turn over Project Documents to Owner’s Representative prior to final acceptance. Completion of Project Documents will be a prerequisite for Review at completion of pond lining and edge treatment systems installation. 3.08 CLEANUP Upon completion of pond liner and edge treatment installation, remove machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish from site. END OF SECTION 400 North Link Lane | Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 Telephone: 970-206-9455 Fax: 970-206-9441 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION MAPLE HILL PARK IMPROVEMENTS SW MAPLE HILL DRIVE AND BAR HARBOR DRIVE FORT COLLINS, COLORADO 215 North Mason Street Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 Attention: Matthew Day, RLA Project No. FC07300-125 January 10, 2017 CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 TABLE OF CONTENTS SCOPE 1 SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS 1 SITE CONDITIONS AND PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION 2 INVESTIGATION 3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3 GEOLOGIC HAZARDS 4 Expansive Soils 4 Seismicity 4 SITE DEVELOPMENT 4 Over-Excavation 4 Fill Placement 5 Excavations 6 FOUNDATIONS 6 Footings 6 BELOW GRADE WALLS AND SUBSURFACE DRAINS 7 FLOOR SYSTEMS AND SLABS-ON-GRADE 8 WATER-SOLUBLE SULFATES 10 SURFACE DRAINAGE 11 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS 11 GEOTECHNICAL RISK 11 LIMITATIONS 12 FIGURE 1 – LOCATIONS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS FIGURE 2 – SUMMARY LOGS OF EXPLORATORY BORINGS APPENDIX A – RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTING APPENDIX B – SAMPLE SITE GRADING SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 1 SCOPE This report presents the results of our Geotechnical Investigation for the proposed Maple Hill Neighborhood Park in Fort Collins, Colorado. The purpose of the investigation was to evaluate the subsurface conditions and provide foundation recommendations and geotechnical design criteria for the project. The scope was described in our Service Agreement (Proposal No. FC-16-0100, dated March 1, 2016). The report was prepared from data developed during field exploration, laboratory testing, engineering analysis and experience with similar conditions. The report includes a description of subsurface conditions found in our exploratory borings and discussions of site development as influenced by geotechnical considerations. Our opinions and recommendations regarding design criteria and construction details for site development, foundations, slabs-on-grade, lateral earth loads and drainage are provided. The report was prepared for the exclusive use of the City of Fort Collins in design and construction of single-family residences in the referenced subdivision. If the proposed construction changes, we should be requested to review our recommendations. Our conclusions are summarized in the following paragraphs. SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS 1. Soils encountered in our borings consisted in general of sandy clay and clayey sand. Claystone bedrock was encountered in one boring at 8 feet to the depth explored. Groundwater was encountered in five of the borings during drilling at depths of 14 to 18 feet and was measured several days after drilling at depths of 8½ to 15 feet. We recommend a minimum 3-foot separation from foundation excavations to groundwater. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 2 2. The presence of expansive soils and bedrock constitutes a geologic hazard. There is risk that slabs-on-grade and foundations will heave or settle and be damaged. We believe the recommendations presented in this report will help to control risk of damage; they will not eliminate that risk. Slabs-on-grade and, in some instances, foundations may be damaged. 3. Testing indicated higher swells in the upper clays. We recommend footing foundations designed to maintain a minimum dead load placed on 2 feet of over-excavated, properly compacted fill. Design and construction criteria for foundations are presented in the report. 4. We judge the risk of poor slab-on-grade performance is moderate to high for surficial slabs. We recommend placing slabs-on-grade on 2 feet of over-excavated, properly compacted fill. Some slab movements should be anticipated. We expect movements will be minor, on the order of 1 inch or less. If movement cannot be tolerated, structural floors should be considered for the structures. 5. Surface drainage should be designed, constructed and maintained to provide rapid removal of surface runoff away from the proposed structures. Conservative irrigation practices should be followed to avoid excessive wetting. SITE CONDITIONS AND PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION The site is located on the south side of Maple Hill Drive between Forecastle Drive and Bar Harbor Drive in Fort Collins, Colorado (Figure 1). At the time of our investigation the parcel was undeveloped. The ground surface slopes generally downward to the south and west from the adjacent roadways. Ground cover consisted of natural grasses and weeds. Based on conversations with our client, we understand that a variety of improvements have been proposed that may include restrooms, canopy shelters, concrete walkways, sport courts and a detention pond. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 3 INVESTIGATION The field investigation included drilling six exploratory borings at the locations presented on Figure 1. The borings were drilled to depths of approximately 10 to 30 feet using 4-inch diameter, continuous-flight augers and a truck-mounted drill. Drilling was observed by our field representative who logged the soils and bedrock encountered. Summary logs of the borings, including results of field penetration resistance tests, are presented on Figure 2. Soil and bedrock samples obtained during drilling were returned to our laboratory and visually examined by our geotechnical engineer. Laboratory testing was assigned and included moisture content, dry density, swell-consolidation, particle-size analysis, Atterberg limits and water-soluble sulfate tests. Swell- consolidation test samples were wetted at a confining pressure which approximated the weight of overlying soils (overburden pressures). Results of the laboratory tests are presented in Appendix A. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Soils encountered in our borings consisted in general of sandy clay and clayey sand. Claystone bedrock was encountered in one boring at 8 feet to the depth explored. The overburden soils classified as medium stiff to very stiff / loose to medium dense based on field penetration test results. The competent claystone bedrock classified as medium hard to hard. Swell-consolidation testing of seven soil and bedrock samples indicated 0.0 to 7.3 percent swell; samples tested from 4 feet and below swelled a maximum of 1.2 percent. Groundwater was encountered in five of the borings during drilling at depths of 14 to 18 feet and was measured several days after drilling at depths of 8½ to 15 feet. We recommend a minimum 3-foot separation from foundation excavations to groundwater. Further descriptions of the subsurface conditions are presented on our boring logs and in our laboratory test results. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 4 GEOLOGIC HAZARDS Expansive Soils Expansive soils and bedrock are present at the site. The presence of expansive soils and bedrock, collectively referred to as expansive or swelling soils, constitutes a geologic hazard. There is a risk that ground heave will damage slabs- on-grade and foundations. The risks associated with swelling soils can be mitigated, but not eliminated, by careful design, construction, and maintenance procedures. We believe the recommendations in this report will help control risk of foundations and/or slab damage; they will not eliminate that risk. Seismicity This area, like most of central Colorado, is subject to a low degree of seismic risk. As in most areas of recognized low seismicity, the record of the past earthquake activity in Colorado is incomplete. According to the 2012 International Building Code and the subsurface conditions encountered in our borings, this site probably classifies as a Site Class D. Only minor damage to relatively new, properly designed and built buildings would be expected. Wind loads, not seismic considerations, typically govern dynamic structural design in this area. SITE DEVELOPMENT Over-Excavation Testing indicated higher swells in the upper clays. We recommend over- excavation below footings and slabs-on-grade. The over-excavation should consist of removal of the existing soils to a depth of 2 feet, moisture conditioning and compaction of the soils as described in the Fill Placement section below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 5 The over-excavation should extend a minimum 1-foot beyond the perimeter of the improvements. Fill Placement The existing onsite soils are suitable for re-use as fill material provided debris or deleterious organic materials are removed. If import material is used, it should be tested and approved as acceptable fill by CTL|Thompson. In general, import fill should meet or exceed the engineering qualities of the onsite soils. Areas to receive fill should be scarified, moisture-conditioned and compacted to at least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D698, AASHTO T99). Sand soils used as fill should be moistened to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Clay soils should be moistened between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture content. The fill should be moisture-conditioned, placed in thin, loose lifts (8 inches or less) and compacted as described above. We should observe placement and compaction of fill during construction. Fill placement and compaction should not be conducted when the fill material is frozen. Site grading in areas of landscaping where no future improvements are planned can be placed at a dry density of at least 90 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698, AASHTO T 99). Example site grading specifications are presented in Appendix B. Water and sewer lines are often constructed beneath areas where improvements are planned. Compaction of trench backfill can have a significant effect on the life and serviceability overlying structures. We recommend trench backfill be moisture conditioned and compacted as described in the Fill Placement section of this report. Placement and compaction of fill and backfill should be observed and tested by a representative of our firm during construction. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 6 Excavations The materials found in our borings can be excavated using conventional heavy-duty excavation equipment. Excavations should be sloped or shored to meet local, State and Federal safety regulations. Excavation slopes specified by OSHA are dependent upon types of soil and groundwater conditions encountered. The contractor’s “competent person” should identify the soils and/or rock encountered in the excavation and refer to OSHA standards to determine appropriate slopes. Excavations deeper than 20 feet should be braced or a professional engineer should design the slopes. FOUNDATIONS Testing indicated higher swells in the upper clays. We recommend footing foundations designed to maintain a minimum dead load placed on 2 feet of over- excavated, properly compacted fill as described in the SITE DEVELOPMENT section of this report. Design criteria for footing foundations developed from analysis of field and laboratory data and our experience are presented below. Footings 1. Footings should be constructed on undisturbed natural soils or properly compacted fill (see the Fill Placement section of this report). All existing, uncontrolled fill should be removed from under footings and within one footing width around footings and replaced with properly compacted fill. Where soil is loosened during excavation, it should be removed and replaced with on-site soils compacted following the criteria in the Fill Placement section of this report. 2. Footings should be designed for a net allowable soil pressure of 2,000 psf and a minimum dead load pressure of 700 psf. The soil pressure can be increased 33 percent for transient loads such as wind or seismic loads. We recommend a minimum 3-foot separation between foundation elements and groundwater. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 7 3. Footings should have a minimum width of at least 16 inches. Foundations for isolated columns should have minimum dimensions of 20 inches by 20 inches. Larger sizes may be required depending on loads and the structural system used. 4. The soils beneath footing pads can be assigned an ultimate coefficient of friction of 0.4 to resist lateral loads. The ability of grade beam or footing backfill to resist lateral loads can be calculated using a passive equivalent fluid pressure of 250 pcf. This assumes the backfill is densely compacted and will not be removed. Backfill should be placed and compacted to the criteria in the Fill Placement section of this report. 5. To meet the minimum deadload criteria, a continuous void with minimum 4-inch thickness should be placed below grade beams, between pads to concentrate the load of the structures on the footing pads. 6. Exterior footings should be protected from frost action. We believe 30 inches of frost cover is appropriate for this site. 7. Foundation walls and grade beams should be well reinforced both top and bottom. We recommend the amount of steel equivalent to that required for a simply supported span of 10 feet. 8. We should observe completed footing excavations to confirm that the subsurface conditions are similar to those found in our borings. BELOW GRADE WALLS Some of the structures constructed may include below grade areas. Below grade walls should be designed for lateral earth pressures where backfill is not present to about the same extent on both sides of the wall. Many factors affect the value of the design lateral earth pressure. These factors include, but are not limited to, the type, compaction, slope and drainage of the backfill, and the rigidity of the wall against rotation and deflection. For a very rigid wall where negligible or very little deflection will occur, an "at-rest" lateral earth pressure should be used in design. For walls that can deflect or rotate 0.5 to 1 percent of the wall height (depending upon the backfill types), lower "active" lateral earth pressures are appropriate. Our experience indicates walls can deflect or rotate slightly under CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 8 normal design loads and that this deflection results in satisfactory wall performance. Thus, the earth pressure on the walls will likely be between the "active" and "at-rest" conditions. If on-site soils are used as backfill and the backfill is not saturated, we recommend design of below grade walls at this site using an equivalent fluid density of at least 50 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). This value assumes deflection; some minor cracking of walls may occur. If very little wall deflection is desired, higher design density may be appropriate. The structural engineer should also consider site-specific grade restrictions and the effects of large openings on the behavior of the walls. FLOOR SYSTEMS AND SLABS-ON-GRADE Testing indicated higher swell potential in the upper couple feet of clay. We recommend slabs-on-grade be constructed on 2 feet of over-excavated, properly compacted fill as described in the SITE DEVELOPMENT section of this report. It is impossible to construct slabs-on-grade with no risk of movement. Based on our experience, we believe movements due to swell will be less than 1 inch. If movements for floor slabs cannot be tolerated, structural floors should be used. Structural floors can be considered for specific areas that are particularly sensitive to movement or where equipment on the floor is sensitive to movement. Where structurally supported floors are selected, we recommend a minimum void between the ground surface and the underside of the floor system of 4 inches. The minimum void should be constructed below beams and utilities that penetrate the floor. The floor may be cast over void form. Void form should be chosen to break down quickly after the slab is placed. We recommend against the use of wax or plastic-coated void boxes. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 9 Slabs may be subject to heavy point loads. The structural engineer should design floor slab reinforcement. For design of slabs-on-grade, we recommend a modulus of subgrade reaction of 75 pci for on-site soils. If the owner elects to use slab-on-grade construction and accepts the risk of movement and associated damage, we recommend the following precautions for slab-on-grade construction at this site. These precautions can help reduce, but not eliminate, damage or distress due to slab movement. 1. Slabs should be separated from exterior walls and interior bearing members with a slip joint that allows free vertical movement of the slabs. This can reduce cracking if some movement of the slab occurs. 2. Slabs should be placed directly on exposed soils or properly moisture conditioned, compacted fill. The 2012 International Building Code (IBC) requires a vapor retarder be placed between the base course or subgrade soils and the concrete slab-on-grade floor. The merits of installation of a vapor retarder below floor slabs depend on the sensitivity of floor coverings and building use to moisture. A properly installed vapor retarder (minimum 6-mil; 10-mil recommended) is more beneficial below concrete slab-on-grade floors where floor coverings, painted floor surfaces or products stored on the floor will be sensitive to moisture. The vapor retarder is most effective when concrete is placed directly on top of it, rather than placing a sand or gravel leveling course between the vapor retarder and the floor slab. The placement of concrete on the vapor retarder may increase the risk of shrinkage cracking and curling. Use of concrete with reduced shrinkage characteristics including minimized water content, maximized coarse aggregate content, and reasonably low slump will reduce the risk of shrinkage cracking and curling. Considerations and recommendations for the installation of vapor retarders below concrete slabs are outlined in Section 3.2.3 of the 2006 report of American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee 302, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction (ACI 302.R1-04)”. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 10 3. If slab-bearing partitions are used, they should be designed and constructed to allow for slab movement. At least a 3-inch void should be maintained below or above the partitions. If the “float” is provided at the top of partitions, the connection between interior, slab- supported partitions and exterior, foundation supported walls should be detailed to allow differential movement. 4. Underslab plumbing should be eliminated where feasible. Where such plumbing is unavoidable it should be thoroughly pressure tested for leaks prior to slab construction and be provided with flexible couplings. Pressurized water supply lines should be brought above the floors as quickly as possible. 5. Plumbing and utilities that pass through the slabs should be isolated from the slabs and constructed with flexible couplings. Where water and gas lines are connected to furnaces or heaters, the lines should be constructed with sufficient flexibility to allow for movement. 6. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends frequent control joints be provided in slabs to reduce problems associated with shrinkage cracking and curling. To reduce curling, the concrete mix should have a high aggregate content and a low slump. If desired, a shrinkage compensating admixture could be added to the concrete to reduce the risk of shrinkage cracking. We can perform a mix design or assist the design team in selecting a pre-existing mix. WATER-SOLUBLE SULFATES Concrete that comes into contact with soils can be subject to sulfate attack. We measured water-soluble sulfate concentrations in three samples from this site. Concentrations were measured from 0.01 to 0.13 percent. Water-soluble sulfate concentrations between 0.1 and 0.2 percent indicate Class 1 exposure to sulfate attack, according to the American Concrete Institute (ACI). ACI indicates adequate sulfate resistance can be achieved by using Type II cement with a water-to- cementitious material ratio of 0.50 or less. ACI also indicates concrete in Class 1 exposure environments should have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 11 Superficial damage may occur to the exposed surfaces of highly permeable concrete. To control this risk and to resist freeze-thaw deterioration, the water-to- cementitious materials ratio should not exceed 0.50 for concrete in contact with soils that are likely to stay moist due to surface drainage or high water tables. Concrete should have a total air content of 6 percent ± 1.5 percent. We advocate all foundation walls and grade beams in contact with the soils (including the inside and outside faces of garage and crawl space grade beams) be damp-proofed. SURFACE DRAINAGE Performance of foundations, flatwork and pavements are influenced by changes in subgrade moisture conditions. Carefully planned and maintained surface grading can reduce the risk of wetting of the foundation soils and pavement subgrade. Positive drainage should be provided away from foundations. Backfill around foundations should be moisture treated and compacted as described in Fill Placement. Roof drains should be directed away from buildings. Downspout extensions and splash blocks should be provided at discharge points. CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS We recommend that CTL | Thompson, Inc. provide construction observation services to allow us the opportunity to verify whether soil conditions are consistent with those found during this investigation. Other observations are recommended to review general conformance with design plans. If others perform these observations, they must accept responsibility to judge whether the recommendations in this report remain appropriate. GEOTECHNICAL RISK The concept of risk is an important aspect with any geotechnical evaluation primarily because the methods used to develop geotechnical recommendations do not comprise an exact science. We never have complete knowledge of subsurface CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 12 conditions. Our analysis must be tempered with engineering judgment and experience. Therefore, the recommendations presented in any geotechnical evaluation should not be considered risk-free. Our recommendations represent our judgment of those measures that are necessary to increase the chances that the structures will perform satisfactorily. It is critical that all recommendations in this report are followed during construction. Owners must assume responsibility for maintaining the structures and use appropriate practices regarding drainage and landscaping. Improvements performed by owners after construction, such as construction of additions, retaining walls, landscaping and exterior flatwork, should be completed in accordance with recommendations in this report. LIMITATIONS This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the City of Fort Collins for the purpose of providing geotechnical design and construction criteria for the proposed project. The information, conclusions, and recommendations presented herein are based upon consideration of many factors including, but not limited to, the type of construction proposed, the geologic setting, and the subsurface conditions encountered. The conclusions and recommendations contained in the report are not valid for use by others. Standards of practice evolve in the area of geotechnical engineering. The recommendations provided are appropriate for about three years. If the proposed construction is not constructed within about three years, we should be contacted to determine if we should update this report. Six borings were drilled during this investigation to obtain a reasonably accurate picture of the subsurface conditions. Variations in the subsurface conditions not indicated by our borings are possible. A representative of our firm should observe foundation excavations to confirm the exposed materials are as anticipated from our borings. We should also test compaction of fill if over- excavation is used. TH-1 TH-2 TH-3 TH-4 TH-5 TH-6 TBM MAPLE HILL DR. GIDDINGS RD. SITE COUNTRY CLUB DR. RICHARDS LAKE RD. TIMBERLINE TURNBERRY RD. LEGEND: INDICATES APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF EXPLORATORY TEST HOLE INDICATES APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF TEMPORARY BENCHMARK; WATER TAP (ASSUMED ELEVATION 100') TH-1 TBM CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL I T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 FIGURE 1 Locations of Exploratory Borings VICINITY MAP (FORT COLLINS, COLORADO) NOT TO SCALE 100' APPROXIMATE SCALE: 1" = 100' 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 22/12 12/12 11/12 7/12 WC=8.0 DD=120 SW=7.3 SS=0.010 WC=11.4 LL=24 PI=8 -200=34 WC=8.0 DD=120 SW=7.3 SS=0.010 WC=11.4 LL=24 PI=8 -200=34 TH-1 El. 106.0 10/12 9/12 12/12 14/12 5/12 WC=15.0 DD=114 SW=0.4 WC=19.9 DD=108 -200=52 WC=15.0 DD=114 SW=0.4 WC=19.9 DD=108 -200=52 TH-2 El. 101.0 24/12 APPENDIX A RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTING Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 120 PCF From TH - 1 AT 2 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 8.0 % CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF COMPRESSION % EXPANSION Swell Consolidation Test Results FIGURE A-1 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING 0.1 1.0 10 100 Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 114 PCF From TH - 2 AT 4 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 15.0 % CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF COMPRESSION % EXPANSION Swell Consolidation Test Results FIGURE A-2 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING 0.1 1.0 10 100 Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 126 PCF From TH - 3 AT 2 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 9.2 % CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF COMPRESSION % EXPANSION Swell Consolidation Test Results FIGURE A-3 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING 0.1 1.0 10 100 Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 119 PCF From TH - 3 AT 9 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 14.5 % Sample of CLAYSTONE, WEATHERED DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 108 PCF From TH - 4 AT 9 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 20.3 % CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF COMPRESSION % EXPANSION Swell Consolidation FIGURE A-4 COMPRESSION % EXPANSION -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 NO MOVEMENT DUE TO WETTING -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING 0.1 1.0 10 100 0.1 1.0 10 100 Sample of CLAYSTONE, WEATHERED DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 113 PCF From TH - 4 AT 14 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 18.3 % Sample of CLAY, SANDY (CL) DRY UNIT WEIGHT= 113 PCF From TH - 5 AT 9 FEET MOISTURE CONTENT= 17.4 % CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF APPLIED PRESSURE - KSF COMPRESSION % EXPANSION Swell Consolidation FIGURE A-5 COMPRESSION % EXPANSION -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 EXPANSION UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE DUE TO WETTING 0.1 1.0 10 100 0.1 1.0 10 100 PASSING WATER- MOISTURE DRY LIQUID PLASTICITY APPLIED SWELL NO. 200 SOLUBLE DEPTH CONTENT DENSITY LIMIT INDEX SWELL* PRESSURE PRESSURE SIEVE SULFATES BORING (FEET) (%) (PCF) (%) (PSF) (PSF) (%) (%) DESCRIPTION TH-1 2 8.0 120 7.3 200 12,000 0.01 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-1 9 11.4 24 8 34 SAND, CLAYEY (SC) TH-2 4 15.0 114 0.4 500 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-2 14 19.9 108 52 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-3 2 9.2 126 6.5 200 11,000 0.02 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-3 9 14.5 119 0.0 1,100 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-4 9 20.3 108 1.2 1,100 CLAYSTONE, WEATHERED TH-4 14 18.3 113 0.8 1,800 CLAYSTONE, WEATHERED TH-5 2 9.7 76 CLAY, SANDY (CL) TH-5 9 13.9 113 0.2 1,100 0.13 CLAY, SANDY (CL) SWELL TEST RESULTS* TABLE A-I SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TESTING ATTERBERG LIMITS Page 1 of 1 * NEGATIVE VALUE INDICATES COMPRESSION. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL|T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 APPENDIX B SAMPLE SITE GRADING SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 B-1 SAMPLE SITE GRADING SPECIFICATIONS 1. DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of the excavation, transportation, placement and compaction of materials from locations indicated on the plans, or staked by the Engineer, as necessary to achieve building site elevations. 2. GENERAL The Geotechnical Engineer shall be the Owner's representative. The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve fill materials, method of placement, moisture contents and percent compaction, and shall give written approval of the completed fill. 3. CLEARING JOB SITE The Contractor shall remove all trees, brush and rubbish before excavation or fill placement is begun. The Contractor shall dispose of the cleared material to provide the Owner with a clean, neat appearing job site. Cleared material shall not be placed in areas to receive fill or where the material will support structures of any kind. 4. SCARIFYING AREA TO BE FILLED All topsoil and vegetable matter shall be removed from the ground surface upon which fill is to be placed. The surface shall then be plowed or scarified to a depth of 8 inches until the surface is free from ruts, hummocks or other uneven features, which would prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. 5. COMPACTING AREA TO BE FILLED After the foundation for the fill has been cleared and scarified, it shall be disked or bladed until it is free from large clods, brought to the proper moisture content and compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99. 6. FILL MATERIALS On-site materials classifying as CL, SC, SM, SW, SP, GP, GC and GM are acceptable. Fill soils shall be free from organic matter, debris, or other deleterious substances, and shall not contain rocks or lumps having a diameter greater than three (3) inches. Fill materials shall be obtained from the existing fill and other approved sources. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 B-2 7. MOISTURE CONTENT Fill materials shall be moisture treated. Clay soils placed below the building envelope should be moisture-treated to between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture content as determined from Standard Proctor compaction tests. Clay soil placed exterior to the building should be moisture treated between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Sand soils can be moistened to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Sufficient laboratory compaction tests shall be performed to determine the optimum moisture content for the various soils encountered in borrow areas. The Contractor may be required to add moisture to the excavation materials in the borrow area if, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, it is not possible to obtain uniform moisture content by adding water on the fill surface. The Contractor may be required to rake or disk the fill soils to provide uniform moisture content through the soils. The application of water to embankment materials shall be made with any type of watering equipment approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, which will give the desired results. Water jets from the spreader shall not be directed at the embankment with such force that fill materials are washed out. Should too much water be added to any part of the fill, such that the material is too wet to permit the desired compaction from being obtained, rolling and all work on that section of the fill shall be delayed until the material has been allowed to dry to the required moisture content. The Contractor will be permitted to rework wet material in an approved manner to hasten its drying. 8. COMPACTION OF FILL AREAS Selected fill material shall be placed and mixed in evenly spread layers. After each fill layer has been placed, it shall be uniformly compacted to not less than the specified percentage of maximum dry density. Fill materials shall be placed such that the thickness of loose material does not exceed 8 inches and the compacted lift thickness does not exceed 6 inches. Compaction, as specified above, shall be obtained by the use of sheepsfoot rollers, multiple-wheel pneumatic-tired rollers, or other equipment approved by the Engineer. Compaction shall be accomplished while the fill material is at the specified moisture content. Compaction of each layer shall be continuous over the entire area. Compaction equipment shall make sufficient trips to insure that the required dry density is obtained. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 B-3 9. COMPACTION OF SLOPES Fill slopes shall be compacted by means of sheepsfoot rollers or other suitable equipment. Compaction operations shall be continued until slopes are stable, but not too dense for planting, and there is no appreciable amount of loose soil on the slopes. Compaction of slopes may be done progressively in increments of three to five feet (3' to 5') in height or after the fill is brought to its total height. Permanent fill slopes shall not exceed 3:1 (horizontal to vertical). 10. DENSITY TESTS Field density tests shall be made by the Geotechnical Engineer at locations and depths of his choosing. Where sheepsfoot rollers are used, the soil may be disturbed to a depth of several inches. Density tests shall be taken in compacted material below the disturbed surface. When density tests indicate that the dry density or moisture content of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below that required, the particular layer or portion shall be reworked until the required dry density or moisture content has been achieved. 11. COMPLETED PRELIMINARY GRADES All areas, both cut and fill, shall be finished to a level surface and shall meet the following limits of construction: A. Overlot cut or fill areas shall be within plus or minus 2/10 of one foot. B. Street grading shall be within plus or minus 1/10 of one foot. The civil engineer, or duly authorized representative, shall check all cut and fill areas to observe that the work is in accordance with the above limits. 12. SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION STAKING Observation by the Geotechnical Engineer shall be continuous during the placement of fill and compaction operations so that he can declare that the fill was placed in general conformance with specifications. All site visits necessary to test the placement of fill and observe compaction operations will be at the expense of the Owner. All construction staking will be provided by the Civil Engineer or his duly authorized representative. Initial and final grading staking shall be at the expense of the owner. The replacement of grade stakes through construction shall be at the expense of the contractor. CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTLT PROJECT NO. FC07300-125 B-4 13. SEASONAL LIMITS No fill material shall be placed, spread or rolled while it is frozen, thawing, or during unfavorable weather conditions. When work is interrupted by heavy precipitation, fill operations shall not be resumed until the Geotechnical Engineer indicates that the moisture content and dry density of previously placed materials are as specified. 14. NOTICE REGARDING START OF GRADING The contractor shall submit notification to the Geotechnical Engineer and Owner advising them of the start of grading operations at least three (3) days in advance of the starting date. Notification shall also be submitted at least 3 days in advance of any resumption dates when grading operations have been stopped for any reason other than adverse weather conditions. 15. REPORTING OF FIELD DENSITY TESTS Density tests performed by the Geotechnical Engineer, as specified under "Density Tests" above, shall be submitted progressively to the Owner. Dry density, moisture content and percent compaction shall be reported for each test taken. 16. DECLARATION REGARDING COMPLETED FILL The Geotechnical Engineer shall provide a written declaration stating that the site was filled with acceptable materials, or was placed in general accordance with the specifications. Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK MAPLE HILL PARK BID SET MARCH 29, 2017 CLIENT MATTHEW DAY, RLA SENIOR LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON P.O. BOX 580 FORT COLLINS, CO. 80522 (970) 224-6096 OFFICE (970) 218-4926 CELL MDAY@FCGOV.COM ARCHITECT CHAD KOSCINSKI PROJECT ARCHITECT ALM2S 712 WHALERS WAY BUILDING B, SUITE 100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 CKOSCINSKI@ALM2S.COM ELECTRICAL YANCY SCHNEIDER ESC ENGINEERING 3540 JFK PARKWAY FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 224-9100 (MAIN) (970) 224-9137 (FAX) YSCHNEIDER@THINKESC.COM IRRIGATION CULLEN B. KINOSHITA AQUA ENGINEERING, INC. 375 EAST HORSETOOTH ROAD BLDG. 2-202 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525-3196 (970) 372-6128 CULLEN@AQUAENGINEERING.COM C-1 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK GENERAL NOTES 1"=30' 03.29.17 PROJECT DATUM: NGVD29 UNADJUSTED (OLD CITY OF FORT COLLINS DATUM) CITY OF FORT COLLINS BENCHMARK #34-01 DESCRIPTION: NORTH SIDE OF RICHARDS LAKE ROAD APPROXIMATELY 0.5 MILE EAST OF TURNBERRY ROAD ON THE EAST END OF A HEADWALL OVER AN IRRIGATION DITCH. ELEVATION = 5023.41 CITY OF FORT COLLINS BENCHMARK #5-08 DESCRIPTION: NORTHWEST CORNER OF TURNBERRY ROAD AND COUNTRY CLUB ROAD ON THE SOUTHWEST CORNER OF AN AREA INLET, APPROXIMATELY 35 FEET NORTH OF THE EDGE OF ASPHALT. ELEVATION = 5057.66 NOTE: IF NAVD88 DATUM IS REQUIRED FOR ANY PURPOSE, THE FOLLOWING EQUATION SHOULD BE USED: NAVD88 = NGVD29 UNADJUSTED + 3.18' FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 ¶ ¶ ¶ C-2 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK GENERAL NOTES 1"=30' 03.29.17 ABBREVIATION LIST AE ACCESS EASEMENT BOV BLOW OFF VALVE BT BOTTOM OF TRENCH BW BOTTOM OF WALL C&G CURB AND GUTTER CL CENTERLINE CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE DE DRAINAGE EASEMENT EG EXISTING GRADE EL ELEVATION EX EXISTING FES FLARED END SECTION FL FLOWLINE GB GRADE BREAK GV GATE VALVE HP HIGH POINT FH FIRE HYDRANT INV INVERT IRR IRRIGATION LF LINEAR FEET LP LOW POINT LT LEFT MH MANHOLE PE PEDESTRIAN EASEMENT PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE RD ROOF DRAIN RT RIGHT SAN SANITARY SEWER STA STATION TRACT I PUBLIC NEIGHBORHOOD PARK PER PLAT OF MAPLE HILL 0 SCALE: 1" = 30' 30 15 30 60 NOTES 1. ALL SANITARY SEWER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL WATER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH EAST LARIMER COUNTY WATER DISTRICT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL STORM PIPE CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 2. WATER SERVICE SHALL BE TYPE K SOFT COPPER. 3. 6-INCH SANITARY SEWER SERVICE SHALL BE PVC (SDR 35) @ 1.0% MINIMUM SLOPE AS SPECIFIED. 4. ALL CLEANOUTS SHALL BE TRAFFIC RATED CLEANOUTS. 5. RCP STORM PIPES SHALL BE CLASS III AND BE INSTALLED AND BEDDED PER CITY OF FORT COLLINS STANDARDS. 6. ONSITE IMPROVEMENTS ARE TO BE PRIVATELY OWNED AND MAINTAINED BY THE PROPERTY OWNER. 7. ANY DAMAGED CURB, GUTTER AND SIDEWALK EXISTING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, AS WELL AS STREETS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS, DESTROYED, DAMAGED OR REMOVED DUE TO CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT SHALL BE REPLACED OR RESTORED TO CITY OF FORT COLLINS STANDARDS AT THE DEVELOPER'S EXPENSE PRIOR TO THE ACCEPTANCE OF COMPLETED IMPROVEMENTS AND/OR PRIOR TO THE ISSUANCE OF THE FIRST CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. 8. LIMITS OF STREET CUT ARE APPROXIMATE. FINAL LIMITS ARE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD BY THE CITY ENGINEERING INSPECTOR. ALL REPAIRS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY STREET REPAIR STANDARDS. 9. REMOVE EXISTING CURB & GUTTER TO NEAREST JOINT. 2' MINIMUM SAWCUT AND ASPHALT PATCH REQUIRED FOR CURB AND RAMP RECONSTRUCTION. C-3 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design TRACT I PUBLIC NEIGHBORHOOD PARK PER PLAT OF MAPLE HILL EXISTING WATER QUALITY & DETENTION POND LOCATED IN TRACT AA 0 SCALE: 1" = 40' 40 20 40 80 LEGEND PROPOSED DIRECTION VEHICLE TRACKING CONTROL SILT FENCE INLET PROTECTION (TYPE I) CONCRETE WASHOUT (CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE) NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN ALL NECESSARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES PRIOR TO AND THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. PLACE EROSION CONTROL PROTECTION AT ALL EXISTING INLETS DOWNSTREAM FROM THE CONSTRUCTION AREA. EROSION CONTROL PROTECTION SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE UNTIL CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE AND ALL DISTURBED GROUND IS ADEQUATELY VEGETATED WITH OWNER'S APPROVAL FOR REMOVAL. 2. THE EXTENT OF EROSION CONTROL PROTECTION SHALL BE OBSERVED AND ADJUSTED AS NEEDED DURING CONSTRUCTION BASED ON SITE CONDITIONS AND THE PERFORMANCE OF THE EROSION CONTROL CONTROL MEASURES SHOWN, TO SUPPLY SUFFICIENT EROSION CONTROL AND MINIMIZE DOWNSTREAM WATERWAY POLLUTION. OF OVERLAND FLOW PROPOSED DRAINAGE MINOR STORM RUNOFF COEFFICIENT DRAINAGE BASIN AREA DRAINAGE BASIN NUMBER PROPOSED DIRECTION OF OVERLAND FLOW BASIN DIVIDE LINE WATTLE GRAVEL BAG C-4 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 5022 5025 5028 5031 5034 5037 5040 5043 5046 5049 5052 5055 -0+30 0+00 0+30 0+60 0+90 1+20 1+50 1+80 2+10 2+40 2+70 3+00 3+30 3+60 3+90 4+20 4+50 4+80 5+10 5+40 5+70 5022 5025 5028 5031 5034 5037 5040 5043 5046 5049 5052 5055 MARSHFIELD LN FORECASTLE DR 0 HORIZONTAL SCALE: 1" = VERTICAL SCALE: 1" = 30' 6' 30 15 30 60 NOTES 1. THE IRRIGATION LINE SHALL BE BORED FROM POINT OF CONNECTION TO THE PARK PROPERTY. REFER TO IRRIGATION PLANS FOR APPROXIMATE BORE PIT LOCATIONS AND ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. 2. ANY DAMAGED CURB, GUTTER AND SIDEWALK EXISTING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, AS WELL AS STREETS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS, DESTROYED, DAMAGED OR REMOVED DUE TO CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT SHALL BE REPLACED OR RESTORED TO CITY OF FORT COLLINS STANDARDS AT THE DEVELOPER'S EXPENSE PRIOR TO THE ACCEPTANCE OF COMPLETED IMPROVEMENTS AND/OR PRIOR TO THE ISSUANCE OF THE FIRST CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. 3. LIMITS OF STREET CUT ARE APPROXIMATE. FINAL LIMITS ARE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD BY THE CITY ENGINEERING INSPECTOR. ALL REPAIRS TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY STREET REPAIR STANDARDS. C-5 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: C-6 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK CONSTRUCTION 1"=30' 03.29.17 DETAILS FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 C-7 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK CONSTRUCTION 1"=30' 03.29.17 DETAILS FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 C-8 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK CONSTRUCTION 1"=30' 03.29.17 DETAILS FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C T POND BAR HARBOR DRIVE MAPLE HILL DRIVE PLAYGROUND RESTROOM RE: ARCH 30' ELCO WATER LINE EASEMENT SITE LIGHT, TYP. RE: ELEC. CONCRETE SIDEWALK, TYP. RIGHT OF WAY POND EDGE RE: IRR CRUSHER FINES RIGHT OF WAY ACCESS RAMP RE: CIVIL IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR. EXISTING STORMLINE ELCO WATER LINE ACCESS RAMP, RE: CIVIL BASKETBALL COURT SHELTER SEWER SERVICE LINE WATER SERVICE LINE PUMP HOUSE RE: ARCH EXISTING 5' CONCRETE WALK TO REMAIN ACCESS RAMP C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C SHELTER, RE: ARCH POND PLAYGROUND STACKED BOULDER WALL- TYPE 1 KID'S BUILDER FOR 2-5 YEARS OLD, BY OTHERS POND EDGE RE: IRR RESTROOM RE: ARCH PLAYGROUND HEADER RESTROOM RETAINING WALLS- WEST WALL ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER BENCH- TYPE 2 CRUSHER FINES BENCH- TYPE 1 CRUSHER FINES BAR HARBOR DRIVE rabbit brush 20 fringed sage 60 yucca 31 creeping sumac 8 R600' R800' R1000' R400' R8' R1200' R6' R80' TANGENT N:143092.0765 E:206815.8526 TANGENT N:142900.5597 E:207079.9885 TANGENT N:142815.8766 E:207200.1723 TANGENT N:142696.8206 E:207372.1433 TANGENT N:142557.9575 E:207575.9623 EX. 13.34 EX. 13.44 SOUTH EAST TRAIL ENDING ℄ ℄ ℄ EXISTING FENCE EXISTING FENCE EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ 10' WIDE, 8" THICK COLORED CONCRETE SIDEWALK, DAVIS COLOR: YOSEMITE BROWN L4.00 1 L4.00 SAW CUT JOINTS, TYP. 3 NORTH WEST TRAIL ENDING 10' 10' E XPANSION JOINT, SEE DETAIL 4, SHEET L4.00 FS 14.50 CONCRETE TRAIL C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE T BAR HARBOR DRIVE MAPLE HILL DRIVE N:143180.6358 E:206218.7975 N:143266.6358 E:206218.7975 N:143266.6358 E:206172.7975 N:143180.6358 E:206172.7975 SITE LIGHT N:143336.1769 E:206171.5893 SITE LIGHT N:143127.3269 E:206624.7061 N:143103.7948 E:206689.4030 N:143123.8953 E:206689.3110 N:142943.3425 E:206690.1641 N:142965.9098 E:206690.0333 8' 8' 5' 10' 8' 10' 8'-6" 8' C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE T BAR HARBOR DRIVE MAPLE HILL DRIVE 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 11 12 13 13 12 19 11 21 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 22 25 24 23 26 27 11 12 13 14 15 18 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 16 17 18 19 20 21 15 14 13 12 H.P. 22 14 15 H.P. 21 25 24 22 21 1" 1 2" TOOL SCORE JOINTS TO A DEPTH OF 1", SEE LAYOUT PLAN FOR JOINT LOCATIONS SEE PLAN FOR CONCRETE TYPE COMPACTED SUBGRADE 1/3 THICKNESS OF PAVEMENT SEE PLAN FOR CONCRETE TYPE COMPACTED SUBGRADE SAW CUT JOINTS TO A DEPTH OF 1 3 THICKNESS OF THE PAVEMENT, SEE LAYOUT PLAN FOR JOINT LOCATIONS 1 4" EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL 1 4" RADIUS EDGE; CAULK JOINT TO MATCH CONCRETE COMPACTED SUBGRADE #4 X 24" REBAR @ 30" O.C. 1' BREAK BOND ONE END 8" 6" WIDTH PER PLAN CRUSHER FINES COMPACTED SUBGRADE CRUSHER FINES SHALL BE FLUSH WITH ADJACENT FINISH GRADE NOTES: 1. ADD SOIL STABILIZER/CEMENT TO CRUSHER FINES PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS' 2. REFER TO GRADING PLAN TO DETERMINE CROSS-SLOPE DIRECTION 4" 2% MAX SLOPE, SLOPE TO DRAIN NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 2" MIN. CLEAR CONCRETE AROUND REBAR 2. SAW CUT JOINTS TO BE LOCATED APPROXIMATELY EVERY 8' O.C. 3. PROVIDE MEDIUM BROOM FINISH ON TOP OF HEADER 2% COMPACTED SUBGRADE 18" 15" (2) #4 REBAR CONTINUOUS ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER PLANTING AREA, SEE LANDSCAPE PLAN 8" FABRIC L4.00 5 12" 6" 3" 'T' BENCH MOUNTING BRACKET MOISTURE SHIELD TRIM BOARD, 11/16" X 5-5/8" BOLTED TO EVERY BENCH MOUNTING BRACKET AND TO BENCH BOARDS 8" O.C. BETWEEN BRACKETS 2" X 1/4" STEEL JOIST CANTILEVERED BENCH MOUNTING BRACKET MOISTURE SHIELD BENCH BOARD, 2" X 6" LEAVING 1/4" GAPS BETWEEN BOARDS 12" CONCRETE WALL, RE: ARCH PLAN 2' MOISTURE SHIELD TRIM BOARD, 11/16" X 5-5/8" BOLTED TO EVERY BENCH MOUNTING BRACKET BENCH MOUNTING BRACKET TRIM BOARD BOLTED TO 2"X6" BENCH BOARD EVERY 8" BETWEEN BENCH BRACKETS MOISTURE SHIELD 2"X6" BENCH BOARDS 1/4" X 2" STEEL FRAME CONCRETE WALL, RE:ARCH TOPPING SLAB, RE: ARCH SECTION 2' 2" X 6" MOISTURE SHIELD COMPOSITE DECKING, LEAVING 1/4" GAPS BETWEEN BOARDS 2" X 2" X 3/16" HSS FRAME 2" X 1/4" HSS STRAP (SIDE) SELF TAPPING SCREWS FROM BACK SIDE 12" DIA. CEMENT CAISSON AS SHOWN FOR PLAYGROUND MOUNT; CAISSON 36" DEEP FROM FRAME FOR CRUSHER FINES MOUNT COMPACTED SUBGRADE 8"X8" BASEPLATE TYPE A 1'-8" FRAME WIDTH VARIES; SEE PLAN 1" 12" O.C. VARIES 36" 12" CONCRETE COMPACTED SUBGRADE 12" DIA. CEMENT CAISSON FOR CRUSHER FINES AND PLAYGROUND INSTALLATION 8"X8" BASEPLATE TYPE A 2 X 1/4" HSS STRAP (TOP) ALIGN STRAP (TOP) WITH EDGE OF FRAME 2" X 6" MOISTURE SHIELD COMPOSITE DECKING, LEAVING 1/4" GAPS BETWEEN BOARDS 2" X 2" X 3/16" HSS FRAME 2" X 1/4" HSS STRAP (SIDE) 6" BOTTOM OF WALL SECTION 4 SECTION 3 SECTION 2 SECTION 1 RESTROOM, RE: ARCH AGGREGATE BACKFILL BASE TOP OF RESTROOM:5023.67 TOP OF CONCRETE WALL 5022 FINISH GRADE 5014.61 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WALL (BEHIND) TOP OF RESTROOM WALL SHALL ALIGN WITH TOP OF RESTROOM RETAINING WALL TOP OF 1ST COURSE: 16 TOP OF 2ND COURSE: 17.5 TOP OF 3RD COURSE: 19 TOP OF 4TH COURSE: 20.5 TOP OF 5TH COURSE: 22 TOP OF 6TH COURSE: 23.67 SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 RESTROOM, RE: ARCH TOP OF RESTROOM 5025.25 FINISH GRADE 5014 AGGREGATE BACKFILL BASE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WALL (BEHIND) TOP OF CONCRETE WALL 5021.50 TOP OF CONCRETE WALL 5023.75 TOP OF RESTROOM WALL SHALL ALIGN WITH TOP OF RESTROOM RETAINING WALL BOTTOM OF WALL: 13.5 TOP OF 1ST COURSE: 15 TOP OF 2ND COURSE: 16.5 TOP OF 3RD COURSE: 18 TOP OF 4TH COURSE: 19.5 TOP OF 5TH COURSE: 21 TOP OF 6TH COURSE: 22.5 TOP OF 7TH COURSE: 24 TOP OF 8TH COURSE: 25.25 SECTION 4 RESTROOM WALL, RE: ARCH TOP OF WALL, RE: GRADING PLAN FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN MORTAR AGGREGATE BACKFILL BASE BOULDERS- TYPE A STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WALL; RE: STRUCTURAL C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE T BAR HARBOR DRIVE MAPLE HILL DRIVE 2 QU BU 3 PO AC 3 JU MG 2 PI NI 2 PI NI 2 JU MG 2 UL AC 2 PI NI 1 PI ST 3 PI AR 3 QU BU 2 GY DI 2 QU GA 1 QU MA 1 CA SP 1 GY DI 2 JU MG 2 CE OC 1 PI PU 2 PI NI 2 PI PO 1 CA SP 2 TI AM 1 PI PO 1 PI PU 3 AC HW 3 SY PE 2 QU BU 3 CA SP 2 CE OC 3 FA SY MULCH PER PLAN SPECIFIED BACKFILL MATERIAL, WATER AND TAMP TO REMOVE AIR POCKETS CONSTRUCT WATERING RING AROUND SHRUB AT EDGE OF PLANTING PIT TO CONTAIN WATER TO A DEPTH OF 2" 2X ROOTBALL DIAMETER SCARIFY SIDES AND BOTTOM MULCH PER PLAN, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE AND DEPTH OF MULCH PROVIDE FERTILIZER PACKETS PLANT ROOT BALL SLIGHTLY ABOVE GRADE 6" RADIUS AROUND PERENNIALS AND ORNAMENTAL GRASSES TO BE MULCHED USING WOOD MULCH TO ALLOW FOR PLANT GROWTH 6" RADIUS MULCH PER PLAN INSTALL CEDAR WOOD MULCH RING TO EXTENTS OF AROUND BASE TO A DEPTH OF 4". 36" TO 48" 6' MIN. 2 TIMES ROOTBALL DIA. GENERAL TREE PLANTING NOTES 1. PRUNE ONLY CROSSOVER LIMBS, CO-DOMINANT LEADERS, AND BROKEN OR DEAD BRANCHES. SOME INTERIOR TWIGS AND LATERAL BRANCHES MAY BE PRUNED; HOWEVER, DO NOT REMOVE THE TERMINAL BUDS OF BRANCHES THAT EXTEND TO THE EDGE OF THE CROWN. 2. MARK NORTH SIDE OF THE TREE IN THE NURSERY AND ROTATE TREE TO FACE NORTH AT THE SITE WHENEVER POSSIBLE. TREES WHOSE NORTH ORIENTATION IS NOT CHANGED FROM THE NURSERY DO NOT NEED TO BE WRAPPED, EXCEPT TREES WITH VERY THIN BARK. 3. EACH TREE SHALL BE PLANTED SUCH THAT THE TRUNK FLARE IS VISIBLE AT THE TOP OF THE ROOT BALL. DO NOT COVER THE TOP OF THE ROOT BALL WITH SOIL. 4. SET TOP OF ROOT BALL FLUSH WITH GRADE OR 1"-2" HIGHER IN SLOWLY DRAINING SOILS. 5. DO NOT PLACE MULCH IN CONTACT WITH TREE TRUNK. 6. IN SEEDED AREAS, HOLD SEED BACK TO A MINIMUM 36" DIA. CIRCLE. FORM A 4" HIGH EARTH SAUCER BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL. MULCH PLANTING PIT. 1" WIDE FABRIC WEBBING WITH GROMMETS & GALVANIZED WIRE OR CABLE, TWIST WIRE TO TIGHTEN. BREATHABLE PAPER OF FABRIC TREE WRAP APPLIED FROM TRUNK FLARE TO FIRST BRANCH. WRAP PAPER FROM BOTTOM UP WITH SUFFICIENT OVERLAP TO COVER BARK. USE MASKING TAPE TO SECURE. ADJUST TREE STAKE SO THAT TOP IS LEVEL WITH, OR JUST BELOW, FIRST BRANCHES. TREE STAKES TO BE DRIVEN OUTSIDE OF ROOT BALL. INSTALL 3' DIA. CEDAR WOOD MULCH RING AROUND BASE TO A DEPTH OF 4". BACKFILL MATERIAL REMOVE TWINE, ROPE, WIRE, AND BURLAP FROM ENTIRE ROOT BALL. TAMP SOIL AROUND ROOT BALL BASE FIRMLY WITH FOOT Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 WS-0 THE IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE FOR THIS PARK IS RAW WATER PROVIDED FROM THE EXISTING BAKER LATERAL. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FOLLOWING: *TAP EXISTING BAKER LATERAL PIPE *INSTALL WATER METER *INSTALL ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE *INSTALL SETTLING STRUCTURE (INTENDED TO REMOVE LARGE PARTICLES, EXAMPLE: SAND, FROM WATER PRIOR TO DISCHARGE TO THE IRRIGATION POND. *WATER DELIVERY PIPING FROM BAKER LATERAL PIPE TO THE POND THE RAW WATER IS CONTROLLED BY AN ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE AND METERED. AN AMPLIFIER (DEVICE THAT READS AND POWERS THE METER) IS LOCATED WITHIN THE BUILDING THAT HOUSES THE PUMP STATION. SINCE THE WATER METER IS LOCATED WITHIN A VAULT, IT MUST INCLUDE HOUSING RATED FOR SUBMERSIBLE CONDITIONS - REFER TO PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF AN IRRIGATION POND, POND LINING SYSTEM, IRRIGATION PUMP STATION, AND IRRIGATION PUMP STATION INTAKE SYSTEM. REFER TO LANDSCAPE PLANS FOR POND EXCAVATION GRADING. REFER TO THE IRRIGATION, ELECTRICAL, AND ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING THE PUMP STATION. PROVISIONS ARE MADE FOR A FUTURE POND AERATION SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR MUST INSTALL AN AERATION SLEEVE INTENDED TO ROUTE AERATION TUBING TO AERATION PODS. IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE GENERAL DESCRIPTION RAW WATER POINT-OF-CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (REFER TO DETAIL) WATER DELIVERY PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) *TYPE: HDPE DR11 WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE (EBV) ASSEMBLY *MAKE/MODEL (METER): BADGER METER INC, MAGETOFLOW MAG METER, 4-INCH FLANGED ENDS, REMOTE MOUNT PRIMO AMPLIFIER (INSTALLED WITHIN PUMP BUILDING), NEMA 6A SUBMERSIBLE OPTION INCLUDED WITH METER *MAKE/MODEL (EBV): 4-INCH, WAFER STYLE, ON/OFF, 120 VAC ACTUATOR, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, FAIL CLOSE, MANUAL OVERRIDE, INTERNAL HEATER/THERMOSTAT, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, 2 AUXILIARY 2" DIA 5' CAN PINE TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN PINE TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN PINE TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN PINE TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN PINE TREE 1" DIA 4' CAN PINE TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE DECIDUOUS TREE IRRIGATION WATER CONNECTION *SOURCE: UNDERGROUND PIPE FROM DITCH SYSTEM *SIZE: 18-INCH *PIPE TYPE: PVC A 4" HDPE 4" 4" HDPE 4" HDPE B TRENCHED BORED BORED BORED BORED 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE T 3" PVC 3" PVC 4" HDPE 4" HDPE 4" HDPE TRENCHED C E F G G 4" HDPE 4" HDPE TRENCHED TRENCHED H I J K L N N 4" HDPE (WINTERIZATION PIPE) MUST CLEAN SETTLING MANHOLE PRIOR TO DRAINING SYSTEM FOR WINTER O M N NOTE: REFER TO UTILITY PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL PIPE AND SLEEVING INFORMATION, TYPICAL TRENCHED 4" HDPE C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C N C 24" 10.5" EQUIPMENT LIST - THIS SHEET ONLY A B C E G J M N Q O S W X D R K L P 42" CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL PANEL PER NEC CODE T U FINISH FLOOR EL. 5012.2' BOTTOM OF WET WELL EL. 4996.03' BOTTOM OF POND EL. 5002.0' ±12" NORMAL WATER SURFACE EL. 5009.5' (EBV "OFF" - SEE NOTES THIS SHEET) PUMP SHUT DOWN WATER SURFACE EL. 5004.0' ANTI-FLOATION SKIRT PER PRECAST MANUFACTURER WET WELL THICKNESS PER PRECAST MANUFACTURER EBV "ON" - SEE NOTES THIS SHEET, EL.5008.5' 108" MIN CEILING HEIGHT INTAKE PIPE INVERT EL. 5004.0' FINISH GRADE ±24" Y A B C D G I J K L M O T P U V W ±12" X Z AA AB AC Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 RAW WATER POINT-OF-CONNECTION ASSEMBLY N.T.S. 4 WATER METER & ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE ASSEMBLY N.T.S. 12" SECTION VIEW PLAN VIEW EQUIPMENT LIST FOOTING DETAIL 9" 1' 8'-0" CONCRETE MANHOLE BASE BEAMS (SEE FOOTING DETAIL) 1' 1 1 2 3 3 12" 6" 4 5 4 6 2 1 7 8 9 10 60" 96" 2 3 12" 4 5 3 4 6" 11 6 2 1 7 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 SETTLING STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY N.T.S. EQUIPMENT LIST OPERATIONAL NOTES 8" MIN. 3'-0" 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 4 10 9 11 9 8 1'-0" 10 9 9 3'-0" 9 12 8' 8 30° 11 12 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12" COMPACTED SOIL BALLAST ELEVATION, FT POND OPERATING LEVEL 6" FREEBOARD 5010 5009 5008 5007 5006 5005 5004 5003 5002 5001 ELEVATION, FT 5010 5009 5008 5007 5006 5005 5004 5003 5002 5001 COMPACTED SUBGRADE SLOPE 3:1 Max. SLOPE 4:1 Max. ELEVATION, FT EXCAVATION PRIOR TO LINER INSTALLATION 5010 5009 5008 5007 5006 5005 5004 5003 5002 5001 ELEVATION, FT 5010 5009 5008 5007 5006 5005 5004 5003 5002 5001 SLOPE 0.5:1 BEGIN EXCAVATION TRANSITION #2 TRANSITION #5 30 MIL RPE LAKE LINER 8 OZ GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 1'-0" 1'-0" 3'-0" 4'-6" Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 INTAKE SCREEN ASSEMBLY N.T.S. +/- 20' 2' 12" MIN. 12" 2 FILTER FLUSH PIPE POND PENETRATION DETAIL N.T.S. 3 SLEEVE FOR FUTURE AERATION N.T.S. USE PVC 45-DEGREE OR 22.5-DEGREE FITTINGS AS NECESSARY 8" AERATION SLEEVE PIPE BOOT SECURED WITH STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP AERATION SLEEVE PENETRATION CAP END OF SLEEVE INVERT ELEV. = ±5003.0.' PUMP STATION BUILDING WALL - BY OTHERS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 13" X 24" X 15" DEEP RECTANGULAR PLASTIC VALVE BOX EXTEND SLEEVE A MINIMUM OF 12" ABOVE OPERATIONAL WATER LEVEL & CAP END FINISH GRADE STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP TO SECURE PIPE BOOT PVC FILTER FLUSH PIPE FROM PUMP STATION FILTER FLUSH PIPE WATER LEVEL ±36" NOTES: 1. TRANSITION PIPE TO BURIAL DEPTH PER SPECIFICATIONS 5-FEET FROM POND EDGE USING NECESSARY SOLVENT WELD SCH. 40 PVC FITTINGS. 2. INSTALL PIPE IN BETWEEN TYPE A BOULDER JOINT. CHIP AND ROUND BOULDERS AS NECESSARY SO THAT BOULDERS AND SHARP EDGES DO NOT REST ON PIPE. 3. INSTALL AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF LINER MATERIAL AROUND OUTSIDE OF PIPE TO PROTECT IT FROM CONTACT. Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 LEGEND # # Q S .2 30 H 30 F 30 Q 35 H 35 F 35 Q 25 Q 25 H 25 F A A1 1" 15 - F R A1 A5 F GENERAL NOTES FLAG NOTES 1 2 3 4 5 1" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE 2" DIA 5' CAN DECIDUOUS TREE T 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 4" 2.5" 2.5" 2" 2" 1.5" 2.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 2" 2.5" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 3" 3" 3 1.25" 3 1 2 5 5 4 TYP 3 AIR\VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 ISOLATION GATE VALVE ASSEMBLY 5 QUICK COUPLING VALVE ASSEMBLY 2 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY 4 DRIP REMOTE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY A B C D E F G H I J A. JUMBO VALVE BOX WITH EXTENSION AND COVER (HEIGHT AS REQUIRED) B. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH C. AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE D. PVC SCH 80 NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) E. PVC SCH 40 BALL VALVE (SIZE 2") F. PVC SCH 80 NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) G. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL H. BRICK (1 OF 4) I. PVC MAINLINE PIPE J. TEE OR EL: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS K. TRACING WIRE NOTES: 1. OPEN BALL VALVE IN ASSEMBLY 1/4 TURN UNTIL IRRIGATION SYSTEM IS FULLY CHARGED WITH WATER. 2. CLOSE VALVE DURING WINTERIZATION AND OPEN 1/2 TURN AFTER WINTERIZATION OF SYSTEM TO PROTECT VALVE DURING FREEZING WEATHER. 3. REPLACE PVC BALL VALVE WITH BRASS BALL VALVE IN THE EVENT AN AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE WITH MALE INLET IS USED. K 1 POP-UP ROTOR SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 2 POP-UP SPRAY SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY 3 ZONE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY 4 TYPICAL DRIP EMITTER PLACEMENT 5 DRIP TREE RING ASSEMBLY A B C D E F A. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH B. POP-UP SPRAY SPRINKLER C. SWING PIPE, 12" LENGTH D. 1/2" MALE NPT x BARB EL E. PVC SCH 40 TEE OR EL F. PVC LATERAL PIPE D A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O A. 6" ROUND VALVE BOX WITH COVER B. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH C. PVC SCH. 40 EL D. PVC BALL VALVE E. PVC SCH. 40 TRANSITION NIPPLE (MIPTxMHT) 1 FLUSH CAP ASSEMBLY Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 2 INLINE DRIP TREE RING FLUSH VALVE ASSEMBLY 4 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 5 TRENCH DETAIL 6 THRUST BLOCK DETAIL NOTE: 1. INSTALL FLUSH CAP ASSEMBLY AT THE END OF EACH DRIP LATERAL SEGMENT. A B C D E F A. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH B. 6" ROUND VALVE BOX WITH COVER C. FLUSH CAP WITH HOSE THREAD CAP D. DRIP IRRIGATION LATERAL E. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL F. BRICK (1 OF 2) NOTE: 1. REFER TO IRRIGATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR COVERAGE DEPTH TO BURIED PIPE AND WIRE. A B C D F G A. WARNING TAPE B. FINISH GRADE C. BACKFILL D. LATERAL PIPE E. TRACING WIRE F. TWO-WIRE CABLE G. MAINLINE PIPE E X 1 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER PEAK IRRIGATION SCHEDULE Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 IR-5 IRRIGATION CHARTS 2 ANNUAL WATER USE CHART 3 HYDRAULIC ESTIMATIONS NOTES: 1. THE PEAK SEASON RUN TIME HAS BEEN CALCULATED ASSUMING AN IRRIGATION EFFICIENCY OF 70% AND A PEAK SEASON ETo OF 0.21 INCHES/DAY. THE CROP COEFFICIENT IS ASSUMED TO BE 0.6 FOR SEED MIX AND TREES AND 0.8 FOR TURF. 2. THE TAP SIZE WAS CALCULATED FOR A 8 HR X 6 DAYS/WEEK IRRIGATION WINDOW TO IRRIGATE THE TURF GRASS AND SEED MIX. IT WAS ASSUMED THAT DRIP IRRIGATION COULD OCCUR OUTSIDE OF THE 48-HOUR WINDOW. 3. ADJUST INDIVIDUAL STATION RUN TIMES AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMMODATE TURF/PLANT ESTABLISHMENT, TURF TYPE, TURF/PLANT SOLAR EXPOSURE, SOIL TYPES, WIND, AND SLOPE. 4. ADJUST DRIP RUN TIMES AS NECESSARY FOR PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. RECORD RUN TIMES ON THE RECORD DRAWINGS. 5. BLANK ITEMS TO BE COMPLETED ON AS-BUILT DRAWINGS BY CONTRACTOR. SOIL TYPE - CLAY, SAND, LOAM, ETC. SLOPE - NONE, GENTLE, MILD, STEEP. MICROCLIMATE - SHADE, PARTIAL SUN/SHADE, FULL SUN. 6. PROVIDE LAMINATED COPY OF PEAK IRRIGATION SCHEDULE WITHIN IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ENCLOSURE. Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-0.0-ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION.DWG 29 March 2017 3:33:47 PM ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ES0.0 Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-0.1-ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES & LEGEND.DWG 29 March 2017 3:35:10 PM ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES & LEGEND ES0.1 20' OR MORE 2" MIN. Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 MAPLE HILL PARK CONDUIT AND FEEDER SCHEDULE POWER CONDUCTORS GROUND CONDUCTOR CONDUIT SECTION # RUNS # CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG/KCMIL) METAL INSUL. L (FT) %VD # CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG/KCMIL) METAL INSUL. MIN SIZE (INCHES) TYPE L (FT) NOTES A 1 4 4/0 CU XHHW-2 110 1.12% 0 - - - 3 PVC UNDERGROUND GRC ABOVE 100 - B 1 4 4/0 CU XHHW-2 440 1.07% 1 3 CU XHHW-2 3 PVC UNDERGROUND GRC ABOVE 430 - Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE PICTURE SYMBOL TYPE LAMPS COLOR TEMP / LUMENS SHIELDS LIGHT LOSS FACTOR(LLF) QTY DESCRIPTION FINISH MOUNTING VOLTAGE (120/277) MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT # AAx 48W LED 3000K / 4500 LUMENS VARIES BY LOCATION PLEASE SEE FLAG NOTES ON DRAWINGS 1 3 POLE LIGHT FIXTURE, UNIVERSE MEDIUM WITHOUT LUMINOUS ELEMENT, 48W, 3000K, FLAT DIFFUSED GLASS LENS, WHERE X IN PART NUMBER AND DRAWINGS REPRESENTS DISTRIBUTION DARK 4" HDPE 4" HDPE 4" HDPE TRENCHED 4" HDPE 4" HDPE TRENCHED TRENCHED TRENCHED 4" HDPE (WINTERIZATION PIPE) MUST CLEAN SETTLING MANHOLE PRIOR TO DRAINING SYSTEM FOR WINTER NOTE: REFER TO UTILITY PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL PIPE AND SLEEVING INFORMATION, TYPICAL TRENCHED 4" HDPE C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C TRENCHED C C 4" HDPE Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 C C C C C C C C C C ES1.1 ELECTRICAL ENLARGED PUMP HOUSE Not For Construction 3/29/17 RELEASE FOR BID Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-1.0-ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN.DWG 29 March 2017 3:39:30 PM FD FD FD FD FD 1 A4.1 A4.1 A4.1 4 3 UNEXCAVATED EARTH RETAINING WALL, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS MEN 1 MECH 2 WOMEN 3 1 A6.1 01 02 03 RETAINING WALL, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 1' - 0" 16' - 0" 1 A5.1 2 A5.1 3 A5.1 F1 F1 F1 EW5 F1 EW5 EW3 EW1 P1 EW4 P1 EW3 TYPICAL 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 8' - 0" 8" 10' - 0" 1' - 0" 10' - 6" 1' - 0" 6' - 0" 1' - 0" 4' - 0" 2' - 9 3/4" 2' - 8" 8" 5' - 0" 5' - 0" 1 3/4" 4' - 8" 8" 3' - 0" 9' - 0" 31' - 4" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR W/ INTEGRAL COLOR. SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS 1/8"/FT. - SEAL, TYPICAL. FLOOR DRAIN, REFERENCE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 1 A4.2 A4.2 A4.2 4 2 3 5/8" / 12" 3 5/8" / 12" S1 S2 S3 SB SC SA A4.2 3 4 A5.1 5 A5.1 R2 R2 1' - 5" 1' - 5" 24' - 0" 24' - 0" 45.00° 45.00° 4 A2.1 CONCRETE WALKWAY THAT FOLLOWS SLOPE OF HILL GUARDRAIL ALONG WALKWAY 16" x 8" MECHANICAL LOUVER AT FACE OF WALL. 9' - 10" 1 A6.1 1 A5.1 R1.1 2 A5.1 3 A5.1 10" x 8" CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURB 11' - 9" 10' - 3" 10' - 5" 10' - 7" 10' - 9" 10' - 11" 11' - 1" 11' - 3" 11' - 5" 11' - 7" 11' - 9" 11' - 9" 11' - 9" 11' - 8" 11' - 7" 11' - 6" 1 A4.1 A4.1 A4.1 4 3 1 A6.1 1 A5.1 2 A5.1 3 A5.1 C1 C1 C1 C1 MEN 1 MECH 2 WOMEN 3 A9.1 2 A9.1 1 LOCATION OF SOLATUBE LOCATION OF SOLATUBE 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 4' - 0" 178.50° 178.50° 178.00° 178.00° 178.00° 178.00° 178.00° 178.00° 175.00° 170.00° 172.00° 165.00° 165.00° 169.00° R1.1 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH EW7 EW5 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH GUARDRAIL BALUSTERS. TERMINATE AT COMPOSITE PLANKS. REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND SITE WALL CONSTRUCTION R5 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH EW5 R1.1 EW7 6" 118'-0" REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND SITE WALL CONSTRUCTION EW7 R5 R5 MECHANICAL LOUVER THROUGH WALL IN AREA WELL 114'-4" 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH R1.1 EW5 EW5 R1.1 EW1 COMPOSITE PLANKS ATTACHED TO CONCRETE WALL IN VERTICAL PATTERN. 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH GUARDRAIL BALUSTERS. TERMINATE AT COMPOSITE PLANKS. A4.1 5 8' - 0" R1.1 EW5 EW7 EW1 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH GUARDRAIL BALUSTERS. TERMINATE AT COMPOSITE PLANKS. REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR GRADING AND SITE WALL CONSTRUCTION R5 A7.1 5 2x2x1/8 TUBE STEEL POST, ALIGN BOTTOM WITH TOP OF ADJACENT COMPOSITE WOOD PLANK 3 1/2" x 3/4" REVEAL AT END OF 4' CONCRETE SECTION R4 R2 14" SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMNS WITH 3 1/2" x 3/4" VERTICAL REVEALS ON ALL SIDES. TYPICAL AT SHELTER. 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH RESTROOM. TYPICAL AT ALL COLUMNS. 16' - 1" 9' - 1" 11' - 1" R4 R2 14" SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMNS WITH 3 1/2" x 3/4" VERTICAL REVEALS ON ALL SIDES. TYPICAL AT SHELTER. 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH RESTROOM. TYPICAL AT ALL COLUMNS. 16' - 1" 11' - 1" 9' - 1" R4 R2 14" SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMNS WITH 3 1/2" x 3/4" VERTICAL REVEALS ON ALL SIDES. TYPICAL AT SHELTER. 16' - 1" 11' - 1" R2 R4 14" SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMNS WITH 3 1/2" x 3/4" VERTICAL REVEALS ON ALL SIDES. TYPICAL AT SHELTER. 2x2 STEEL TUBE AT 3 1/2" REVEALS TO MATCH RESTROOM. TYPICAL AT ALL COLUMNS. 11' - 1" 16' - 1" 9' - 1" 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 02 - ROOF LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 108' - 0" EW6 2'-0"X2'-0" METAL INTAKE LOUVER WITH DAMPER - PAINT R3 2' - 0" 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 02 - ROOF LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 108' - 0" R3 EW6 04A 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 2 A5.1 EW4 R1.1 F1 A6.1 4 MEN 1 R1.2 SURFACE MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL BABY CHANGING STATION,TYPICAL OF TWO 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 1 A5.1 3 A5.1 EW7 R1.1 F1 EW4 P1 P1 F1 WOMEN 3 MECH 2 MEN 1 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH 11' - 4 1/2" A7.1 5 14' - 4" 18' - 0" 18' - 6" 9' - 10" R5 R5 4" DIAMETER PERFORATED PIPE WITH FABRIC SOCK SET IN BED OF WASHED GRAVEL. DAYLIGHT THROUGH BOULDER WALL 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 2 A5.1 A6.1 2 A6.1 3 MECH 2 EW4 EW7 R1.1 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" R1.1 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL WITH PAINT FINISH COMPOSITE PLANKS ATTACHED TO CONCRETE WALL IN VERTICAL PATTERN. REFERENCE ELEVATIONS FOR LAYOUT. EW5 F1 COMPACTED BACKFILL A7.1 5 A7.1 7 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT AND CAULK TYPICAL AT OVERHANG 6' - 0" REINFORCING PER STRUCTURAL EW8 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" EW3 EW7 2x1 COMPOSITE PLANKS ATTACHED VERTICALLY TO BOTH SIDES OF WALL LIGHTING IN PLANTING BED TO SHINE UPWARD ON FACE OF WALL 2x1 COMPOSITE PLANKS ATTACHED VERTICALLY TO EXTERIOR FACE OF WALL SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE TO SHINE DOWNWARD ON FACE OF WALL SANDBLAST CITY/PARK LOGO INTO BACKSIDE OF WALL 4x8x16 CMU BLOCK 2" AIR GAP 2" RIGID INSULATION 12" CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE WALL WATER STOP 2" RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOUNDATION AND FOOTING, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - CAULK, TYP. F1 F1 REINFORCING PER STRUCTURAL 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 3/4" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" DEEP x 3 1/2" WIDE REVEAL IN CONCRETE 2x2x1/8 TUBE STEEL, FINISH WITH PAINT 1/2" DIAMETER STEEL 'STUD' WELDED TO BACK SIDE OF TUBE STEEL AT 12" O.C. PRE-DRILL CONCRETE FOR STEEL AND EPOXY. FASTEN COMPOSITE WOOD MEMBERS TO CONCRETE WITH POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS AT 24" O.C. 1x4 COMPOSITE WOOD PLANKS WITH 1 1/2" SPACING BETWEEN, TYPICAL. 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 4" CONC. SLAB 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT W/ SEALANT ADA COMPLIANT THRESHOLD H.M. DOOR WEATHERSTRIPPING & DOOR SWEEP AS REQ'D PER SPEC. FOUNDATION WALL RE: STRUCTURAL 6" CONC. SLAB W/ THICKENED EDGE PRE-FINISHED 24 GA. SHEET METAL FLASHING. TURN SHEET METAL FLASHING VERTICALLY A MINIMUM OF 6" HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME - GROUT SOLID, PAINT DOOR AS SCHEDULED SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES 4x8x16 CMU BLOCK, PAINT. INTERIOR EXTERIOR 2" RIGID INSULATION 4" 2" 2" 8" 2" AIR GAP JAMB ANCHOR STRAPS - THREE PER JAMB MINIMUM CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALL DOUBLE 2x FRT/PT WOOD BLOCKING ANCHOR FRAME WITH THROUGH BOLT AT JAMB CONDITIONS LOUVER TO DISCHARGE INTO NATURAL AREA WELL. REFERENCE MECHANICAL FOR LOUVER SIZE. ROCK MULCH, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 5" OF RIGID INSULATION TOTALING TO R-25 STEEL DOOR HM FRAME A TUBE STEEL DOOR WITH EXPANDED METAL SCREEN HM FRAME B STEEL DOOR HM FRAME C STEEL DOOR HM FRAME D REFERENCE MECHANICAL FOR LOUVER SIZE 2' - 10" WOMEN 3 A7.1 4 2' - 10" T.P DISPENSER, OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED MEN 1 BULLNOSE CORNERS OF CMU AT WING WALLS AND DOOR OPENINGS, TYPICAL. STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS STAINLESS STEEL MIRROR A7.1 4 STAINLESS STEEL URINAL 6" MIN. 36" MAX 27" MIN. 32" CLR. MIN. 18" CLR. MIN. 27" MIN. 36" MAX 54" MIN. 18" CLR. MIN. 6" MAX. 18" MIN. STANDARD HEIGHT DRINKING FOUNTAINS IN ALCOVE SINGLE HIGH & LOW MASONRY / CONC. WALL STAINLESS STEEL ANCHOR STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES Project: Maple Hill Park Larsen Structural Design Job Number: 2074 DESIGN LOADS: International Building Code; IBC 2012 Edition, except as noted Risk Category: Table 1604.5 II Standard Roofs: Ground Snow: Pg 30 psf (used for drifting calculations) Flat Roof Snow: Pf 30 psf (Min.) Snow Exposure Factor: Ce ASCE 7-10 Table 7-2 1.0 Snow Importance Factor: Is ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Snow Thermal Factor: Ct ASCE 7-10 Table 7.3 1.0 Soil Above Restrooms 110 psf Floors: Public Spaces 100 psf Lateral: Wind ASCE 7-10 Directional Procedure 3 Second Gust Velocity V_ult = 129 mph (V_asd = 100 mph) Importance Factor, Iw: ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Building Category Enclosed Internal Pressure Coefficient ASCE 7-10 Table 26.11-1 GCpi= ±0.18 Exposure C Seismic Importance Factor: Ie ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Spectral Response Acceleration Coefficient Short Period Ss 0.1819 g SDS 0.194 g One Second S1 0.0579 g SD1 0.093 g Soils Site Class D Design Category B Design Base Shear 14.5 kips Seismic Response Coefficient Cs 0.0485 Response Modification Coefficient R 4.0 Analysis Procedure Equivalent Lateral Force FOUNDATION DESIGN: Refer to soils report no. FC07300-125 by CTL Thompson, Inc., dated January 10, 2017. Soils engineer shall verify soil conditions and types during excavation and prior to concrete placement. --Footings-- Design of footings is based on: Maximum allowable bearing pressure: 2000 psf Minimum dead load pressure: 700 psf Minimum at-rest equivalent fluid pressure: 50 psf/ft Minimum passive equivalent fluid pressure: 250 psf/ft Bear footings on natural undistrubed sandstone bedrock or properly compacted structural fill as directed by the geotechnical engineer. Bottom of exterior footings to bear a minimum of 30" below final exterior grade for frost protection. --Drilled Piers-- Drilled pier design values were not provided in the soils report. Design of straight shaft drilled piers is based on the following estimated values, and shall be verified by the soils engineer prior to concrete placement: Maximum end bearing pressure: 20,000 psf Allowable side shear: 2,000 psf Minimum penetration into bedrock: 10 feet See plans for additional penetration and length requirements. Mushrooming is not permitted. Provide for overrun or underrun in drilling, concrete, and reinforcing. Pier holes shall be thoroughly cleaned and de-watered and shall be inspected by the Soils Engineer prior to concrete placement. REINFORCED CONCRETE: Design is based on "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"(ACI 318-11). Concrete work shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete” (ACI 301-10). Structural concrete shall have the following properties: 2 S2.1 1 S2.1 1' - 0" 10' - 0" 0' - 8" 8' - 0" 0' - 8" 10' - 0" 1' - 0" 10' - 6" 1' - 0" 6' - 0" 3 S2.1 2 S2.1 2 S2.1 SIM 2' - 0" 7' - 6" 2' - 0" LOWER TOP OF WALL FOR SLAB, TYP. SEE 4 / S2.1 1 S2.1 1' - 6" 15' - 6" 1' - 0" 8' - 0 7/8" 0' - 8" 9' - 1 3/4" 9' - 1 3/4" 0' - 8" 7' - 4 1/8" 14' - 0 1/2" F30 F36 F42 F30 F36 F36 F30 F36 F36 F48 FILL WITH SOIL PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE ELEVATED SLAB ABOVE. 5 S2.1 5 S2.1 48' - 10" 2' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 178.5° 178.5° 178.5° 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 9 S2.1 12 S2.1 8 S2.1 6 S2.1 2" CLR # 5 AT 10" O.C., TOP 2" CLR #5 AT 9" O.C., TOP 2" CLR #4 AT 18" O.C., TOP 7 S2.1 10 S2.1 12 S2.1 2" CLR #5 AT 10" O.C., TOP 2 5/8" CLR #4 AT 18" O.C., TOP 108' - 10" 109' - 0" 109' - 4" 108' - 11" 109' - 1" 109' - 3" 108' - 11 1/2" 110' - 5" 110' - 6 1/2" 110' - 7 1/2" 110' - 9" 110' - 11" 110' - 11" 110' - 7" 110' - 5" 110' - 3" 110' - 1" 109' - 11" 109' - 9" 109' - 7" 109' - 5" 109' - 0 1/2" 110' - 11" 110' - 10" 110' - 9" 110' - 8" 110' - 7" 3 1/4" CLR #5 AT 9" O.C., TOP 2 5/8" CLR #5 AT 10" O.C., TOP SOLATUBES PER ARCH'L 113' - 6" T.O. WALL VERIFY w/ SA S1 S2 S3 SB SC CC14 CC14 CC14 CC14 F6.5 F6.5 F6.5 F6.5 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 1 S2.2 TYP BOULDER RETAINING WALL BY OTHERS "CC14" DENOTES 14" x 14" CONCRETE COLUMN. SEE 1 / S2.2 ( 101' - 0" ) 105'-0" T.O. SLAB VERIFY w/ CIVIL ( 102' - 0" ) ( 101' - 0" ) ( 102' - 0" ) SA S1 S2 S3 SB SC HSS10X6X5/16 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS8X2X1/4 HSS8X2X1/4 HSS8X2X1/4 HSS8X2X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 113' - 7 1/2" 113' - 7 1/2" 113' - 9 1/2" 2 S2.2 3 S2.2 4 S2.2 5 S2.2 3 S2.2 MITER CORNER OF 3 S1.4 OPENING IN WALL FOR SLAB. SEE 4 / S2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL BY OTHERS 13' - 8" 13' - 8" TYP 8" PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS BY OTHERS BUTT CORNERS OF PRECAST PANELS 8" PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS BELOW BY OTHERS 8" PRECAST CONCRETE ROOF BY OTHERS OPENING BELOW PER ARCH'L, TYP. 13' - 8" 13' - 8" BUTT CORNERS OF PRECAST PANELS 108' - 4" 108' - 0" 5 S1.4 TYP PRECAST NOTES: ROOF MISCELLANEOUS DEAD LOAD = 10 psf ROOF SNOW LOAD = 30 psf WIND LOAD = PER PLAN 1.4 KIPS (ULTIMATE WIND LOAD) 1.4 KIPS (ULTIMATE WIND LOAD) 1.4 KIPS (ULTIMATE WIND LOAD) 1.4 KIPS (ULTIMATE WIND LOAD) SLOPE DIAPHRAGM LOAD TO PANEL, TYP. NOTES: TYPICAL TOP OF SLAB = 98'-0". TYPICAL TOP OF PIER CAP ELEVATION = 95'-0". TYPICAL TOP OF PIER ELEVATION = 92'-0". CENTER PIERS UNDER GRADE BEAMS, U.N.O. CONCRETE SLAB-ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION: 6" CONCRETE SLAB ON 4" GRAVEL LAYER OVER UNDISTURBED SOIL OR PROPERLY COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL PER SOILS REPORT. REINFORCE w/ #4 AT 18" EACH WAY, MID-DEPTH. PROVIDE 1/8" SAWCUT CONTROL JOINST x 1 1/4" DEEP, SPACED AT 12'-0" MAXIMUM. ELEVATTION TOP OF SLAB = 98'-0". 8" PRECAST WALL BY PRECASTER WITH BUTT CORNERS 24" SQUARE PIER CAP x 3'-0" SEE PLAN SEE PLAN TYPICAL 8" CONC WALL: REINFORCE w/ (2)-#5 TOP AND BOTTOM, #5 AT 12" HORIZONTAL, AND #5 VERTICALS AT 1'-4". PROVIDE (2)-#5 EACH SIDE OF OPENINGS IN CONC WALLS AND EXTEND 2'-0" MINIMUM BEYOND EDGE OF OPENING. SLAB ON GRADE #5 DOWELS PER CONTINUOUS SPREAD FOOTING, SEE PLAN FOR MARK AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND REINF. 2 / S2.1 EQ 0' - 8" EQ EQ EQ CLR 0' - 2" CLR 0' - 2" 12" CONC WALL #4 AT 16" HORIZ EACH FACE #5 AT 12" VERT EACH FACE SEE PLAN #5 x 10" DOWELS TO MATCH VERT REINF 3'-0" SLAB ON GRADE CONTINUOUS SPREAD FOOTING, SEE PLAN FOR MARK AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND REINF SEE PLAN EXTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE PER CIVIL AT SIM WALL RETAINING SOIL AT SOME LOCATIONS CLR 0' - 2" CLR 0' - 2" 18" CONC RETAINING WALL #4 AT 16" HORIZ EACH FACE PER CIVIL #5 AT 10" VERT #5 DOWELS PER 2 / S2.1 EXTERIOR CONC SLAB ON GRADE BY OTHERS EQ 1' - 6" EQ PER PLAN CLR CLR 0' - 2" CLR GRID 105'-0" VERIFY w/ CIVIL 3' - 0" MIN 1'-2" SQ CONC COLUMN: REINFORCE w/ (8)-#5 AND #4 TIES AT 10". EXTERIOR CONC SLAB ON GRADE BY OTHERS #5 x DOWELS TO MATCH VERT REINF. 10" 3'-0" ISOLATED FOOTING, SEE FOUNDATION PLAN FOR MARK & FOOTING SCHEDULE FOR SIZES AND REINFORCEMENT. EQ 1' - 2" EQ SB 3/16 3/16 4" NOMINAL T&G DECKING PER PLAN HSS BEAM PER PLAN, TYP. 2x6 SILL PLATE ABOVE EACH HSS BEAM. ATTACH TO HSS BEAM w/ (1)-0.145"Ø PAF AT 8", STAGGERED. SA SQ CONC COLUMN PER 1 / S2.2 STEEL BEAM PER PLAN 1/2"x9"x0'-9" EMBED PL w/ (4)-3/4"Ø x 6" HAS AT 6" GAGE 4" NOMINAL T&G DECKING PER PLAN SILL PLATE AND ATTACHMENT PER 2 / S2.2 3/16 3/16 SLOPE TOP OF CONC COL TO MATCH STEEL BEAM SLOPE 3/16 HSS TO 3/16 HSS STEEL BEAM PER PLAN w/ 1/4" CAP PL SC 12" 3 3/16" VERIFY SLOPE w/ ARCH'L SEE PLAN GENERAL LEGEND HVAC LEGEND PLUMBING LEGEND XXX X SECTION/DETAIL IS DRAWN XXX = SHEET NUMBER WHERE X = SECTION/DETAIL NUMBER AIRFLOW - RETURN/EXHAUST RA EA OA SA RETURN AIR EXHAUST AIR AIRFLOW - SUPPLY OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY AIR MVD STANDARD RADIUS ELBOW NEW RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK - WIDTH x DEPTH BACKDRAFT DAMPER 10x8 45° TAKEOFF DUCT ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES RETURN/EXHAUST DUCT UP/RETURN/EXHAUST DUCT DOWN SUPPLY DUCT UP/SUPPLY DUCT DOWN MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER SQUARE TO ROUND TRANSITION A.F.F. ABBV. G.C. SYMBOL ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR GENERAL CONTRACTOR MCD MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPER DESCRIPTION ABBV. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION TMV DF THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE DRINKING FOUNTAIN L WC FD FS VTR WCO GCO FCO LAVATORY WATER CLOSET FLOOR DRAIN FLOOR SINK VENT THRU ROOF WALL CLEANOUT GRADE CLEANOUT FLOOR CLEANOUT V W HW CW ABBV. SYMBOL FD LVR-1 210 CFM LVR-2 210 CFM 2 1 3 2 5 6 4 7 M 10x8 10x8 16x8 EH-2 EF-1 LVR-4 EH-1 LVR-2 210 CFM 36x12 LVR-3 8 8 16x8 16x8 MEN 1 WOMEN 3 MECH 2 16x6 1 LVR-1 210 CFM 16x6 HVAC KEYNOTES: 1 LOUVER MOUNTED 8" AFF. 2 LOUVER MOUNTED 8" BELOW CEILING. 3 LOUVER MOUNTED ABOVE DOOR. 4 LOW LEAKAGE MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPER. GREENHECK ICD-45 OR APPROVED. 5 DICHARGE TO AREA WELL. PROVIDE OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR. SENSOR TO LOCKOUT EF-1 OPERATION WHEN OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 40°F (ADJ.) 6 DAMPER INTERLOCKED WITH EF-1. DAMPER TO OPEN WHEN EF-1 IS IN OPERATION, OTHERWISE TO BE CLOSED. 7 8 16x6 DOWN. PROVIDE MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER IN DUCT RISER. The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Consulting Engineers 2525 S. Wadsworth Blvd, Suite 200 Lakewood, CO 80227 (303) 988-4514 4730 S. College Ave, Suite 203 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 568-8762 03.29.17 EF-1 GREENHECK CSP-A710 NORTH BAYS 2.0 360 0.5'' 1080 333 120/1 40 NOTE: A GRAVITY NOTE: 1 WITH EC MOTOR. BALANCE TO CONSTANT VOLUME AIRFLOW. OCCUPANCY SENSOR. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL. FAN SCHEDULE PLAN MANUFACTURER AREA CFM ESP RPM MOTOR WT CONTROL DAMPER CODE & MODEL NO. SERVED SONES WATTS V/Ø (LBS) TYPE REMARKS NOTES: 1. A. MARKEL E3055TDWB 120 1 1500 100 18 SURFACE 13'' 10'' 4'' NOTE: 1,2,3 MARKEL E3055TDWB 120 1 1500 100 18 SURFACE 13'' 10'' 4'' NOTE: 1,2,4 WITH INTEGRAL THERMOSTAT. WITH UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT. HEATING SETPOINT TEMPERATURE TO BE 50F (ADJ). FIRST STAGE HEATING. HEATING SETPOINT TEMPERATURE TO BE 40F (ADJ). SERVES AS BACKUP HEAT IN CASE OF EWH-1 FAILURE. ELECTRIC HEATER SCHEDULE PLAN ELECTRICAL GRILLE DIMENSIONS CODE MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. VOLTS PHASE WATTS CFM GAUGE MOUNTING TYPE H L W REMARKS EH-1 EH-2 NOTES: 1. 2. 3. 4. LVR-1 GREENHECK BVE157 SUPPLY - 150/210 - 0.03 NOTE: 1 16'' 8'' 4'' NOTE: 2 LVR-2 GREENHECK BVE157 EXHAUST - 150/210 - 0.01 NOTE: 1 16'' 8'' 4'' NOTE: 2 LVR-3 GREENHECK ESD-435 INTAKE 1.1 360 328 0.04 NOTE: 3 36'' 12'' 4'' NOTE: 4,5 LVR-4 GREENHECK BVE157 EXHAUST - 360 - 0.07 NOTE: 1 16'' 8'' 4'' NOTE: 4,5 NOTES: 1. ANODIZED ALUMINUM WITH INSECT SCREEN. PAINTING IN FIELD BY GC. 2. WITH INSECT SCREEN. PAINTING OF LOUVER IN FIELD BY GC. 3. EXTRUDED ALUMINUM. 4. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH 1/2" BIRD SCREEN. 5. PROVIDE LOUVER WITH ANODIZED FINISH. COLOR SELECTION BY ARCHITECT. LOUVER SCHEDULE PLAN MANUFACTURER SERVICE FREE CFM VEL. A.P.D. MATERIALS SIZE REMARKS CODE & MODEL NO. AREA (FPM) (IN. W.C.) (INCHES) (SQ. FT.) W H D The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Consulting Engineers 2525 S. Wadsworth Blvd, Suite 200 Lakewood, CO 80227 (303) 988-4514 4730 S. College Ave, Suite 203 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 568-8762 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: Checked by: NORTH FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD 4" GCO (2-WAY), SEE DETAIL 4" WASTE. SEE CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION 1-1/2" CW SERVICE TO 1" WATER METER. SEE CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION 2 3 4 P1.1 1 3 P5.1 Storage 4 Women 3 Men 1 DRAIN DOWN PIT. SEE DETAIL 4 P5.1 Mech 2 1 1/2" 3/4" CW TO DF. SEE CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION 3" VTR 2 3 4 11 4" W., SEE THIS SHEET FOR CONTINUATION. SEE DETAIL FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1-1/2" CW, SEE THIS SHEET FOR CONTINUATION 4" WCO SEE DETAIL WC-1 WC-1 3" FD-1 W/ TS L-1 W/ TMV-2 4" FS-1 W/ TP SEE PLUMBING ISOMETRIC A PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE PLAN DESCRIPTION MANUF. MODEL COLOR FITTINGS MANUF. MODEL COLOR REMARKS CODE FINISH FINISH WC-1 WATER CLOSET (ACCESSIBLE) ACORN 1675-W-1-1.28- STAINLESS SEAT ACORN INTEGRAL TO UNIT - NOTE(S):2,3,4,5 WALL HUNG - 1.28 GPF FVBO-HP-ADA STEEL FLUSH VALVE SLOAN 140-1.28 ESS CHROME TRANSFORMER SLOAN EL-154 L-1 LAVATORY (ACCESSIBLE) ACORN 1652LRB-1-H1-OF STAINLESS FAUCET CHICAGO 333-E2805-665PSHAB CHROME NOTE(S):1,2,4 WALL HUNG - 0.5 GPM STEEL MSB-1 MOP SERVICE BASIN FIAT MSB-2424 MOLDED FAUCET ZURN Z43M1-RC-CS CHROME NOTE(S):7 STONE UR-1 URINTAL (ACCESSIBLE) ACORN 1709HEU-W-1 STAINLESS FLUSH VALVE SLOAN 195-0.125 ESS CHROME NOTE(S):2,3,6 WALL HUNG - 0.125 GPF -0.125-FVBO STEEL TRANSFORMER SLOAN EL-154 NOTES: 1. 17 GA. P-TRAP, ANGLE SUPPLIES WITH L.K. STOPS. 4. VANDAL RESISTANT FIXTURE. 7. VACUUM BREAKER, CHECK STOPS, PAIL HOOK. 2. PROVIDE FIXTURE CARRIER. 5. MOUNT @ 17" AFF. 3. COORDINATE TRANSFORMER LOCATION, 120/60/1. 6. MOUNT @ 15" AFF. MISCELLANEOUS PLUMBING FIXTURE PLAN DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL FINISH REMARKS CODE WH-1 WALL HYDRANT WOODFORD B74 CHROME NOTE(S):1 TMV-1 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE POWERS LFLM-490 (3/4") - NOTE(S):2 TMV-2 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE POWERS LFLM-495 (1/2") - NOTE(S):3 PET-1 PLUMBING EXPANSION TANK AMTROL ST-5 STEEL NOTE(S):4 HB-1 HOSE BIBB ZURN Z1350 STAINLESS STEEL NOTE(S):1 NOTES: 1. USED FOR WINTERIZATION DRAIN LOCATION & WASHDOWN. 3. SET TO 110° F. 2. SET TO 120° F. 4. HANG FROM STRUCTURE. PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE PIPE SIZE (INCHES, MINIMUM) PLAN FIXTURE WASTE COLD WATER HOT WATER REMARKS CODE TRAP VERT. VENT SUPPLY CONNECTION SUPPLY CONNECTION & ARM DRAIN (MIN.) (MIN.) (ACTUAL) (MIN.) (ACTUAL) WC WATER CLOSET INT. 4" 2" 1" 1" - - L LAVATORY 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 3/8" 1/2" 3/8" MIXED HW UR URINAL 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/2" 3/4" 3/4" - - MSB MOP SERVICE BASIN 3" 3" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" WH/HB WALL HYDRANT/HOSE BIBB - - - 3/4" 3/4" - - WATER HEATER SCHEDULE (ELECTRIC) PLAN MANUFACTURER STORAGE G.P.M. KW/ ELECTRICAL NO. KW/ UNIT SIZE OPER. REMARKS CODE & MODEL NO. GALLONS @ 90' RISE INPUT VOLTS CYCLE PH. ELEM. ELEM. DIA. X HEGHT WEIGHT EWH-1 STATE ES6-10-SOMS 10 8.0 1.65 120 60 1 1 1.65 16" x 19" 125 LB NOTE(S):1,2 NOTES: 1. SET TO 140° F. 2. INSTALL IN MECHANICAL ROOM ABV. MSB. UNDERGROUND PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAIL SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE FLOOR FINISHED GRADE FINISHED GRADE FINISHED GRADE WALL CLEANOUT DETAIL DOMESTIC CW ENTRY PIPING DETAIL GRADE CLEANOUT (2-WAY) DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE DRAIN DOWN PIT DETAIL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER DETAIL 2 P5.1 5 RJB 03.29.17 APS..644-16 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MPP, SJM RJB, CP ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWING INDEX E0 RJB 03.29.17 APS..644-16 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MPP, SJM RJB, CP ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E0.1 FD FD FD FD FD MEN 1 MECH 2 WOMEN 3 S1 S2 S3 SB SC SA FD FD FD FD FD MEN 1 MECH 2 WOMEN 3 RJB 03.29.17 APS..644-16 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MPP, SJM RJB, CP ELECTRICAL RJB 03.29.17 APS..644-16 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MPP, SJM RJB, CP ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULES E3.1 FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS E1.1 P5.1 3 P5.1 1 P5.1 4 P5.1 6 P5.1 D 1-1/2" CW TO BUILDING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 1-1/2" REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER UNION (TYP.) FOR DOMESTIC CW (BY P.C.) (TYP.) 12" DIA. FUNNEL 1-1/2" BALL VALVE FOR SYSTEM SHUT-OFF FLOOR LINE 2" DRAIN FROM FUNNEL TO AIR GAP TO FLOOR SINK PRESSURE GAUGE WITH COCK PIPED TO FLOOR WITH 1" DRAIN 1" DRAIN VALVE STRAINER W/BLOWDOWN VALVE & PIPED FULLSIZE TO FLOOR SINK SINK WALL WALL COVER - SEE SPECS. PLUG WITH WALL FLUSH SHOWN ON DRAWINGS WASTE/SOIL PIPE SIZE AS EXTEND BRONZE CLEANOUT 18" MAX HEAVY DUTY CAST IRON TRACTOR COVER (GRADE C.O.) 24"x18"x6" THICK CONCRETE PVC CLEANOUT FLOW ADJUSTING PAD (GRADE C.O.) CLEANOUT PLUG AND BODY, SEE SPECS. PVC RISER COLLAR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC PIPING: PLASTIC PIPE SHOULD ALWAYS BE BURIED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE ASTM STANDARD RELEVANT TO THE TYPE OF PLASTIC PIPING SYSTEM BEING INSTALLED. THOSE STANDARDS ARE: FINAL BACKFILL EXCAVATED TRENCH WIDTH EMBEDMENT AREA INITIAL BACKFILL PIPE ZONE SPRINGLINE 6 INCH ASTM D2321 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION OF THERMOPLASTIC PIPE FOR SEWERS AND OTHER GRAVITY-FLOW APPLICATIONS ASTM D2774 STANDARD PRACTICE FOR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION OF THERMOPLASTIC PRESSURE PIPING. NOTE: IN ADDITION TO THESE STANDARDS, PIPE SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC DRAINAGE PIPE: 1. THE MINIMUM WIDTH OF THE TRENCH SHOULD BE THE PIPE OD (OUTSIDE DIAMETER) PLUS 16 INCHES OR THE PIPE OUTSIDE DIAMETER TIMES 1.25 PLUS 12 INCHES. THIS WILL ALLOW ADEQUATE ROOM FOR JOINING THE PIPE, SNAKING THE PIPE IN THE TRENCH TO ALLOW FOR EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION WHERE APPROPRIATE AND SPACE FOR BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION OF BACKFILL. THE SPACE BETWEEN THE PIPE AND TRENCH WALL MUST BE WIDER THAN COMPACTION EQUIPMENT USED TO COMPACT THE BACKFILL. 2. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 4 INCHES OF FIRM, STABLE AND UNIFORM BEDDING MATERIAL IN THE TRENCH BOTTOM. IF ROCK OR UNYIELDING MATERIAL IS ENCOUNTERED. A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES OF BEDDING SHALL BE USED. BLOCKING SHOULD NOT BE USED TO CHANGE GRADE OR TO INTERMITTENTLY SUPPORT PIPE OVER LOW SECTIONS IN THE TRENCH. 3. THE PIPE SHOULD BE SURROUNDED WITH AN AGGREGATE MATERIAL WHICH CAN BE EASILY WORKED AROUND THE SIDES OF THE PIPE. BACKFILLING SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN LAYERS OF 6 INCHES WITH EACH LAYER BEING SUFFICIENTLY COMPACTED TO 85% TO 95% COMPACTION. 4. A MECHANICAL TAMPER IS RECOMMENDED FOR COMPACTING SAND AND GRAVEL. THESE MATERIALS CONTAIN FINE-GRAINS, SUCH AS SILT AND CLAY. IF A TAMPER IS NOT AVAILABLE. COMPACTING SHOULD BE DONE BY HAND. 5. THE TRENCH SHOULD BE COMPLETELY FILLED. THE BACKFILL SHOULD BE PLACED AND SPREAD IN UNIFORM LAYERS TO PREVENT ANY UNFILLED SPACES OR VOIDS. LARGE ROCKS, STONES, FROZEN CLODS OR OTHER LARGE DEBRIS SHOULD BE REMOVED. STONE BACKFILL SHALL PASS THROUGH AN 1-1/2" SIEVE. ROCK SIZE SHOULD BE ABOUT ONE-TENTH OF THE PIPE OUTSIDE DIAMETER. HEAVY TAMPERS OR ROLLING EQUIPMENT SHOULD ONLY BE USED TO CONSOLIDATE THE FINAL BACKFILL. 6. TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE PIPE AND DISTURBANCE TO PIPE EMBEDMENT. A MINIMUM DEPTH OF BACKFILL ABOVE THE PIPE SHOULD BE MAINTAINED. PIPE SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED BELOW THE FROST LEVEL. TYPICALLY. IT IS NOT ADVISABLE TO ALLOW VEHICULAR TRAFFIC OR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT TO TRAVERSE THE PIPE TRENCH. HAUNCHING BEDDING REMOVABLE TEE HANDLES FOR OPENING & CLOSING STOP VALVES 24" DIA. CONCRETE MANHOLE RINGS FLOW DIRECTION TO BUILDING REFER SIZE PER PLANS 3/4" RIVER ROCK FREE FLOWING 12" DEEP UNDER MANHOLE BASE FULL SIZE STOP VALVE FROSTLINE 24" DIA TRAFFIC DUTY, CAST-IRON RING & COVER, H-20 LOAD 3/4" HOSE END THREADED COPPER PIPING WITH BALL VALVE AND CAP FOR COMPRESSED AIR WINTERIZED CONNECTION 4" PRV. 85 PSI INLET, 80 PSI OUTLET. 35 GPM MAX. 1" - WATTS LF-223S (WITH STRAINER) 1-1/2" 1-1/2" CW SERVICE TO 1" WATER METER & TAP 1-1/2" 1-1/2" HEATER DRAIN TO SINK DRAIN AND PAN RELIEF VALVE PAN DRAIN DRAIN VALVE HOSE END SECURE TO 1/2" RODS UNION (TYP.) DIELECTRIC WITH CENTER BRACE BALL VALVE (TYP.) ASME RELIEF VALVE ELECTRIC WATER 1-1/2" ANGLE IRON LOCATED IN RETURN AIR PLENUM CEILING. SUPPORT DECK SHALL BE MADE OF STEEL WHEN INORGANIC ISOLATOR BETWEEN HEATER AND PAN. WATER HEATER SHALL HAVE SHEETMETAL PAN WITH NOTE: D D (PET) HUNG FROM EXPANSION TANK CHECK VALVE STRUCTURE TAILPIECE STRUCTURE ONLY REQUIRED ON HEATERS NOTE: VACUUM RELIEF IS NOT PROVIDED WITH DIP TUBES WITH ANTI SYPHON PROTECTION. 3/4" 3/4" TMV-1 The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Consulting Engineers 2525 S. Wadsworth Blvd, Suite 200 Lakewood, CO 80227 (303) 988-4514 4730 S. College Ave, Suite 203 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 568-8762 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: Checked by: NORTH SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SDC/JMB SDC/JMB MJD AS NOTED PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DETAILS P5.1 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION P1.1 2 3 Men 1 Mech 2 Women 3 3" FD-1 W/ TS 3" 1 1 3 3 5 12 10 HB-1 HB-1 5 P5.1 7 1 P5.1 3/4" WH-1 4" 9 3 9 UR-1 3" FD-1 W/ TS 3 3" FD-1 W/ TS L-1 W/ TMV-2 PET-1 TMV-1 EWH-1 SEE DETAIL 3/4" CW, SEE THIS SHEET FOR CONTINUATION 14 13 6 2 4" WCO 15 17 16 15 5 MSB-1 6 P5.1 18 19 PLUMBING KEYNOTES: 4" W. DOWN, 2" V. RISE, 1" CW TO WC. SHOCK ABSORBER. CLASS "B". COMBINATION WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM. 1/2" CW TO EWH. 1/2" MIXED HW TO LAV. 2" W. DOWN, 1-1/2" V. RISE, 1/2" MIXED HW TO LAV. 2" V. RISE. 1/2" CW TO TRAP PRIMER FOR FLOOR SINK. 1-1/2" CW RISE AND OFFSET TO RPBP. LABEL PIPE "NO CONNECTION PRIOR TO BACKFLOW". SSEE DETAIL 2/P5.1 3/4" CW TO HB. 1-1/2" CW BACKFLOW. SEE DETAIL 2/P5.1 FOR INFORMATION. 2" V. RISE IN COLUMN TO MIN. 10' ABV. GRADE. PROVIDE 3" VTR AT END. 3/4" CW DN. IN WALL. OFFSET 1/2" TO DF & 3/4" TO WH. 1" PRV. SEE DETAIL 2/P5.1 FOR INFORMATION. 3/4" CW DN., OFFSET BELOW GRADE, BELOW FROST LINE TO DF. SHOCK ABSORBER CLASS "A". 2" W. DN., 1-1/2" V. RISE, 3/4" CW TO UR. 1" CW DN., OFFSET TO FIXTURES. 4" W. DN., 3" W. TO MSB, 4" W. TO WCO, 2" V. RISE, 1/2" CW & 1/2" HW TO MSB. 3" W. DN., 1-1/2" V. RISE FOR FD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 3" 3" 4" 4" 4" 4" 3" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 3" 3" 2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 2" 1 1/2" 2" 2" 2" 2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1/2" 1" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 3/4" 1 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1" 1 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 2" 2" WC WC UR LAV W/ TMV LAV W/ TMV FS W/ TP PRV FD SHOCK ABSORBER: CLASS "A" WH HB WCO TO FD TO FD FOR FD SHOCK ABSORBER: CLASS "A" 1" EWH PET TMV SHOCK ABSORBER: CLASS "B" HB RPBP MSB FD TO DF BY OTHERS 2" 3" VTR WCO The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Consulting Engineers 2525 S. Wadsworth Blvd, Suite 200 Lakewood, CO 80227 (303) 988-4514 4730 S. College Ave, Suite 203 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 568-8762 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: Checked by: NORTH SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SDC/JMB SDC/JMB MJD AS NOTED PLUMBING PLANS AND ISOMETRIC P1.1 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 01 - GROUND LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 02 - ROOF PLUMBING PLAN P1.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ENLARGED SCALE PLUMBING PLAN P1.1 SCALE: A PLUMBING ISOMETRIC NOTE: BUILDING IS REQUIRED TO BE WINTERIZED. NOT INTENDED TO BE HEATED YEAR ROUND. CONTRACTOR TO SLOPE ALL WATER PIPING TO HOSE BIBBS, WALL HYDRANTS, AND DRAIN DOWN PIT TO ENSURE PROPER WINTERIZATION. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE DRAIN DOWN PLAN FOR REVIEW AND WITHIN O&M'S. NONE NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SDC/JMB SDC/JMB MJD AS NOTED HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS M5.1 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: Checked by: NORTH SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SDC/JMB SDC/JMB MJD AS NOTED HVAC PLAN M1.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 01 - GROUND LEVEL HVAC PLAN NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION SANITARY WASTE BELOW FLOOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER SANITARY VENT DOMESTIC COLD WATER DESCRIPTION LVR EWH ELECTRIC WALL HEATER LOUVER EF EXHAUST FAN PET PLUMBING EXPANSION TANK SHOCK ABSORBER (ELEVATION) HOSE BIBB/WALL HYDRANT PIPE ANCHOR SHOCK ABSORBER (PLAN) PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE HOSE END DRAIN VALVE OR TP/TS TRAP PRIMER/TRAP SEAL WHA WATER HAMMER ARRESTER RPBP REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER OR HB/WH B M PLUMBING SPECIFICATION: PIPING: WASTE AND VENT PIPING SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC "SOLID CORE WITH SOLVENT WELDED FITTINGS. WATER PIPING AND CONDENSATE PIPING SHALL BE TYPE "L" COPPER WITH NO LEAD SOLDER OR FLUX FITTINGS. A. B. INSULATION: WATER PIPING INSULATION SHALL BE 1" THICK, 1-1/2 LB/CUBIC FT. DENSITY; FOR HW, CW AND CONDENSATE PIPING. A. EQUIPMENT: FLOOR DRAIN (FD-1): ZURN Z-415-B, CAST-IRON BODY, BOTTOM OUTLET, FLASHING FLANGE, NICKEL BRONZE TOP. FLOOR SINK (FS-1): CAST IRON BODY, BOTTOM OUTLET, FLASHING FLANGE, SATIN NIKALOY COVER WITH 1/2 GRATE. WATTS OR EQUAL. A. B. GRADE CLEANOUT (GCO): CAST-IRON BODY AND FRAME, CLEANOUT PLUG, ADJUSTABLE, ROUND, NO-SLIP OR ABRASIVE, CAST-IRON TOP. WATTS OR EQUAL. C. WALL CLEANOUT (WCO): CAST-IRON BOSY ADAPTABLE TO PIPE WITH CAST BRONZE OR CAST BRASS CLEANOUT PLUG. STAINLESS STEEL COVER INCLUDING SCREWS. JOSAM OR EQUAL. D. E. TRAP SEAL (TS): SURE SEAL OR EQUAL. VALVES: A. BALL VALVES SHALL BE NSF 61 RATED AND EQUAL TO APOLLO #77CLF-100/200. B. DRAIN VALVES SHALL BE NSF 61 RATED AND EQUAL TO APOLLO 70LF-(10/20)X-HC. C. CHECK VALVES SHALL BE NSF 61 RATED AND EQUAL TO APOLLO 161(T/S)LF OR EQUAL. REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTOR (RPBP): REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW ASSE 1013 AND USC APPROVED. MUST BE LEAD FREE. PROVIDE FUNNEL AIR GAP FITTING. ROUTE RELIEF TO FLOOR DRAIN. FEBCO LF880V OR EQUAL. D. The Ballard Group, Inc. Mechanical Consulting Engineers 2525 S. Wadsworth Blvd, Suite 200 Lakewood, CO 80227 (303) 988-4514 4730 S. College Ave, Suite 203 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 568-8762 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: Checked by: NORTH SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SDC/JMB SDC/JMB MJD AS NOTED MECHANICAL COVER SHEET - LEGENDS, GENERAL NOTES AND SHEET INDEX MP0.0 SHEET INDEX SHEET NUMBER MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SHEET TITLES SHEET SCALE MP0.0 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET - LEGENDS, GENERAL NOTES AND SHEET INDEX NONE M1.1 HVAC PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" M5.1 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS NONE P1.1 PLUMBING PLANS AND ISOMETRIC AS SHOWN P5.1 PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DETAILS NONE MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. THESE DOCUMENTS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE AND ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE UTILIZED AS SHOP DRAWINGS NOR NECESSARILY SCALED FOR EXACT MEASUREMENTS. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THESE DOCUMENTS AND THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 2. MECHANICAL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID OR COMMENCING WORK. 3. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY ADDITIONAL COORDINATION OR MODIFICATIONS THAT MAY BE REQUIRED DUE TO THE USE OR INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN THAT OF THE BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURERS LISTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO AND DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHOWN SHALL BE RUN AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ROOFING DETAILS SPECIFIC TO THIS PROJECT. 6. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THERMOSTAT, SENSOR AND SWITCH LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ALL THERMOSTATS, SENSORS AND SWITCHES SHALL BE LOCATED 48" AFF UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS REQUIRE EXPOSED CONTROL WIRING, SUCH WIRING SHALL BE CONCEALED WITH WIRE MOLD WITH COLOR AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 7. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT LABELS FOR ALL MAJOR EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS, FANS, CONTROLS, AND DAMPERS. LABELS SHALL BE AFFIXED OR ADHERED DIRECTLY TO EQUIPMENT. EQUIPMENT TO BE LABELED WITH ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS. 8. BALANCE AIR SYSTEMS TO THE QUANTITIES SHOWN AND SUBMIT BALANCE REPORT TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. FAN SYSTEMS TO BE BALANCED WITHIN PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT OF LISTED VALUES. AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS TO BE BALANCED WITH PLUS 10 PERCENT TO MINUS 5 PERCENT OF LISTED VALUES. 9. SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER ELECTRONIC PDF FILES OF MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW OF ALL MAJOR EQUIPMENT AS LISTED ON DRAWING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES, AS WELL AS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES AND CONTROLS. ENGINEER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR EQUIPMENT OR INSTALLATION COORDINATION THAT HAS NOT BEEN SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL WARRANTY WORK, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND PROPER OPERATION FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF BUILDING BY OWNER. THIS GUARANTEE SHALL NOT INCLUDE NORMAL MAINTENANCE REQUIRED BY THE OWNER AS DESCRIBED IN O&M MANUALS. 11. PROVIDE TWO SETS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS TO OWNER AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. MANUALS TO INCLUDE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, REPLACEMENT PART LISTS, AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ON ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUBMITTED. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A COMPLETE AND ACCURATE SET OF RECORD DRAWINGS SHOWING ACTUAL INSTALLED LOCATIONS OF WORK. SUBMIT THESE DRAWINGS AS PART OF THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. 13. ACCESS DOORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ORDER TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS REQUIRING ACCESS FOR SERVICING OR ADJUSTMENT LOCATED ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS, WHETHER OR NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ACCESS DOORS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ACCESS DOOR LOCATIONS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PROVIDE 12"x12" ACCESS DOORS FOR HAND ACCESS (VALVES AND DAMPERS) AND 24"x24" ACCESS FOR HEAD AND SHOULDER ACCESS FOR OTHER EQUIPMENT. HVAC GENERAL NOTES 1. DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS LISTED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE CLEAR, INSIDE DIMENSIONS. WHEN DUCT LINER IS INDICATED, INCREASE SHEET METAL DIMENSIONS ACCORDINGLY. 2. PROVIDE DUCT TRANSITIONS FROM EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO DUCT SIZES INDICATED AS REQUIRED. 3. PROVIDE A FLEXIBLE CONNECTION TO THE INTAKE AND DISCHARGE OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HAVING ROTATING PARTS. FLEXIBLE CONNECTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES. 4. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE A MINIMUM 26 GAUGE SHEETMETAL, OR AS REQUIRED BY ALL APPLICABLE CODES. ALL DUCTWORK CROSSING RATED CORRIDORS SHALL BE A MINIMUM 24 GAUGE SHEETMETAL. DUCT GAUGES SHALL MEET OR EXCEED SMACNA STANDARDS. 5. ALL SUPPLY, RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCTWORK SHALL BE SEALED AIRTIGHT WITH DUCT SEALANT (SMACNA SEAL CLASS “A”) ALONG ALL SEAMS AND JOINTS. 6. ALL ELBOWS, BOTH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL, SHALL BE LONG RADIUS ELBOWS WHEREVER POSSIBLE, OR SHALL HAVE TURNING VANES WHERE SHOWN. 7. RECTANGULAR BRANCH DUCT TAKEOFFS SHALL HAVE 45° TAKEOFFS AND ROUND DUCT TAKEOFFS SHALL BE CONICAL. 8. ALL JOB SITE DUCTWORK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION SHALL BE COVERED AND PROTECTED FROM DIRT, DUST AND DAMAGE PER SMACNA STANDARDS. OPENINGS IN INSTALLED DUCTWORK DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE SEALED CLOSED WITH PLASTIC TO PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS INTRUSION INTO DUCTWORK SYSTEMS. 9. COORDINATE LOUVER, WALL CAP AND AIR DEVICE PLACEMENT WITH BRICK OR BLOCK COURSING WHERE APPLICABLE. 10 COORDINATE THE LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK WITH THE ARCHITECT AT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES 1. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF ALL CONNECTION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 2. ROUGH-IN AND FINAL CONNECT ALL FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT SITE TO THOROUGHLY FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE AREA OF WORK. ANY DISCREPANCES BETWEEN THESE DOCUMENTS AND ACTUAL CONDITIONS SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION PRIOR TO BID PRICING. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO LACK OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS. 4. ALL WORK SHALL BE PER LOCAL BUILDING AND HEALTH DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS. 6 ALL VENTS THROUGH THE ROOF (VTR) SHALL BE POSITIONED A MINIMUM OF 15'-0" FROM ANY OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE. 7. OFFSET ALL PIPING AS REQUIRED TO AVOID STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, CANTS, FLASHING, MECHANICAL, OR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. HVAC INSULATION NOTES 1. LVR-3 PLENUM AND ALL DUCTWORK DOWNSTREAM OF EF-1 SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH 2" DUCT WRAP WITH VAPOR BARRIER JACKET, MINIMUM R-8. NO DUCT LINER ALLOWED. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION T.O. COL S1 SQ CONC COLUMN PER 1 / S2.2 STEEL BEAM PER PLAN EMBED PL PER 4" NOMINAL T&G DECKING PER PLAN SILL PLATE AND ATTACHMENT PER 2 / S2.2 3/16 3/16 HSS TO HSS SLOPE TOP OF CONC COL TO MATCH STEEL BEAM SLOPE 3 / S2.2 STEEL BEAM PER PLAN w/ 1/4" CAP PL STEEL STRUCTURAL FASCIA PER PLAN, MITERED. 12" 1 3/4" VERIFY SLOPE w/ ARCH'L SEE PLAN T.O. COL S3 SQ CONC COLUMN PER 1 / S2.2 STEEL BEAM PER PLAN EMBED PL PER 4" NOMINAL T&G DECKING PER PLAN SILL PLATE AND ATTACHMENT PER 2 / S2.2 3/16 3/16 HSS TO HSS SLOPE TOP OF CONC COL TO MATCH STEEL BEAM SLOPE 3 / S2.2 STEEL BEAM PER PLAN w/ 1/4" CAP PL STEEL STRUCTURAL FASCIA PER PLAN, MITERED. SEE FOR ADD'L INFORMATION. 4 / S2.2 SEE PLAN T.O. COL 12" 1 3/4" VERIFY SLOPE w/ ARCH'L #5 AT 9" HORIZ, EACH FACE #5 AT 9" VERT, EACH FACE SLOPES SEE PLAN EXTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE PER CIVIL CONTINUOUS SPREAD FOOTING. SEE PLAN FOR MARK AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND REINF. SEE PLAN EQ 1' - 0" EQ CLR 0' - 2" CLR 0' - 2" SEE PLAN #5 x 3'-0" DOWELS TO MATCH VERT REINF 3'-0" CLR 0' - 2" MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 SECTIONS S2.2 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 SITE RETAINING WALL 0' - 2" 10" CONC SLAB. REINFORCE PER PLAN. SLOPES 18" CONC RETAINING WALL. REINF PER #5 x DOWELS AT 10" 3'-0" 3'-0" #5 x DOWELS AT 24" 2'-6" 2'-6" 0' - 10" DOWELS MAY NOT BE WET SET CURB PER 7 / S2.1 0 '- 3" CLR 3 / S2.1 (2)-#5 TOP PER PLAN CLR PER PLAN CLR 12" CONC WALL PER 2 / S2.1 10" CONC SLAB, REINFORCE PER PLAN #5 x 2'-6" DOWELS TO MATCH VERT WALL REINF. 2'-6" 0' - 10" RAILING PER ARCH'L SLOPES SEE PLAN DOWELS MAY NOT BE WET SET #4 x AT 12", ALTERNATE HORIZ LEG. 12" 8" (1)-#5 CONT VERIFY w/ ARCH/L 0' - 8" VERIFY w/ ARCH'L 0' - 10" CHAMFER PER ARCH'L, TYP. 1/2" x 5" x CONT EMBED PL w/ (1)-3/4"Ø x 6" H.A.S. AT 12" PL 1/2" x 4" x CONT 3/16 3/16 3/16 2-12 3/16 2-12 RAILING PER ARCH'L (2)-#5 TOP 0' - 3" CLR 0' - 3" CLR 12" CONC WALL PER 2 / S2.1 SLOPES 10" CONC SLAB, REINF PER PLAN. #5 DOWELS PER 7 / S2.1 DOWELS MAY NOT BE WET SET 0' - 10" CLR 0' - 3" CLR 0' - 3" PER PLAN CLR PER PLAN CLR 10" CONC SLAB. REINFORCE PER PLAN. SLOPES 0' - 10" 8" CONC WALL, REINF PER 1 / S2.1 #5 x DOWELS AT 24", ALTERNATE HORIZ LEG DIRECTION. 2'-6" 2'-6" (2)-#5 TOP CLR 0' - 3" CLR 0' - 1 1/2" CLR 0' - 2" 12"x24" DROPPED CONCRETE BEAM SLOPES 0' - 10" 10" CONC SLAB. REINFORCE PER PLAN. #4 x DOWELS AT 24", ALTERNATE HORIZ LEG DIRECTION. 2'-0" 2'-0" (2)-#5 TOP WALL REINF CONT THRU BEAM (3)-#5 BOTTOM. EXTEND 4'-0" MINIMUM INTO WALL, TYPICAL EACH END. CLR 0' - 1" TOP & BOTT 0' - 2" CLR #4 TIES AT 10" PER PLAN CLR PER PLAN CLR SLOPES SEE PLAN 12" CONC WALL w/ HORIZ REINF PER 10" CONC SLAB. REINFORCE PER PLAN. 2 / S2.1 #4 x DOWELS AT 16" EACH FACE FULL HT 24" 1' - 0" SEE PLAN SLOPES 8" CONC WALL: REINF w/ (2)-#4 TOP & BOTTOM, #4 AT 12" HORIZ, AND #4 AT 16" VERT. #5 x DOWELS TO MATCH VERT REINF. ALTERNATE HORIZ LEG. 2'-6" 2'-6" CLR 0' - 2" CLR 0' - 1 1/2" 10" CONC SLAB, REINFORCE PER PLAN 0' - 8" ARCH. SEE DROP STEM WALL REINF. BELOW DOOR BLOCK-OUT. EXTEND REINF. 2’-8” BEYOND EDGES OF OPENING SLAB-ON-GRADE, SEE PLAN NOTES FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING . SLOPE EXTERIOR SLAB PER CIVIL T/S.O.G. SEE PLAN #4 x DOWELS AT 1’-0” O.C. ALTERNATE HORIZ. LEGS 25” 25” 2'-8" MIN. OPENING 2'-8" MIN. ELEVATION N.T.S. 0' - 8" CLR 0' - 2" CLR 0' - 2" 24" CONC WALL #5 AT 12" HORIZ EACH FACE #5 AT 16" VERT EACH FACE PER CIVIL CONTINUOUS SPREAD FOOTING, SEE PLAN FOR MARK AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND REINF EXTERIOR SLAB ON GRADE PER CIVIL AT SOME LOCATIONS SEE PLAN DOWELS PER 2 / S2.1 EQ 2' - 0" EQ MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 SECTIONS S2.1 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 7 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 12 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 8 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 9 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 10 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 11 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 SECTION TALL. REINF w/ (8)-#5 VERT AND (3)-#4 TIES. EMBED PL BY PRECASTER STEEL ANGLE BY PRECASTER 95'-0" 98'-0" VERIFY w/ 92'-0" ARCH'L DRILLED PIER, SEE PLAN FOR SIZE AND FOR REINFORCING 4 / S1.4 (3)-#5 x 5'-0" DOWELS 1" SHIM AND GROUT 3" CLR MIN 2' - 6" MIN 2' - 6" 0' - 2" CLR DOWELS PER (3) TIES AT TOP OF DRILLED PIER ROUGHEN SIDES OF PIER WITHIN FIRM BEDROCK PER SOILS ENGINEER. 0' - 3" 1' - 0" 0' - 3" CENTER CAGES WITH #3 x 4 SIDES, WIRED TO VERTICAL BARS, TOP AND BOTTOM. ADD (1) TIE TOP OF APPROVED BEDROCK. SEE SOILS REPORT FOR BORING LOGS. 3" HORIZ LEG DOWELS SHALL BE WET-SET AND VIBRATED IMMEDIATELY AFTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT. VERIFY w/ SOILS ENGINEER 10'-0" MIN BEDROCK PENETRATION VERIFY w/ SOILS ENGINEER 25'-0" MINIMUM LENGTH SEE PLAN T.O. PIER ELEV FORM UPPER 2' (MIN.) OF DRILLED PIER WITH SONOTUBE TO PREVENT MUSHROOMING. 3 / S1.4 TYPICAL DRILLED PIER TO BE 18" DIAMETER. REINF w/ (6)-#5 VERT AND #3 TIES AT 16" 8" PRECAST WALL BY PRECASTER WITH BUTT CORNERS 8" PRECAST ROOF BY PRECASTER SLOPES EMBED PLs BY PRECASTER STEEL ANGLE BY PRECASTER PER ARCH'L MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 PUMPHOUSE FOUNDATION AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS & SECTIONS S1.4 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 PUMPHOUSE FOUNDATION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 PUMPHOUSE ROOF FRAMING PLAN 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 PUMPHOUSE FOUNDATION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 TYPICAL DRILLED PIER 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 PUMPHOUSE ROOF HSS8x2x1/4 STRUCTURAL FASCIA, TYP. 120' - 7 1/2" 115' - 7 1/2" 113' - 9 1/2" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" T&G DECKING 119'-1" T.O. CONC COLUMN 114'-11 3/4" T.O. CONC COLUMN 113'-7 1/2" T.O. CONC COLUMN 113'-7 1/2" T.O. CONC COLUMN NOTES: VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION COMMENCES. SEE S0.1 FOR GENERAL NOTES. NOTES: GRIND WELDS SMOOTH, TYPICAL AT ALL HSS-TO-HSS CONNECTIONS. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION COMMENCES. SEE S0.1 FOR GENERAL NOTES. TYPICAL ROOF FRAMING: 4" NOMINAL T&G DECKING. ATTACH T&G DECKING TO EACH SUPPORTS AND TO EACH OTHER PER THE GENERAL NOTES. MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 SHELTER FOUNDATION AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS S1.3 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 SHELTER FOUNDATION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 SHELTER ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHELTER FOUNDATION SCHEDULE Type Length Width Foundation Thickness Longitudinal Transverse F6.5 6' - 6" 6' - 6" 1' - 0" (8)-#5, BOTTOM (8)-#5, BOTTOM ARCH'L T.O. WALL VERIFY w/ ARCH'L 11 S2.1 118' - 6" 6 S2.2 107' - 6" VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSACPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS TYPICAL AT SOLATUBE OPENINGS: REINFORCE w/ (2)-#5 ON (4) SIDES, EXTENDED 2'-6" PAST EACH SIDE OF OPENING. CENTER REINFORCING IN SLAB. 6 S2.2 MECHANICAL LOUVER AND CONCRETE WELL, SIZE AND LOCATION PER ARCH'L. 107' - 4" 106' - 4" 108' - 11" [DROPPED] 12" x 24" CONC BEAM 6" CONC WALLS. REINF w/ #4 x HORIZ AT 12" AND #4 VERT AT 18". DRILL AND EPOXY HORIZ REINF 8" MINIMUM INTO 12" CONC WALL OR 10" ELEVATED CONC SLAB. SEE ARCH'L FOR WALL ELEVATIONS. 9 S2.1 12 S2.1 8 S2.1 6 S2.1 7 S2.1 10 S2.1 1 1/2" CLR #5 AT 8" O.C., BOTTOM 1 1/2" CLR #5 AT 12" O.C., BOTTOM 1 1/2" CLR #5 AT 6" O.C., BOTTOM 1 1/2" CLR #5 AT 12" O.C., BOTTOM 12 S2.1 2 1/8" CLR #5 AT 12" O.C., BOTTOM [DROPPED] 12" x 24" CONC BEAM 108' - 10" 109' - 0" 110' - 5" 110' - 6 1/2" 110' - 7 1/2" 110' - 7" 110' - 8" 110' - 9" 110' - 10" 110' - 11" 110' - 11" 110' - 11" 110' - 7" 110' - 9" 110' - 5" 110' - 3" 110' - 1" 109' - 11" 109' - 9" 109' - 7" 109' - 5" 109' - 4" 109' - 3" 109' - 1" 108' - 11" 108' - 11 1/2" 109' - 0 1/2" SOLATUBES PER ARCH'L 11 S2.1 8 S2.1 6 S2.2 107' - 6" VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS VERIFY w/ LANDSCAPE DWGS 6 S2.2 MECHANICAL LOUVER AND CONCRETE WELL PER ARCH'L 106' - 4" 107' - 4" 108' - 11" 2 1/8" CLR #4 AT 18" O.C., BOTTOM 1 1/2" CLR #4 AT 18" O.C., BOTTOM 1 1/2" CLR #4 AT 18" O.C., BOTTOM 6" CONC WALLS. REINF w/ #4 x HORIZ AT 12" AND #4 VERT AT 18". DRILL AND EPOXY HORIZ REINF 8" MINIMUM INTO 12" CONC WALL OR 10" ELEVATED CONC SLAB. SEE ARCH'L FOR WALL ELEVATIONS. ELEVATED CONCRETE SLAB CONSTRUCTION: 10" CONCRETE SLAB, REINFORCE PER PLAN. DO NOT CUT CONTROL JOINTS IN SLAB. NOTES: ELEVATIONS ON ROOF PLANS DENOTE BOTTOM OF SLAB/TOP OF WALL ELEVATIONS, U.N.O. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION COMMENCES. SEE S0.1 FOR GENERAL NOTES. MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 RESTROOM ROOF FRAMING PLANS S1.2 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 RESTROOM ROOF FRAMING PLAN_TOP REINFORCING 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 RESTROOM ROOF FRAMING PLAN_BOTTOM REINFORCING 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 178.5° 178.5° 1 78.0° 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 4' - 0" 178.0° 178.0° 178.0° 178.0° 178.0° 175.0° 170.0° 172.0° 165.0° 165.0° 169.0° 170.0° 177. 0° F54 F54 F30 F36 F36 F36 1' - 0" 6 S2.2 6 S2.2 3' - 0" 1' - 0" DROPPED BEAM ABOVE F84 F96 F48 2' - 0" 70.00° 44.00° 27' - 0" 2' - 0" 17' - 0" 4 S2.1 4 S2.1 4 S2.1 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 10' - 0" 17' - 0" F84 NOTES: TYPICAL TOP OF FOOTING = 97'-0", U.N.O. TYPICAL TOP OF CONC SLAB ON GRADE = 100'-0", U.N.O. VERITY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION COMMENCES. SEE S0.1 FOR GENERAL NOTES. TYPICAL SLAB-ON-GRADE CONSTRUCTION: 5" CONCRETE SLAB ON 4" GRAVEL LAYER OVER UNDISTURBED SOIL OR PROPERLY COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL PER SOILS REPORT. REINF SLAB w/ #4 AT 18" O.C., CHAIRED TO MIDDLE OF SLAB. PROVIDE 1/8" x 1 1/4" DEEP SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AT 12'-0" O.C. MAXIMUM. MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 RESTROOM FOUNDATION PLAN S1.1 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 RESTROOM FOUNDATION PLAN RESTROOM FOUNDATION SCHEDULE Mark Width Foundation Thickness Length Longitudinal Transverse F30 2' - 6" 1' - 0" CONT (3)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F36 3' - 0" 1' - 0" CONT (4)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F42 3' - 6" 1' - 0" CONT (4)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F48 4' - 0" 1' - 0" CONT (5)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F54 4' - 6" 1' - 0" CONT (5)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F84 7' - 0" 1' - 2" CONT (9)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM F96 8' - 0" 1' - 2" CONT (9)-#5, BOTTOM #5 AT 12", BOTTOM Intended f’c, (psi) Maximum Entrained Cement Use 28 day Aggregate Air (±1.5%) Type Foundations 4,000 1 1/2” Stone 5% I/II Grade Beams 3,000 ¾” Stone 5% I/II Elevated 4,000 ¾” Stone --- I/II Structural Slab Columns 4,500 ¾” Stone 3% I/II Interior Slab- 3,500 ¾” Stone 3% I/II on-Grade Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the engineer of record no less than 15 working days prior to the commencent of pouring. Water cement ratios shall in no case exceed 0.50. Slump of concrete shall be specified by the concrete sub- contractor to provide adequate workability and finishing of the concrete being placed. No concrete admixture containing calcium chloride shall be permitted in any concrete. Detailing, fabrication, and placement of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures (ACI 315-99). Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Splice welded-wire fabric by lapping one full mesh space plus 2". Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, reinforcement to be welded shall be ASTM 706 grade 60 reinforcing. At splices, lap bars 50 diameters unless noted otherwise. At corners and intersections, make horizontal bars continuous or provide matching corner bars. Provide standard hooks on bars terminating at a concrete face unless noted otherwise on plan. Around openings in walls and slabs, provide 2-#5, extending 2'-0 beyond edge of opening. In continuous members, splice top bars at mid-span and splice bottom bars over supports. Provide intermittent shear keys at all construction joints and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. Except as noted on the drawings, concrete protection for reinforcement in cast-in-place concrete shall be as follows: a. Cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3" b. Exposed to earth or weather: #6 through #18 bars 2" #5 bar, W31 or D31 wire, and smaller 1-1/2" c. Not exposed to weather or in contact with ground: Slabs, walls, joists: #11 bar and smaller 3/4" Beams, columns: Primary reinforcement 1-1/2" Stirrups, ties, spirals 1-1/2" Anchor bolts and rods for beam and column-bearing plates shall be placed with setting templates. Permanent corrugated steel forms for concrete floor slabs shall be manufactured and erected according to the "Specifications and Code of Standard Practice" of the Steel Deck Institute. Concrete shall not be placed until reinforcing and embedded items have been inspected by a qualified special inspector employed by the owner in accordance with IBC Section 1704.4. Earth formed trenches shall not be used. STRUCTURAL ERECTION AND BRACING REQUIREMENTS: The structural drawings illustrate the completed structure with elements in their final positions, properly supported and braced. These construction documents contain typical and representative details to assist the contractor. Details shown apply at all similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. Although due diligence has been applied to make the drawings as complete as possible, not every detail is illustrated, nor is every exceptional condition addressed. All proprietary connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. All work shall be accomplished in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the applicable code and local ordinances. The general contractor is responsible for coordination of all work, including layout and dimension verification, materials coordination, shop drawing review, and the work of subcontractors. Any discrepancies or omissions discovered in the course of the work shall be immediately reported to the architect for resolution. Continuation of work without notification of discrepancies relieves the architect and engineer from all consequences. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, the drawings do not describe methods of construction. The contractor, in the proper sequence, shall perform or supervise all work necessary to achieve the final completed structure, and to protect the structure, workmen, and others during construction. Such work shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, shoring for construction equipment, shoring for excavation, formwork, scaffolding, safety devices and programs of all kinds, support and bracing for cranes and other erection equipment. Do not backfill against basement or retaining walls until supporting slabs and floor framing are in place and securely anchored, unless adequate bracing is provided. Temporary bracing shall remain in place until all floors, walls, roofs and any other supporting elements are in place. The architect and engineer bear no responsibility for the above items, and observation visits to the site do not in any way include inspection of them. SHOP DRAWINGS: Construction Documents are copyrighted and shall not be copied for use as erection plans or shop details. Use of Larsen Structural Design's electronic files as base for shop drawings requires prior approval by Larsen Structural Design, signed release of liability by subcontractor, and deletion of Larsen Structural Design’s name and Logo from all sheets so used. The General Contractor and his subcontractors shall submit in writing any requests to modify the plans or specifications. All shop and erection drawings shall be checked and stamped by the General Contractor prior to submission for Engineer's review. Unchecked submittals will be returned without review. Furnish one (1) print and one (1) electronic copy of shop and erection drawings to the Structural Engineer for review prior to fabrication for: concrete mix designs, reinforcing steel, structural steel, precast, and T&G decking. Submit in a timely manner to permit ten (10)working days for review. Shop drawings submitted for review do not constitute "request for change in writing" unless specific suggested changes are clearly marked. In any event, such changes by means of the shop drawing submittal process become the responsibility of the one initiating such change. LETTERS OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE: The General Contractor shall determine from the local building official at the time the building permit is obtained whether any letters of construction compliance will be requested from the Structural Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the engineer about all such requirements in writing before the start of construction. One-week advance notice shall be given when requesting site visits necessary as the basis for the compliance letter. INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: All site soils related work and footing excavations prior to placing forms, as well as site drainage, shall be reviewed by the project geotechnical engineer. Normal reviews by Local Building Department. Notify 48 hours prior to required review. Required special inspections per I.B.C. Section 1705 by an approved special inspector retained by owner: * Concrete: Observation of reinforcing, embeds, and forms prior to placement of concrete and observation during placement of concrete as well as taking and testing of specimens. Refer to Section 1705.3 and Table 1705.3 of the I.B.C. * Steel: Periodic and continuous inspections of steel frame joint details. Refer to Section 1705.2 and Table 1705.2.2 of the I.B.C, and Tables N5.4-1 thru N5.4-3 and N5.6-1 thru N5.6-3 of the AISC 360-10. * Grading, Excavation and Placement of Fills: Observation during grading, earthwork excavations and placement of fills, as well as testing for required compaction of fills. * Masonry: Level B and Core Wall special inspection. Refer to Section 1705.4 of the I.B.C. and Table 1.18.2 of the TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. The Special Inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the building official, for inspection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection. Duties and responsibilities of the special inspector shall be to observe and/or test the work assigned and outlined above for conformance with the approved construction documents. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction. The special inspector shall furnish regular reports to the building official, the engineer and architect of record, and other designated persons. Progress reports for continuous inspection shall be furnished weekly. Individual reports of periodic inspections shall be furnished within one week of inspection dates. The reports shall note uncorrected deficiencies, correction of previously reported deficiencies, and changes to the approved construction documents authorized by engineer of record. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report within 10 days of the final special inspection stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge and belief, in conformance with the approved construction documents and the applicable workmanship provisions of the International Building Code. Work not in compliance shall be noted in the report. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated, and erected in accordance with the "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" (AISC 360-05) and the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges" (AISC 303-05), by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). Structural steel wide flange beams shall conform to ASTM A992. Other rolled shapes, including plates, channels, and angles shall conform to ASTM A36. Hollow structural section (HSS) tube shapes shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi yield. Pipe shapes shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B. Except as noted, framed beam connections shall be bearing-type with 3/4" diameter, snug tight, A325-N bolts, detailed in conformance with the Structural Drawings and the "Steel Construction Manual" by AISC, 13th Edition. Install bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", 2004. All beams shall have full depth web stiffeners each side of webs above and below columns Anchor rods shall conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36 (or high strength Gr 55 or Gr 105 as noted), with weldability supplement S1. Headed anchor studs (HAS) shall be attached to structural steel with equipment approved by the stud manufacturer according to the stud manufacturer's recommendations. Welding shall be done by a certified welder in accordance with AISC and AWS specifications and recommendations using E70- electrodes. Where not specifically noted, minimum weld shall be 3/16” fillet by length of contact edge. All post-installed anchors shall have current International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) reports and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Expansion anchors shall be approved “wedge” type unless specifically noted to be “sleeve” type and shall have current ICC-ES Report. Chemical anchors shall be approved epoxy or similar adhesive type and shall have current ICC-ES Report. Where base material is not solid, approved screen tubes shall be used. Grout beneath column base and beam-bearing plates shall be minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,500 psi, approved non-metallic,non-shrink, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1107 Grade B or C at a flow cone fluid consistency of 20 to 30 seconds. STRUCTURAL WOOD FRAMING: In-Grade Base Values have been used for design. 2x framing shall be Hem-Fir S4S No. 2 and better unless noted. All lumber shall be 19% maximum moisture content, unless noted. Solid timber beams and posts shall be Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1. Studs shall be Hem-Fir No.2 grade and better. Top and bottom plates shall be Hem-Fir S4S No. 2 and better. Wood in contact with concrete shall be ACQ pressure-treated. Conventional light framing shall comply with IBC Section 2308. Except as noted otherwise, minimum nailing shall be provided as specified in IBC Table 2304.9.1 "Fastening Schedule". Lead holes for lag screws shall be drilled in accordance with Table 6.23 of the AITC Timber Construction Manual, 5th edition. TONGUE-AND-GROOVE DECKING: Materials and grading shall be in conformance with NDS WCD 2, "Tongue and Groove Roof Decking" (2004), and AITC 112-93, "Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking". Design and installation shall be in conformance with NDS WCD 2, AITC 112, and IBC Section 2304.9. Decking shall be Douglas-Fir and shall have the following minimum allowable stress values: Fb(t) = 2300 psi Fv = 165 psi E = 1,800 ksi All decking shall be 19% maximum moisture content, unless noted otherwise. Layup Pattern shall be two-span continuous, in accordance with IBC 2304.9.2. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, decking attachments shall be as follows: Four-inch sawn tongue-and-groove decking shall be attached to each support with (1)-40d toenail and (1)-60d face nail. Decking courses shall be attached to each other with 8" spikes at 30" maximum and no greater than 10" from the end of each piece. Spikes shall be installed in pre-drilled holes no less than 4" in depth. Mechanically laminated decking shall be attached to each support with (2) face nails using the minimum nail sizes as follows: 16d nails for 2" nominal decking 20d nails for 3" nominal decking 30d nails for 4" nominal decking 50d nails for 5" nominal decking. Mechanically laminated decking courses shall be attached to each other with toe nails spaced no more than 30" when supports are no more than 4'-0" O.C. and no more than 18" when supports are greater than 4'-0" O.C. Toe nails shall alternate between top and bottom edges and shall be staggered 1/3 the nail spacing in adjacent courses. Toe nails shall be installed within 12" maximum each side of end joints. Minimum toe nail sizes are as follows: 6d nails for 2" nominal decking 8d nails for 3" nominal decking 16d nails for 4" nominal decking 16d nails for 5" nominal decking. DEFERRED SUBMITTALS: Portions of the structure have elements of proprietary design and fabrication, which shall be submitted by the supplier for approval after award of conract. These items shall conform to the load, capacity, size, geometry, connection, and support criteria noted on the structural drawings. Drawings and calculations shall be prepared under hte control and supervision of a Colorado Registered Engineer. Final submittals shall be sealed and signed. Furnish deferred submittals for: precast concrete. Submittals will be reviewed by the Structural Engineer of Record for compliance with the specified design requirements, stamped as "Reviewed...", and forwarded to the Building Department for its approval. Final issue of Building Permit may, at approval authority's option, be contingent on its approval of the deferred submittal documents. Deferred submittal items shall not be installed until their design and submittal documents have been approved by the Building Department. PRECAST/PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE: The precast manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI) Plant Certification Program. Manufacturer shall be certified at the time of bidding for all product groups and categories to be supplied. Precast concrete members shall be designed and calculations stamped by a registered engineer in the state of Colorado, employed by the precast supplier to satisfy the requirements shown on the drawings as a Deferred Submittal Item. Members shall be designed to support the full dead loads and the superimposed design loads noted above or on the drawing. Live load reductions may be taken where permitted by code. Members shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5,000 psi. Topping may be considered as a composite element to resist live loads. Shop drawings shall indicate all dimensions and all elements, including flexure and shear reinforcing, corbels, bearing plates and other embedded items. Erection drawings shall indicate all connecting elements and field welding. Calculations for all precast members shall accompany the shop drawings. Connections which are exposed to soils or weathering shall be protected from corrosion by a field-applied coating approved by the Architect. ABBREVIATIONS: B/??? BOTTOM OF ELEMENT C.F.M.F. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CLR. CLEAR COL. COLUMN DEFL. DEFLECTION FTG. FOOTING G.B. GRADE BEAM H.A.S. HEADED ANCHOR STUDS (E) EXISTING ELEMENT E.O.D. EDGE OF ROOF DECK E.O.S. EDGE OF SLAB LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL MAX. MAXIMUM MIN. MINIMUM O.H. OPPOSITE HAND O.H. OVERHANG (C&C LOAD TABLE) SIM. SIMILAR STL. STEEL T/??? TOP OF ELEMENT T&B TOP AND BOTTOM TYP. TYPICAL W.T.S. WELDED THREADED STUDS MAM 03.29.17 LSD 2074 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 MAM BRL 19 Old Town Square, Ste. 238 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 568-3355 GENERAL NOTES S0.1 W/ STEEL WEDGE MIN. 2 PER BRACKET, TYP. WATER RESIST. GYP. BD. OR CER. TILE WHERE OCCURS 1-1/4" DIA. GRAB BAR CLR. 1 1/2" MIN. EMBEDMENT 1 3/4" DOOR ROOM SIGNAGE AND/OR INTERN. SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY 5' - 0" 4" RESTROOM MEN WOMEN A B C NOTES: 1. SIGN COLOR & CONTRAST SHALL BE DISTINCTLY DIFFERENT FROM DOOR. 2. SIGNS SHALL COMPLY WITH ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS IN THE LATEST EDITION OF ANSI A117.1. UNISEX 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 1/2" 1/2" FLUSH VALVE WHERE 0CCURS 36" GRAB BAR TOILET PAPER 42" GRAB BAR 2' - 0" 1' - 0" 2' - 9" 1' - 6" 18" GRAB BAR 3' - 3" 3' - 3" 1' - 6" 1' - 6" MAX. 4' - 0" MIN. 4' - 8" MIN. CL FLOOR CLEARANCE GRAB BAR ABOVE 1' - 3" MIN. CLEARANCE FROM FORWARD APPROACH OTHER APPLIANCES 3' - 6" MIN CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH (TYP) 2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL SUPPORT - PRIMED & PAINTED 2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL FRAME - PRIMED & PAINTED 11 GA. SHEET STEEL @ DOOR (2) SPRING HINGES @ EA. DOOR ATTACH TO DOOR W/ TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS WELD TO FRAME (3 HINGES PER DOOR) WELD 2x2x0.125 STEEL ANGLES @ 2 PLACES EA. PARTITION - ANCHOR TO CMU/CONCRETE 1" 1" 1/4" 3/8" BAR STOCK PULL 1" BENT FLAT BAR WELD TO SUPPORT FOR LATCH STUD WELDED TO SUPPORT FOR LATCH PIVOT 1" W FLAT BAR LATCH W/ WELDED STUD FOR HANDLE 1" x2"Wx55" L FLAT BAR DOOR STOP CONT. WELD GRIND SMOOTH PROVIDE ADEQUATE CLEARANCE FOR DOOR SWING 2" 6" 2" NOTE: ENTIRE PARTITION AND HARDWARE TO BE PAINTED WELD 2x2x0.125 STEEL ANGLES @ 2 PLACES EA. PARTITION - ANCHOR TO CMU / CONCRETE MASONRY EXP. ANCHORS W/ TAMPER- PROOF HEADS 2x2x0.125 TUBE STEEL - PAINT CONT. WELD, GRIND SMOOTH 11 GA. SHEET STEEL - PAINT (4) EXPANSION ANCHORS W/ TAMPER-PROOF HEADS 4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT. WELD TO TUBE SEC. - PRIMED AND PAINTED 2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE - PRIMED AND PAINTED 4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT. WELD TO TUBE SEC. - PRIMED AND PAINTED (3"x4" STEEL PLATE @ WALL CONDITION) 2x2x0.125 STEEL TUBE - PRIMED AND PAINTED (4) EXP. ANCHORS W/ TAMPER-PROOF HEADS 4"x4" STEEL PLATE, CONT. WELD TO TUBE SEC. - PRIMED AND PAINTED H.M. FRAME - GROUT SOLID. PAINT 2x2 T.S. DOOR FRAME AT EXTERIOR CAULK EACH SIDE INTERIOR EXTERIOR H.M. DOOR AT INTERIOR 6 3/4" PLAN CLEAR FLOOR SPACE TOP OF RIM FLUSH VALVE ELEVATION 1' - 5" MAX. 3' - 8" MAX. 4' - 0" 2' - 6" alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SCHEDULES, DETAILS, AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A9.1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NUMBER NAME FLOOR WALL FINISH CEILING BASE FINISH NORTH N. FINISH EAST E. FINISH SOUTH S. FINISH WEST W. FINISH FINISH COMMENTS 1 MEN CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONC/EPOXY PAINT 2 MECH CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONC/EPOXY PAINT 3 WOMEN CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONCRETE EPOXY PAINT CONC/EPOXY PAINT 4 PUMPROOM CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE SEAL CONCRETE SEAL CONC/EPOXY PAINT DOOR SCHEDULE MARK FROM ROOM TO ROOM WIDTH HEIGHT THK TYPE HDWR GROUP FIRE RATING COMMENTS 01 MEN EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" A A ELECTRO-MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN 02 MECH EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" D B 03 WOMEN EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" A A ELECTRO-MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN 04A PUMPROOM EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" C C 04B PUMPROOM EXTERIOR 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" B C SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" Door Types A9.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 MEN'S RESTROOM A9.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 WOMEN'S RESTROOM A9.1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 DRINKING FOUNTAIN DETAIL A9.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 4 GRAB BAR @ CMU WALL A9.1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 DOOR SIGN MOUNTING DETAIL A9.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 RESTROOM DOOR SIGNAGE A9.1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 9 ACCESSIBLE TOILET A9.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 7 TLT PARTITION DTL @ HINGE A9.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 8 TLT PARTITION DTL @ LATCH A9.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 10 TLT PARTITION DTL @ WALL A9.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 11 TLT PARTITION DTL SUPPORT A9.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 12 DOOR HEAD AT PUMPHOUSE A9.1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 13 ACCESSIBLE URINAL WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE OVER 10" STRUCTURAL SLAB, WRAP UP FACE OF CURB 10" TALL CONCRETE CURB ALONG NATURAL AREA WELL ONE LAYER OF EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER 1/2" COVER BOARD. WATER STOP GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER WALL AND CURB WHERE EXPOSED SELF-ADHERING CONCRETE FINISH OVER METAL LATH, COLOR TO MATCH OTHER LOCATIONS OF EXPOSED CONCRETE 1/2" COVER BOARD WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE STEEL GRATE, PAINT. 3x3x1/4" STEEL ANGLE ALL AROUND TERMINATION BAR 8" REINFORCING PER STRUCTURAL 2' - 0" 8" 1' - 9 1/4" EXTENSION TUBE AS REQUIRED ROOF SYSTEM ROOF SEALANT COVERBOARD OVER RIGID INSULATION DIFFUSER SEAL DIFFUSER FLASHING DOME SKYLIGHT SECURITY BAR 1/2" STEEL PLATE WELDED TO EMBED PLATE IN CONCRETE CURB. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL. TYPICAL GUARDRAIL PICKET: 2"x2" TUBE STEEL POST FULLY WELDED TO BASE PLATE AND WELD TO BE GROUND SMOOTH. PAINT FINISH. 3' - 6 33/128" 2" WELD STEEL CAP TO TOP OF ALL GUARDRAIL POSTS, WELD TO BE CONTINUOUS AND GROUND SMOOTH. 10" CONCRETE STRUCTURAL SLAB 10" x 8" CONCRETE CURB 4" CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE 5" RIGID INSULATION WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE - WRAP UP CURB INTO TERMINATION BAR CHAMFER EDGE OF CONCRETE SLAB CHAMFER EDGES OF CONCRETE CURB 3 1/2" 3/4" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" DEEP x 3 1/2" WIDE REVEAL IN CONCRETE 2x2x1/8 TUBE STEEL, FINISH WITH PAINT. REFERENCE ELEVATIONS FOR HEIGHTS 1/2" DIAMETER STEEL 'STUD' WELDED TO BACK SIDE OF TUBE STEEL AT 12" O.C. PRE-DRILL CONCRETE FOR STEEL AND EPOXY. 1' - 2" 1' - 2" 4" CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB 5" OF RIGID INSULATION TOTALING TO R-25 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE OVER 10" STRUCTURAL SLAB ONE LAYER OF EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER 1/2" COVER BOARD WATER STOP GALVANIZED METAL LATH OVER WALL AND CURB WHERE EXPOSED SELF-ADHERING CONCRETE FINISH OVER METAL LATH, COLOR TO MATCH OTHER LOCATIONS OF EXPOSED CONCRETE 1/2" LAYER OF COVER BOARD REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR GRADE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, OVERLAP WITH ROOF MEMBRANE LED LIGHT FIXTURE RE: ELEC ROCK MULCH, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS RIGID INSULATION CONDUIT ADAPTER CONDUIT (PER MANF. CABLE WILL EXIT LUMINAIRE BODY 90° TO LEFT OF TARGET DIRECTION) SECTION alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 DETAILS A7.1 A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 1 DETAIL - CONCRETE WALL VENEER A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 2 DETAIL - DOOR HEAD AND SILL A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 3 DETAIL - ROOF AT LOUVER A7.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 DETAIL - TUBULAR SKYLIGHT A7.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 DETAIL - GUARDRAIL SECTION A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 6 SHELTER COLUMN DETAIL A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 7 DETAIL - ROOF AT GRADE A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 8 DETAIL - RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE EW4 F1 LOUVER TO DISCHARGE INTO NATURAL AREA WELL. REFERENCE MECHANICAL FOR LOUVER SIZE. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE RIGID INSULATION COMPACTED BACKFILL A7.1 3 MOP AND BROOM HOLDER MECH 2 ROCK MULCH, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 5" OF RIGID INSULATION TOTALING TO R-25 ONE LAYER OF WATERPROOFING OVER 10" STRUCTURAL SLAB CONCRETE CURB EXTENDS WIDTH OF AREA WELL ONE LAYER OF EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER 1/2" COVERBOARD WATERPROOFING WATER STOP CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOUNDATION AND FOOTING, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL REINFORCING PER STRUCTURAL 6" CONCRETE WALLS TO POURED AFTER STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, DOWEL AND EPOXY INTO WALL / SLAB AS REQUIRED. 7' - 4" 4' - 0" STEEL GRATE, PAINT. 4" BED OF WASHED GRAVEL 4" DIAMETER PERFORATED PIPE WITH FABRIC SET IN BED OF WASHED GRAVEL. DAYLIGHT THROUGH BOULDER WALL 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - CAULK, TYP. 3x3x1/4" STEEL ANGLE ALL AROUND 8" 01 - GROUND LEVEL 100' - 0" 2" x 2" STEEL POST GUARDRAIL (3" x 3" STEEL POSTS EVERY 4'-0"). FINISH WITH PAINT. R1.1 EW5 F1 10"x8" CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE CURB 4' - 4" 4x8x16 CMU BLOCK 2" AIR GAP 2" RIGID INSULATION REFERENCE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR HEIGHTS TYPICAL AT OVERHANG 6' - 0" A7.1 5 12" CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE WALL 2" RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOUNDATION AND FOOTING, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT - CAULK, TYP. REFERENCE LANDSCAPE PLANS FOR EXTENTS OF ROCK MULCH R1.2 WATER STOP REINFORCING PER STRUCTURAL alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 WALL SECTIONS A6.1 SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. A6.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 Restroom Wall Section 1 A6.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 Restroom Wall Section 3 GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. A6.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 Restroom Wall Section 2 A6.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 Restroom Wall Section 4 DISCHARGE LOUVER INTO AREA WELL. REFERENCE MECHANICAL FOR LOUVER SIZE AREA WELL 8' - 0" R1.2 4" DIAMETER PERFORATED PIPE WITH FABRIC SOCK SET IN BED OF WASHED GRAVEL. DAYLIGHT THROUGH BOULDER WALL EW9 SHELTER LEVEL 105' - 0" SA SB SC 5 A5.1 9' - 0" 13' - 0 1/2" 9' - 0" 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 3 3/16" / 12" 3 3/16" / 12" R4 R2 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE TUBE STEEL STRUCTURE, PAINT 7' - 0" 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT AND SEALANT, ALL SIDES 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT AND SEALANT, ALL SIDES SHELTER LEVEL 105' - 0" S1 S2 S3 4 A5.1 1 3/4" / 12" R2 R4 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE, REFERENCE LANDSCAPE 14' - 0" 14' - 0" TUBE STEEL STRUCTURE, PAINT 11' - 1" 16' - 1" A2.1 5 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT AND SEALANT, ALL SIDES 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT AND SEALANT, ALL SIDES 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 02 - ROOF LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 108' - 0" 7 A5.1 R3 EW6 F1 PRECAST CONCRETE CONNECTIONS BY PRECASTER - CONNECTION SHALL BE 2-PIECE IN ORDER TO FACILITATE FUTURE ROOF REMOVAL 2'-0"X2'-0" METAL LOUVER WITH DAMPER - PAINT IRRIGATION PUMP ON SKID RE: IRRIGATION 5'-0" I.D. PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PIERS RE:STRUCTURAL 10"x10" METAL LOUVER WITH DAMPER AND EXHAUST FAN - PAINT 6' - 8" 1' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 6 A5.1 PRECAST CONCRETE CONNECTIONS BY PRECASTER - CONNECTION SHALL BE 2-PIECE IN ORDER TO FACILITATE FUTURE ROOF REMOVAL IRRIGATION PUMP ON SKID RE: IRRIGATION 5'-0" I.D. PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PIERS RE:STRUCTURAL R3 EW6 F1 alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.1 SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Restroom Building Section 1 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Restroom Building Section 2 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Restroom Building Section 3 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Shelter Section 1 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Shelter Section 2 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 Pumphouse Section 1 A5.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 Pumphouse Section 2 H.M. DOOR AND FRAME WITH EXPANDED METAL SCREEN DOOR - PAINT 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 02 - ROOF LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 108' - 0" R3 EW6 10"X10" METAL LOUVER WITH DAMPER AND EXHAUST FAN - PAINT 6' - 8" 8" SQUARE BLOCKOUT. VERIFY LOCATION WITH IRRIGATION. 01- GROUND LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 98' - 0" 02 - ROOF LEVEL PUMPHOUSE 108' - 0" R3 EW6 alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 SHELTER AND PUMPHOUSE ELEVATIONS A4.2 A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Shelter - East Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Shelter - South Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Shelter - North Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Shelter - West Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Pumphouse Side Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 Pumphouse - FRONT ELEVATION A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 Pumphouse - Side Elevation A4.2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 Pumphouse - Rear Elevation SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. 3 1/2" x 3/4" COMPOSITE WOOD PLANKS INSTALLED IN VERTICAL ORIENTATION. SPACE PLANKS 1 1/2" APART. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ROOF SLAB SEE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS FOR GRADE ELEVATIONS 1 A7.1 CONTRACTOR TO MOCK-UP A TYPICAL PANEL SHOWING TUBE STEEL, REVEAL, AND AT LEAST 4 COMPOSITE PLANKS. MOCKUP DOES NOT HAVE TO BE THE FULL HEIGHT OF PANEL. 1" 1 1/2" CURB 10" SLAB 10" 3' - 6" 2" 3" 3" 3" 2"x2" STEEL POST, TYPICAL. 3"x3" STEEL POST AT THE END OF EVERY SEGMENT SLAB AND CURB SLOPES ACCORDING TO ELEVATIONS GIVEN IN PLAN STEEL BASE PLATE BOLTED TO CURB ALL POSTS TO BE CONTINUOUSLY WELDED TO BASE PLATE AND GROUND SMOOTH 5 A7.1 WELD STEEL CAP TO TOP OF ALL GUARDRAIL POSTS, WELD TO BE CONTINUOUS AND GROUND SMOOTH. POSTS TO HAVE PAINT FINISH. COLOR TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 RESTROOM ELEVATIONS A4.1 A4.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 EAST ELEVATION A4.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 NORTH ELEVATION A4.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 SOUTH ELEVATION A4.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 WEST ELEVATION SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. A4.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 TYPICAL CONCRETE PANEL VENEER A4.1 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 TYPICAL GUARDRAIL ELEVATION 170.00° 177.00° LIGHT FIXTURES, REFERENCE ELECTRICAL FOR TYPE. 6' - 0" 6' - 8" 6' - 8" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 2' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 4' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 178.50° 178.50° 1 A4.2 A4.2 A4.2 4 2 S1 S2 S3 SB SC SA A4.2 3 4 A5.1 5 A5.1 TUBE STEEL BEAM, TYP. PAINT. PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA TUBE STEEL BEAM, TYP. PAINT. 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 3' - 0" R2 A7.1 6 A7.1 6 A7.1 6 A7.1 6 HSS10X6X5/16 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 HSS6X6X1/4 alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A3.1 SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" RESTROOM REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" SHELTER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 11' - 5" 11' - 3" 11' - 11 1/4" 11' - 11 1/4" 11' - 11 1/4" 1/4" / 12" 3/8" / 12" 10' - 2" NOTE: ALL SPOT DIMENSIONS IN THIS DRAWING ARE TO THE TOP OF THE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLAB 4 A7.1 R1.2 EW7 EW7 EW7 3" VENT PIPE DISCHARGES AT TOP OF WALL. REFERENCE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. R5 R5 11' - 8 3/4" 11' - 6 1/2" 11' - 4 1/2" 11' - 2 1/2" 11' - 0 1/2" 10' - 10 1/2" 10' - 8 1/2" 10' - 6 1/2" 10' - 4 1/2" 10' - 2 1/2" 10' - 0 1/2" 9' - 10 1/2" 9' - 9 1/2" 11' - 7 1/2" 11' - 8 1/2" 11' - 9 1/2" 11' - 6 1/2" 11' - 4 1/2" 14' - 4" 18' - 0" 18' - 6" RECESSED LIGHT, REFERENCE ELECTRICAL 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 6" 14' - 4" 6' - 4" 19' - 4" 10' - 1" 9' - 11" 9' - 9" 9' - 8" 1/2" / 12" EW9 1/2" / 12" 1/2" / 12" A4.2 5 A4.2 6 7 A4.2 A4.2 8 6 A5.1 7 A5.1 R3 LINE OF WALL BELOW 1/4" / 12" CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE COLUMN 2"x2" TUBE STEEL COLUMNS CENTERED IN REVEAL, PAINT. STEEL BEARING PLATE, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL TUBE STEEL BEAM, PAINT. NOMINAL 3x6 TONGUE AND GROOVE ROOF DECKING - STAIN. PREFINISHED METAL STANDING SEAMED ROOF TUBE STEEL SUBFASCIA, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA, COLOR TO MATCH ROOF PRESSURE TREATED 2x SILL PLATE 9" 4 3/4" 1' - 4" ICE AND WATER SHIELD OVER ENTIRE ROOF DECK CAP TUBE STEEL BEAM PER STRUCTURAL PREFINISHED METAL STANDING SEAMED ROOF TONGUE AND GROOVE ROOF DECKING 2x6 SILL PLATE, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL 1x PRESSURE TREATED WOOD TRIM TUBE STEEL BEAM, REFERENCE STRUCTURAL alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 ROOF PLANS A2.1 SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" SHELTER - ROOF PLAN SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" RESTROOM - ROOF PLAN SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" PUMPHOUSE - ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. A2.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 DETAIL - SHELTER BEAM / COLUMN A2.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 DETAIL - SHELTER BEAM TRIM STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS - PAINT, TYPICAL STAINLESS STEEL TOILET, TYPICAL A9.1 2 HAND DRYER, REFERENCE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SURFACE MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL BABY CHANGING STATION,TYP. A9.1 1 STAINLESS STEEL GRAB BARS, TYPICAL MOP AND BROOM HOLDER MOP BASIN SURFACE MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER A7.1 1 A4.1 5 A9.1 7 A9.1 10 A9.1 8 A9.1 7 A9.1 8 A9.1 10 EW2 SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS 90.00° 77.00° 90.00° 1' - 6" 6' - 0" EW8 3' - 4" 3' - 4" 1' - 4" 4' - 0" EW4 EW4 1 A4.2 A4.2 A4.2 4 2 14" SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMNS WITH 3 1/2" x 3/4" VERTICAL REVEALS ON ALL SIDES. TYPICAL AT SHELTER. S1 S2 S3 14' - 0" 14' - 0" SB SC SA 14' - 0" 14' - 0" A4.2 3 4 A5.1 5 A5.1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PLAZA REFERENCE LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 45.00° APPROXIMATE OUTLINE OF ROOF ABOVE CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE FOUNDATION BELOW. REFERENCE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 1' - 2 1/2" 3' - 2 1/2" 1' - 2 1/2" 3' - 2 1/2" 3' - 2 1/2" 3' - 2 1/2" 1' - 2 1/2" 1' - 2 1/2" 12' - 4" 12' - 4" TYP. 1' - 0" 13' - 8" 13' - 8" A4.2 5 A4.2 6 7 A4.2 A4.2 8 6 A5.1 7 A5.1 PUMPROOM 4 04A 2' - 0" 1' - 0" EW6 NOTE: PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS, WET WELL, CONNECTIONS AND ROOF TO BE DESIGNED BY THE PRECAST CONCRETE MANUFACTURER CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY FINAL SKID REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL OF PRECAST BUILDING. 2'-0"X2'-0" METAL WALL LOUVER W/ DAMPER - PAINT. REFERENCE IRRIGATION H. M. DOOR AND EXPANDED METAL SCREEN DOOR - PAINT IRRIGATION PUMP ON SKID RE:IRRIGATION PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL LINE OF PRECAST ROOF ABOVE ELECTRICAL PANEL METAL LOUVER WITH DAMPER AND EXHAUST FAN - PAINT. REFERENCE IRRIGATION 04B VERIFY ORIENTATION OF PUMPHOUSE WITH SITE PLAN 8" SQUARE BLOCKOUT. REFERENCE IRRIGATION (2) 4" DIAMETER CONDUITS. REFERENCE IRRIGATION 1' - 6" 3' - 4" alm2s 03.29.17 1619.01 215 NORTH MASON STREET FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Fort Collins, Colorado MAPLE HILL PARK Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions: 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Graphic Design Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: BID SET - 03.29.17 FLOOR PLANS A1.1 SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" RESTROOM - FLOOR PLAN SYSTEM NOTES C1 Open to concrete structure above, paint. EW1 12" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. See elevations for extent of composite board veneer. EW2 12" cast in place concrete wall. EW3 8" cast in place concrete with 2" rigid insulation, 2" air gap, and 4" CMU block - paint. EW4 2" rigid insulation over 12" cast in place concrete. EW5 24" cast in place concrete. EW6 8" precast concrete wall. EW7 8" cast in place concrete wall. EW8 18" cast in place concrete wall. EW9 6" cast in place concrete wall. Walls to be poured after structural concrete. Dowel and epoxy into wall / slab as required. F1 6" concrete slab on grade. P1 8" CMU block - paint. All CMU block walls to have bullnosed corners at end-wall conditions. R1.1 4" topping slab over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard on R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R1.2 4" of grass or crusher fines (see Landscape drawings) over EPDM roofing membrane on 1/2" coverboard over R-25 rigid insulation (R-5 per inch) over liquid applied waterproofing on 10" cast in place concrete slab. R2 Prefinished standing-seam metal roof over 3"x6" nominal tongue and groove douglas fir boards on tube steel framing. Tongue and groove boards to be oriented in a staggered pattern. Tongue and groove boards to be stained to match composite boards on restroom building. R3 8" precast concrete roof. R4 Prefinished metal fascia to match roof. R5 21" diameter tubular daylighting device with diffuser. SCALE: NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" SHELTER - FLOOR PLAN A1.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 PUMPHOUSE - FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES G1 Dimensions are measured from outside face to outside face. G2 All construction shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the International Building Code, Mechanical Code, and National Electrical Code, all current editions. G3 Contractor shall review the drawings, field verify existing conditions, and verify all aspects of this project prior to beginning construction and notify architect and owner representative of any discrepancies. G4 Clean entire area affected by construction G5 The existing conditions depicted on these drawings are based on the best available information and shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. G6 See structural drawings for additional information. SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK YS DA SB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 10 SCALE IN FEET 0 20 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-1.0-ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN.DWG 29 March 2017 3:38:47 PM SCALE IN FEET 0 40 80 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN ES1.0 BRONZE POLE 120/277 ARCHITECTURAL AREA LIGHTING # UCM-STR-TX-32LED-3K-450-DBZ-FLD-120-277/MOD POLE: RNTS-4R-7-14-9BC-343-S1-BZ ARM: VA106-S-S1-4-BZ POLE OR ARM TO INCLUDE 7 PIN ANSI C136.41 COMPLIANT PHOTOCELL RECEPTACLE BB 23W LED 3000K / 3000 LUMENS N/A 1 4 48" LED STRIP LIGHT, 3000 LUMENS WITH WET LOCATION FITTING ON BOTH ENDS AND 30K COLOR TEMPERATURE. WHITE SURFACE MVOLT LITHONIA# FEM-L48-3000LM-1MAFL-WD-MVOLT-30K-80CRI-WL FEND2 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-0.3-LIGHTING SCHEDULES & CUT SHEETS.DWG 29 March 2017 3:37:19 PM LIGHTING SCHEDULES & CUT SHEETS ES0.3 C 1 4 2 CU XHHW-2 50 0.78% 1 4 CU XHHW-2 2 PVC UNDERGROUND GRC ABOVE 40 - D 1 2 8 CU XHHW-2 900 1.17% 1 8 CU XHHW-2 1 PVC UNDERGROUND GRC ABOVE 890 4 NOTES: 1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE APPROXIMATE, CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM LENGTHS IN FIELD 2. CONDUCTOR SIZED ASSUMING SINGLE LOAD PER CONDUIT AND WITH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 75 DEGREES F. 3. # RUNS SIGNIFIES THE NUMBER OF PARALLEL RUNS OF CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS PER SECTION 4. CONTRACTOR TO INCLUDE UNSWITCHED CONDUCTOR FOR EGRESS LIGHTING CIRCUIT AT RESTROOM VOLTAGE DROP BRANCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION PROJECT MAPLE HILLS PANEL: L1 BRANCH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE DROP 208Y/120 VOLT BUS: 225A CU 3 PHASE 4 W MAIN: 200A MCB LOCATION: EQUIPMENT RACK FAULT CURRENT RATING: 22 kAIC VOLTAGE DROP TO PANEL 0.00% FED FROM: UTILITY TRANSFORMER MOUNTING: SURFACE ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID SEE FEEDER SCHEDULE B 125/3 IRRIGATION PAD 12009 1 A 2 1920 GFCI 20 G 1 RUN (2-8, 8 GND, CU) 2.76% B | 12009 3 B 4 105 SITE LITES 20 L SEE FEEDER SCH B | 12009 5 C 6 180 TIMECLOCK CIRCUIT 20 G 1 RUN (2-12, 12 GND, CU) 1.15% SEE FEEDER SCHEDULE G 60/3 PANEL L2 5764 7 A 8 0 SURGE PROTECTIVE 30/3 G 1 RUN (3-10, 10 GND, CU) 1.10% G | RESTROOM LIGHTING 5764 9 B 10 0 DEVICE | G G | AND POWER PANEL 5764 11 C 12 0 | G 2.08% 1 RUN (2-12, 12 GND, CU) D 20 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER 600 13 A 14 92 PUMPHOUSE LIGHTS 20 + 1 RUN (2-10, 10 GND, CU) 1.22% 2.08% 1 RUN (2-12, 12 GND, CU) D 20 METER AMPLIFIER 600 15 B 16 72 VENTILATION FAN 20 + 1 RUN (2-12, 12 GND, CU) 1.29% + ---- 0 17 C 18 0 ---- + CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY Phase A 20385 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS Phase B 18550 LIGHTING 105 125% 131 0.4 NOTES Phase C 17953 GENERAL RECEPTACLE 10000 100% 10,000 27.8 * = GFCI PROTECTED BREAKER REQUIRED REMAINING GENERAL REC. 9392 50% 4,696 13.0 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 1200 100% 1,200 3.3 MOTOR 0 100% 0 0.0 B - LARGEST MOTOR 36027 125% 45,034 125.0 + MISCELLANEOUS 164 100% 164 0.5 KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0 ELECTRIC HEAT 0 125% 0 0.0 Total Demand: 61,225 170 P:\200'S\216\419-BHA DESIGN, INC.-MAPLE HILLS NEIGH PARK\ESC DRAWINGS\ES-0.2-ELECTRICAL ONE LINE.DWG 29 March 2017 3:36:31 PM ELECTRICAL ONE LINE ES0.2 WIRE THRUST BLOCK UNDISTURBED SOIL THRUST BLOCK SURFACE AREA (SF) AGAINST UNDISTURBED SOIL (X x Y)=(SF) FITTING SIZE 11.25° BEND (SF) 22.5° BEND (SF) 45° BEND (SF) 90° BEND (SF) TEE OR DEAD END (SF) NOTES: 1. INSTALL AND TEST MAINLINE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS. 2. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL TRENCH DEPTHS AND WIDTHS. 3. USE NO. 4 REBAR WITH MASTIC COATING WHERE PIPE MUST BE ANCHORED TO THRUST BLOCK. 4. INSTALL THRUST BLOCK SO THE HORIZONTAL (X) AND VERTICAL (Y) DIMENSIONS OF THE THRUST BLOCK ARE APPROXIMATELY EQUAL. 5. INSTALL THRUST BLOCK WITH A MINIMUM THICKNESS FROM THE PIPE TO THE UNDISTURBED SOIL OF TWO TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE PIPE. 6. THRUST BLOCK SIZING ASSUMES A MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE OF 100 PSI, A MAXIMUM VELOCITY OF 5 FEET PER SECOND, AND A SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1000 LBS/FT². 7 TRACING WIRE DETAIL NOTES: 1. NOMINAL SIZE OF BALL VALVE TO MATCH NOMINAL LATERAL SIZE. 2. USE FOR FLUSHING AND WINTERIZATION OF DRIP LATERAL. 3. INSTALL FILTER FABRIC AROUND EXTERIOR OF VALVE BOX. USE DUCT TAPE TO SECURE FABRIC TO PIPE AND VALVE BOX. A B C D E F G H J I A. PVC PIPE B. 12" STANDARD VALVE BOX WITH COVER C. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH D. FLEXIBLE VINYL IRRIGATION HOSE: AQUARIUS BRANDS 5/8" FLEX VINYL IRRIGATION HOSE E. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL F. FILTER FABRIC G. BRICK (1 OF 4) H. SCH 40 PVC HOSE FITTING: MIPT X HOSE FITTING I. SCH 40 PVC REDUCER BUSHING FITTING (SPIG X FIPT) J. TRUE UNION PVC BALL VALVE FINISHED GRADE ELEVATION VIEW PLAN VIEW NOTES: 1. COPPER TRACING WIRE WILL START AT THE DOGLEG CONNECTION NEAR PUMP STATION AND WILL BE ROUTED WITH ALL MAINLINE PIPE. 2. SPLICE TRACING WIRE IN IRRIGATION MAINLINE COMPONENT VALVE BOXES WHEN POSSIBLE, OTHERWISE, PLACE SPLICE IN SEPARATE VALVE BOX. A B C D F E G H A. 10" ROUND VALVE BOX B. INSTALL TRACING WIRE TO THE TOP OF VALVE BOX C. WATER PROOF CONNECTION (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) D. PIPE SLEEVE SEE VALVE DETAIL E. TAPE COPPER WIRE TO TOP OF PIPE EVERY 10 FT. F. CONTINUOUS LOOP COPPER TRACING WIRE (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) G. PVC PIPE H. TYP. VALVE F A B C E D A. IRRIGATION CONTROLLER INDOOR WALL MOUNT B. 2" PVC SCH 40 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS C. JUNCTION BOX D. WIRES TO REMOTE CONTROL VALVES E. 1" PVC SCH 40 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS TO POWER SUPPLY WALL FLOW NOTE: 1. NOMINAL SIZE OF CHECK VALVE TO MATCH NOMINAL SIZE OF LATERAL PIPE. A B C D E F H G A. FINISH GRADE B. PVC SWING CHECK VALVE C. 12" STANDARD VALVE BOX WITH COVER D. PVC LATERAL PIPE E. BRICK (1 OF 4) F. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL G. PVC SCH 80 CLOSE NIPPLE (1 OF 2) H. PVC SCH 40 UNION (1 OF 2) 3 SWING CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY S A IR-4 IRRIGATION DETAILS F. COMPRESSIONxFEMALE HOSE SWIVEL ADAPTER G. DRIP LATERAL PIPING H. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL I. BRICK (1 OF 2) J. PVC SCH 80 NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED, 1 OF 2) K. PVC SCH 40 EL L. PVC SCH 40 STREET EL (1 OF 2) M. PVC DRIP MANIFOLD PIPE N. PVC SCH 40 TEE OR EL O. PVC SCH 80 NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X NOTES: 1. EMITTERS SHALL BE LOCATED IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO PERENNIALS AND AT THE OUTSIDE PERIMETER OF THE PLANTING PIT OF ALL SHRUBS AND TREES. 2. INSTALL FOUR 1 GPH EMITTERS PER DECIDUOUS TREE. 3. INSTALL THREE 1 GPH EMITTER PER CONIFEROUS TREE. 4. INSTALL TWO 1 GPH EMITTER PER SHRUB. 5. INSTALL ONE 1 GPH EMITTER PER PERENNIAL. A B C D E F A. DRIP LATERAL PIPE B. CONIFEROUS TREE C. DECIDUOUS TREE D. EMITTER E. SHRUB F. PERENNIAL NOTE: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL DRIP TUBING IN TURF AND NATIVE AREAS 2-3" BELOW GRADE. 2. DIAMETER OF DRIPLINE RINGS ARE DEPENDANT ON TREE CANOPY SIZE. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT DRIP TUBING AT POINT "X" AND INSTALL FLUSH CAP AS TRUNK DIAMETER INCREASES. A B C D E F A. PVC PIPE B. 3/4" POLYETHYLENE TUBING: RAIN BIRD XBS BLACK STRIPE PIPE C. EASY FIT COMPRESSION TEE: RAIN BIRD MDCFTEE (QTY AS REQUIRED) D. EASY FIT REMOVABLE FLUSH CAP: RAIN BIRD MDCFCAP (QTY AS REQUIRED) E. LANDSCAPE DRIPLINE TUBING: RAIN BIRD DRIPLINE MODEL XFCV-06-12 F. TIE DOWN STAKE: RAIN BIRD TDS-050 W/BEND (QTY AS REQUIRED) G. TREE ROOTBALL H. EASY FIT COMPRESSION ELBOW RAIN BIRD MDCFEL (QTY AS REQUIRED) G H X X .2 + - WR2 WIRELESS SENSOR NOTES: 1. MOUNT RAIN/FREEZE SENSOR IN SUITABLE LOCATION ON BUILDING EAVE OR WALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 2. CONNECT INTERFACE TO CONTROLLER PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. 3. CONFIRMATION NOTE: ENSURE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OPERATE BETWEEN SENSOR AND INTERFACE UNIT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. IF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT SUBSTITUTE WIRELESS SENSOR FOR A WIRED SENSOR (HUNTER MINI-CLIK). INCLUDE HUNTER STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE SG-MC AND NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR WIRED SENSOR. INSTALL 1-INCH CONDUIT IF WIRED SENSOR IS REQUIRED. A B C D E A. EAVE OR WALL B. MOUNTING BRACKET C. RAIN/FREEZE SENSOR INTERFACE D. RAIN/FREEZE SENSOR E. IRRIGATION CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 6 RAIN SENSOR ASSEMBLY R 7 DECODER GROUNDING SCHEMATIC SEE NOTE #1 NOTE: 1. INSTALL SWING JOINT LAY ARM BETWEEN 30° AND 45° OF LATERAL PIPE TO ABSORB DOWNWARD IMPACT. A B C D E A. FINISH GRADE B. POP-UP ROTOR SPRINKLER C. RAIN BIRD PRE-FABRICATED SWING JOINT MIPT INLET x MIPT OUTLET D. PVC LATERAL PIPE E. PVC SCH 40 TEE OR EL IR-3 IRRIGATION DETAILS 5/8" X 8' U.L. LISTED LINE SURGE PROTECTOR GROUND ROD CLAMP TWO-WIRE PATH 500 FT. MAX. BETWEEN GROUND POINTS 25 FT. OR LONGER "DEAD ENDS" 10-INCH ROUND VALVE BOX W/ COVER IRRIGATION CONTROLLER (CONCEPTUAL) COPPER GROUND ROD DECODER TO VALVE WIRE CONNECTORS: PER SPECS NOTES: 1. ALL WIRE CONNECTION SHALL BE MADE WITH APPROVED CONNECTORS. 2. MAKE ALL WIRE SPLICES IN VALVE BOXES. 3. LEAVE A MINIMUM OF 36" EXTRA WIRE AT ALL SPLICE POINTS. 4. TEST EARTH TO GROUND RESISTANCE AT ALL GROUND POINTS. 5. EARTH TO GROUND RESISTANCE MUST MEET OR EXCEED MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 6. INSTALL ALL GROUND ASSEMBLIES IN VALVE BOXES. 7. INSTALL GROUNDING EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED ON THE IRRIGATION DOCUMENTS AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. GROUND TWO WIRE CABLE NEAR CONTROLLER PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES TWO-WIRE TO GROUND ROD CONNECTORS: PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES TWO-WIRE TO DECODER CONNECTORS: PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES OR EVERY 5 DECODERS, WHICHEVER IS FIRST NOTES: 1. NOMINAL SIZE OF GATE VALVE TO MATCH NOMINAL MAINLINE SIZE. 2. INSTALL A 4" THICK CONCRETE PAD BELOW VALVE WITH NO. 4 REBAR WHEN USING PUSH ON TYPE VALVES. 3. RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE MAY HAVE EITHER MECHANICAL JOINT OR PUSH-ON GASKETED ENDS. THE OPERATOR IS A 2" SQUARE-WRENCH NUT. 4. ANCHOR ISOLATION VALVE TO CONCRETE BY BENDING REBAR OVER EACH END OF VALVE AND EXTENDING A MINIMUM OF 6" INTO CONCRETE SUPPORT BLOCK. 5. WRAP VALVE ENDS AND BODY IN 3 MIL. PLASTIC PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE. 6. CONCRETE SUPPORT BLOCK IS TO BE POURED UNDER ISOLATION GATE VALVE. THE ISOLATION GATE VALVE IS NOT TO BE SET IN THE CONCRETE. A B C D E F G H I J K A. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH B. 10" VALVE BOX WITH COVER C. 6" PVC CL 200 PIPE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) D. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL E. BRICK (1 OF 2) F. RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE W/ 2" SQUARE OPERATING NUT, CONFORMING TO AWWA C-515 G. 3 MIL. PLASTIC WRAP WITH TAPED ENDS H. #4 REBAR, TWO BARS WRAPPED OVER VALVE AND SECURED BY CONCRETE BLOCK I. PVC MAINLINE J. CONCRETE SUPPORT BLOCK USE A MINIMUM OF 3 CUBIC FEET OF CONCRETE K. TRACING WIRE A B C D E F G H I A. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH B. QUICK-COUPLING VALVE C. 10" ROUND VALVE BOX WITH COVER D. HARCO QUICK COUPLER ANCHOR E. PVC SCH 80 TOE NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) F. BRICK (1 OF 2) G. PRE-FABRICATED UNITIZED SWING JOINT 1" MIPT INLET X SOC OUTLET H. TEE OR EL: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS I. PVC MAINLINE PIPE J. TRACING WIRE NOTES: 1. FURNISH FITTINGS AND PIPING NOMINALLY SIZED IDENTICAL TO NOMINAL QUICK COUPLING VALVE INLET SIZE. 2. INSTALLATION HEIGHT OF QUICK COUPLER VALVE IN VALVE BOX MUST ASSURE PROPER OPERATION OF QUICK COUPLER KEY. 3. INSTALL SWING JOINT LAY ARM BETWEEN 30° AND 45° OF LATERAL PIPE IN ORDER TO ABSORB DOWNWARD IMPACT. J Q IR-2 IRRIGATION DETAILS NOTES: 1. USE VALVE BOX EXTENSION AS NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS ABOVE ASSEMBLY. 2. NOMINAL SIZE OF ALL COMPONENTS ARE TO BE THE SAME NOMINAL SIZE AS THE SOLENOID VALVE (SIZED AS SHOWN). 3. INSTALL FILTER FABRIC AROUND EXTERIOR OF VALVE BOX. USE DUCT TAPE TO SECURE FABRIC TO PIPE AND VALVE BOX. 4. TRANSITION TO PROPER LATERAL PIPE BURIAL DEPTH USING 45° ELBOW FITTINGS DOWNSTREAM OF REMOTE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY. 5. DO NOT CUT OUT ENDS OF VALVE BOX UNNECESSARILY. 6. POSITION VALVE BOX OVER VALVE TO ALLOW ACCESS TO SOLENOID AND PROPER OPERATION OF BALL VALVE. 7. INSTALL SO THAT NO GRAVEL IS IN CONTACT WITH VALVE ASSEMBLY. 8. COIL 3-FEET OF WIRE FOR EACH DECODER FOR SERVICE PURPOSES. 9. SEE DECODER GROUNDING SCHEMATIC FOR ADDITIONAL DECODER GROUNDING INFORMATION. A B C E D G H I L M N O J K F P A. CHRISTY ID TAG B. WIRE FROM DECODER TO VALVE SEE SPECIFICATIONS C. DECODER D. JUMBO VALVE BOX WITH LID E. FINISH GRADE F. DUCTILE IRON GASKETED LATERAL SWIVEL TEE WITH 2-INCH OUTLET: LEEMCO LT SERIES G. REMOTE CONTROL VALVE H. LEEMCO LMNP SERIES ADAPTER. OUTLET SIZE TO MATCH REMOTE CONTROL VALVE SIZE. I. SCH. 40 PVC MALE ADAPTER J. PVC MAINLINE PIPE K. 3-INCH DEPTH OF 3/4-INCH WASHED GRAVEL L. PVC LATERAL PIPE M. WIRE CONNECTOR FROM DECODER GROUND WIRE TO BARE COPPER GROUNDING WIRE N. FILTER FABRIC O. 2-INCH DUCTILE IRON ANGLE VALVE: LEEMCO LV-200. SECURE ANGLE VALVE POSITION WITH LEEMCO LV CLIPS PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. P. JOINT RESTRAINT (1 OF 2) Q. WIRE CONNECTOR FROM TWO-WIRE CABLE TO DECODER (1 OF 2) R. WIRE CONNECTOR FROM DECODER TO SOLENOID VALVE (1 OF 2) S. GROUNDING PLATE/ROD (SEE DECODER GROUNDING SCHEMATIC) T. TWO-WIRE CABLE Q R T S NOTES: 1. USE VALVE BOX EXTENSION AS NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS ABOVE ASSEMBLY. 2. NOMINAL SIZE OF ALL COMPONENTS ARE TO BE THE SAME NOMINAL SIZE AS THE SOLENOID VALVE (SIZED AS SHOWN). 3. INSTALL FILTER FABRIC AROUND EXTERIOR OF VALVE BOX. USE DUCT TAPE TO SECURE FABRIC TO PIPE AND VALVE BOX. 4. TRANSITION TO PROPER LATERAL PIPE BURIAL DEPTH USING 45° ELBOW FITTINGS DOWNSTREAM OF REMOTE CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY. 5. DO NOT CUT OUT ENDS OF VALVE BOX UNNECESSARILY. 6. POSITION VALVE BOX OVER VALVE TO ALLOW ACCESS TO SOLENOID AND PROPER OPERATION OF BALL VALVE. 7. INSTALL SO THAT NO GRAVEL IS IN CONTACT WITH VALVE ASSEMBLY. 8. COIL 3-FEET OF WIRE FOR EACH DECODER FOR SERVICE PURPOSES. 9. SEE DECODER GROUNDING SCHEMATIC FOR ADDITIONAL DECODER GROUNDING INFORMATION. A B C E D G H J K L M N O I Q F P A. CHRISTY ID TAG B. WIRE FROM DECODER TO VALVE SEE SPECIFICATIONS C. DECODER D. JUMBO VALVE BOX WITH LID E. FINISH GRADE F. DUCTILE IRON GASKETED LATERAL SWIVEL TEE WITH 2-INCH OUTLET: LEEMCO LT SERIES G. REMOTE CONTROL VALVE H. LEEMCO LMNP SERIES ADAPTER. OUTLET SIZE TO MATCH REMOTE CONTROL VALVE SIZE. I. PVC MAINLINE PIPE J. FILTER/PRESSURE REGULATION DEVICE K. SCH. 40 PVC FEMALE ADAPTER L. PVC LATERAL PIPE M. WIRE CONNECTOR FROM DECODER GROUND WIRE TO BARE COPPER GROUNDING WIRE N. FILTER FABRIC O. 2-INCH DUCTILE IRON ANGLE VALVE: LEEMCO LV-200. SECURE ANGLE VALVE POSITION WITH LEEMCO LV CLIPS PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. P. JOINT RESTRAINT (1 OF 2) Q. 3-INCH DEPTH OF 3/4-INCH WASHED GRAVEL R. WIRE CONNECTOR FROM TWO-WIRE CABLE TO DECODER (1 OF 2) S. GROUNDING PLATE/ROD (SEE DECODER GROUNDING SCHEMATIC) T. TWO-WIRE CABLE S R T 7 WIRESPLICE DETAIL 1. 2. 3. 4. 1/2" 5. NOTE: 1. VISUALLY CHECK THAT CONNECTOR IS BELOW LOCKING "FINGERS". 1. STRIP ENDS OF WIRE 2. SECURE WIRES INTO WIRE NUT 3. INSERT WIRE NUT INTO GEL-FILLED TUBE 4. POSITION WIRES INTO CHANNELS 5. CLOSE SPLICE KIT FOR SECURED SEAL A1 A5 NOTES: 1. ALLOW 10 PIPE DIAMETERS UPSTREAM AND 5 PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM OF STRAIGHT RUN OF PIPE TO ACHIEVE PROPER FLOW REGIME. 2. INSTALL FILTER FABRIC AROUND EXTERIOR OF VALVE BOX. USE DUCT TAPE TO SECURE FABRIC TO PIPE AND VALVE BOX. 3. DO NOT CUT OUT ENDS OF VALVE BOX UNNECESSARILY. 4. INSTALL SO THAT GRAVEL IS ONLY IN CONTACT WITH BOTTOM OF SENSOR ASSEMBLY. A B C D E F G H A. 12" VALVE BOX WITH COVER B. FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH C. FLOW SENSOR D. SENSOR CABLE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS E. FILTER FABRIC F. PVC PIPE G. BRICK (1 OF 4) H. 3" MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4" WASHED GRAVEL 6 FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY F 4 TYP 4 TYP 4 TYP 4 TYP 4 TYP 6 3" 3" 2.5" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 2" 2" 2" 1.5" 1.5" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 2.5" 2.5" 2.5" 2" 2" 1.25" 3" 1.25" 2.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 2.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 2.5" 1.25" 2" 2" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2.5" 2" 2" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 3" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 2" 2" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 2" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 7 TYP 7 TYP 7 TYP 7 TYP 7 TYP 1.25" 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 4" 2" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 3 3 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 1.5" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.5" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 1.25" 2" 2" 1.25" 2" 2.5" 1.25" 2" 12 12 6 35H 35H 30H 35H 12 6 4 12 12 12 12 10 12 10 35H 35H 30H 30H 30H 35H 35H 35H 10 6 12 12 35H 35Q 30H 30H 35Q 35H 25H 25H 25F 35H 30H 35H 35Q 35Q 30H 35H 25F 25F 35Q 35H 35H 25H 25H 35Q 35H 35H 35H 35F 35F 35F 30F 35Q 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35Q 35H 35H 35H 35F 35F 35F 35F 35F 35F 25F 25Q 25H 25H 25H 25H 25F 8 8 6 25H 25Q 25Q 25H 35H 35Q 35Q 35H 35H 35H 25F 25F 25H 35Q 35H 35Q 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35Q 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35H 35F 30F 30F 30F 30F 30F 30F 30F 30F 35F 30F A60 A60 2" 78 SD A2 A1 A2 2" 56 SD A1 2" 78 SD A49 A50 A50 2" 63 T A49 1" 25 T 12 10 35Q 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 35Q 35H 35H 6 6 30H 25F A17 A18 A19 A22 A22 1.5" 34 SD A19 1.5" 49 SD A18 2" 60 SD A17 2" 60 SD A20 A20 2" 71 SD A10 A10 1.5" 53 SD Q Q Q Q Q Q Q .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 S .2 S S A A23 A23 1.5" 32 SD A48 A48 1" 24 T .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A32 .2 .2 S .2 A32 1" 3 TR .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 Q A51 A51 1" 23 T 10 F F F F F R F F F A21 A11 A11 1.5" 36 SD A21 1.5" 36 SD 30Q 30Q 25H 25H 25H 35Q 35Q 25H 25H 25F .2 .2 .2 A31 A31 1.5" 29 SD A59 A59 1.5" 26 SD 35H 35Q 35Q 25F 25F 35H 35Q 35Q 10 12 12 10 12 10 12 12 12 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 A62 1" 4 TR 25H 25H 25H 25H 30H 25H 25Q 25Q 30H 25H 25H 25H 25H 25Q 25Q 30Q 25Q 25Q 25H 25H 25H 25H 30H 30H 25F 25F 25F A5 A14 A43 A9 A8 A7 A7 2" 70 SD A47 A46 A47 1.5" 39 T A46 1.5" 39 T .2 .2 .2 A5 1" 23 SD .2 .2 .2 A43 1.5" 37 SD .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A44 2" 68 T .2 .2 .2 A14 2" 68 SD A3 F A3 1.5" 42 T A40 F A40 1.5" 46 T A41 A41 1" 24 T A45 .2 A45 1" 3 TR A16 A15 A16 2" 68 SD A15 1" 18 SD .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A13 1" 3 TR .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A62 F F F A44 A12 A12 2" 72 SD A9 2" 70 SD A8 2" 70 SD .2 F A13 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8 8 4 8 4 6 6 6 4 6 25H 25Q 25Q 25H 25H 25Q 25H 25Q 25H 25H 25F 25F 25H 25H 30H 35H 35H 35Q 35H 25H 25H 25H 25H 25Q 25Q 30H 30F 30F 25F A33 A33 1.5" 31 SD A28 A28 1" 18 SD A29 A29 1" 6 SD A26 A27 A26 1.5" 46 SD A27 1" 21 SD A30 A30 1.5" 26 SD .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A34 A24 A24 1.5" 54 SD A34 1" 4 TR A36 A36 1" 6 T 10 12 12 12 10 4 10 10 10 25H 25Q 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 4 12 12 4 12 4 4 A38 A52 A56 A53 A54 A54 1.5" 46 T A55 A55 1.5" 46 T A52 1" 22 T A53 1.5" 41 T A38 1" 11 T A56 1.5" 34 T .2 A39 .2 .2 .2 A39 1" 1 TR .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 A37 .2 A37 1.5" 44 T A57 A25 1.5" 32 SD A57 1" 2 TR A58 A25 A58 1" 3 TR A35 1" 3 D Q Q A61 1" 1 D A6 A6 1" 6 TR A61 F F F F F F S F F F 10 10 10 10 6 A4 A4 1.5" 48 SD A35 S S 35Q 35H 25H 25Q A42 A42 1.5" 32 T .2 .2 .2 9 9 9 9 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1" = 30' 0' 15' 30' 60' 30' IR-1 IRRIGATION PLAN 6 7 8 9 GENERAL DESCRIPTION IR-0 IRRIGATION NOTES AND LEGEND TYPE A BOULDER FILTER FLUSH PIPE CROSS SECTION WS-7 WATER SOURCE DETAILS 4 PIPE PENETRATION DETAIL N.T.S. PIPE BOOT SECURED WITH STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP PIPE GEOTEXTILE LINER 8'-0" SLOPE 3:1 Max. SLOPE 4:1 Max. SLOPE 0.5:1 TYPE A BOULDER - REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS ±2'-6" ±1'-6" TYPE M RIP RAP - REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS 3" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" 1'-0" PREPARED AND COMPACTED SUBGRADE FINISH GRADE FILL VOID WITH SMALLER RIP RAP AS NECESSARY ±12" FILL VOID BEHIND BOULDERS WITH GRAVEL - REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS TRANSITION #1 TRANSITION #3 TRANSITION #4 Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 POND EXCAVATION CROSS SECTION N.T.S. WS-6 WATER SOURCE DETAILS 2 POND LINER CROSS SECTION DETAIL N.T.S. 10 11 12 MH WS-5 WATER SOURCE DETAILS 2 WATER DELIVERY PIPE PENETRATION AND ARMOR DETAIL N.T.S. PIPE BOOT FOR LINER PENETRATION (SEE SPECIFICATIONS) STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP TO SECURE PIPE BOOT WATER LEVEL DELIVERY PIPE INV ELEV = 5003.0' 4" THICK CONCRETE PAD. SEE WATER SOURCE PLAN FOR LOCATION AND SIZE CONCRETE RAISED EDGE AT END OF EROSION PROTECTION 95% STANDARD PROCTOR DENSITY OR UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE GEOTEXTILE FABRIC POND LINER POND BOTTOM 15" CAP END OF PIPE WITH SOLVENT WELD SCH. 40 PVC PLUG. ENSURE PLUG EXTENDS 2-FEET BEYOND CLAMP AND BOOT. NOTE: WHEN FILLING POND EASE WATER DELIVERY TO POND USING THE GATE VALVE LOCATED NEAR THE CONNECTION TO BAKER LATERAL PIPE (IE. OPEN GATE VALVE (IE. 1/8-1/4 OPEN). DO NOT OPEN GATE VALVE FULL OPEN OR ELSE EXCESSIVE WATER FLOW COULD CAUSE EROSION TO SOIL COVER IN POND. GATE VALVE CAN BE OPENED FULL WHEN WATER LEVEL SUBMERGES THE WATER DELIVERY PIPE. 6' 8 9 10 12 13 14 14 15 15 24" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 30° 36" BASED ON AS-BUILTS. FIELD VERIFY 3 AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY N.T.S. 2 ISOLATION GATE VALVE ASSEMBLY N.T.S. W WS-4 WATER SOURCE DETAILS AD H F 42" MIN. NEC CLEARANCE AE AF 1, 8" CONDUIT FOR FUTURE AERATION TUBING RE: ARCHITECTURAL 4, 2" CONDUITS IRRIGATION WIRING AND AMPLIFIER, RE: ARCHITECTURAL AG AH SEAL PENETRATION WITH LINK SEAL, TYP 76" 78" AI TOP OF WET WELL EL. 5012.03' A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AI 1 PUMP STATION DETAIL 3/8"=1' Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 WS-3 WATER SOURCE DETAILS A A. STEEL DISCHARGE PIPE B. 1-INCH THREAD-O-LET DOWNSTREAM OF FILTER C. 1-INCH DIELECTRIC NIPPLE D. 1-INCH BRASS BALL VALVE E. 1-INCH BRASS NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) F. 1-INCH PRESSURE REGULATOR, BRASS G. 1-INCH WYE STRAINER, BRASS. INCLUDE BRASS UNIONS ON EACH SIDE OF STRAINER FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES. 30 MESH STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN. H. 1-INCH BRASS TEE WITH 1/4-INCH FPT OUTLET I. PRESSURE GAUGE, 1 4" MPT, GLYCERIN FILLED, 0-100 PSI RANGE J. 1-INCH SOLENOID VALVE - RAIN BIRD PESB. WIRE TO PUMP CONTROL PANEL. K. 1-INCH CAST IRON OR STEEL COUPLING L. 1-INCH SCH. 40 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS M. 1-INCH CAST IRON OR STEEL ELBOW N. WALL O. FINISH GRADE P. 1-INCH SCH. 40 PVC MPT X BARB FITTING. SECURE POLYETHYLENE PIPE TO BARB WITH STAINLESS STEEL PINCH CLAMPS. Q. 1-INCH POLYETHYLENE INTAKE STRUCTURE FLUSH PIPE R. PIPE SUPPORT STAND B C D E F E G E H I E J C K M L L N M P Q R R O ±24" 2 INTAKE STRUCTURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT DETAIL NTS C P Q Q Q R W MH I Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 MATCHLINE SEE SHEET WS-1 1" = 30' 0' 15' 30' 60' 30' WS-2 WATER SOURCE PLAN RAW WATER POINT-OF-CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (REFER TO DETAIL) WATER DELIVERY PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) *TYPE: HDPE DR11 WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE (EBV) ASSEMBLY *MAKE/MODEL (METER): BADGER METER INC, MAGETOFLOW MAG METER, 4-INCH FLANGED ENDS, REMOTE MOUNT PRIMO AMPLIFIER (INSTALLED WITHIN PUMP BUILDING), NEMA 6A SUBMERSIBLE OPTION INCLUDED WITH METER *MAKE/MODEL (EBV): 4-INCH, WAFER STYLE, ON/OFF, 120 VAC ACTUATOR, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, FAIL CLOSE, MANUAL OVERRIDE, INTERNAL HEATER/THERMOSTAT, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, 2 AUXILIARY LIMIT SWITCHES. MODEL: S&K AUTOMATION MEN501S013-4EXT1-SK *ALL PLACED WITHIN CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS CONDUITS FOR WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE WIRING (REFER TO PLAN) SETTLING STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY *CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS IRRIGATION PUMP STATION INTAKE PIPE *CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC, SIZE: 8-INCH INTAKE SCREEN *MAKE/MODEL: LAKOS PC915, 30 MESH, RATED FOR 250 GPM (10 GPM BACKWASH FLOW) IRRIGATION PUMP STATION *REFER TO DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FILTER FLUSH PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC ISOLATION GATE VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: CLOW *SIZE TO MATCH PIPE SIZE AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: WATERMAN AV150 *SIZE: 1-1/2-INCH SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC AERATION SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC *SIZE: 8-INCH VALVE BOXES: RAIN BIRD VB SERIES WITH GREEN LIDS IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE LEGEND C I W C MH C C D D D EXISTING HOMES EXISTING HOMES EXISTING HOMES 18" C900 PVC (BAKER LATERAL) 18" C900 PVC (BAKER LATERAL) NOTE: REFER TO UTILITY PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL PIPE AND SLEEVING INFORMATION, TYPICAL C Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions Checked by: Project Number: Project: Client: CBK JHK/EGK RWB/CBK CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 MATCHLINE SEE SHEET WS-2 1" = 30' 0' 15' 30' 60' 30' WS-1 WATER SOURCE PLAN RAW WATER POINT-OF-CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (REFER TO DETAIL) WATER DELIVERY PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) *TYPE: HDPE DR11 WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE (EBV) ASSEMBLY *MAKE/MODEL (METER): BADGER METER INC, MAGETOFLOW MAG METER, 4-INCH FLANGED ENDS, REMOTE MOUNT PRIMO AMPLIFIER (INSTALLED WITHIN PUMP BUILDING), NEMA 6A SUBMERSIBLE OPTION INCLUDED WITH METER *MAKE/MODEL (EBV): 4-INCH, WAFER STYLE, ON/OFF, 120 VAC ACTUATOR, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, FAIL CLOSE, MANUAL OVERRIDE, INTERNAL HEATER/THERMOSTAT, 1-FOOT EXTENSION, 2 AUXILIARY LIMIT SWITCHES. MODEL: S&K AUTOMATION MEN501S013-4EXT1-SK *ALL PLACED WITHIN CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS CONDUITS FOR WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE WIRING (REFER TO PLAN) SETTLING STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY *CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS IRRIGATION PUMP STATION INTAKE PIPE *CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC, SIZE: 8-INCH INTAKE SCREEN *MAKE/MODEL: LAKOS PC915, 30 MESH, RATED FOR 250 GPM (10 GPM BACKWASH FLOW) IRRIGATION PUMP STATION *REFER TO DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FILTER FLUSH PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC ISOLATION GATE VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: CLOW *SIZE TO MATCH PIPE SIZE AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: WATERMAN AV150 *SIZE: 1-1/2-INCH SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC AERATION SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC *SIZE: 8-INCH VALVE BOXES: RAIN BIRD VB SERIES WITH GREEN LIDS IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE LEGEND C I W C MH LIMIT SWITCHES. MODEL: S&K AUTOMATION MEN501S013-4EXT1-SK *ALL PLACED WITHIN CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS CONDUITS FOR WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE WIRING (REFER TO PLAN) SETTLING STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY *CONCRETE MANHOLE - REFER TO DETAILS IRRIGATION PUMP STATION INTAKE PIPE *CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC, SIZE: 8-INCH INTAKE SCREEN *MAKE/MODEL: LAKOS PC915, 30 MESH, RATED FOR 250 GPM (10 GPM BACKWASH FLOW) IRRIGATION PUMP STATION *REFER TO DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FILTER FLUSH PIPE (SIZE PER PLAN) CLASS 200 SDR 21 PVC ISOLATION GATE VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: CLOW *SIZE TO MATCH PIPE SIZE AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY *MODEL: WATERMAN AV150 *SIZE: 1-1/2-INCH SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC AERATION SLEEVE *CLASS 200 PVC *SIZE: 8-INCH VALVE BOXES: RAIN BIRD VB SERIES WITH GREEN LIDS IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE LEGEND C I W C MH EXCAVATE AND EXPOSE EXISTING PVC BAKER LATERAL PIPE IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION. INSTALL FORD STAINLESS STEEL TAPPING SLEEVE WITH 4-INCH FLANGED OUTLET PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES - REFER TO DETAIL. CONNECT HDPE DELIVERY PIPE TO FLANGED CONNECTION USING HDPE FLANGE ADAPTER FITTING WITH DUCTILE IRON BACKUP RING. INSTALL GATE VALVE AND AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE APPROXIMATELY 5-FEET FROM CONNECTION LOCATION. COORDINATE CONNECTION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL HDPE DELIVERY PIPE FROM CONNECTION, TO THE ISOLATION GATE VALVE AND AIR VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY, AND TO THE PARK. NOTE THERE ARE NUMEROUS UTILITIES THE DELIVERY PIPE MUST CROSS. REFER TO CIVIL PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE PIPE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. PROPOSED BORE PIT LOCATION. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO MOVE BORE PIT LOCATION AS NEEDED FOR DELIVERY PIPE INSTALLATION. REPAIR DAMAGES TO EXISTING LANDSCAPE AND HARDSCAPE TO MEET OR EXCEED PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS. DOCUMENT PRE AND POST INSTALLATION CONDITIONS VIA PHOTOGRAPHS IN PRESENCE OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. BORE DELIVERY PIPE UNDER OUTER EDGE TO MIDDLE OF EXISTING SIDEWALK DUE TO LIMITED SPACE FOR INSTALLING THE DELIVERY PIPE. INSTALL WATER METER AND ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE ASSEMBLY IN THE APPROXIMATE LOCATION. REFER TO DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL SETTLING STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY IN THE APPROXIMATE LOCATION. REFER TO DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL THE FOLLOWING FOR THE ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE AND METER WIRING. EACH ITEM IS SEPARATE AND THUS EACH ARE INSTALLED WITHIN SEPARATE CONDUITS. PLACE TRACEABLE WARNING TAPE 8-INCHES BELOW GRADE WHEN NOT INSTALLED ADJACENT TO DELIVERY PIPE. MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH OF THE CONDUITS IS 24-INCHES. CONDUITS TO SHARE SAME TRENCH AS WATER DELIVERY PIPE. 1. INSTALL 12/10/12-10 TRAY CABLE WITHIN 1-1/2-INCH CONDUIT FROM PUMP STATION CONTROL PANEL TO THE ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE. PROVIDE AN ELECTRICAL PULL BOX EVERY 100-FEET TO EASE INSTALLATION OF WIRING. MAKE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS AND CONDUCT ALL WORK PER NEC AND LOCAL CODES. INTENT OF THIS WIRING IS TO POWER (OPEN AND CLOSE) THE 120 VAC ELECTRONIC BUTTERFLY VALVE. THE VALVE OPENS WHEN INSUFFICIENT WATER IS AVAILABLE IN THE POND AND CLOSES WHEN THE POND IS NEAR FULL. ALL CONTROL LOGIC TO UTILIZE FLOAT LOCATED IN WET WELL AND PUMP CONTROL PANEL PLC. COORDINATE WIRING INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 2. INSTALL 18 AWG METERING CABLE PER BADGER METER INC. WITHIN 1-1/2-INCH CONDUIT. PROVIDE A ELECTRICAL PULL BOX EVERY 100-FEET TO EASE CABLE INSTALLATION. MAKE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTIONS TO METER AND AMPLIFIER PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. AMPLIFIER TO BE INSTALLED WITHIN PUMP BUILDING. INTENT OF METER IS TO SEND LOW VOLTAGE (24 VAC) SIGNAL TO AMPLIFIER FOR PROCESSING AND OBSERVING FLOW/VOLUME ON READ OUT. COORDINATE CABLE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. CONNECT WATER DELIVERY PIPE DOWNSTREAM OF GATE VALVE IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION. TRANSITION PIPE DOWNWARDS FROM MANHOLE USING 45-DEGREE DR11 HDPE FITTINGS. INSTALL HDPE WYE FITTING TO FACILITATE DRAINAGE. COORDINATE PIPE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL PUMP STATION WITHIN BUILDING OVER WET WELL IN THE APPROXIMATE LOCATION. INSTALLATION ITEMS INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: 1. INSTALL WET WELL AND SET PUMP STATION PRIOR TO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION - REFER TO DETAILS. 2. INSTALL CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT FROM DISCONNECT (REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLANS) TO PUMP CONTROL PANEL. NOTE: THE PUMP STATION IS A PRE-FABRICATED UNIT SO ALL POWER WIRING FROM THE PUMP CONTROL PANEL TO MOTORS, FLOATS, METER, ETC. IS COMPLETED BY THE PUMP MANUFACTURER. ALL THE CONTRACTOR NEEDS TO INSTALL REGARDING POWER IS THE POWER FROM THE DISCONNECT TO THE PUMP CONTROL PANEL. 3. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL WATER METER'S AMPLIFIER WITHIN THE PUMP BUILDING IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION. CONNECT 120 VAC POWER TO AMPLIFIER PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES, LOCAL CODE, AND NEC CODE. REFER TO FLAG NOTE G ABOVE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE AMPLIFIER INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL INTAKE STRUCTURE IN APPROXIMATE LOCATION ON A CONCRETE PAD - REFER TO DETAILS. CONNECT INTAKE BACKWASH PIPE FROM PUMP STATION TO THE CONNECTION ON THE INTAKE STRUCTURE PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. COORDINATE INTAKE STRUCTURE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL AERATION SLEEVE INTENDED FOR POTENTIAL FUTURE POND AERATION SYSTEM. THE SLEEVE IS INTENDED TO HOUSE THE FUTURE AERATION TUBES FROM AN AIR COMPRESSOR TO THE AERATION PODS. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION TO INSTALL HDPE DR11 PIPE IN LIEU OF PVC PIPE. COORDINATE AERATION TUBING SLEEVE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL 3-INCH SCH. 40 STEEL FLUSH PIPE FROM FILTER WHEN ABOVE GRADE (WITHIN THE PUMP BUILDING) THEN TRANSITION TO PVC WHEN BELOW GRADE. ROUTE FILTER FLUSH PIPE TO POND. REFER TO DETAIL. COORDINATE FILTER DISCHARGE PIPE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. SEAL ALL PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH POND LINER USING BOOTS AND CLAMPS PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. INDICATED GATE VALVE AND PIPING INTENDED TO DRAIN WATER (WINTERIZATION) UPSTREAM OF SETTLING STRUCTURE. MAINTENANCE STAFF MUST VACUUM AND CLEAN OUT SETTLING STRUCTURE PRIOR TO OPENING GATE VALVE SO SETTLED DEBRIS DOES NOT FLOW TO POND!!!!!! CONTRACTOR TO CONNECT PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF GATE VALVE TO THE DELIVERY PIPE THAT IS ROUTED TO THE POND. INSTALL 6-FOOT WIDE, 4-INCH THICK CONCRETE APRON FROM WATER DELIVERY PIPE PENETRATION INTO POND TO THE POND BOTTOM TO MINIMIZE EROSION TO THE POND FROM WATER DELIVERY. CENTER APRON UNDER WATER DELIVERY PIPE. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE PIPING INSTALLATION WITH IRRIGATION WORK WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR SINCE THERE ARE NUMEROUS PIPES IN SAME GENERAL AREA. GRADUALLY TRANSITION PIPE DEEPER TO MEET APPROXIMATE INVERT INDICATED ON DETAILS WITHIN POND. TRANSITION SHOULD NOT REQUIRE FITTINGS ON FLEXIBLE HDPE PIPING. A B C D E G H I J IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE FLAG NOTES F K L M N O P Q R 1. THE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP STATION FLOW AND PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS ARE INDICATED IN THE INSTALLATION DETAILS. 2. THE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP STATION SKID CONTAINS ONE MAIN PUMP AND A PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP. 3. VERIFY EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND BRING ANY CONCERNS TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 4. READ THOROUGHLY AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR THIS AND RELATED WORK PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 5. COORDINATE UTILITY LOCATES ("CALL BEFORE YOU DIG") OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 6. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM WHEN IT IS OBVIOUS IN THE FIELD THAT OBSTRUCTIONS OR GRADE DIFFERENCES EXIST THAT MIGHT NOT HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED IN THE ENGINEERING, OR IF DISCREPANCIES IN CONSTRUCTION DETAILS, LEGEND, NOTES, OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE DISCOVERED. BRING ALL SUCH OBSTRUCTIONS OR DISCREPANCIES TO THE ATTENTION OF THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 7. THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. SYSTEM COMPONENTS MAY BE SHOWN OUTSIDE PLANTING AREAS FOR GRAPHIC CLARITY. AVOID CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE SYSTEM, PLANTING MATERIALS, AND ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES. INSTALL SYSTEM COMPONENTS IN LANDSCAPED AREAS WHEREVER POSSIBLE. 8. INSTALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE PUMP SYSTEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC AND OTHER APPLICABLE LOCAL ELECTRIC UTILITY CODES. 9. WITH REGARD TO PIPE SIZING, THE FOLLOWING SHOULD BE NOTED: IF A SECTION OF UNSIZED PIPE IS LOCATED BETWEEN TWO IDENTICALLY SIZED SECTIONS, THE UNSIZED PIPE IS THE SAME NOMINAL SIZE AS THE TWO SIZED SECTIONS AND SHOULD NOT BE CONFUSED WITH THE DEFAULT PIPE SIZE NOTED IN THE LEGEND. IRRIGATION WATER SOURCE GENERAL NOTES SITE IMAGE - N.T.S. (IMAGE BY GOOGLE EARTH) MAPLE HILL PARK WATER SOURCE NOTES AND LEGEND PRESSURE SO THAT ROOT BALL DOES NOT SHIFT UNEXCAVATED OR COMPACTED MOUND UNDER THE ROOT BALL TO PREVENT SETTLING. 60° MAX. 45° MIN. GENERAL NOTES 1. OVER EXCAVATE PLANTING PIT TO 2 TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE ROOT BALL. 2. NYLON WEBBING SHALL NOT TOUCH OR RUB ADJACENT BRANCHES. 3. INSTALL 3 GUY WIRES PER TREE, SPACE EVENLY AROUND TREE. 4. REMOVE STAKING AT AFTER FIRST GROWING SEASON. PLANT TREE 2"-3" HIGHER THAN SURROUNDING SOIL AND TAPER MOUND BACK INTO EXISTING GRADE PLASTIC FLAGGING, OR OTHER VISUAL MARKER ON EACH WIRE NYLON WEBBING GUY WIRES. ATTACH MIN. OF 4' ABOVE FINISH GRADE TREES NOT WITHIN IRRIGATED TURF SHALL HAVE A SOIL SAUCER WITH TOP SOIL (6" MIN.) METAL DRIVE ANCHORS, INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS DIRECTIONS INSTALL 3' DIA. CEDAR WOOD MULCH RING AROUND BASE TO A DEPTH OF 4". INSTALL SPECIFIED BACKFILL REMOVE MIN. 2/3 OF WIRE BASKET. PILL BACK ALL BURLAP AND CUT ALL STRINGS. 1' 4" 8' ROOT BALL BACKFILL UNEXCAVATED OR COMPACTED SUBGRADE ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER; 4" DEEP AT TOP OF ROOTBALL BACKFILL MOUND; SURROUND ROOTBALL COMPLETELY DECIDUOUS TREE; SEE DETAIL EXTENTS OF FULL DEPTH SAFETY SERVICING Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK LANDSCAPE DETAILS ORNAMENTAL GRASS PLANTING 5 NTS DECIDUOUS SHRUB PLANTING 4 NTS EVERGREEN TREE PLANTING 2 NTS DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING 3 NTS MM DE RS COMMON NAME SCIENTIFIC NAME SEED/LB PERCENT SUB-PERCENT PLS OF SEEDS NUMBER/SF LBS/PLS/ACRE Beeplant Cloeme serrulata 113,000 40% 10% 3 1.0800 Hairy Goldenaster Heterotheca villosa 336,000 10% 3 0.3600 Purple Prairie Clover Dalea purpurea 300,000 10% 3 0.4100 Wallflower Erysimum aperum 1,085,504 10% 3 0.1100 Annual Sunflower Helianthus annus 59,000 10% 3 2.0700 Dotted Gayfeather Liatris punctata 168,000 10% 3 0.7300 Blue Flax Linum lewsii 295,000 10% 3 0.4100 Prairie Aster Machaeranthera tanacetifola 496,000 10% 3 0.2500 Mexican Hat Ratibida columnifera 1,200,000 10% 3 0.1000 American Vetch Vicia americana 20,000 10% 3 0.6100 Forb Total 28 11.6100 Sideoats Grama Bouteloua curtipendula 190,000 60% 10% 4 0.9600 Buffalograss Bouteloua dactyloides 56,000 10% 4 3.2700 Blue Grama Bouteloua gracilis 825,000 10% 4 0.2200 Prairie Sandreed Calamovilfa longifolia 273,000 10% 4 0.6700 Needle and Thread Hesperostipa comata 115,000 10% 4 1.5900 Prairie Junegrass Koeleria macrantha 2,300,000 10% 4 0.0800 Switchgrass Panicum virgatum 389,000 10% 4 0.4700 Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 110,000 10% 4 1.6600 Sand Dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus 5,200,000 10% 4 0.0400 Six Weeks Fescue Vulpia octoflora 965,000 10% 4 0.1900 Grasses Total 42 9.1500 Mix Total 100% 70 20.7600 NATIVE SEED MIX Deciduous Trees Symbol Botanical Name Common Name Size Root Quantity Percent CA SP Catalpa speciosa Catalpa 2" Cal. BB 9 6.6 CE OC Celtis occidentalis Common Hackberry 2" Cal. BB 7 5.1 GY DI Gymnocladus dioicus 'Espresso' Seedless Kentucky Coffeetree 2" Cal. BB 6 4.4 PO AC Populus x acuminata Lanceleaf Cottonwood 2" Cal. BB 3 2.2 QU BU Quercus buckleyi Texas Red Oak 2" Cal. BB 13 8.8 QU SH Quercus shummardi Shummard Oak 2" Cal. BB 3 2.2 QU MA Quercus macrocarpa Bur Oak 2" Cal. BB 6 2.2 TI AM Tilia americana 'Legend' Legend American Linden 2" Cal. BB 9 6.6 UL AC Ulmus 'Morton' Accolade Elm 2" Cal. BB 6 4.4 Ornamental Trees AC HW Acer tataricum 'Hot Wings' Hot Wings Maple 2" Cal. BB 3 5.1 AC GR Acer grandidentatum Bigtooth Maple 2" Cal. BB 6 1.4 CR AM Crataegus ambigua Russian Hawthorn 2" Cal. BB 7 FA SY Fagus sylvatica 'Tricolor' Tricolor Beech 2" Cal. BB 3 4.4 PR VI Prunus x virginana 'P002S' Sucker Punch Chokecherry 2" Cal. BB 3 7.4 SY PE Syringa pekinensis 'Morton' China Snow Peking Lilac 2" Cal. BB 6 6.2 QU GA Quercus gambelii Gambel Oak 6' Ht. BB 7 1.4 PLANT LIST Evergreen Trees JU MG Juniperus scopulorum 'Moonglow' Moonglow Juniper 6' Height BB 12 8.8 PI AR Pinus aristata Bristlecone Pine 6' Height BB 3 2.2 PI PU Picea pungens Colorado Blue Spruce 6' Height BB 4 6.6 PI ST Pinus strobiformis Southwestern White Pine 6' Height BB 3 6.6 PI NI Pinus nigra Austrian Pine 6' Height BB 10 3.7 PI PO Pinus ponderosa Ponderosa Pine 6' Ht. BB 10 3.7 L5.01 GENERAL LANDSCAPE NOTES: 1. PLANT QUALITY: ALL PLANT MATERIAL SHALL BE A-GRADE OR NO. 1 GRADE - FREE OF ANY DEFECTS, OF NORMAL HEALTH, HEIGHT, LEAF DENSITY AND SPREAD APPROPRIATE TO THE SPECIES AS DEFINED BY THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF NURSERYMEN (AAN) STANDARDS. ALL TREES SHALL BE BALL AND BURLAP OR EQUIVALENT. 2. TOPSOIL: TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT FEASIBLE, TOPSOIL THAT IS REMOVED DURING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY SHALL BE CONSERVED FOR LATER USE ON AREAS REQUIRING REVEGETATION AND LANDSCAPING. 3. SOIL AMENDMENTS: SOIL AMENDMENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND DOCUMENTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY CODE SECTION 12-132. THE SOIL IN ALL LANDSCAPE AREAS, INCLUDING PARKWAYS AND MEDIANS, SHALL BE THOUGHLY LOOSENED TO A DEPTH OF NOT LESS THAN EIGHT(8) INCHES AND SOIL AMENDMENT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY INCORPORATED INTO THE SOIL OF ALL LANDSCAPE AREAS TO A DEPTH OF AT LEAST SIX(6) INCHES BY TILLING, DISCING OR OTHER SUITABLE METHOD, AT A RATE OF AT LEAST THREE (3) CUBIC YARDS OF SOIL AMENDMENT PER ONE THOUSAND (1,000) SQUARE FEET OF LANDSCAPE AREA. PRIOR TO THE ISSUANCE OF ANY CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY, A WRITTEN CERTIFICATION MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE CITY THAT ALL PLANTED AREAS, OR AREAS TO BE PLANTED, HAVE BEEN THOROUGHLY LOOSENED AND THE SOIL AMENDED, CONSISTENT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN SECTION 12-132. 4. THE FOLLOWING SEPARATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED BETWEEN TREES/SHRUBS AND UTILITIES: 40 FEET BETWEEN CANOPY TREES AND STREET LIGHTS 15 FEET BETWEEN ORNAMENTAL TREES AND STREETLIGHTS 10 FEET BETWEEN TREES AND PUBLIC WATER, SANITARY AND STORM SEWER MAIN LINES 6 FEET BETWEEN TREES AND PUBLIC WATER, SANITARY AND STORM SEWER SERVICE LINES. 4 FEET BETWEEN SHRUBS AND PUBLIC WATER AND SANITARY AND STORM SEWER LINES 4 FEET BETWEEN TREES AND GAS LINES 5. PLACEMENT OF ALL LANDSCAPING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SIGHT DISTANCE CRITERIA AS SPECIFIED BY THE CITY OF FORT COLLINS. NO STRUCTURES OR LANDSCAPE ELEMENTS GREATER THAN 24" SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHIN THE SIGHT DISTANCE TRIANGLE OR EASEMENTS WITH THE EXCEPTION OF DECIDUOUS TREES PROVIDED THAT THE LOWEST BRANCH IS AT LEAST 6' FROM GRADE. ANY FENCES WITHIN THE SIGHT DISTANCE TRIANGLE OR EASEMENT MUST BE NOT MORE THAN 42" IN HEIGHT AND OF AN OPEN DESIGN. WARRANTEE AND INSPECTIONS 1. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL HOLD A PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING WITH THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND CITY OF FORT COLLINS FORESTRY AND PARKS DIVISION REPRESENTATIVES TO REVIEW PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. ADDITIONAL ONSITE INSPECTION MEETINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULED DURING THE INSTALLATION PHASE OF THE PROJECT TO INSPECT THE QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION METHODS. 2. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE AN INSPECTION OF THE COMPLETED LANDSCAPE WORK WITH THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARKS AND FORESTRY DIVISION REPRESENTATIVES WITHIN TWO WEEKS OF FINAL COMPLETION OF ALL LANDSCAPE WORK. PUNCH LIST ITEMS WILL BE IDENTIFIED. IDENTIFIED ITEMS SHALL BE CORRECTED WITHIN TWO WEEKS OF THIS MEETING. UPON CORRECTION OF ALL PUNCH LIST ITEMS THE TWO YEAR MAINTENANCE/WARRANTEE PERIOD SHALL BEGIN. 3. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A TWO YEAR WARRANTEE ON TREES (NOT TRANSPLANTED EXISTING TREES) AND OTHER LANDSCAPE PLANTS AND MATERIALS. DURING THE TWO YEAR WARRANTEE/MAINTENANCE PERIOD THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A MINIMUM OF TWO INSPECTIONS PER YEAR WITH THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARKS AND FORESTRY DIVISION REPRESENTATIVES. THE PURPOSE OF THESE MEETING IS TO EVALUATE GROWTH AND ESTABLISHMENT OF ALL TREES AND LANDSCAPE PLANTS AND THE QUALITY OF MAINTENANCE WORK. ONE INSPECTION SHALL OCCUR IN JUNE AND ONE IN SEPTEMBER EACH YEAR DURING THE WARRANTEE/MAINTENANCE PERIOD. 4. AFTER MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTEE HAVE BEEN PROVIDED FOR TWO YEARS THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A FINAL INSPECTION WITH THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND CITY OF FORT COLLINS FORESTRY AND PARKS DIVISION REPRESENTATIVES. LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY REPLACE TREES AND LANDSCAPE PLANTS FOUND TO HAVE DIED OR IN POOR CONDITION AND PROVIDE REPAIRS TO ANY LANDSCAPING AS IDENTIFIED AT ANY OF THE SITE INSPECTIONS AND AS DIRECTED BY THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER OR A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARKS OR FORESTRY DIVISIONS. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST OR IMPROVE MAINTENANCE PRACTICES AS DIRECTED AT ANY SITE MEETING. AT THE END OF TWO YEARS FROM THE FINAL INSTALLATION INSPECTION AND ONCE ALL PUNCH LIST ITEMS HAVE BEEN SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED, THE CITY PROJECT MANAGER WILL NOTIFY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR THAT THE MAINTENANCE/WARRANTEE PERIOD HAS BEEN COMPLETED. 5. REPLACED PLANT MATERIAL SHALL HAVE A WARRANTEE TO THE END OF THE TWO YEAR WARRANTEE PERIOD OR FOR ONE YEAR WHICHEVER PROVIDES FOR THE LONGEST PERIOD OF TIME AFTER PLANT REPLACEMENT. THIS MAY EXTEND WARRANTEE ON INDIVIDUAL REPLACED PLANTS PASSED THE TWO YEAR WARRANTEE PERIOD. DECIDUOUS SHRUBS AR FR Artemsia frigida Fringed Sage 1 Gal. Cont. 60 ER NA Ericameria nauseosa ssp. nauseosa var. glabrata Tall Green Rabbitbrush 1 Gal. Cont. 20 PR MA Prunus virginiana melanocarpa Native Chokecherrry 1 Gal. Cont. 5 RH TR Rhus trilobata 'Autumn Amber' Autumn Amber Threeleaf Sumac 1 Gal. Cont. 8 YU BA Yucca baccata Banana Yucca 1 Gal. Cont. 31 NATIVE SEED MIX NOTES 1. PREPARE SOIL AS NECESSARY FOR NATIVE SEED MIX SPECIES THROUGH AERATION AND ADDITION OF AMENDMENTS THEN SEED IN TWO DIRECTIONS TO DISTRIBUTE SEED EVENLY OVER ENTIRE AREA. 2. IF CHANGES ARE TO BE MADE TO SEED MIX BASED ON SITE CONDITIONS THEN APPROVAL MUST BE PROVIDED BY CITY ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNER. 3. APPROPRIATE NATIVE SEEDING EQUIPMENT WILL BE USED (STANDARD TURF SEEDING EQUIPMENT OR AGRICULTURE EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE USED). 4. DRILL SEED APPLICATION RECOMMENDED PER SPECIFIED APPLICATION RATE TO NO MORE THAN ½ INCH DEPTH. FOR BROADCAST SEEDING INSTEAD OF DRILL SEEDING METHOD-DOUBLE SPECIFIED APPLICATION RATE. REFER TO NATIVE SEED MIX TABLE FOR SPECIES, PERCENTAGES AND APPLICATION RATES. 5. TREAT NATIVE SEED MIX AREA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF SEED WITH APPROPRIATE HERBICIDE TO PROACTIVELY MITIGATE HERBACEOUS WEED SPECIES GROWTH DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD THEN AFTER APPROPRIATE TIME PERIOD APPLY NATIVE SEED AS CALLED FOR ON APPROVED PLANS. 6. AFTER SEEDING THE AREA SHALL BE COVERED WITH CRIMPED STRAW OR OTHER APPROPRIATE METHODS AND PROVIDED TEMPORARY IRRIGATION UNTIL SEED IS ESTABLISHED. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL MONITOR SEEDED AREA FOR PROPER IRRIGATION, EROSION CONTROL, GERMINATION AND RESEEDING AS NEEDED TO ESTABLISH COVER. 8. THE APPROVED SEED MIX AREA IS INTENDED TO BE MAINTAINED IN A NATURAL-LIKE LANDSCAPE AESTHETIC. IF AND WHEN MOWING OCCURS IN NATIVE GRASS SEED MIX AREAS DO NOT MOW LOWER THAN 6_8 INCHES IN HEIGHT TO AVOID INHIBITING NATIVE PLANT GROWTH. 9. NATIVE SEED AREA WILL BE CONSIDERED ESTABLISHED WHEN SEVENTY-PERCENT TOTAL COVER IS REACHED WITH NO LARGER THAN ONE FOOT SQUARE BARE SPOTS AND/OR UNTIL DEEMED ESTABLISHED BY CITY PLANNING SERVICES. DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING 1 NTS 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1 PI ST 3 QU GA 3 AC GR 3 TI AM 4 TI AM 3 GY DI 3 CR AM 1 CA SP 2 QU MA 1 PI NI 1 AC GR 2 QU GA 1 PI PO 1 AC GR 2 CR AM 1 PI NI 2 JU MG 2 PI PO 1 PI ST 1 AC GR 2 CR AM 1 CE OC 2 UL AC 2 UL AC 3 QU BU 1 CA SP 2 CE OC 1 PI PO 1 PI PU 1 PI PO 1 PI PU 2 CA SP 3 QU SH 3 QU MA 3 JU MG STOP SIGN SANITARY SEWER SEWER SERVICE ELCO WATER LINE POND OUTLET LINE RE: CIVIL IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR. WATER SOURCE LINE RE: IRR WATER SERVICE RE: CIVIL POND IRRIGATION PIPE 3 SY PE 2 PI PO 3 PR VI 3 QU BU 5 PR MA ENLARGEMENT, RE: THIS PAGE 28 AR FR 13 YU BA 6 AR FR 7 ER NA 4 RH TR 18 YU BA 4 RH TR 2 ER NA 25 AR FR 5 ER NA 6 AR FR STEEL EDGER SEEDED TURF SODDED TURF NATIVE SEED EVERGREEN TREE ORNAMENTAL TREE DECIDUOUS TREE LEGEND Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK LANDSCAPE PLAN 15' 30' 60' 1"=30' MM DE RS L5.00 ROCK MULCH DECIDUOUS SHRUB 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 ENLARGEMENT SCALE: 1"=20' TOP OF WALL, RE: GRADING PLAN BOULDERS- TYPE A STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WALL; RE: STRUCTURAL FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN AGGREGATE BACKFILL TOP OF WALL, RE: GRADING PLAN BOULDERS- TYPE A GEOTEXTILE FABRIC FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN AGGREGATE, MIN. 9" THICK TOP OF WALL, RE: GRADING PLAN BOULDERS- TYPE A AGGREGATE BACKFILL GEOTEXTILE FABRIC SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN 1 1 FINISH GRADE, RE: GRADING PLAN SECTION 4 RESTROOM RETAINING WALL SECTION NOTES: 1. PROVIDE MINIMUM 6" OVERLAP BETWEEN COURSES; PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BOULDERS WHEN WALL IS LESS THAN 1:1 SLOPE 2. FABRIC SHALL NOT SHOW BETWEEN BOULDERS 3. THERE SHALL BE NO GAPS BETWEEN BOULDERS MORE THAN 1" >1 1 COMPACTED SUBGRADE GEOTEXTILE FABRIC TIE BACKS SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4 SECTION 1 SECTION 2 SECTION 3 SECTION 4 PLAYGROUND RESTROOM Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK SITE DETAILS RESTROOM RETAINING WALL- WEST WALL 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' MM DE RS RESTROOM RETAINING WALL- EAST WALL 2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' L4.02 RESTROOM RETAINING WALL SECTIONS 3 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 6" 1'-33 4" FINISH GRADE FINISH GRADE FINISH GRADE SUBGRADE FOR CRUSHER FINES MOUNT SUBGRADE FOR PLAYGROUND MOUNT FRAME 36" O.C. SPACING 12'-51 4" MINIMUM 1-1/2" TOP DECK OVERHANG 12" (TOP) STRAP SPACING O.C. 4" @ CRUSHER FINES, 12" @ PLAYGROUND (FRAME SHALL EXTEND TO SUBGRADE IN BOTH INSTANCES 8" X 8" X 3/8" BASEPLATE 12" DIA. CONCRETE CAISSON HSS FRAME (4) 5/8" HOLES 4" X 8" X 3/8" BASEPLATE (2) 5/8" HOLES BASEPLATE TYPE A BASEPLATE TYPE B HSS FRAME 2" 2" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 8" X 4" BASEPLATE TYPE B PLAN ELEVATION SECTION- FRAME ON CRUSHER FINES AND PLAYGROUND SECTION- FRAME ON CEMENT COMPOSITE DECKING (TOP) COMPOSITE DECKING (SIDE) 80° 86' 80' 46' 40' 12' 14' 20' 40' 20' 16'-8" OUTSIDE 15' OUTSIDE EXTENTS OF CONCRETE POST-TENSION BASKETBALL COURT NOTES: 1. BASKETBALL COURT DESIGN BUILD CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. GEOTECH REPORT SHALL BE PROVIDED UPON REQUEST. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE DETAILED INFORMATION FOR THE FOLLOWING: SUBGRADE PREPARATION, MOISTURE BARRIER, POST-TENSION SLAB, GRAVEL PERIMETER, SURFACING, AND BASKETBALL STRIPING. 2. COURT LINES ARE 2" WIDE, WHITE PAINT. 3. COURT IS SYMMETRICAL. DIMENSIONS ON ONE SIDE OF COURT APPLY TO THE OPPOSITE SIDE. 4. LINEAR AND RADIUS DIMENSIONS THAT INCLUDE 'OUTSIDE' ARE SUCH MADE FROM THE OUTSIDE OF THE 2" WIDE COURT LINES. R6' OUTSIDE R23' OUTSIDE R6' OUTSIDE PAINTED LINES, TYP. EQUAL (2) BASKETBALL POSTS/ BACKBOARD & GOALS CRUSHER FINES CRUSHER FINES STONE STEPS; MIN. 24" DEPTH; 5' WIDTH GRADE TO DRAIN SEE GRADING PLAN FOR PROPOSED STEP ELEVATIONS 2' MIN. 6" 6" 6" AGGREGATE BACKFILL COMPACTED SUBGRADE NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PHOTOS OF STONES AT QUARRY FOR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE TO REVIEW AND APPROVE PRIOR TO DELIVERY ON SITE. INCLUDE A RULER IN THE PHOTO FOR SCALE 2. STONE LOCATIONS SHALL BE STAKED FOR REVIEW. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE BOULDER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO PLACEMENT 3. REMOVE SHARP/DANGEROUS EDGES/CORNERS WITH HAMMER FOR SAFETY 4. PROVIDE 4" DEPTH OF CRUSHER FINES BETWEEN STEPS AND ADJACENT BOULDERS L4.01 2 16'-31 4" 2" X 6" MOISTURE SHIELD COMPOSITE DECKING (TOP), LEAVING 1/4" GAPS BETWEEN BOARDS BASE PLATE TYPE B 2" X 1/4" (TOP) HSS STRAP 2" X 2" X 3/16" HSS FRAME ALIGN STRAP (TOP) WITH EDGE OF FRAME MINIMUM 1-1/2" TOP DECK OVERHANG FRAME 36" O.C. SPACING PLAN 12" (TOP) STRAP SPACING O.C. COMPOSITE DECKING (SIDE) NOTES: REFER TO DETAIL 2, SAME SHEET FOR SECTION OF BENCH TYPE 2. DIMENSIONS ARE THE SAME Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK SITE DETAILS RESTROOM ROOF BENCH 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' MM DE RS BENCH- TYPE 1 2 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' BASKETBALL COURT 4 SCALE: 1" = 10' L4.01 STONE STAIRS 5 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 BENCH- TYPE 2 3 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' BENCH NOTES: 1. STEEL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE WITH A CONTINUOUS WELD, GRIND WELDS SMOOTH LEAVING NO BURRS OR SHARP EDGES 2. STEEL SHALL BE 'STRUCTURAL' WITH ROUNDED/RADIUSED EDGES. 3. FRAMES SHALL BE INSTALLED PLUMB. 4. DETAILED AND DIMENSIONED SHOP DRAWINGS (INCLUDING THICKNESS, DIMENSIONS, MATERIALS, PROPOSED GRADES OF METAL, COLORS) SHALL BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR TO OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO REVIEW AND APPROVE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT SUBMIT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AS SHOP DRAWINGS. 5. PAINT METAL COMPONENTS WITH HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINT PRIOR TO INSTALLING DECKING. 6. DETAILS CONVEY DESIGN INTENT. FABRICATOR MAY PROPOSE ALTERNATIVE FABRICATION TECHNIQUES FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. 7. PROVIDE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR THE FRAMING SYSTEM THAT IS SIGNED AND STAMPED BY A COLORADO REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. PROVIDE 1/4" RADIUS AT EDGES ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER, GEOTEXTILE FABRIC TO COMPLETELY SURROUND DRAIN SUMP/ FABRIC OVERLAP ALL EDGES 24" MIN. WRAP FABRIC AROUND THE PIPE 12" COMPACTED SUBGRADE ENTIRE LENGTH OF AREA: 4" PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE. SLOPE IN TRENCH PER PLAN; MIN. 1% SLOPE TO DRAIN NOTES: 1. SEE DETAIL L3.01 FOR PLAYGROUND UNDERDRAIN PLAN VARIES L4.00 5 AGGREGATE BACKFILL ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER TOP OF ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER, HOLD DOWN 1" FROM TOP OF ADJACENT FINISHED SURFACE, TYP. 2% 12" MIN. SEE GRADING PLAN FOR UNDER-DRAIN GRADING GEOTEXTILE FABRIC COMPACTED SUBGRADE 2" 8" 3" CLR 1' PROVIDE 1/4" RADIUS AT TOP EDGES (2) #4 REBAR CONTINUOUS FINISH GRADE #4 REBAR; BEND DOWEL AT 18" O.C., 2'-0" LEG MIN. COMPACTED SUBGRADE FINISH GRADE, HOLD FG DOWN 1" FROM TOP OF BOULDER, SEE SITE PLAN WEED BARRIER FABRIC BOULDER- TYPE A AGGREGATE BACKFILL HEIGHT VARIES, SEE GRADING PLAN BURY MINIMUM 6" OF BOULDER AS MEASURED FROM ADJACENT FINISH SURFACE COMPACTED SUBGRADE FINISH GRADE, SEE SITE PLAN 9" NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PHOTOS OF BOULDERS AT QUARRY FOR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE TO REVIEW AND APPROVE PRIOR TO DELIVERY ON SITE. INCLUDE A RULER IN THE PHOTO FOR SCALE. REFER TO GRADING PLAN FOR HEIGHTS OF BOULDERS, FACTORING IN BURYING BOULDER PER DETAIL BELOW. 2. BOULDER LOCATIONS SHALL BE STAKED FOR REVIEW. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE BOULDER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. 3. WHERE BOULDERS ARE ABUTTING, VERTICAL JOINTS BETWEEN BOULDERS SHALL NOT EXCEED 1/2", TYP. STONE CHINKING NOT ALLOWED. 4. REMOVE SHARP/DANGEROUS EDGES/CORNERS WITH HAMMER FOR SAFETY. 5. WHERE BOULDER IS ADJACENT CONCRETE SURFACE, PROVIDE 3" DEPTH OF CRUSHER FINES BETWEEN CONCRETE AND BOULDER CRUSHER FINES 12" TYP 12" MIN. NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 1 4" RADIUS EDGE AT EDGES AND JOINTS 2. CONCRETE PAVEMENT SHALL SLOPE TO DRAIN, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROVIDE 2% CROSS SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF DRAINAGE - REFER TO GRADING PLAN 3. SURFACE OF CONCRETE SHALL HAVE MEDIUM BROOM FINISH PERPENDICULAR TO DIRECTION OF TRAVEL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED STANDARD GRAY CONCRETE WITH FIBER MESH REINFORCEMENT; SEE SITE PLAN FOR SCORING 5" COMPACTED SUBGRADE 12" TYP. 6" 6" NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PHOTOS OF BOULDERS AT QUARRY FOR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE TO REVIEW AND APPROVE PRIOR TO DELIVERY ON SITE. INCLUDE A RULER IN THE PHOTO FOR SCALE. REFER TO GRADING PLAN FOR HEIGHTS OF BOULDERS, FACTORING IN BURYING BOULDER PER DETAIL BELOW. 2. BOULDER LOCATIONS SHALL BE STAKED FOR REVIEW. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE BOULDER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. 4. REMOVE SHARP/DANGEROUS EDGES/CORNERS WITH HAMMER FOR SAFETY. 5. WHERE BOULDER IS ADJACENT CONCRETE SURFACE, PROVIDE 3" DEPTH OF CRUSHER FINES BETWEEN CONCRETE AND BOULDER CONCRETE AT SHADE STRUCTURE: RE: SITE PLAN FILL GAP BETWEEN BOULDER AND CONCRETE WITH CRUSHER FINES BOULDER- TYPE A, LANDSCAPE BOULDER FILL GAP BETWEEN BOULDERS WITH CRUSHER FINES WEED BARRIER FABRIC AGGREGATE BACKFILL COMPACTED SUBGRADE REFER TO GRADING PLAN FOR TOP OF BOULDER ELEVATIONS PLANTING AREA; RE: SITE PLAN UNCOMPACTED SOIL SLOPE TO DRAIN NOTES: 1. SEE GRADING PLAN FOR TOP OF BOULDER ELEVATIONS. TOP OF BOULDER SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY LEVEL 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PHOTOS OF BOULDERS AT QUARRY FOR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE TO REVIEW AND APPROVE PRIOR TO DELIVERY ON SITE. INCLUDE A RULER IN THE PHOTO FOR SCALE. REFER TO GRADING PLAN FOR HEIGHTS OF BOULDERS, FACTORING IN BURYING BOULDER PER DETAIL BELOW. 3. BOULDER LOCATIONS SHALL BE STAKED FOR REVIEW. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE BOULDER LOCATIONS PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. 4. REMOVE SHARP/DANGEROUS EDGES/CORNERS WITH HAMMER FOR SAFETY. LANDSCAPE AREA; RE: SITE PLAN PARTIALLY BURY APPROX. 1/3 HEIGHT OF BOULDER INTO SOIL COMPACTED SUBGRADE BOULDER- TYPE A TOP OF BOULDER; RE: GRADING PLAN APPROX. 1/3 HEIGHT OF BOULDER Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK SITE DETAILS TOOLED JOINT 2 SCALE: 1" = 1' SAW CUT JOINT 3 SCALE: 1" = 1' EXPANSION JOINT 4 SCALE: 1" = 1' CRUSHER FINES 7 SCALE: 1" = 1' PLAYGROUND HEADER 8 SCALE: 1" = 1' PLAYGROUND UNDERDRAIN 6 SCALE: 1" = 1' MM DE RS ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER 5 SCALE: 1" = 1' THICKENED EDGE 9 SCALE: 1" = 1' STACKED BOULDER WALL- TYPE 1 10 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' L4.00 CONCRETE SIDEWALK 1 SCALE: 1" = 1' STACKED BOULDER WALL- TYPE 2 11 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 LANDSCAPE BOULDER 12 SCALE: 3/4" = 1' 14 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 F.S. 13.41 F.S. 13.09 F.S. 13.13 F.S. 13.24 F.S. 13.35 F.S. 13.46 T.B. 14 T.B. 15.5 T.B. 17 F.S. 13.45 T.W. 15.84 T.B. 15.73 T.B. 17.23 T.B. 14 F.S. 13.30 F.S. 13.54 F.S. 13.73 F.S. 12.89 T.B. 15 T.B.15 T.B. 16.5 T.B. 16.5 T.B. 16.5 T.B. 15 T.B. 13.65 T.C. 13.58 F.S. 13.15 F.S. 13.50 F.S. 13.75 F.S. 12.72 F.S. 12.52 F.S. 12.33 F.S. 12.15 T.B. 19.5 T.B. 18.5 T.B. 17.5 T.B. 18.5 T.B. 19.50 T.B. 19.5 T.B. 18.5 T.C. 15.35 T.C. 15.64 T.C. 15.70 T.C. 15.10 T.C. 15.07 T.C. 15.05 T.C. 15.05 T.C. 15.15 T.C. 15.30 T.C. 15.15 T.C. 14.75 T.C. 14.40 T.C. 14.2 T.C. 14.16 T.C. 14.12 T.C. 13.52 F.S. 13.75 F.S. 13.87 T.C. 14.12 T.C. 14.2 F.S. 19.3 F.S. 19.2 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% F.S. 13.16 T.B. 15 F.S. 13.52 F.S. 13.92 F.S. 13.56 T.B. 15.5 T.B. 17 F.S. 13.41 F.S. 13.80 F.S. 13.73 F.S. 13.98 23 24 25 T.S. 16 T.S. 16.5 T.S. 17 T.S. 17.5 T.S. 18 T.S. 18.5 T.S. 19 T.S. 19.5 T.S. 20 1.5% MIN. PERFORATED PIPE 20 19 18 17 16 15 20 19 18 17 16 15 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 1.5% MIN. 1.5% MIN. 1.5% MIN. 1.5% MIN. 1.5% MIN. T.B. 17.5 F.S. 19.3 GRADE BREAK T.S. 20.5 T.S. 21 T.S. 15 T.S. 15.5 T.S. 16 T.S. 16.5 T.S. 17 T.S. 17.5 T.S. 18 T.S. 18.5 T.S. 19 T.S. 19.5 T.S. 20 T.S. 20.5 T.S. 21 T.S. 21.5 T.S. 22 T.S. 22.5 T.S. 23 T.S. 23.5 T.S. 24 T.S. 24.5 T.S. 25 F.S.13 T.B.13 F.S.12 F.S.11.5 T.B.11.5 F.S.10.5 T.B.13 F.S.12.5 T.B.13 F.S.12.5 T.B.11.5 F.S.11 T.B.11.5 F.S.11 NON PERFORATED PIPE 2% 2% T.B. 13.5 T.B. 14 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 F.S. 13.70 T8C 25.25 T7C 24 T6C 22.5 T5C 21 T4C 19.5 T3C 18 T2C 16.5 T1C 15 T6C 23.67 T5C 22 T4C 20.5 T3C 19 T2C 17.5 T1C 16 FFE 14 F.S. 14.61 F.S. 14.43 F.S. 14.73 F.S. 14 F.S. 13.92 F.S. 14 F.S. 13.92 F.S. 13.90 F.S. 13.90 F.S. 13.78 F.S. 13.67 F.S. 13.66 F.S. 13.90 2% 2% 2% Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK GRADING ENLARGEMENT 5' 10' 20' 1"=10' LEGEND FINISHED SURFACE TOP OF BOULDER F.S. T.B. T.C. TOP OF CURB MM DE RS L3.01 T.S. TOP OF STEP GROUND LEVEL GRADING: THIS PAGE GROUND LEVEL GRADING 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 TOP OF 'X'(NUMBER) COURSE SEE DETAIL 1&2, SHEET L4.02 T'X'C 27 20 19 21 22 26 10 13 12 25 12 24 25 16 15 14 13 13 14 24 23 15 14 14 18 19 17 12 13 20.5 11 15 14 16 15 13 12 24 23 25 22 FS 20.2 FS 18.9 20.5 28 29 EX. 15.83 EX. 19.32 EX. 27.34 EX. 27.10 EX. 27.31 EX. 13.20 EX. 11.5 EX. 13.34 EX. 13.44 PUMPHOUSE FFE: 5012.2 1.5% 5:1 6:1 5:1 4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1 3% 2.5% 1% 1% FS. 20.2 FS 18. 9 EX. 31.77 GRADING ENLARGEMENT RE: L3.01 NOTE: CONTOURS IN THE POND REFLECT EXCAVATED DEPTH PRIOR TO LINER AND SOIL BALLAST; REFER TO IRRIGATION PLANS FOR DETAILS RESTROOM FFE: 5014 POND WATER ELEVATION 5009.5 28 29 30 SWALE SWALE LEGEND Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK GRADING PLAN 15' 30' 60' 1"=30' F.S. T.W. T.C. FINISHED SURFACE TOP OF WALL TOP OF CURB MM DE RS L3.00 E.X. EXISTING ELEVATION 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 8' 10'-6" 10' 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. 10' SPACING, TYP. N:143396.8897 N:143396.8337 E:206311.8045 E:206299.7080 5' 18'-9 1 2 " 10' 10' 10' N:143217.0130 E:206218.7975 N:143233.5499 E:206218.7975 5' N:143048.7344 E:206612.1198 N:143059.9771 E:206619.8903 N:143067.7472 E:206608.6482 N:143056.5045 E:206600.8777 SITE LIGHT N:143405.0538 E:206136.6729 SITE LIGHT N:143247.6498 E:206482.6277 SITE LIGHT N:142980.6511 E:206698.7210 N:143314.5664 E:206446.9404 N:143296.3057 E:206472.8118 ALIGN EDGES WITH EXISTING WALK ALIGN EDGES WITH EXISTING WALK 8' 10' 10' SITE LIGHT CONCRETE PAVING LEGEND CRUSHER FINES PLAYGROUND SURFACING Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK LAYOUT PLAN 15' 30' 60' 1"=30' MM DE RS L2.00 CL WALK CENTERLINE 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 1% MIN, 2% MAX TOWARDS POND TIE INTO ADJACENT GRADES, MAX 3:1 SLOPE ENSURE POSTIVE DRAINAGE TOWARDS POND DETENTION POND APPX. LIMITS OF TRACT Y, ACCESS, PUBLIC TRAIL, UTILITY & ELCO WATER LINE EASEMENT FS 13.80 FS 12.50 FS 11 FS 10 FS 9.5 FS 9.6 FS 14.80 FS 14.50 FS 14.9 FS 15.6 R80' R6' ALIGN WITH EDGE OF EX. 13.44 EXISTING N:143125.CONCRETE 3120 E:206768.3640 EX ELEV: 5016.62 N:143109.1315 E:206765.4717 ELEV: 5016.48 EXISTING CONCRETE 10' ℄ EJ R8' ALIGN WITH EDGE OF EXISTING CONCRETE N:142467.0797 E:207785.2250 N:142450.2770 E:207780.2970 EXISTING CONCRETE 10' ℄ EJ CONCRETE TRAIL 1% MIN, 2% MAX TOWARDS POND TIE INTO ADJACENT GRADES, MAX 3:1 SLOPE ENSURE POSTIVE DRAINAGE TOWARDS POND Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK TRAIL SITE, LAYOUT, GRADING 20' 40' 80' 1"=40' MM DE RS SOUTH-EAST TRAIL END NORTH-WEST TRAIL END L1.02 1"=10'-0" 1"=10'-0" LEGEND CONCRETE PAVING EXPANSION JOINT, SEE DETAIL 4, SHEET L4.00 EJ ℄ CENTER LINE 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 TRAIL CROSS SECTION 1"=5'-0" STACKED BOULDER WALL TYPE 2 THICKENED EDGE THICKENED EDGE THICKENED EDGE ARCH SWING SET, BY OTHERS BENCH- TYPE 2 STACKED BOULDER WALL- TYPE 1 BENCH- TYPE 1 L4.00 9 IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR (5) BIKE RACKS SKY BUILDER PLAY STRUCTURE, BY OTHERS REVOLUTION INCLUSIVE SPINNER, BY OTHERS SITE LIGHT, TYP. RESTROOM RETAINING WALLS- EAST WALL EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ STONE STEPS CRUSHER FINES IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR POND IRRIGATION PIPE RE: IRR SANITARY SERVICE RE: CIVIL CRUSHER FINES FALL ZONE, TYP. WATER SERVICE RE: CIVIL (2) PICNIC BENCHES TREE PLANTING IN PLAYGROUND LANDSCAPE BOULDERS DRINKING FOUNTAIN TREE PLANTING IN PLAYGROUND BENCH- TYPE 1 PLAYGROUND UNDERDRAIN RESTROOM ROOF BENCH RESTROOM ROOF WALL, RE: ARCH LANDSCAPE BOULDER STONE STEPS LANDSCAPE BOULDER L4.00 11 L4.00 8 L4.01 3 L4.00 5 L4.00 6 L4.01 3 L4.00 9 L4.01 2 L4.00 10 L4.00 7 L4.01 2 L4.00 7 L4.00 10 L4.01 1 L4.02 1 L4.00 7 L4.01 5 L4.01 5 L4.00 7 L4.01 2 L4.00 9 L4.02 2 L4.00 12 L4.00 12 L4.00 12 SAW CUT JOINTS, TYP. L4.00 3 L4.01 BENCH- TYPE 1 2 L5.01 1 L5.01 1 SAW CUT JOINTS, TYP. L4.00 3 (2) BENCH- TYPE 1 L4.01 2 EXTENTS OF CONCRETE ON ROOF TRASH RECEPTACLES PA PA PA PA PA Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK L1.01 SITE ENLARGEMENT 5' 10' 20' 1"=10' LEGEND MM DE RS SITE LIGHT CONCRETE PAVING CRUSHER FINES ENGINEERED WOOD FIBER EXPANSION JOINT, SEE EJ DETAIL 4, SHEET L4.00 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 NOTES 1. SURVEY FALL ZONE LAYOUT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF PLAYGROUND HEADER RE: CIVIL IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR. SAW CUT JOINTS, TYP. EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ EJ WATER SOURCE LINE RE: IRR IRRIGATION MAINLINE RE: IRR. ENLARGEMENT RE: L1.01 POND OUTLET LINE RE: CIVIL STREET LIGHT BY OTHERS STREET LIGHT BY OTHERS TRANSFORMER; RE: ELEC L4.00 1 L4.00 7 L4.01 4 L4.00 3 SITE LIGHT CONCRETE SIDEWALK LEGEND CRUSHER FINES PLAYGROUND SURFACING Sheet Date: Sheet Number: Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK SITE PLAN 15' 30' 60' 1"=30' MM DE RS L1.00 EXPANSION JOINT, SEE DETAIL NO. 4, SHEET L4.00 EJ 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 Drawing Name: Drawn by: Designed by: Revisions 1603 Oakridge Drive Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 fax (970) 223-1827 Landscape Architecture Urban Design Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK IRRIGATION PLAN 1"=30' 03.29.17 & PROFILE FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK 1"=30' 03.29.17 CONTROL PLAN EROSION DRAINAGE & FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 Planning Checked by: NORTH 0 SCALE: Project Number: Project: Client: CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL PARK UTILITY PLAN 1"=30' 03.29.17 FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 SDMH STORM DRAIN MANHOLE TB THRUST BLOCK TW TOP OF WALL TYP TYPICAL UE UTILITY EASEMENT PROPOSED STREET LIGHT PROPOSED STORM SEWER & MANHOLE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER MAIN PROPOSED TELEPHONE LINE EXISTING GAS EXISTING STORM SEWER EXISTING WATER MAIN EXISTING MANHOLE PROPOSED STORM INLET LEGEND PROPOSED CONCRETE PROPOSED MINOR CONTOUR PROPOSED MAJOR CONTOUR EXISTING MINOR CONTOUR EXISTING MAJOR CONTOUR EXISTING UTILITY POLE EXISTING GUY WIRE PROPOSED GAS EXISTING ELECTRIC LINE PROPOSED ELECTRIC LINE EXISTING TELEPHONE LINE EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT PROPOSED FIRE HYDRANT EXISTING WATER VALVE PROPOSED SANITARY SEWER PROPOSED WATER LINE & VALVE EXISTING CONCRETE EXISTING FLOWLINE, CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED FLOWLINE, CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED FENCE EXISTING OVERHEAD UTILITY EXISTING STORM SEWER INLET PROPOSED UTILITY POLE EXISTING STREET LIGHT EXISTING FIBER OPTIC LINE EXISTING OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE EXISTING OVERHEAD TELEPHONE LINE PROPOSED OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE PROPOSED FIBER OPTIC LINE PROPOSED OVERHEAD TELEPHONE LINE EXISTING FENCE PROPOSED OVERHEAD UTILITY EXISTING CABLE TV PROPOSED CABLE TV EXISTING TREE EXISTING PROPERTY LINE & MANHOLE PROPOSED IRRIGATION FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 LANDSCAPE MIKE MCBRIDE, ASLA BHA DESIGN INCORPORATED 1603 OAKRIDGE DRIVE FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-7577 OFFICE (970) 402-0438 CELL MMCBRIDE@BHADESIGN.COM CIVIL SKYLAR BROWER, PE INTERWEST CONSULTING GROUP 1218 WEST ASH STREET WINDSOR, CO 80550 (970) 460 1091 SBROWER@INTERWESTGRP.COM CS COVER SHEET SITE DRAWINGS CIVIL ENGINEERING C-1 GENERAL NOTES C-2 GENERAL NOTES C-3 UTILITY PLAN C-4 DRAINAGE & EROSION CONTROL PLAN C-5 IRRIGATION PLAN & PROFILE C-6 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS C-7 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS C-8 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS SITE PLANS L1.00 SITE PLAN L1.01 SITE PLAN ENLARGEMENT L1.02 TRAIL SITE, LAYOUT, GRADING PLAN L2.00 LAYOUT PLAN L3.00 GRADING PLAN L3.01 GRADING ENLARGEMENT PLAN SITE DETAILS L4.00 SITE DETAILS L4.01 SITE DETAILS L4.02 SITE DETAILS LANDSCAPE PLANS L5.00 LANDSCAPE PLAN L5.01 LANDSCAPE DETAILS VICINITY MAP COVER SHEET PROJECT TEAM DIRECTORY MM DE RS 03.29.17 SHEET INDEX ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ARCHITECTURE A1.1 FLOOR PLANS A2.1 ROOF PLANS A3.1 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A4.1 RESTROOM ELEVATIONS A4.2 SHELTER AND PUMPHOUSE ELEVATIONS A5.1 BUILDING SECTIONS A6.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.1 DETAILS A9.1 SCHEDULES, DETAILS, AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ARCHITECTURE- STRUCTURAL S0.1 GENERAL NOTES S1.1 RESTROOM FOUNDATION PLAN S1.2 RESTROOM FRAMING PLANS S1.3 SHELTER FOUNDATION AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS S1.4 PUMPHOUSE FOUNDATION AND ROOF FRAMING PLANS & SECTIONS S2.1 SECTIONS S2.2 SECTIONS ARCHITECTURAL- MECHANICAL MP0.0 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET M1.1 HVAC PLAN M5.1 HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS P1.1 PLUMBING PLANS AND ISOMETRIC P5.1 PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL- ELECTRICAL E0 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWING INDEX E0.1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS E3.1 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULES SITE WATER SOURCE WS-0 WATER SOURCE NOTES AND LEGEND WS-1 WATER SOURCE PLAN WS-2 WATER SOURCE PLAN WS-3 WATER SOURCE DETAILS WS-4 WATER SOURCE DETAILS WS-5 WATER SOURCE DETAILS WS-6 WATER SOURCE DETAILS WS-7 WATER SOURCE DETAILS IRRIGATION IR-0 IRRIGATION NOTES AND LEGEND IR-1 IRRIGATION PLAN IR-2 IRRIGATION DETAILS IR-3 IRRIGATION DETAILS IR-4 IRRIGATION DETAILS ELECTRICAL E0.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E0.1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES & LEGEND E0.2 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE E0.3 LIGHTING SCHEDULES & CUT SHEETS E1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN CS FORT COLLINS, COLORADO PARK PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS, CO 80522 BID SET - 03.29.17 7/12 12/12 22/12 4/12 13/12 WC=9.2 DD=126 SW=6.5 SS=0.020 WC=14.5 DD=119 SW=0.0 WC=9.2 DD=126 SW=6.5 SS=0.020 WC=14.5 DD=119 SW=0.0 TH-3 El. 101.0 7/12 13/12 28/12 50/12 42/12 WC=20.3 DD=108 SW=1.2 WC=18.3 DD=113 SW=0.8 WC=20.3 DD=108 SW=1.2 WC=18.3 DD=113 SW=0.8 TH-4 El. 108.5 11/12 8/12 4/12 10/12 WC=9.7 -200=76 WC=13.9 DD=113 SW=0.2 SS=0.130 WC=9.7 -200=76 WC=13.9 DD=113 SW=0.2 SS=0.130 TH-5 El. 98.0 21/12 16/12 8/12 9/12 7/12 TH-6 El. 99.5 ELEVATION - FEET FIGURE 2 DRIVE SAMPLE. THE SYMBOL 22/12 INDICATES 22 BLOWS OF A 140-POUND HAMMER FALLING 30 INCHES WERE REQUIRED TO DRIVE A 2.5-INCH O.D. SAMPLER 12 INCHES. ELEVATION - FEET WATER LEVEL MEASURED SEVERAL DAYS AFTER DRILLING. SAND, CLEAN TO CLAYEY, WITH OCASSIONAL SANDY CLAY LAYERS, MOIST TO WET, LOOSE TO MEDIUM DENSE, BROWN (SC, SP, CL) 2. 3. CLAY, SANDY, WITH OCASSIONAL CLAYEY SAND LAYERS, MOIST TO WET, MEDIUM STIFF TO VERY STIFF, BROWN, GRAY, TAN (CL, SC) THE BORINGS WERE DRILLED ON DECEMBER 16, 2016 USING 4-INCH DIAMETER CONTINUOUS-FLIGHT AUGERS AND A TRUCK-MOUNTED DRILL RIG. 1. LEGEND: NOTES: WEATHERED CLAYSTONE, SANDY, MOIST, MEDIUM HARD, BROWN, GRAY, RUST CLAYSTONE, SANDY, MOIST, MEDIUM HARD TO HARD, BROWN, GRAY, RUST WATER LEVEL MEASURED AT TIME OF DRILLING. BORING ELEVATIONS WERE SURVEYED BY A REPRESENTATIVE OF OUR FIRM REFERENCING THE TEMPORARY BENCHMARK SHOWN ON FIGURE 1. THESE LOGS ARE SUBJECT TO THE EXPLANATIONS, LIMITATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS IN THIS REPORT. 4. Summary Logs of Exploratory Borings WC DD SW -200 LL PI UC SS - - - - - - - - INDICATES MOISTURE CONTENT (%). INDICATES DRY DENSITY (PCF). INDICATES SWELL WHEN WETTED UNDER OVERBURDEN PRESSURE (%). INDICATES PASSING NO. 200 SIEVE (%). INDICATES LIQUID LIMIT. INDICATES PLASTICITY INDEX. INDICATES UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (PSF). INDICATES SOLUBLE SULFATE CONTENT (%). CITY OF FORT COLLINS MAPLE HILL NEIGHBORHOOD PARK CTL | T PROJECT NO. FC07300-125